H8S2111B

REJ09B0163-0100Z 16 H8S/2111B Hardware Manual Renesas 16-Bit Single-Chip Microcomputer H8S Family / H8S/2100 Series H8S/2111B HD64F2111B Rev.1.00 Revision Date: May. 14, 2004 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page ii of xxxiv Keep safety first in your circuit designs! 1. Renesas Technology Corp. puts the maximum effort into making semiconductor products better and more reliable, but there is always the possibility that trouble may occur with them. Trouble with semiconductors may lead to personal injury, fire or property damage. Remember to give due consideration to safety when making your circuit designs, with appropriate measures such as (i) placement of substitutive, auxiliary circuits, (ii) use of nonflammable material or (iii) prevention against any malfunction or mishap. Notes regarding these materials 1. These materials are intended as a reference to assist our customers in the selection of the Renesas Technology Corp. product best suited to the customer's application; they do not convey any license under any intellectual property rights, or any other rights, belonging to Renesas Technology Corp. or a third party. 2. Renesas Technology Corp. assumes no responsibility for any damage, or infringement of any thirdparty's rights, originating in the use of any product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, or circuit application examples contained in these materials. 3. All information contained in these materials, including product data, diagrams, charts, programs and algorithms represents information on products at the time of publication of these materials, and are subject to change by Renesas Technology Corp. without notice due to product improvements or other reasons. It is therefore recommended that customers contact Renesas Technology Corp. or an authorized Renesas Technology Corp. product distributor for the latest product information before purchasing a product listed herein. The information described here may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Renesas Technology Corp. assumes no responsibility for any damage, liability, or other loss rising from these inaccuracies or errors. Please also pay attention to information published by Renesas Technology Corp. by various means, including the Renesas Technology Corp. Semiconductor home page (http://www.renesas.com). 4. When using any or all of the information contained in these materials, including product data, diagrams, charts, programs, and algorithms, please be sure to evaluate all information as a total system before making a final decision on the applicability of the information and products. Renesas Technology Corp. assumes no responsibility for any damage, liability or other loss resulting from the information contained herein. 5. Renesas Technology Corp. semiconductors are not designed or manufactured for use in a device or system that is used under circumstances in which human life is potentially at stake. Please contact Renesas Technology Corp. or an authorized Renesas Technology Corp. product distributor when considering the use of a product contained herein for any specific purposes, such as apparatus or systems for transportation, vehicular, medical, aerospace, nuclear, or undersea repeater use. 6. The prior written approval of Renesas Technology Corp. is necessary to reprint or reproduce in whole or in part these materials. 7. If these products or technologies are subject to the Japanese export control restrictions, they must be exported under a license from the Japanese government and cannot be imported into a country other than the approved destination. Any diversion or reexport contrary to the export control laws and regulations of Japan and/or the country of destination is prohibited. 8. Please contact Renesas Technology Corp. for further details on these materials or the products contained therein. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page iii of xxxiv General Precautions on Handling of Product 1. Treatment of NC Pins Note: Do not connect anything to the NC pins. The NC (not connected) pins are either not connected to any of the internal circuitry or are used as test pins or to reduce noise. If something is connected to the NC pins, the operation of the LSI is not guaranteed. 2. Treatment of Unused Input Pins Note: Fix all unused input pins to high or low level. Generally, the input pins of CMOS products are high-impedance input pins. If unused pins are in their open states, intermediate levels are induced by noise in the vicinity, a passthrough current flows internally, and a malfunction may occur. 3. Processing before Initialization Note: When power is first supplied, the product's state is undefined. The states of internal circuits are undefined until full power is supplied throughout the chip and a low level is input on the reset pin. During the period where the states are undefined, the register settings and the output state of each pin are also undefined. Design your system so that it does not malfunction because of processing while it is in this undefined state. For those products which have a reset function, reset the LSI immediately after the power supply has been turned on. 4. Prohibition of Access to Undefined or Reserved Addresses Note: Access to undefined or reserved addresses is prohibited. The undefined or reserved addresses may be used to expand functions, or test registers may have been be allocated to these addresses. Do not access these registers; the system's operation is not guaranteed if they are accessed. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page iv of xxxiv Configuration of This Manual This manual comprises the following items: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. General Precautions on Handling of Product Configuration of This Manual Preface Contents Overview Description of Functional Modules • CPU and System-Control Modules • On-Chip Peripheral Modules The configuration of the functional description of each module differs according to the module. However, the generic style includes the following items: i) Feature ii) Input/Output Pin iii) Register Description iv) Operation v) Usage Note When designing an application system that includes this LSI, take notes into account. Each section includes notes in relation to the descriptions given, and usage notes are given, as required, as the final part of each section. 7. List of Registers 8. Electrical Characteristics 9. Appendix 10. Main Revisions and Additions in this Edition (only for revised versions) The list of revisions is a summary of points that have been revised or added to earlier versions. This does not include all of the revised contents. For details, see the actual locations in this manual. 11. Index Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page v of xxxiv Preface The H8S/2111B is a microcomputer (MCU) made up of the H8S/2000 CPU employing Renesas Technology's original architecture as its core, and the peripheral functions required to configure a system. The H8S/2000 CPU has an internal 32-bit configuration, sixteen 16-bit general registers, and a simple and optimized instruction set for high-speed operation. The H8S/2000 CPU can handle a 16-Mbyte linear address space. This LSI is equipped with ROM, RAM, a 16-bit free-running timer (FRT), an 8-bit timer (TMR), a watchdog timer (WDT), a serial communication interface (SCI), a keyboard buffer controller, a host interface (LPC), an I2C bus interface (IIC), and I/O ports as on-chip peripheral modules, required for system configuration. A flash memory (F-ZTATTM*) version is available for this LSI's ROM. This provides flexibility as it can be reprogrammed in no time to cope with all situations from the early stages of mass production to full-scale mass production. This is particularly applicable to application devices with specifications that will most probably change. Note: * F-ZTATTM is a trademark of Renesas Technology Corp. Target Users: This manual was written for users who will be using the H8S/2111B in the design of application systems. Target users are expected to understand the fundamentals of electrical circuits, logical circuits, and microcomputers. Objective: This manual was written to explain the hardware functions and electrical characteristics of the H8S/2111B to the target users. Refer to the H8S/2600 Series, H8S/2000 Series Programming Manual for a detailed description of the instruction set. Notes on reading this manual: • In order to understand the overall functions of the chip Read the manual according to the contents. This manual can be roughly categorized into parts on the CPU, system control functions, peripheral functions and electrical characteristics. • In order to understand the details of the CPU's functions Read the H8S/2600 Series, H8S/2000 Series Programming Manual. • In order to understand the details of a register when its name is known Read the index that is the final part of the manual to find the page number of the entry on the register. The addresses, bits, and initial values of the registers are summarized in section 21, List of Registers. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page vi of xxxiv Rules: Register name: Bit order: Number notation: Signal notation: Related Manuals: The following notation is used for cases when the same or a similar function, e.g. serial communication interface, is implemented on more than one channel: XXX_N (XXX is the register name and N is the channel number) The MSB is on the left and the LSB is on the right. Binary is B'xxxx, hexadecimal is H'xxxx, decimal is xxxx. An overbar is added to a low-active signal: xxxx The latest versions of all related manuals are available from our web site. Please ensure you have the latest versions of all documents you require. http://www.renesas.com/eng/ H8S/2111B manuals: Document Title H8S/2111B Hardware Manual H8S/2600 Series, H8S/2000 Series Programming Manual Document No. This manual REJ09B0139 User's manuals for development tools: Document Title H8S, H8/300 Series C/C++ Compiler, Assembler, Optimizing Linkage Editor User's Manual Microcomputer Development Environment System H8S, H8/300 Series Simulator/Debugger User's Manual H8S, H8/300 Series High-performance Embedded Workshop 3 Tutorial H8S, H8/300 Series High-performance Embedded Workshop 3 User's Manual Document No. REJ10B0058 ADE-702-282 REJ10B0024 REJ10B0026 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page vii of xxxiv Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page viii of xxxiv Contents Section 1 Overview............................................................................................1 1.1 1.2 1.3 Features............................................................................................................................. 1 Internal Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 2 Pin Description.................................................................................................................. 3 1.3.1 Pin Arrangement .................................................................................................. 3 1.3.2 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode ............................................................... 4 1.3.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 9 Section 2 CPU....................................................................................................13 2.1 Features............................................................................................................................. 13 2.1.1 Differences between H8S/2600 CPU and H8S/2000 CPU .................................. 14 2.1.2 Differences from H8/300 CPU ............................................................................ 15 2.1.3 Differences from H8/300H CPU.......................................................................... 15 CPU Operating Modes...................................................................................................... 16 2.2.1 Normal Mode....................................................................................................... 16 2.2.2 Advanced Mode................................................................................................... 18 Address Space................................................................................................................... 20 Register Configuration...................................................................................................... 21 2.4.1 General Registers................................................................................................. 22 2.4.2 Program Counter (PC) ......................................................................................... 23 2.4.3 Extended Control Register (EXR) ....................................................................... 23 2.4.4 Condition-Code Register (CCR).......................................................................... 24 2.4.5 Initial Register Values.......................................................................................... 25 Data Formats..................................................................................................................... 26 2.5.1 General Register Data Formats ............................................................................ 26 2.5.2 Memory Data Formats ......................................................................................... 28 Instruction Set ................................................................................................................... 29 2.6.1 Table of Instructions Classified by Function ....................................................... 30 2.6.2 Basic Instruction Formats .................................................................................... 39 Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation..................................................... 40 2.7.1 Register Direct—Rn ............................................................................................ 40 2.7.2 Register Indirect—@ERn .................................................................................... 40 2.7.3 Register Indirect with Displacement—@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:32, ERn).............. 41 2.7.4 Register Indirect with Post-Increment or Pre-Decrement—@ERn+ or @-ERn.. 41 2.7.5 Absolute Address—@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32.................................... 41 2.7.6 Immediate—#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32................................................................. 42 2.7.7 Program-Counter Relative—@(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC).................................... 42 2.7.8 Memory Indirect—@@aa:8 ................................................................................ 43 2.7.9 Effective Address Calculation ............................................................................. 44 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page ix of xxxiv 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 Processing States............................................................................................................... 46 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 48 2.9.1 Note on TAS Instruction Usage........................................................................... 48 2.9.2 Note on STM/LDM Instruction Usage ................................................................ 48 2.9.3 Note on Bit Manipulation Instructions ................................................................ 48 2.9.4 EEPMOV Instruction........................................................................................... 49 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes ..................................................................... 51 3.1 3.2 MCU Operating Mode Selection ...................................................................................... 51 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 52 3.2.1 Mode Control Register (MDCR) ......................................................................... 52 3.2.2 System Control Register (SYSCR)...................................................................... 53 3.2.3 Serial Timer Control Register (STCR) ................................................................ 55 Operating Mode Descriptions ........................................................................................... 56 3.3.1 Mode 2................................................................................................................. 56 3.3.2 Mode 3................................................................................................................. 56 Address Map ..................................................................................................................... 57 3.3 3.4 Section 4 Exception Handling ........................................................................... 59 4.1 4.2 4.3 Exception Handling Types and Priority............................................................................ 59 Exception Sources and Exception Vector Table ............................................................... 60 Reset ................................................................................................................................. 61 4.3.1 Reset Exception Handling ................................................................................... 61 4.3.2 Interrupts after Reset............................................................................................ 62 4.3.3 On-Chip Peripheral Modules after Reset is Cancelled ........................................ 62 Interrupt Exception Handling ........................................................................................... 63 Trap Instruction Exception Handling................................................................................ 63 Stack Status after Exception Handling.............................................................................. 64 Usage Note........................................................................................................................ 65 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 Section 5 Interrupt Controller............................................................................ 67 5.1 5.2 5.3 Features............................................................................................................................. 67 Input/Output Pins.............................................................................................................. 68 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 69 5.3.1 Interrupt Control Registers A to C (ICRA to ICRC) ........................................... 69 5.3.2 Address Break Control Register (ABRKCR) ...................................................... 70 5.3.3 Break Address Registers A to C (BARA to BARC)............................................ 71 5.3.4 IRQ Sense Control Registers (ISCRH, ISCRL)................................................... 72 5.3.5 IRQ Enable Register (IER) .................................................................................. 73 5.3.6 IRQ Status Register (ISR).................................................................................... 73 5.3.7 Keyboard Matrix Interrupt Mask Registers (KMIMRA, KMIMR) Wake-Up Event Interrupt Mask Register (WUEMRB) ....................................... 73 Interrupt Sources............................................................................................................... 76 5.4 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page x of xxxiv 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.4.1 External Interrupts ............................................................................................... 76 5.4.2 Internal Interrupts ................................................................................................ 77 Interrupt Exception Handling Vector Table...................................................................... 78 Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation ............................................................. 80 5.6.1 Interrupt Control Mode 0 ..................................................................................... 80 5.6.2 Interrupt Control Mode 1 ..................................................................................... 82 5.6.3 Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence .............................................................. 85 5.6.4 Interrupt Response Times .................................................................................... 86 Address Break................................................................................................................... 87 5.7.1 Features................................................................................................................ 87 5.7.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 87 5.7.3 Operation ............................................................................................................. 88 5.7.4 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................... 88 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 90 5.8.1 Conflict between Interrupt Generation and Disabling ......................................... 90 5.8.2 Instructions that Disable Interrupts ...................................................................... 91 5.8.3 Interrupts during Execution of EEPMOV Instruction.......................................... 91 5.8.4 IRQ Status Register (ISR).................................................................................... 91 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC).........................................................................93 6.1 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 93 6.1.1 Bus Control Register (BCR) ................................................................................ 93 6.1.2 Wait State Control Register (WSCR) .................................................................. 94 Section 7 I/O Ports .............................................................................................95 7.1 Port 1................................................................................................................................. 100 7.1.1 Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR)............................................................. 100 7.1.2 Port 1 Data Register (P1DR)................................................................................ 100 7.1.3 Port 1 Pull-Up MOS Control Register (P1PCR).................................................. 101 7.1.4 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 101 7.1.5 Port 1 Input Pull-Up MOS ................................................................................... 102 Port 2................................................................................................................................. 102 7.2.1 Port 2 Data Direction Register (P2DDR)............................................................. 102 7.2.2 Port 2 Data Register (P2DR)) .............................................................................. 103 7.2.3 Port 2 Pull-Up MOS Control Register (P2PCR).................................................. 103 7.2.4 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 103 7.2.5 Port 2 Input Pull-Up MOS ................................................................................... 104 Port 3................................................................................................................................. 104 7.3.1 Port 3 Data Direction Register (P3DDR)............................................................. 104 7.3.2 Port 3 Data Register (P3DR)................................................................................ 105 7.3.3 Port 3 Pull-Up MOS Control Register (P3PCR).................................................. 105 7.3.4 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 106 7.3.5 Port 3 Input Pull-Up MOS ................................................................................... 106 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page xi of xxxiv 7.2 7.3 7.4 Port 4................................................................................................................................. 107 7.4.1 Port 4 Data Direction Register (P4DDR)............................................................. 107 7.4.2 Port 4 Data Register (P4DR) ............................................................................... 107 7.4.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 108 7.5 Port 5................................................................................................................................. 110 7.5.1 Port 5 Data Direction Register (P5DDR)............................................................. 110 7.5.2 Port 5 Data Register (P5DR) ............................................................................... 110 7.5.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 111 7.6 Port 6................................................................................................................................. 112 7.6.1 Port 6 Data Direction Register (P6DDR)............................................................. 112 7.6.2 Port 6 Data Register (P6DR) ............................................................................... 113 7.6.3 Port 6 Pull-Up MOS Control Register (KMPCR) ............................................... 113 7.6.4 System Control Register 2 (SYSCR2) ................................................................. 114 7.6.5 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 114 7.6.6 Port 6 Input Pull-Up MOS ................................................................................... 116 7.7 Port 7................................................................................................................................. 117 7.7.1 Port 7 Input Data Register (P7PIN) ..................................................................... 117 7.7.2 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 117 7.8 Port 8................................................................................................................................. 118 7.8.1 Port 8 Data Direction Register (P8DDR)............................................................. 118 7.8.2 Port 8 Data Register (P8DR) ............................................................................... 118 7.8.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 119 7.9 Port 9................................................................................................................................. 122 7.9.1 Port 9 Data Direction Register (P9DDR)............................................................. 122 7.9.2 Port 9 Data Register (P9DR) ............................................................................... 122 7.9.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 123 7.10 Port A................................................................................................................................ 125 7.10.1 Port A Data Direction Register (PADDR)........................................................... 125 7.10.2 Port A Output Data Register (PAODR)............................................................... 125 7.10.3 Port A Input Data Register (PAPIN) ................................................................... 126 7.10.4 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 126 7.10.5 Port A Input Pull-Up MOS .................................................................................. 128 7.11 Port B ................................................................................................................................ 129 7.11.1 Port B Data Direction Register (PBDDR) ........................................................... 129 7.11.2 Port B Output Data Register (PBODR) ............................................................... 129 7.11.3 Port B Input Data Register (PBPIN).................................................................... 130 7.11.4 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 130 7.11.5 Port B Input Pull-Up MOS .................................................................................. 131 7.12 Ports C, D.......................................................................................................................... 132 7.12.1 Port C and Port D Data Direction Registers (PCDDR, PDDDR) ........................ 132 7.12.2 Port C and Port D Output Data Registers (PCODR, PDODR) ............................ 133 7.12.3 Port C and Port D Input Data Registers (PCPIN, PDPIN)................................... 133 7.12.4 Port C and Port D Nch-OD Control Register (PCNOCR, PDNOCR) ................. 134 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page xii of xxxiv 7.12.5 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 135 7.12.6 Input Pull-Up MOS in Ports C and D .................................................................. 135 7.13 Ports E, F........................................................................................................................... 136 7.13.1 Port E and Port F Data Direction Registers (PEDDR, PFDDR) .......................... 136 7.13.2 Port E and Port F Output Data Registers (PEODR, PFODR) .............................. 137 7.13.3 Port E and Port F Input Data Registers (PEPIN, PFPIN)..................................... 138 7.13.4 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 138 7.13.5 Port E and Port F Nch-OD Control Register (PENOCR, PFNOCR) ................... 140 7.13.6 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 141 7.13.7 Input Pull-Up MOS in Ports E and F ................................................................... 141 7.14 Port G................................................................................................................................ 142 7.14.1 Port G Data Direction Register (PGDDR) ........................................................... 142 7.14.2 Port G Output Data Register (PGODR) ............................................................... 143 7.14.3 Port G Input Data Register (PGPIN).................................................................... 143 7.14.4 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 144 7.14.5 Port G Nch-OD Control Register (PGNOCR) ..................................................... 145 7.14.6 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 145 Section 8 8-Bit PWM Timer (PWM).................................................................147 8.1 8.2 8.3 Features............................................................................................................................. 147 Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. 148 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 148 8.3.1 PWM Register Select (PWSL)............................................................................. 149 8.3.2 PWM Data Registers 7 to 0 (PWDR7 to PWD0)................................................. 151 8.3.3 PWM Data Polarity Register A (PWDPRA) ....................................................... 151 8.3.4 PWM Output Enable Register A (PWOERA) ..................................................... 152 8.3.5 Peripheral Clock Select Register (PCSR) ............................................................ 152 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 153 8.4.1 PWM Setting Example ........................................................................................ 155 8.4.2 Diagram of PWM Used as D/A Converter .......................................................... 155 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 156 8.5.1 Module Stop Mode Setting .................................................................................. 156 8.4 8.5 Section 9 16-Bit Free-Running Timer (FRT) ....................................................157 9.1 9.2 9.3 Features............................................................................................................................. 157 Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. 159 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 159 9.3.1 Free-Running Counter (FRC) .............................................................................. 160 9.3.2 Output Compare Registers A and B (OCRA, OCRB) ......................................... 160 9.3.3 Input Capture Registers A to D (ICRA to ICRD) ................................................ 160 9.3.4 Output Compare Registers AR and AF (OCRAR, OCRAF) ............................... 161 9.3.5 Output Compare Register DM (OCRDM)........................................................... 161 9.3.6 Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER) .............................................................. 162 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page xiii of xxxiv 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.3.7 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)................................................................ 163 9.3.8 Timer Control Register (TCR)............................................................................. 166 9.3.9 Timer Output Compare Control Register (TOCR) .............................................. 167 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 169 9.4.1 Pulse Output ........................................................................................................ 169 Operation Timing.............................................................................................................. 170 9.5.1 FRC Increment Timing........................................................................................ 170 9.5.2 Output Compare Output Timing.......................................................................... 171 9.5.3 FRC Clear Timing ............................................................................................... 171 9.5.4 Input Capture Input Timing ................................................................................. 172 9.5.5 Buffered Input Capture Input Timing .................................................................. 173 9.5.6 Timing of Input Capture Flag (ICF) Setting ........................................................ 174 9.5.7 Timing of Output Compare Flag (OCF) setting................................................... 174 9.5.8 Timing of FRC Overflow Flag Setting ................................................................ 175 9.5.9 Automatic Addition Timing................................................................................. 175 9.5.10 Mask Signal Generation Timing.......................................................................... 176 Interrupt Sources............................................................................................................... 177 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 177 9.7.1 Conflict between FRC Write and Clear ............................................................... 177 9.7.2 Conflict between FRC Write and Increment........................................................ 178 9.7.3 Conflict between OCR Write and Compare-Match ............................................. 178 9.7.4 Switching of Internal Clock and FRC Operation................................................. 180 9.7.5 Module Stop Mode Setting .................................................................................. 181 Section 10 8-Bit Timer (TMR).......................................................................... 183 10.1 Features............................................................................................................................. 183 10.2 Input/Output Pins.............................................................................................................. 188 10.3 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 189 10.3.1 Timer Counter (TCNT)........................................................................................ 191 10.3.2 Time Constant Register A (TCORA) .................................................................. 191 10.3.3 Time Constant Register B (TCORB)................................................................... 191 10.3.4 Timer Control Register (TCR)............................................................................. 192 10.3.5 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)................................................................ 196 10.3.6 Time Constant Register (TCORC)....................................................................... 202 10.3.7 Input Capture Registers R and F (TICRR, TICRF, TICRR_A and TICRF_A) ... 202 10.3.8 Timer Input Select Register (TISR and TISR_B) ................................................ 202 10.3.9 Timer Connection Register I (TCONRI) ............................................................. 203 10.3.10 Timer Connection Register S (TCONRS) ........................................................... 203 10.3.11 Timer XY Control Register (TCRXY) ................................................................ 204 10.3.12 Timer AB Control Register (TCRAB)................................................................. 205 10.4 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 206 10.4.1 Pulse Output ........................................................................................................ 206 10.5 Operation Timing.............................................................................................................. 207 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page xiv of xxxiv 10.6 10.7 10.8 10.9 10.10 10.5.1 TCNT Count Timing ........................................................................................... 207 10.5.2 Timing of CMFA and CMFB Setting at Compare-Match ................................... 207 10.5.3 Timing of Timer Output at Compare-Match........................................................ 208 10.5.4 Timing of Counter Clear at Compare-Match ....................................................... 208 10.5.5 TCNT External Reset Timing.............................................................................. 209 10.5.6 Timing of Overflow Flag (OVF) Setting ............................................................. 209 TMR_0 and TMR_1 Cascaded Connection ...................................................................... 210 10.6.1 16-Bit Count Mode .............................................................................................. 210 10.6.2 Compare-Match Count Mode .............................................................................. 210 TMR_Y and TMR_X Cascaded Connection .................................................................... 211 10.7.1 16-Bit Count Mode .............................................................................................. 211 10.7.2 Compare-Match Count Mode .............................................................................. 211 10.7.3 Input Capture Operation ...................................................................................... 212 TMR_B and TMR_A Cascaded Connection .................................................................... 212 10.8.1 16-Bit Count Mode .............................................................................................. 212 10.8.2 Compare-Match Count Mode .............................................................................. 212 10.8.3 Input Capture Operation ...................................................................................... 213 Interrupt Sources............................................................................................................... 215 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 216 10.10.1 Conflict between TCNT Write and Counter Clear............................................... 216 10.10.2 Conflict between TCNT Write and Count-Up ..................................................... 216 10.10.3 Conflict between TCOR Write and Compare-Match........................................... 217 10.10.4 Conflict between Compare-Matches A and B ..................................................... 217 10.10.5 Switching of Internal Clocks and TCNT Operation............................................. 218 10.10.6 Mode Setting with Cascaded Connection ............................................................ 219 10.10.7 Module Stop Mode Setting .................................................................................. 219 Section 11 Watchdog Timer (WDT)..................................................................221 11.1 Features............................................................................................................................. 221 11.2 Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. 223 11.3 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 223 11.3.1 Timer Counter (TCNT)........................................................................................ 223 11.3.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)................................................................ 224 11.4 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 227 11.4.1 Watchdog Timer Mode ........................................................................................ 227 11.4.2 Interval Timer Mode............................................................................................ 229 11.4.3 RESO Signal Output Timing ............................................................................... 230 11.5 Interrupt Sources............................................................................................................... 230 11.6 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 231 11.6.1 Notes on Register Access..................................................................................... 231 11.6.2 Conflict between Timer Counter (TCNT) Write and Increment.......................... 232 11.6.3 Changing Values of CKS2 to CKS0 Bits............................................................. 232 11.6.4 Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode................ 232 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page xv of xxxiv 11.6.5 System Reset by RESO Signal ............................................................................ 233 11.6.6 Counter Values during Transitions between High-Speed, Sub-Active, and Watch Modes ................................................................................................ 233 Section 12 Serial Communication Interface (SCI)............................................ 235 12.1 Features............................................................................................................................. 235 12.2 Input/Output Pins.............................................................................................................. 236 12.3 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 237 12.3.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR) .............................................................................. 237 12.3.2 Receive Data Register (RDR).............................................................................. 237 12.3.3 Transmit Data Register (TDR)............................................................................. 237 12.3.4 Transmit Shift Register (TSR) ............................................................................. 238 12.3.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR) ............................................................................... 238 12.3.6 Serial Control Register (SCR) ............................................................................. 239 12.3.7 Serial Status Register (SSR) ................................................................................ 241 12.3.8 Serial Interface Mode Register (SCMR).............................................................. 243 12.3.9 Bit Rate Register (BRR) ...................................................................................... 244 12.3.10 Serial Pin Select Register (SPSR)........................................................................ 249 12.4 Operation in Asynchronous Mode .................................................................................... 249 12.4.1 Data Transfer Format........................................................................................... 250 12.4.2 Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Asynchronous Mode 251 12.4.3 Clock.................................................................................................................... 251 12.4.4 SCI Initialization (Asynchronous Mode)............................................................. 253 12.4.5 Data Transmission (Asynchronous Mode) .......................................................... 254 12.4.6 Serial Data Reception (Asynchronous Mode) ..................................................... 256 12.5 Multiprocessor Communication Function......................................................................... 259 12.5.1 Multiprocessor Serial Data Transmission ............................................................ 260 12.5.2 Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception ................................................................. 261 12.6 Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode ........................................................................ 264 12.6.1 Clock.................................................................................................................... 264 12.6.2 SCI Initialization (Clocked Synchronous Mode)................................................. 265 12.6.3 Serial Data Transmission (Clocked Synchronous Mode) .................................... 266 12.6.4 Serial Data Reception (Clocked Synchronous Mode) ......................................... 268 12.6.5 Simultaneous Serial Data Transmission and Reception (Clocked Synchronous Mode) ............................................................................. 269 12.7 Interrupt Sources............................................................................................................... 271 12.8 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 272 12.8.1 Module Stop Mode Setting .................................................................................. 272 12.8.2 Break Detection and Processing .......................................................................... 272 12.8.3 Mark State and Break Detection .......................................................................... 272 12.8.4 Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operations (Clocked Synchronous Mode Only) .................................................................... 272 12.8.5 Relation between Writing to TDR and TDRE Flag ............................................. 272 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page xvi of xxxiv 12.8.6 SCI Operations during Mode Transitions ............................................................ 273 12.8.7 Switching from SCK Pins to Port Pins ................................................................ 276 Section 13 I2C Bus Interface (IIC) .....................................................................277 13.1 Features............................................................................................................................. 277 13.2 Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. 280 13.3 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 281 13.3.1 I2C Bus Data Register (ICDR) ............................................................................. 282 13.3.2 Slave Address Register (SAR)............................................................................. 283 13.3.3 Second Slave Address Register (SARX) ............................................................. 284 13.3.4 I2C Bus Mode Register (ICMR)........................................................................... 286 13.3.5 I2C Bus Control Register (ICCR)......................................................................... 289 13.3.6 I2C Bus Status Register (ICSR)............................................................................ 297 13.3.7 DDC Switch Register (DDCSWR) ...................................................................... 301 13.3.8 I2C Bus Extended Control Register (ICXR)......................................................... 302 13.3.9 Port G Control Register (PGCTL) ....................................................................... 306 13.4 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 307 13.4.1 I2C Bus Data Format ............................................................................................ 307 13.4.2 Initialization ......................................................................................................... 309 13.4.3 Master Transmit Operation .................................................................................. 309 13.4.4 Master Receive Operation.................................................................................... 314 13.4.5 Slave Receive Operation...................................................................................... 321 13.4.6 Slave Transmit Operation .................................................................................... 328 13.4.7 IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control ................................................................ 331 13.4.8 Noise Canceller.................................................................................................... 334 13.4.9 Initialization of Internal State .............................................................................. 335 13.5 Interrupt Sources............................................................................................................... 336 13.6 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 337 13.6.1 Module Stop Mode Setting .................................................................................. 347 Section 14 Keyboard Buffer Controller.............................................................349 14.1 Features............................................................................................................................. 349 14.2 Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. 350 14.3 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 351 14.3.1 Keyboard Control Register H (KBCRH) ............................................................. 351 14.3.2 Keyboard Control Register L (KBCRL) .............................................................. 353 14.3.3 Keyboard Data Buffer Register (KBBR) ............................................................. 354 14.4 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 355 14.4.1 Receive Operation................................................................................................ 355 14.4.2 Transmit Operation .............................................................................................. 356 14.4.3 Receive Abort ...................................................................................................... 359 14.4.4 KCLKI and KDI Read Timing............................................................................. 361 14.4.5 KCLKO and KDO Write Timing......................................................................... 361 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page xvii of xxxiv 14.4.6 KBF Setting Timing and KCLK Control............................................................. 362 14.4.7 Receive Timing.................................................................................................... 363 14.4.8 KCLK Fall Interrupt Operation ........................................................................... 364 14.5 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 365 14.5.1 KBIOE Setting and KCLK Falling Edge Detection ............................................ 365 14.5.2 Module Stop Mode Setting .................................................................................. 366 Section 15 Host Interface (LPC) ....................................................................... 369 15.1 Features............................................................................................................................. 369 15.2 Input/Output Pins.............................................................................................................. 371 15.3 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 372 15.3.1 Host Interface Control Registers 0 and 1 (HICR0, HICR1) ................................ 373 15.3.2 Host Interface Control Registers 2 and 3 (HICR2, HICR3) ................................ 379 15.3.3 LPC Channel 3 Address Register (LADR3) ........................................................ 381 15.3.4 Input Data Registers 1 to 3 (IDR1 to IDR3) ........................................................ 382 15.3.5 Output Data Registers 1 to 3 (ODR1 to ODR3) .................................................. 383 15.3.6 Bidirectional Data Registers 0 to 15 (TWR0 to TWR15).................................... 383 15.3.7 Status Registers 1 to 3 (STR1 to STR3) .............................................................. 383 15.3.8 SERIRQ Control Registers 0 and 1 (SIRQCR0, SIRQCR1) ............................... 389 15.3.9 Host Interface Select Register (HISEL)............................................................... 397 15.4 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 398 15.4.1 Host Interface Activation..................................................................................... 398 15.4.2 LPC I/O Cycles.................................................................................................... 399 15.4.3 A20 Gate.............................................................................................................. 400 15.4.4 Host Interface Shutdown Function (LPCPD) ...................................................... 403 15.4.5 Host Interface Serialized Interrupt Operation (SERIRQ) .................................... 407 15.4.6 Host Interface Clock Start Request (CLKRUN).................................................. 409 15.5 Interrupt Sources............................................................................................................... 410 15.5.1 IBFI1, IBFI2, IBFI3, and ERRI ........................................................................... 410 15.5.2 SMI, HIRQ1, HIRQ6, HIRQ9, HIRQ10, HIRQ11, and HIRQ12 ....................... 410 15.6 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 413 15.6.1 Module Stop Mode Setting .................................................................................. 413 15.6.2 Notes on Using Host Interface............................................................................. 413 Section 16 A/D Converter ................................................................................. 413 16.1 Features............................................................................................................................. 413 16.2 Input/Output Pins.............................................................................................................. 415 16.3 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 416 16.3.1 A/D Data Registers A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD) ............................................. 416 16.3.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR) ............................................................... 417 16.3.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR) ............................................................................ 418 16.4 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 419 16.4.1 Single Mode......................................................................................................... 419 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page xviii of xxxiv 16.4.2 Scan Mode ........................................................................................................... 419 16.4.3 Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time ......................................................... 421 16.4.4 External Trigger Input Timing............................................................................. 422 16.5 Interrupt Sources............................................................................................................... 423 16.6 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions ............................................................................. 423 16.7 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 425 16.7.1 Permissible Signal Source Impedance ................................................................. 425 16.7.2 Influences on Absolute Accuracy ........................................................................ 425 16.7.3 Setting Range of Analog Power Supply and Other Pins ...................................... 426 16.7.4 Notes on Board Design ........................................................................................ 426 16.7.5 Notes on Noise Countermeasures ........................................................................ 426 16.7.6 Module Stop Mode Setting .................................................................................. 427 Section 17 RAM ................................................................................................429 Section 18 ROM ................................................................................................431 18.1 18.2 18.3 18.4 18.5 Features............................................................................................................................. 431 Mode Transitions .............................................................................................................. 433 Block Configuration.......................................................................................................... 436 Input/Output Pins .............................................................................................................. 437 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 437 18.5.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1)..................................................... 438 18.5.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2)..................................................... 439 18.5.3 Erase Block Registers 1 and 2 (EBR1, EBR2) .................................................... 440 Operating Modes............................................................................................................... 441 On-Board Programming Modes........................................................................................ 441 18.7.1 Boot Mode ........................................................................................................... 442 18.7.2 User Program Mode............................................................................................. 445 Flash Memory Programming/Erasing ............................................................................... 446 18.8.1 Program/Program-Verify ..................................................................................... 446 18.8.2 Erase/Erase-Verify............................................................................................... 448 Program/Erase Protection ................................................................................................. 450 18.9.1 Hardware Protection ............................................................................................ 450 18.9.2 Software Protection.............................................................................................. 450 18.9.3 Error Protection.................................................................................................... 450 Interrupts during Flash Memory Programming/Erasing ................................................... 451 Programmer Mode ............................................................................................................ 452 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 453 18.6 18.7 18.8 18.9 18.10 18.11 18.12 Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator .....................................................................455 19.1 Oscillator........................................................................................................................... 456 19.1.1 Connecting Crystal Resonator ............................................................................. 456 19.1.2 External Clock Input Method............................................................................... 457 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page xix of xxxiv 19.2 19.3 19.4 19.5 19.6 19.7 19.8 Duty Correction Circuit .................................................................................................... 459 Medium-Speed Clock Divider .......................................................................................... 459 Bus Master Clock Select Circuit....................................................................................... 459 Subclock Input Circuit ...................................................................................................... 460 Waveform Forming Circuit............................................................................................... 460 Clock Select Circuit .......................................................................................................... 461 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 461 19.8.1 Note on Resonator ............................................................................................... 461 19.8.2 Notes on Board Design ........................................................................................ 461 Section 20 Power-Down Modes........................................................................ 463 20.1 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 463 20.1.1 Standby Control Register (SBYCR) .................................................................... 464 20.1.2 Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR) ........................................................... 465 20.1.3 Module Stop Control Registers H and L (MSTPCRH, MSTPCRL) ................... 467 20.2 Mode Transitions and LSI States ...................................................................................... 468 20.3 Medium-Speed Mode ....................................................................................................... 470 20.4 Sleep Mode ....................................................................................................................... 471 20.5 Software Standby Mode.................................................................................................... 471 20.6 Hardware Standby Mode .................................................................................................. 473 20.7 Watch Mode...................................................................................................................... 474 20.8 Subsleep Mode.................................................................................................................. 475 20.9 Subactive Mode ................................................................................................................ 476 20.10 Module Stop Mode ........................................................................................................... 477 20.11 Direct Transitions ............................................................................................................. 477 20.12 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 478 20.12.1 I/O Port Status...................................................................................................... 478 20.12.2 Current Consumption when Waiting for Oscillation Stabilization ...................... 478 Section 21 List of Registers............................................................................... 479 21.1 21.2 21.3 21.4 Register Addresses (Address Order)................................................................................. 480 Register Bits...................................................................................................................... 489 Register States in Each Operating Mode .......................................................................... 497 Register Select Conditions................................................................................................ 505 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics ................................................................. 513 22.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ............................................................................................. 513 22.2 DC Characteristics ............................................................................................................ 514 22.3 AC Characteristics ............................................................................................................ 520 22.3.1 Clock Timing ....................................................................................................... 521 22.3.2 Control Signal Timing ......................................................................................... 522 22.3.3 Timing of On-Chip Peripheral Modules .............................................................. 523 22.4 A/D Conversion Characteristics ....................................................................................... 526 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page xx of xxxiv 22.5 Flash Memory Characteristics .......................................................................................... 527 22.6 Usage Note........................................................................................................................ 529 22.7 Timing Chart..................................................................................................................... 529 22.7.1 Clock Timing ....................................................................................................... 529 22.7.2 Control Signal Timing ......................................................................................... 531 22.7.3 On-Chip Peripheral Module Timing .................................................................... 532 Appendix A. B. C. .........................................................................................................537 I/O Port States in Each Processing State........................................................................... 537 Product Codes ................................................................................................................... 538 Package Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 539 Index .........................................................................................................541 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page xxi of xxxiv Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page xxii of xxxiv Figures Section 1 Overview Figure 1.1 Internal Block Diagram ................................................................................................. 2 Figure 1.2 Pin Arrangement............................................................................................................ 3 Section 2 CPU Figure 2.1 Exception Vector Table (Normal Mode)..................................................................... 17 Figure 2.2 Stack Structure in Normal Mode ................................................................................. 17 Figure 2.3 Exception Vector Table (Advanced Mode)................................................................. 18 Figure 2.4 Stack Structure in Advanced Mode ............................................................................. 19 Figure 2.5 Memory Map............................................................................................................... 20 Figure 2.6 CPU Internal Registers ................................................................................................ 21 Figure 2.7 Usage of General Registers ......................................................................................... 22 Figure 2.8 Stack............................................................................................................................ 23 Figure 2.9 General Register Data Formats (1).............................................................................. 26 Figure 2.9 General Register Data Formats (2).............................................................................. 27 Figure 2.10 Memory Data Formats............................................................................................... 28 Figure 2.11 Instruction Formats (Examples) ................................................................................ 39 Figure 2.12 Branch Address Specification in Memory Indirect Addressing Mode ...................... 43 Figure 2.13 State Transitions ........................................................................................................ 47 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Figure 3.1 Address Map for H8S/2111B-B .................................................................................. 57 Figure 3.2 Address Map for H8S/2111B-C .................................................................................. 58 Section 4 Figure 4.1 Figure 4.2 Figure 4.3 Exception Handling Reset Sequence (Mode 3)............................................................................................ 61 Stack Status after Exception Handling ........................................................................ 64 Operation when SP Value is Odd................................................................................ 65 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Figure 5.1 Block Diagram of Interrupt Controller........................................................................ 68 Figure 5.2 Relationship between Interrupts IRQ7 and IRQ6, Interrupts KIN15 to KIN0, Interrupts WUE7 to WUE0, and Registers KMIMR, KMIMRA, and WUEMRB ..... 75 Figure 5.3 Block Diagram of Interrupts IRQ7 to IRQ0 ................................................................ 76 Figure 5.4 Flowchart of Procedure up to Interrupt Acceptance in Interrupt Control Mode 0....... 81 Figure 5.5 State Transition in Interrupt Control Mode 1 .............................................................. 82 Figure 5.6 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in Interrupt Control Mode 1..... 84 Figure 5.7 Interrupt Exception Handling ...................................................................................... 85 Figure 5.8 Address Break Block Diagram.................................................................................... 87 Figure 5.9 Address Break Timing Example ................................................................................. 89 Figure 5.10 Conflict between Interrupt Generation and Disabling............................................... 90 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page xxiii of xxxiv Section 8 Figure 8.1 Figure 8.2 Figure 8.3 Figure 8.4 8-Bit PWM Timer (PWM) Block Diagram of PWM Timer................................................................................. 147 Example of Additional Pulse Timing (When Upper 4 Bits of PWDR = B'1000) ..... 154 Example of PWM Setting.......................................................................................... 155 Example when PWM is Used as D/A Converter....................................................... 155 Section 9 16-Bit Free-Running Timer (FRT) Figure 9.1 Block Diagram of 16-Bit Free-Running Timer ......................................................... 158 Figure 9.2 Example of Pulse Output........................................................................................... 169 Figure 9.3 Increment Timing with Internal Clock Source .......................................................... 170 Figure 9.4 Increment Timing with External Clock Source......................................................... 170 Figure 9.5 Timing of Output Compare A Output ....................................................................... 171 Figure 9.6 Clearing of FRC by Compare-Match A Signal ......................................................... 171 Figure 9.7 Input Capture Input Signal Timing (Usual Case)...................................................... 172 Figure 9.8 Input Capture Input Signal Timing (When ICRA to ICRD are Read) ...................... 172 Figure 9.9 Buffered Input Capture Timing ................................................................................. 173 Figure 9.10 Buffered Input Capture Timing (BUFEA = 1) ........................................................ 173 Figure 9.11 Timing of Input Capture Flag (ICFA, ICFB, ICFC, or ICFD) Setting.................... 174 Figure 9.12 Timing of Output Compare Flag (OCFA or OCFB) Setting ................................... 174 Figure 9.13 Timing of Overflow Flag (OVF) Setting................................................................. 175 Figure 9.14 OCRA Automatic Addition Timing ........................................................................ 175 Figure 9.15 Timing of Input Capture Mask Signal Setting......................................................... 176 Figure 9.16 Timing of Input Capture Mask Signal Clearing ...................................................... 176 Figure 9.17 FRC Write-Clear Conflict ....................................................................................... 177 Figure 9.18 FRC Write-Increment Conflict................................................................................ 178 Figure 9.19 Conflict between OCR Write and Compare-Match (When Automatic Addition Function is Not Used) ................................................. 179 Figure 9.20 Conflict between OCRAR/OCRAF Write and Compare-Match (When Automatic Addition Function is Used) ........................................................ 179 Section 10 8-Bit Timer (TMR) Figure 10.1 Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer (TMR_0 and TMR_1)............................................ 185 Figure 10.2 Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer (TMR_Y and TMR_X).......................................... 186 Figure 10.3 Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer (TMR_B and TMR_A) .......................................... 187 Figure 10.4 Pulse Output Example ............................................................................................. 206 Figure 10.5 Count Timing for Internal Clock Input ................................................................... 207 Figure 10.6 Count Timing for External Clock Input (Both Edges) ............................................ 207 Figure 10.7 Timing of CMF Setting at Compare-Match ............................................................ 208 Figure 10.8 Timing of Toggled Timer Output by Compare-Match A Signal............................. 208 Figure 10.9 Timing of Counter Clear by Compare-Match ......................................................... 208 Figure 10.10 Timing of Counter Clear by External Reset Input................................................. 209 Figure 10.11 Timing of OVF Flag Setting ................................................................................. 209 Figure 10.12 Timing of Input Capture Operation....................................................................... 213 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page xxiv of xxxiv Figure 10.13 Timing of Input Capture Signal (Input capture signal is input during TICRR and TICRF read) ............................. 213 Figure 10.14 Conflict between TCNT Write and Clear.............................................................. 216 Figure 10.15 Conflict between TCNT Write and Count-Up....................................................... 216 Figure 10.16 Conflict between TCOR Write and Compare-Match ............................................ 217 Section 11 Figure 11.1 Figure 11.2 Figure 11.3 Figure 11.4 Figure 11.5 Figure 11.6 Figure 11.7 Figure 11.8 Watchdog Timer (WDT) Block Diagram of WDT .......................................................................................... 222 Watchdog Timer Mode (RST/NMI = 1) Operation................................................. 228 Interval Timer Mode Operation............................................................................... 229 OVF Flag Set Timing .............................................................................................. 229 Output Timing of RESO signal ............................................................................... 230 Writing to TCNT and TCSR (WDT_0)................................................................... 231 Conflict between TCNT Write and Increment ........................................................ 232 Sample Circuit for Resetting System by RESO Signal ........................................... 233 Section 12 Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Figure 12.1 Block Diagram of SCI............................................................................................. 236 Figure 12.2 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits) ................................................. 249 Figure 12.3 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode ........................................ 251 Figure 12.4 Relation between Output Clock and Transmit Data Phase (Asynchronous Mode) ............................................................................................ 252 Figure 12.5 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart ....................................................................... 253 Figure 12.6 Example of SCI Transmit Operation in Asynchronous Mode (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit).................................................... 254 Figure 12.7 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart ................................................................... 255 Figure 12.8 Example of SCI Receive Operation in Asynchronous Mode (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit).................................................... 256 Figure 12.9 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart (1)................................................................... 257 Figure 12.9 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart (2)................................................................... 258 Figure 12.10 Example of Communication Using Multiprocessor Format (Transmission of Data H'AA to Receiving Station A).......................................... 259 Figure 12.11 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Transmission Flowchart ........................................ 260 Figure 12.12 Example of SCI Receive Operation (Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit) ............................. 261 Figure 12.13 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (1)........................................ 262 Figure 12.13 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (2)........................................ 263 Figure 12.14 Data Format in Clocked Synchronous Communication (LSB-First)..................... 264 Figure 12.15 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart ..................................................................... 265 Figure 12.16 Example of SCI Transmit Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode................... 266 Figure 12.17 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart ................................................................. 267 Figure 12.18 Example of SCI Receive Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode .................... 268 Figure 12.19 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart ...................................................................... 269 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page xxv of xxxiv Figure 12.20 Figure 12.21 Figure 12.22 Figure 12.23 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Transmission and Reception .............. 270 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Transmission............................... 274 Pin States during Transmission in Asynchronous Mode (Internal Clock) ............ 274 Pin States during Transmission in Clocked Synchronous Mode (Internal Clock)..................................................................................................... 275 Figure 12.24 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Reception .................................... 275 Figure 12.25 Switching from SCK Pins to Port Pins.................................................................. 276 Figure 12.26 Prevention of Low Pulse Output at Switching from SCK Pins to Port Pins.......... 276 Section 13 Figure 13.1 Figure 13.2 Figure 13.3 Figure 13.4 Figure 13.5 Figure 13.6 Figure 13.7 Figure 13.8 Figure 13.9 I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Block Diagram of I2C Bus Interface ....................................................................... 278 I2C Bus Interface Connections (Example: This LSI as Master) .............................. 279 I2C Bus Data Format (I2C Bus Format)................................................................... 307 I2C Bus Data Format (Serial Format) ...................................................................... 307 I2C Bus Timing........................................................................................................ 308 Sample Flowchart for IIC Initialization .................................................................. 309 Sample Flowchart for Operations in Master Transmit Mode .................................. 310 Example of Operation Timing in Master Transmit Mode (MLS = WAIT = 0) ...... 312 Example of Stop Condition Issuance Operation Timing in Master Transmit Mode (MLS = WAIT = 0)....................................................... 313 Figure 13.10 Sample Flowchart for Operations in Master Receive Mode (HNDS = 1)............. 314 Figure 13.11 Example of Operation Timing in Master Receive Mode (MLS = WAIT = 0, HNDS = 1)............................................................................ 316 Figure 13.12 Example of Stop Condition Issuance Operation Timing in Master Receive Mode (MLS = WAIT = 0, HNDS = 1) ................................... 316 Figure 13.13 Sample Flowchart for Operations in Master Receive Mode (receiving multiple bytes) (WAIT = 1) ................................................................. 317 Figure 13.14 Sample Flowchart for Operations in Master Receive Mode (receiving a single byte) (WAIT = 1) ................................................................... 318 Figure 13.15 Example of Master Receive Mode Operation Timing (MLS = ACKB = 0, WAIT = 1) ........................................................................... 320 Figure 13.16 Example of Stop Condition Issuance Timing in Master Receive Mode (MLS = ACKB = 0, WAIT = 1) ........................................................................... 321 Figure 13.17 Sample Flowchart for Operations in Slave Receive Mode (HNDS = 1) ............... 322 Figure 13.18 Example of Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing (1) (MLS = 0, HNDS= 1) ... 324 Figure 13.19 Example of Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing (2) (MLS = 0, HNDS= 1) ... 324 Figure 13.20 Sample Flowchart for Operations in Slave Receive Mode (HNDS = 0) ............... 325 Figure 13.21 Example of Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing (1) (MLS = ACKB = 0, HNDS = 0)........................................................................... 327 Figure 13.22 Example of Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing (2) (MLS = ACKB = 0, HNDS = 0)........................................................................... 327 Figure 13.23 Sample Flowchart for Slave Transmit Mode......................................................... 328 Figure 13.24 Example of Slave Transmit Mode Operation Timing (MLS = 0) ......................... 330 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page xxvi of xxxiv Figure 13.25 Figure 13.26 Figure 13.27 Figure 13.28 Figure 13.29 Figure 13.30 Figure 13.31 Figure 13.32 Figure 13.33 Figure 13.34 Figure 13.35 Section 14 Figure 14.1 Figure 14.2 Figure 14.3 Figure 14.4 Figure 14.5 Figure 14.5 Figure 14.6 Figure 14.7 Figure 14.7 Figure 14.8 IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control (1) ............................................................ 331 IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control (2) ............................................................ 332 IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control (3) ............................................................ 333 Block Diagram of Noise Canceler......................................................................... 334 Notes on Reading Master Receive Data ................................................................ 340 Flowchart for Start Condition Issuance Instruction for Retransmission and Timing............................................................................................................. 341 Stop Condition Issuance Timing ........................................................................... 342 IRIC Flag Clearing Timing when WAIT = 1 ........................................................ 343 ICDR Read and ICCR Access Timing in Slave Transmit Mode........................... 344 TRS Bit Set Timing in Slave Mode....................................................................... 345 Diagram of Erroneous Operation when Arbitration is Lost................................... 347 Keyboard Buffer Controller Block Diagram of Keyboard Buffer Controller....................................................... 349 Keyboard Buffer Controller Connection ................................................................. 350 Sample Receive Processing Flowchart.................................................................... 355 Receive Timing ....................................................................................................... 356 Sample Transmit Processing Flowchart (1)............................................................ 357 Sample Transmit Processing Flowchart (2)............................................................. 358 Transmit Timing...................................................................................................... 358 Sample Receive Abort Processing Flowchart (1) ................................................... 359 Sample Receive Abort Processing Flowchart (2) ................................................... 360 Receive Abort and Transmit Start (Transmission/Reception Switchover) Timing ....................................................... 360 Figure 14.9 KCLKI and KDI Read Timing ................................................................................ 361 Figure 14.10 KCLKO and KDO Write Timing .......................................................................... 361 Figure 14.11 KBF Setting and KCLK Automatic I/O Inhibit Generation Timing ..................... 362 Figure 14.12 Receive Counter and KBBR Data Load Timing ................................................... 363 Figure 14.13 Example of KCLK Input Fall Interrupt Operation ................................................ 364 Figure 14.14 KBIOE Setting and KCLK Falling Edge Detection Timing ................................. 365 Section 15 Figure 15.1 Figure 15.2 Figure 15.3 Figure 15.4 Figure 15.5 Figure 15.6 Figure 15.7 Figure 15.8 Host Interface (LPC) Block Diagram of LPC............................................................................................ 370 Typical LFRAME Timing....................................................................................... 400 Abort Mechanism .................................................................................................... 400 GA20 Output ........................................................................................................... 401 Power-Down State Termination Timing ................................................................. 406 SERIRQ Timing ...................................................................................................... 407 Clock Start Request Timing .................................................................................... 409 HIRQ Flowchart (Example of Channel 1)............................................................... 412 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page xxvii of xxxiv Section 16 A/D Converter Figure 16.1 Block Diagram of A/D Converter ........................................................................... 414 Figure 16.2 Example of A/D Converter Operation (Scan Mode, Channels AN0 to AN2 Selected)....................................................... 420 Figure 16.3 A/D Conversion Timing.......................................................................................... 421 Figure 16.4 External Trigger Input Timing ................................................................................ 422 Figure 16.5 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions ................................................................... 424 Figure 16.6 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions ................................................................... 424 Figure 16.7 Example of Analog Input Circuit ............................................................................ 425 Figure 16.8 Example of Analog Input Protection Circuit........................................................... 427 Figure 16.9 Equivalent Circuit of Analog Input Pin................................................................... 427 Section 18 ROM Figure 18.1 Block Diagram of Flash Memory............................................................................ 432 Figure 18.2 Flash Memory State Transitions.............................................................................. 433 Figure 18.3 Boot Mode............................................................................................................... 434 Figure 18.4 User Program Mode (Example) .............................................................................. 435 Figure 18.5 Flash Memory Block Configuration........................................................................ 436 Figure 18.6 On-Chip RAM Area in Boot Mode ......................................................................... 444 Figure 18.7 ID Code Area .......................................................................................................... 444 Figure 18.8 Programming/Erasing Flowchart Example in User Program Mode ........................ 445 Figure 18.9 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart ....................................................................... 447 Figure 18.10 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart ............................................................................... 449 Figure 18.11 Memory Map in Programmer Mode...................................................................... 452 Section 19 Figure 19.1 Figure 19.2 Figure 19.3 Figure 19.4 Figure 19.5 Figure 19.6 Figure 19.7 Figure 19.8 Section 20 Figure 20.1 Figure 20.2 Figure 20.3 Figure 20.4 Section 22 Figure 22.1 Figure 22.2 Figure 22.3 Clock Pulse Generator Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator ............................................................... 455 Typical Connection to Crystal Resonator................................................................ 456 Equivalent Circuit of Crystal Resonator.................................................................. 456 Example of External Clock Input ............................................................................ 457 External Clock Input Timing................................................................................... 458 Timing of External Clock Output Stabilization Delay Time................................... 459 Subclock Input Timing............................................................................................ 460 Note on Board Design of Oscillator Circuit Section ............................................... 461 Power-Down Modes Mode Transition Diagram ....................................................................................... 468 Medium-Speed Mode Timing ................................................................................. 470 Application Example in Software Standby Mode ................................................... 472 Hardware Standby Mode Timing ............................................................................ 473 Electrical Characteristics Darlington Pair Drive Circuit (Example) ................................................................ 518 LED Drive Circuit (Example) ................................................................................. 519 Output Load Circuit ................................................................................................ 520 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page xxviii of xxxiv Figure 22.4 Connection of VCL Capacitor................................................................................. 529 Figure 22.5 System Clock Timing .............................................................................................. 529 Figure 22.6 Oscillation Settling Timing ..................................................................................... 530 Figure 22.7 Oscillation Setting Timing (Exiting Software Standby Mode)................................ 530 Figure 22.8 Reset Input Timing.................................................................................................. 531 Figure 22.9 Interrupt Input Timing............................................................................................. 531 Figure 22.10 I/O Port Input/Output Timing................................................................................ 532 Figure 22.11 FRT Input/Output Timing ..................................................................................... 532 Figure 22.12 FRT Clock Input Timing ....................................................................................... 532 Figure 22.13 8-Bit Timer Output Timing ................................................................................... 533 Figure 22.14 8-Bit Timer Clock Input Timing ........................................................................... 533 Figure 22.15 8-Bit Timer Reset Input Timing ............................................................................ 533 Figure 22.16 PWM, PWMX Output Timing .............................................................................. 533 Figure 22.17 SCK Clock Input Timing....................................................................................... 534 Figure 22.18 SCI Input/Output Timing (Synchronous Mode).................................................... 534 Figure 22.19 A/D Converter External Trigger Input Timing...................................................... 534 Figure 22.20 WDT Output Timing (RESO) ............................................................................... 534 Figure 22.21 Keyboard Buffer Controller Timing...................................................................... 535 Figure 22.22 I2C Bus Interface Input/Output Timing ................................................................. 535 Figure 22.23 Host Interface (LPC) Timing................................................................................. 536 Figure 22.24 Tester Measurement Condition ............................................................................. 536 Appendix Figure C.1 Package Dimensions (TFP-144) ............................................................................... 539 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page xxix of xxxiv Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page xxx of xxxiv Tables Section 1 Overview Table 1.1 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode .................................................................... 4 Table 1.2 Pin Functions ............................................................................................................ 9 Section 2 CPU Table 2.1 Instruction Classification ........................................................................................ 29 Table 2.2 Operation Notation ................................................................................................. 30 Table 2.3 Data Transfer Instructions....................................................................................... 31 Table 2.4 Arithmetic Operations Instructions (1) ................................................................... 32 Table 2.4 Arithmetic Operations Instructions (2) ................................................................... 33 Table 2.5 Logic Operations Instructions................................................................................. 34 Table 2.6 Shift Instructions..................................................................................................... 34 Table 2.7 Bit Manipulation Instructions (1)............................................................................ 35 Table 2.7 Bit Manipulation Instructions (2)............................................................................ 36 Table 2.8 Branch Instructions ................................................................................................. 37 Table 2.9 System Control Instructions.................................................................................... 38 Table 2.10 Block Data Transfer Instructions ............................................................................ 38 Table 2.11 Addressing Modes .................................................................................................. 40 Table 2.12 Absolute Address Access Ranges ........................................................................... 41 Table 2.13 Effective Address Calculation (1)........................................................................... 44 Table 2.13 Effective Address Calculation (2)........................................................................... 45 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Table 3.1 MCU Operating Mode Selection ............................................................................ 51 Section 4 Exception Handling Table 4.1 Exception Types and Priority.................................................................................. 59 Table 4.2 Exception Handling Vector Table........................................................................... 60 Table 4.3 Status of CCR after Trap Instruction Exception Handling ..................................... 63 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Table 5.1 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................... 68 Table 5.2 Correspondence between Interrupt Source and ICR ............................................... 70 Table 5.3 Interrupt Sources, Vector Addresses, and Interrupt Priorities................................. 78 Table 5.4 Interrupt Control Modes ......................................................................................... 80 Table 5.5 Interrupt Response Times ....................................................................................... 86 Table 5.6 Number of States in Interrupt Handling Routine Execution Status ........................ 86 Section 7 I/O Ports Table 7.1 Port Functions ......................................................................................................... 96 Table 7.2 Input Pull-Up MOS States (Port 1) ....................................................................... 102 Table 7.3 Input Pull-Up MOS States (Port 2) ....................................................................... 104 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page xxxi of xxxiv Table 7.4 Table 7.5 Table 7.6 Table 7.7 Table 7.8 Table 7.9 Input Pull-Up MOS States (Port 3)....................................................................... 106 Input Pull-Up MOS States (Port 6)....................................................................... 116 Input Pull-Up MOS States (Port A) ...................................................................... 128 Input Pull-Up MOS States (Port B) ...................................................................... 131 Input Pull-Up MOS States (Port C and port D) .................................................... 135 Input Pull-Up MOS States (Port E and port F) ..................................................... 141 Section 8 8-Bit PWM Timer (PWM) Table 8.1 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 148 Table 8.2 Internal Clock Selection........................................................................................ 150 Table 8.3 Resolution, PWM Conversion Period, and Carrier Frequency when φ = 10 MHz ............................................................ 150 Table 8.4 Duty Cycle of Basic Pulse .................................................................................... 153 Table 8.5 Position of Pulses Added to Basic Pulses ............................................................. 154 Section 9 16-Bit Free-Running Timer (FRT) Table 9.1 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 159 Table 9.2 FRT Interrupt Sources .......................................................................................... 177 Table 9.3 Switching of Internal Clock and FRC Operation.................................................. 180 Section 10 8-Bit Timer (TMR) Table 10.1 TMR Function ...................................................................................................... 184 Table 10.2 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 188 Table 10.3 Clock Input to TCNT and Count Condition (1).................................................... 193 Table 10.3 Clock Input to TCNT and Count Condition (2).................................................... 194 Table 10.3 Clock Input to TCNT and Count Condition (3).................................................... 195 Table 10.4 Registers Accessible by TMR_X/TMR_Y ........................................................... 204 Table 10.5 Input Capture Signal Selection ............................................................................. 214 Table 10.6 Input Capture Signal Selection ............................................................................. 214 Table 10.7 Interrupt Sources of 8-Bit Timers TMR_0, TMR_1, TMR_Y, TMR_X TMR_B, and TMR_A ............................................................................ 215 Table 10.8 Timer Output Priorities......................................................................................... 217 Table 10.9 Switching of Internal Clocks and TCNT Operation ............................................. 218 Section 11 Watchdog Timer (WDT) Table 11.1 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 223 Table 11.2 WDT Interrupt Source .......................................................................................... 230 Section 12 Serial Communication Interface (SCI) Table 12.1 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 236 Table 12.2 Relationships between N Setting in BRR and Bit Rate B..................................... 244 Table 12.3 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (1) ........................... 245 Table 12.3 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (2) ........................... 246 Table 12.4 Maximum Bit Rate for Each Frequency (Asynchronous Mode) .......................... 247 Table 12.5 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Asynchronous Mode) ................ 247 Table 12.6 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode)..................... 248 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page xxxii of xxxiv Table 12.7 Table 12.8 Table 12.9 Table 12.10 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Clocked Synchronous Mode) .... 248 Serial Transfer Formats (Asynchronous Mode).................................................... 250 SSR Status Flags and Receive Data Handling ...................................................... 257 SCI Interrupt Sources........................................................................................ 271 Section 13 I2C Bus Interface (IIC) Table 13.1 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 280 Table 13.2 Communication Format ........................................................................................ 285 Table 13.3 I2C Transfer Rate .................................................................................................. 288 Table 13.4 Flags and Transfer States (Master Mode) ............................................................. 294 Table 13.5 Flags and Transfer States (Slave Mode) ............................................................... 295 Table 13.5 Flags and Transfer States (Slave Mode) (cont)..................................................... 296 Table 13.6 I2C Bus Data Format Symbols .............................................................................. 308 Table 13.7 IIC Interrupt Sources ............................................................................................ 336 Table 13.8 I2C Bus Timing (SCL and SDA Outputs) ............................................................. 337 Table 13.9 Permissible SCL Rise Time (tsr) Values ............................................................... 338 Table 13.10 I2C Bus Timing (with Maximum Influence of tSr/tSf)........................................ 339 Section 14 Keyboard Buffer Controller Table 14.1 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 350 Section 15 Host Interface (LPC) Table 15.1 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 371 Table 15.2 Register Selection ................................................................................................. 382 Table 15.3 GA20 (P81) Set/Clear Timing .............................................................................. 401 Table 15.4 Fast A20 Gate Output Signals.............................................................................. 402 Table 15.5 Scope of Host Interface Pin Shutdown ................................................................. 404 Table 15.6 Scope of Initialization in Each Host Interface Mode ............................................ 405 Table 15.7 Receive Complete Interrupts and Error Interrupt.................................................. 410 Table 15.8 HIRQ Setting and Clearing Conditions ................................................................ 411 Section 16 A/D Converter Table 16.1 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 415 Table 16.2 Analog Input Channels and Corresponding ADDR Registers .............................. 416 Table 16.3 A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode)................................................................... 422 Section 18 ROM Table 18.1 Differences between Boot Mode and User Program Mode .................................. 433 Table 18.2 Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 437 Table 18.3 Operating Modes and ROM.................................................................................. 441 Table 18.4 On-Board Programming Mode Settings ............................................................... 441 Table 18.5 Boot Mode Operation ........................................................................................... 443 Table 18.6 System Clock Frequencies for which Automatic Adjustment of LSI Bit Rate is Possible ................................................................................................................. 444 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page xxxiii of xxxiv Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator Table 19.1 Damping Resistance Values ................................................................................. 456 Table 19.2 Crystal Resonator Parameters ............................................................................... 456 Table 19.3 External Clock Input Conditions .......................................................................... 458 Table 19.4 External Clock Output Stabilization Delay Time ................................................. 458 Table 19.5 Subclock Input Conditions.................................................................................... 460 Section 20 Power-Down Modes Table 20.1 Operating Frequency and Wait Time.................................................................... 465 Table 20.2 LSI Internal States in Each Operating Mode ........................................................ 469 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics Table 22.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ................................................................................. 513 Table 22.2 DC Characteristics (1) .......................................................................................... 514 Table 22.2 DC Characteristics (2) .......................................................................................... 516 Table 22.2 DC Characteristics (3) When LPC Function is Used............................................ 517 Table 22.3 Permissible Output Currents................................................................................. 518 Table 22.4 Bus Drive Characteristics ..................................................................................... 519 Table 22.5 Clock Timing ........................................................................................................ 521 Table 22.6 Control Signal Timing .......................................................................................... 522 Table 22.7 Timing of On-Chip Peripheral Modules (1) ......................................................... 523 Table 22.8 Keyboard Buffer Controller Timing ..................................................................... 524 Table 22.9 I2C Bus Timing ..................................................................................................... 525 Table 22.10 LPC Module Timing......................................................................................... 526 Table 22.11 A/D Conversion Characteristics (AN5 to AN0 Input: 134/266-State Conversion) .............................................. 526 Table 22.12 Flash Memory Characteristics .......................................................................... 527 Appendix Table A.1 I/O Port States in Each Processing State............................................................... 537 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page xxxiv of xxxiv Section 1 Overview 1.1 Features • High-speed H8S/2000 central processing unit with an internal 16-bit architecture Upward-compatible with H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs on an object level Sixteen 16-bit general registers 65 basic instructions • Various peripheral functions 8-bit PWM timer (PWM) 16-bit free-running timer (FRT) 8-bit timer (TMR) Watchdog timer (WDT) Asynchronous or clocked synchronous serial communication interface (SCI) I2C bus interface (IIC) Keyboard buffer controller Host interface (LPC) 10-bit A/D converter Clock pulse generator • On-chip memory ROM F-ZTAT Version Model HD64F2111BVB* HD64F2111BVC* Note: * 3-V version product ROM 64 Kbytes 64 Kbytes RAM 2 Kbytes 3 Kbytes Remarks • General I/O ports I/O pins: 114 Input-only pins: 8 • Supports various power-down states • Compact package Product H8S/2111B Package TQFP-144 Code TFP-144 Body Size Pin Pitch 18.0 × 18.0 mm 0.4 mm Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 1 of 544 1.2 Internal Block Diagram VCC VCC VCL VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS Bus controller H8S/2000 CPU Internal data bus Internal address bus X1 X2 RES XTAL EXTAL VCCB MD1 MD0 NMI STBY RESO PA7/KIN15/PS2CD PA6/KIN14/PS2CC PA5/KIN13/PS2BD PA4/KIN12/PS2BC PA3/KIN11/PS2AD PA2/KIN10/PS2AC PA1/KIN9 PA0/KIN8 Port A P97/SDA0 P96/φ/EXCL P95 P94 P93 P92/IRQ0 P91/IRQ1 P90/IRQ2/ADTRG P67/TMOX/KIN7/IRQ7 P66/FTOB/KIN6/IRQ6 P65/FTID/KIN5 P64/FTIC/KIN4 P63/FTIB/KIN3 P62/FTIA/KIN2/TMIY P61/FTOA/KIN1 P60/FTCI/KIN0/TMIX P47 P46 P45/TMRI1 P44/TMO1 P43/TMCI1 P42/TMRI0/SDA1 P41/TMO0 P40/TMCI0 P52/ExSCK1*/SCL0 P51/ExRxD1* P50/ExTxD1* Interrup controller Port 9 P27 P26 P25 P24 P23 P22 P21 P20 Clock pulse generator Port 2 ROM (Flash memory) WDT× 2 channels Keyboard buffer controller × 3 channels Port 3 P17/PW7 P16/PW6 P15/PW5 P14/PW4 P13/PW3 P12/PW2 P11/PW1 P10/PW0 P37/SERIRQ P36/LCLK P35/LRESET P34/LFRAME P33/LAD3 P32/LAD2 P31/LAD1 P30/LAD0 PB7/WUE7 PB6/WUE6 PB5/WUE5 PB4/WUE4 PB3/WUE3 PB2/WUE2 PB1/WUE1/LSCI PB0/WUE0/LSMI PC7 PC6 PC5 PC4 PC3 PC2 PC1 PC0 PD7 PD6 PD5 PD4 PD3 PD2 PD1 PD0 RAM Port 6 16-bit FRT 8-bit PWM Port 4 8-bit timer × 6 channels 10-bit A/D converter SCI × 1 channel Port 5 P86/IRQ5/SCK1/SCL1 P85/IRQ4/RxD1 P84/IRQ3/TxD1 P83/LPCPD P82/CLKRUN P81/GA20 P80/PME AVref AVCC AVSS P77 P76 P75/AN5 P74/AN4 P73/AN3 P72/AN2 P71/AN1 P70/AN0 PG7/ExSCLB* PG6/ExSDAB* PG5/ExSCLA* PG4/ExSDAA* PG3 PG2 PG1 PG0 PF7/TMOY* PF6/ExTMOX* PF5/ExTMIY* PF4/ExTMIX* PF3/TMOB PF2/TMOA PF1/TMIB PF0/TMIA Note: * The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. Figure 1.1 Internal Block Diagram Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 2 of 544 PE7 PE6 PE5 PE4 PE3 PE2 PE1 PE0 Port D Port 8 Port 7 Port G Port F Port E Port C IIC × 2 channels Port B Host interfaces (LPC) Port 1 1.3 1.3.1 Pin Description Pin Arrangement P13/PW3 P14/PW4 P15/PW5 P16/PW6 P17/PW7 P20 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 VSS PC0 PC1 PC2 PC3 PC4 PC5 PC6 PC7 VCC P67/TMOX/KIN7/IRQ7 P66/FTOB/KIN6/IRQ6 P65/FTID/KIN5 P64/FTIC/KIN4 P63/FTIB/KIN3 P62/FTIA/KIN2/TMIY P61/FTOA/KIN1 P60/FTCI/KIN0/TMIX AVref AVCC P77 P76 P75/AN5 P12/PW2 P11/PW1 VSS P10/PW0 PB7/WUE7 PB6/WUE6 PB5/WUE5 PB4/WUE4 PB3/WUE3 PB2/WUE2 PB1/WUE1/LSCI PB0/WUE0/LSMI P30/LAD0 P31/LAD1 P32/LAD2 P33/LAD3 P34/LFRAME P35/LRESET P36/LCLK P37/SERIRQ P80/PME P81/GA20 P82/CLKRUN P83/LPCPD P84/IRQ3/TxD1 P85/IRQ4/RxD1 P86/IRQ5/SCK1/SCL1 P40/TMCI0 P41/TMO0 P42/TMRI0/SDA1 VSS X1 X2 RESO XTAL EXTAL 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 TFP-144 (Top view) 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 P74/AN4 P73/AN3 P72/AN2 P71/AN1 P70/AN0 AVSS PD0 PD1 PD2 PD3 PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7 PG0 PG1 PG2 PG3 PG4/ExSDAA* PG5/ExSCLA* PG6/ExSDAB* PG7/ExSCLB* PF0/TMIA PF1/TMIB PF2/TMOA PF3/TMOB PF4/ExTMIX* PF5/ExTMIY* PF6/ExTMOX* PF7/TMOY* VSS PA0/KIN8 PA1/KIN9 PA2/KIN10/PS2AC PA3/KIN11/PS2AD PA4/KIN12/PS2BC P43/TMCI1 P44/TMO1 P45/TMRI1 P46 P47 VSS RES MD1 MD0 NMI STBY VCL P52/ExSCK1*/SCL0 P51/ExRxD1* P50/ExTxD1* P97/SDA0 P96/φ/ EXCL P95 P94 P93 P92/IRQ0 P91/IRQ1 P90/IRQ2/ADTRG PE7 PE6 PE5 PE4 PE3 PE2 PE1 PE0 PA7/KIN15/PS2CD PA6/KIN14/PS2CC PA5/KIN13/PS2BD VCC Note: * The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. Figure 1.2 Pin Arrangement Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 3 of 544 VCCB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 1.3.2 Table 1.1 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode Pin Name Pin No. TFP-144 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 (N) 15 16 17 (N) 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Single-Chip Modes Mode 2, Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) VCC P43/TMCI1 P44/TMO1 P45/TMRI1 P46 P47 VSS RES MD1 MD0 NMI STBY VCL P52/ExSCK1*/SCL0 P51/ExRxD1* P50/ExTxD1* P97/SDA0 P96/φ/EXCL P95 P94 P93 P92/IRQ0 P91/IRQ1 P90/IRQ2/ADTRG PE7 PE6 PE5 PE4 PE3 PE2 Flash Memory Programmer Mode VCC NC NC NC NC NC VSS RES VSS VSS FA9 VCC VCC FA18 FA17 NC VCC NC FA16 FA15 WE VSS VCC VCC NC NC NC NC NC NC Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 4 of 544 Pin Name Pin No. TFP-144 31 32 33 (B) 34 (B) 35 (B) 36 37 (B) 38 (B) 39 (B) 40 (B) 41 (B) 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 (N) 52 (N) 53 (N) 54 (N) 55 (N) 56 (N) 57 (N) 58 (N) 59 60 Single-Chip Modes Mode 2, Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) PE1 PE0 PA7/KIN15/PS2CD PA6/KIN14/PS2CC PA5/KIN13/PS2BD VCCB PA4/KIN12/PS2BC PA3/KIN11/PS2AD PA2/KIN10/PS2AC PA1/KIN9 PA0/KIN8 VSS PF7/TMOY* PF6/ExTMOX* PF5/ExTMIY* PF4/ExTMIX* PF3/TMOB PF2/TMOA PF1/TMIB PF0/TMIA PG7/ExSCLB* PG6/ExSDAB* PG5/ExSCLA* PG4/ExSDAA* PG3 PG2 PG1 PG0 PD7 PD6 Flash Memory Programmer Mode NC NC NC NC NC VCC NC NC NC NC NC VSS NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 5 of 544 Pin Name Pin No. TFP-144 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 Single-Chip Modes Mode 2, Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) PD5 PD4 PD3 PD2 PD1 PD0 AVSS P70/AN0 P71/AN1 P72/AN2 P73/AN3 P74/AN4 P75/AN5 P76 P77 AVCC AVref P60/FTCI/KIN0/TMIX P61/FTOA/KIN1 P62/FTIA/KIN2/TMIY P63/FTIB/KIN3 P64/FTIC/KIN4 P65/FTID/KIN5 P66/FTOB/KIN6/IRQ6 P67/TMOX/KIN7/IRQ7 VCC PC7 PC6 PC5 PC4 Flash Memory Programmer Mode NC NC NC NC NC NC VSS NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC VCC VCC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC VSS VCC NC NC NC NC Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 6 of 544 Pin Name Pin No. TFP-144 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 Single-Chip Modes Mode 2, Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) PC3 PC2 PC1 PC0 VSS P27 P26 P25 P24 P23 P22 P21 P20 P17/PW7 P16/PW6 P15/PW5 P14/PW4 P13/PW3 P12/PW2 P11/PW1 VSS P10/PW0 PB7/WUE7 PB6/WUE6 PB5/WUE5 PB4/WUE4 PB3/WUE3 PB2/WUE2 PB1/WUE1/LSCI PB0/WUE0/LSMI Flash Memory Programmer Mode NC NC NC NC VSS CE FA14 FA13 FA12 FA11 FA10 OE FA8 FA7 FA6 FA5 FA4 FA3 FA2 FA1 VSS FA0 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 7 of 544 Pin Name Pin No. TFP-144 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 (N) 136 137 138 (N) 139 140 141 142 143 144 Note: * Single-Chip Modes Mode 2, Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) P30/LAD0 P31/LAD1 P32/LAD2 P33/LAD3 P34/LFRAME P35/LRESET P36/LCLK P37/SERIRQ P80/PME P81/GA20 P82/CLKRUN P83/LPCPD P84/IRQ3/TxD1 P85/IRQ4/RxD1 P86/IRQ5/SCK1/SCL1 P40/TMCI0 P41/TMO0 P42/TMRI0/SDA1 VSS X1 X2 RESO XTAL EXTAL Flash Memory Programmer Mode FO0 FO1 FO2 FO3 FO4 FO5 FO6 FO7 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC VSS NC NC NC XTAL EXTAL The (B) in Pin No. means the VCCB drive and the (N) in Pin No. means the NMOS push-pull/open-drain drive. The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 8 of 544 1.3.3 Table 1.2 Type Power Pin Functions Pin Functions Pin No. Symbol VCC VCL VCCB VSS TFP-144 1, 86 13 36 7, 42, 95, 111, 139 143 144 I/O Input Input Input Input Input Input Name and Function Power supply pin. Connect the pin to the system power supply. Power supply pin. Connect the pin to VCC. The power supply for the port A input/output buffer. Ground pin. Connect to the system power supply (0 V). Pins for connection to crystal resonators. The EXTAL pin can also input an external clock. See section 19, Clock Pulse Generator, for typical connection diagrams. Supplies the system clock to external devices. Input a 32.768 kHz external subclock. Leave open. Leave open. These pins set the operating mode. These pins should not be changed while the MCU is operating. Reset pin. When this pin becomes low, the chip is reset. Outputs reset signal to external device. When this pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode. Input pin for a nonmaskable interrupt request. These pins request a maskable interrupt. Clock XTAL EXTAL φ EXCL X1 X2 18 18 140 141 9 10 8 142 12 11 22 to 24, 133 to 135, 84, 85 Output Input Input Input Input Operating MD1 mode control MD0 System control RES RESO STBY Interrupt signals NMI IRQ0 to IRQ7 Input Output Input Input Input Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 9 of 544 Pin No. Type Symbol TFP-144 78 79 84 80 81 82 83 137 3 85 43 48 47 44 136 2 138 4 78 80 50 49 46 45 104 to 110, 112 133 16 134 15 135 14 39 37 34 38 35 33 I/O Input Output Output Input Input Input Input Output Name and Function The counter clock input pin. The output compare A output pin. The output compare B output pin. The input capture A input pin. The input capture B input pin. The input capture C input pin. The input capture D input pin. The waveform output pins for the output compare function. 16-bit freeFTCI running timer FTOA (FRT) FTOB FTIA FTIB FTIC 8-bit timer (TMR_0, TMR_1, TMR_X, TMR_Y, TMR_A, TMR_B) FTID TMO0 TMO1 TMOX TMOY* TMOA TMOB ExTMOX* TMCI0 TMCI1 TMRI0 TMRI1 TMIX TMIY TMIA TMIB ExTMIX* ExTMIY* PW7 to PW0 TxD1 ExTxD1* RxD1 ExRxD1* SCK1 ExSCK1* PS2AC PS2BC PS2CC PS2AD PS2BD PS2CD Input Input Input Input pins for the external clock input to counters. The counter reset input pins. The counter event input and counter reset input pins. 8-bit timer (TMR_X, TMR_Y, TMR_A, TMR_B) 8-bit PWM timer (PWM) Serial communication interface (SCI_1) Output Output Input Input/ Output Input/ Output Input/ Output PWM timer pulse output pins. Transmit data output pins. Receive data input pins. Clock input/output pins. The output type is NMOS push-pull. Keyboard buffer controller synchronization clock input/output pins. Keyboard buffer controller data input/output pins. Keyboard buffer controller Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 10 of 544 Pin No. Type Symbol TFP-144 124 to 121 125 I/O Input/ Output Input Name and Function LPC command, address, and data input/output pins. Input pin that indicates the start of an LPC cycle or forced termination of an abnormal LPC cycle. Input pin that indicates an LPC reset. The LPC clock input pin. Input/output pin for LPC serialized host interrupts (HIRQ1, SMI, HIRQ6, HIRQ9 to HIRQ12). LPC auxiliary output pins. Functionally, they are general I/O ports. A20 gate control signal output pin. Output state monitoring input is possible. Input/output pin that requests the start of LCLK operation when LCLK is stopped. Input pin that controls LPC module shutdown. Matrix keyboard input pins. KIN0 to KIN15 are used as key-scan inputs, and P10 to P17 and P20 to P27 are used as key-scan outputs. This allows a maximum 16-output × 16-input, 256-key matrix to be configured. Wakeup event input pins. These pins allow the same kind of wakeup as key-wakeup from various sources. Analog input pins. Pin for input of an external trigger to start A/D conversion. The analog power supply pin for the A/D converter. When the A/D is not used, this pin should be connected to the system power supply (+3 V). The reference power supply pin for the A/D converter and. When the A/D is not used, this pin should be connected to the system power supply (+3 V). The ground pin for the A/D converter. This pin should be connected to the system power supply (0 V). Host interface LAD3 to (LPC) LAD0 LFRAME LRESET LCLK SERIRQ 126 127 128 Input Input Input/ Output Input/ Output Input/ Output Input/ Output Input Input LSCI, LSMI, 119, 120, PME 129 GA20 130 CLKRUN LPCPD Keyboard buffer controller KIN0 to KIN15 131 132 78 to 85, 41 to 37, 35 to 33 WUE0 to WUE7 120 to 113 Input A/D converter AN5 to AN0 73 to 68 ADTRG 24 AVCC 76 Input Input Input AVref 77 Input AVSS 67 Input Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 11 of 544 Pin No. Type 2 Symbol TFP-144 14 135 53 51 17 138 54 52 104 to 110, 112 96 to 103 128 to 121 6 to 2, 138 to 136 14 to 16 85 to 78 75 to 68 135 to 129 17 to 24 I/O Input/ Output Name and Function I2C clock I/O pins. The output type is NMOS open-drain output. I C bus SCL0 interface (IIC) SCL1 ExSCLA* ExSCLB* SDA0 SDA1 ExSDAA* ExSDAB* P17 to P10 P27 to P20 P37 to P30 P47 to P40 P52 to P50 P67 to P60 P77 to P70 P86 to P80 P97 to P90 Input/ Output I2C data I/O pins. The output type is NMOS open-drain output. I/O ports Input/ Output Input/ Output Input/ Output Input/ Output Input/ Output Input/ Output Input Input/ Output Input/ Output Input/ Output Input/ Output Input/ Output Input/ Output Input/ Output Input/ Output Input/ Output Eight input/output pins. Eight input/output pins. Eight input/output pins. Eight input/output pins. (The output type of P42 is NMOS push-pull.) Three input/output pins. (The output type of P52 is NMOS push-pull.) Eight input/output pins. Eight input pins. Seven input/output pins. (The output type of P86 is NMOS push-pull.) Eight input/output pins. (The output type of P97 is NMOS push-pull.) Eight input/output pins. Eight input/output pins. Eight input/output pins. Eight input/output pins. Eight input/output pins. Eight input/output pins. Eight input/output pins. (The output type of PG7 to PG0 is NMOS push-pull.) PA7 to PA0 33 to 35, 37 to 41 PB7 to PB0 113 to 120 PC7 to PC0 87 to 94 PD7 to PD0 59 to 66 PE7 to PE0 25 to 32 PF7 to PF0 43 to 50 PG7 to PG0 51 to 58 Note: * The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 12 of 544 Section 2 CPU The H8S/2000 CPU is a high-speed central processing unit with an internal 32-bit architecture that is upward-compatible with the H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs. The H8S/2000 CPU has sixteen 16-bit general registers, can address a 16-Mbyte linear address space, and is ideal for realtime control. This section describes the H8S/2000 CPU. The usable modes and address spaces differ depending on the product. For details on each product, refer to section 3, MCU Operating Modes. 2.1 Features • Upward-compatibility with H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs Can execute H8/300 CPU and H8/300H CPU object programs • General-register architecture Sixteen 16-bit general registers also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers or eight 32-bit registers • Sixty-five basic instructions 8/16/32-bit arithmetic and logic instructions Multiply and divide instructions Powerful bit-manipulation instructions • Eight addressing modes Register direct [Rn] Register indirect [@ERn] Register indirect with displacement [@(d:16,ERn) or @(d:32,ERn)] Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement [@ERn+ or @–ERn] Absolute address [@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32] Immediate [#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32] Program-counter relative [@(d:8,PC) or @(d:16,PC)] Memory indirect [@@aa:8] • 16-Mbyte address space Program: 16 Mbytes Data: 16 Mbytes • High-speed operation All frequently-used instructions are executed in one or two states 8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract: 1 state 8 × 8-bit register-register multiply: 12 states (MULXU.B), 13 states (MULXS.B) 16 ÷ 8-bit register-register divide: 12 states (DIVXU.B) 16 × 16-bit register-register multiply: 20 states (MULXU.W), 21 states (MULXS.W) 32 ÷ 16-bit register-register divide: 20 states (DIVXU.W) CPU210A_020020040200 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 13 of 544 • Two CPU operating modes Normal mode Advanced mode • Power-down state Transition to power-down state by SLEEP instruction Selectable CPU clock speed 2.1.1 Differences between H8S/2600 CPU and H8S/2000 CPU The differences between the H8S/2600 CPU and the H8S/2000 CPU are as shown below. • Register configuration The MAC register is supported only by the H8S/2600 CPU. • Basic instructions The four instructions MAC, CLRMAC, LDMAC, and STMAC are supported only by the H8S/2600 CPU. • The number of execution states of the MULXU and MULXS instructions Execution States Instruction MULXU MULXS Mnemonic MULXU.B Rs, Rd MULXU.W Rs, ERd MULXS.B Rs, Rd MULXS.W Rs, ERd H8S/2600 3 4 4 5 H8S/2000 12 20 13 21 In addition, there are differences in address space, CCR and EXR register functions, power-down modes, etc., depending on the model. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 14 of 544 2.1.2 Differences from H8/300 CPU In comparison to the H8/300 CPU, the H8S/2000 CPU has the following enhancements. • More general registers and control registers Eight 16-bit extended registers and one 8-bit control register have been added. • Expanded address space Normal mode supports the same 64-Kbyte address space as the H8/300 CPU. Advanced mode supports a maximum 16-Mbyte address space. • Enhanced addressing The addressing modes have been enhanced to make effective use of the 16-Mbyte address space. • Enhanced instructions Addressing modes of bit-manipulation instructions have been enhanced. Signed multiply and divide instructions have been added. Two-bit shift and two-bit rotate instructions have been added. Instructions for saving and restoring multiple registers have been added. A test and set instruction has been added. • Higher speed Basic instructions are executed twice as fast. 2.1.3 Differences from H8/300H CPU In comparison to the H8/300H CPU, the H8S/2000 CPU has the following enhancements. • Additional control register One 8-bit control register has been added. • Enhanced instructions Addressing modes of bit-manipulation instructions have been enhanced. Two-bit shift and two-bit rotate instructions have been added. Instructions for saving and restoring multiple registers have been added. A test and set instruction has been added. • Higher speed Basic instructions are executed twice as fast. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 15 of 544 2.2 CPU Operating Modes The H8S/2000 CPU has two operating modes: normal and advanced. Normal mode supports a maximum 64-Kbyte address space. Advanced mode supports a maximum 16-Mbyte address space. The mode is selected by the LSI's mode pins. 2.2.1 Normal Mode The exception vector table and stack have the same structure as in the H8/300 CPU in normal mode. • Address space Linear access to a maximum address space of 64 Kbytes is possible. • Extended registers (En) The extended registers (E0 to E7) can be used as 16-bit registers, or as the upper 16-bit segments of 32-bit registers. When extended register En is used as a 16-bit register it can contain any value, even when the corresponding general register (Rn) is used as an address register. (If general register Rn is referenced in the register indirect addressing mode with pre-decrement (@–Rn) or postincrement (@Rn+) and a carry or borrow occurs, the value in the corresponding extended register (En) will be affected.) • Instruction set All instructions and addressing modes can be used. Only the lower 16 bits of effective addresses (EA) are valid. • Exception vector table and memory indirect branch addresses In normal mode, the top area starting at H'0000 is allocated to the exception vector table. One branch address is stored per 16 bits. The exception vector table in normal mode is shown in figure 2.1. For details on the exception vector table, see section 4, Exception Handling. The memory indirect addressing mode (@@aa:8) employed in the JMP and JSR instructions uses an 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction code to specify a memory operand that contains a branch address. In normal mode, the operand is a 16-bit (word) operand, providing a 16-bit branch address. Branch addresses can be stored in the top area from H'0000 to H'00FF. Note that this area is also used for the exception vector table. • Stack structure In normal mode, when the program counter (PC) is pushed onto the stack in a subroutine call in normal mode, and the PC and condition-code register (CCR) are pushed onto the stack in exception handling, they are stored as shown in figure 2.2. The extended control register (EXR) is not pushed onto the stack. For details, see section 4, Exception Handling. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 16 of 544 H'0000 H'0001 H'0002 H'0003 H'0004 H'0005 H'0006 H'0007 H'0008 H'0009 H'000A H'000B Reset exception vector (Reserved for system use) (Reserved for system use) Exception vector table Exception vector 1 Exception vector 2 Figure 2.1 Exception Vector Table (Normal Mode) SP PC (16 bits) SP CCR CCR* PC (16 bits) (a) Subroutine Branch Note: * Ignored when returning. (b) Exception Handling Figure 2.2 Stack Structure in Normal Mode Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 17 of 544 2.2.2 Advanced Mode • Address space Linear access to a maximum address space of 16 Mbytes is possible. • Extended registers (En) The extended registers (E0 to E7) can be used as 16-bit registers. They can also be used as the upper 16-bit segments of 32-bit registers or address registers. • Instruction set All instructions and addressing modes can be used. • Exception vector table and memory indirect branch addresses In advanced mode, the top area starting at H'00000000 is allocated to the exception vector table in 32-bit units. In each 32 bits, the upper 8 bits are ignored and a branch address is stored in the lower 24 bits (see figure 2.3). For details on the exception vector table, see section 4, Exception Handling. H'00000000 Reserved Reset exception vector H'00000003 H'00000004 Reserved (Reserved for system use) H'00000007 H'00000008 Exception vector table H'0000000B H'0000000C (Reserved for system use) H'00000010 Reserved Exception vector 1 Figure 2.3 Exception Vector Table (Advanced Mode) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 18 of 544 The memory indirect addressing mode (@@aa:8) employed in the JMP and JSR instructions uses an 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction code to specify a memory operand that contains a branch address. In advanced mode, the operand is a 32-bit longword operand, providing a 32-bit branch address. The upper 8 bits of these 32 bits are a reserved area that is regarded as H'00. Branch addresses can be stored in the area from H'00000000 to H'000000FF. Note that the top area of this range is also used for the exception vector table. • Stack structure In advanced mode, when the program counter (PC) is pushed onto the stack in a subroutine call, and the PC and condition-code register (CCR) are pushed onto the stack in exception handling, they are stored as shown in figure 2.4. The extended control register (EXR) is not pushed onto the stack. For details, see section 4, Exception Handling. SP Reserved SP CCR PC (24 bits) PC (24 bits) (a) Subroutine Branch (b) Exception Handling Figure 2.4 Stack Structure in Advanced Mode Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 19 of 544 2.3 Address Space Figure 2.5 shows a memory map of the H8S/2000 CPU. The H8S/2000 CPU provides linear access to a maximum 64-Kbyte address space in normal mode, and a maximum 16-Mbyte (architecturally 4-Gbyte) address space in advanced mode. The usable modes and address spaces differ depending on the product. For details on each product, refer to section 3, MCU Operating Modes. H'0000 64 Kbytes H'FFFF 16 Mbytes Program area H'00000000 H'00FFFFFF Data area Not available in this LSI H'FFFFFFFF (a) Normal Mode (b) Advanced Mode Figure 2.5 Memory Map Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 20 of 544 2.4 Register Configuration The H8S/2000 CPU has the internal registers shown in figure 2.6. There are two types of registers: general registers and control registers. Control registers are a 24-bit program counter (PC), an 8-bit extended control register (EXR), and an 8-bit condition code register (CCR). General Registers (Rn) and Extended Registers (En) 15 ER0 ER1 ER2 ER3 ER4 ER5 ER6 ER7 (SP) E0 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 07 R0H R1H R2H R3H R4H R5H R6H R7H 07 R0L R1L R2L R3L R4L R5L R6L R7L 0 Control Registers 23 PC [Legend] SP: PC: EXR: T: I2 to I0: CCR: I: UI: Stack pointer Program counter Extended control register Trace bit Interrupt mask bits Condition-code register Interrupt mask bit User bit or interrupt mask bit H: U: N: Z: V: C: Half-carry flag User bit Negative flag Zero flag Overflow flag Carry flag 76543210 EXR* T - - - - I2 I1 I0 76543210 CCR I UI H U N Z V C 0 Note: * Does not affect operation in this LSI. Figure 2.6 CPU Internal Registers Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 21 of 544 2.4.1 General Registers The H8S/2000 CPU has eight 32-bit general registers. These general registers are all functionally alike and can be used as both address registers and data registers. When a general register is used as a data register, it can be accessed as a 32-bit, 16-bit, or 8-bit register. Figure 2.7 illustrates the usage of the general registers. When the general registers are used as 32-bit registers or address registers, they are designated by the letters ER (ER0 to ER7). When the general registers are used as 16-bit registers, the ER registers are divided into 16-bit general registers designated by the letters E (E0 to E7) and R (R0 to R7). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum sixteen 16-bit registers. The E registers (E0 to E7) are also referred to as extended registers. When the general registers are used as 8-bit registers, the R registers are divided into 8-bit general registers designated by the letters RH (R0H to R7H) and RL (R0L to R7L). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum sixteen 8-bit registers. The usage of each register can be selected independently. General register ER7 has the function of the stack pointer (SP) in addition to its general-register function, and is used implicitly in exception handling and subroutine calls. Figure 2.8 shows the stack. • Address registers • 32-bit registers • 16-bit registers E registers (extended registers) (E0 to E7) ER registers (ER0 to ER7) R registers (R0 to R7) RL registers (R0L to R7L) RH registers (R0H to R7H) • 8-bit registers Figure 2.7 Usage of General Registers Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 22 of 544 Free area SP (ER7) Stack area Figure 2.8 Stack 2.4.2 Program Counter (PC) This 24-bit counter indicates the address of the next instruction the CPU will execute. The length of all CPU instructions is 2 bytes (one word), so the least significant PC bit is ignored. (When an instruction is fetched for read, the least significant PC bit is regarded as 0.) 2.4.3 Extended Control Register (EXR) EXR does not affect operation in this LSI. Bit 7 6 to 3 2 to 0 Initial Bit Name Value T — I2 I1 I0 0 All 1 All 1 R/W R/W R R/W Description Trace Bit Does not affect operation in this LSI. Reserved These bits are always read as 1. Interrupt Mask Bits 2 to 0 Do not affect operation in this LSI. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 23 of 544 2.4.4 Condition-Code Register (CCR) This 8-bit register contains internal CPU status information, including an interrupt mask bit (I) and half-carry (H), negative (N), zero (Z), overflow (V), and carry (C) flags. Operations can be performed on the CCR bits by the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. The N, Z, V, and C flags are used as branching conditions for conditional branch (Bcc) instructions. Bit 7 Initial Bit Name Value I 1 R/W R/W Description Interrupt Mask Bit Masks interrupts other than NMI when set to 1. NMI is accepted regardless of the I bit setting. The I bit is set to 1 at the start of an exception-handling sequence. For details, refer to section 5, Interrupt Controller. User Bit or Interrupt Mask Bit Can be written to and read from by software using the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. Half-Carry Flag When the ADD.B, ADDX.B, SUB.B, SUBX.B, CMP.B or NEG.B instruction is executed, this flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 3, and cleared to 0 otherwise. When the ADD.W, SUB.W, CMP.W, or NEG.W instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 11, and cleared to 0 otherwise. When the ADD.L, SUB.L, CMP.L, or NEG.L instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 27, and cleared to 0 otherwise. User Bit Can be written to and read from by software using the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. Negative Flag Stores the value of the most significant bit of data as a sign bit. Zero Flag Set to 1 to indicate zero data, and cleared to 0 to indicate non-zero data. Overflow Flag Set to 1 when an arithmetic overflow occurs, and cleared to 0 otherwise. 6 UI Undefined R/W 5 H Undefined R/W 4 U Undefined R/W 3 N Undefined R/W 2 Z Undefined R/W 1 V Undefined R/W Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 24 of 544 Bit 0 Initial Bit Name Value C R/W Description Carry Flag Set to 1 when a carry occurs, and cleared to 0 otherwise. Used by Add instructions, to indicate a carry Subtract instructions, to indicate a borrow Shift and rotate instructions, to indicate a carry The carry flag is also used as a bit accumulator by bit manipulation instructions. Undefined R/W 2.4.5 Initial Register Values The program counter (PC) among CPU internal registers is initialized when reset exception handling loads a start address from a vector table. The trace (T) bit in EXR is cleared to 0, and the interrupt mask (I) bits in CCR and EXR are set to 1. The other CCR bits and the general registers are not initialized. Note that the stack pointer (ER7) is undefined. The stack pointer should therefore be initialized by an MOV.L instruction executed immediately after a reset. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 25 of 544 2.5 Data Formats The H8S/2000 CPU can process 1-bit, 4-bit BCD, 8-bit (byte), 16-bit (word), and 32-bit (longword) data. Bit-manipulation instructions operate on 1-bit data by accessing bit n (n = 0, 1, 2, …, 7) of byte operand data. The DAA and DAS decimal-adjust instructions treat byte data as two digits of 4-bit BCD data. 2.5.1 General Register Data Formats Figure 2.9 shows the data formats of general registers. Data Type Register Number Data Image 7 1-bit data RnH 0 Don't care 76 54 32 10 7 1-bit data RnL Don't care 0 76 54 32 10 7 4-bit BCD data RnH Upper 43 Lower 0 Don't care 7 4-bit BCD data RnL 43 Upper Lower 0 Don't care 7 Byte data RnH 0 Don't care MSB LSB 7 Byte data RnL 0 LSB Don't care MSB Figure 2.9 General Register Data Formats (1) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 26 of 544 Data Type Register Number Data Image Word data Rn 15 0 MSB Word data En LSB 15 0 MSB Longword data ERn LSB 31 16 15 0 MSB [Legend] ERn: General register ER En: General register E Rn: General register R RnH: General register RH RnL: General register RL MSB: Most significant bit LSB : Least significant bit En Rn LSB Figure 2.9 General Register Data Formats (2) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 27 of 544 2.5.2 Memory Data Formats Figure 2.10 shows the data formats in memory. The H8S/2000 CPU can access word data and longword data in memory, but word or longword data must begin at an even address. If an attempt is made to access word or longword data at an odd address, no address error occurs but the least significant bit of the address is regarded as 0, so the access starts at the preceding address. This also applies to instruction fetches. When SP (ER7) is used as an address register to access the stack, the operand size should be word size or longword size. Data Type Address Data Image 7 1-bit data Address L 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 Byte data Address L MSB LSB Word data Address 2M Address 2M + 1 MSB LSB Longword data Address 2N Address 2N + 1 Address 2N + 2 Address 2N + 3 MSB LSB Figure 2.10 Memory Data Formats Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 28 of 544 2.6 Instruction Set The H8S/2000 CPU has 65 types of instructions. The instructions are classified by function as shown in table 2.1. Table 2.1 Function Data transfer Instruction Classification Instructions MOV POP* , PUSH* LDM*5, STM*5 MOVFPE*3, MOVTPE*3 ADD, SUB, CMP, NEG ADDX, SUBX, DAA, DAS INC, DEC ADDS, SUBS MULXU, DIVXU, MULXS, DIVXS EXTU, EXTS TAS*4 1 1 Size B/W/L W/L L B B/W/L B B/W/L L B/W W/L B B/W/L B/W/L B — — — Types 5 Arithmetic operations 19 Logic operations Shift Bit manipulation Branch System control AND, OR, XOR, NOT SHAL, SHAR, SHLL, SHLR, ROTL, ROTR, ROTXL, ROTXR BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BTST, BLD, BILD, BST, BIST, BAND, BIAND, BOR, BIOR, BXOR, BIXOR BCC*2, JMP, BSR, JSR, RTS TRAPA, RTE, SLEEP, LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, XORC, NOP 4 8 14 5 9 1 Total: 65 Block data transfer EEPMOV Notes: B: Byte size; W: Word size; L: Longword size. 1. POP.W Rn and PUSH.W Rn are identical to MOV.W @SP+, Rn and MOV.W Rn, @SP. POP.L ERn and PUSH.L ERn are identical to MOV.L @SP+, ERn and MOV.L ERn, @-SP. 2. BCC is the general name for conditional branch instructions. 3. Cannot be used in this LSI. 4. When using the TAS instruction, use registers ER0, ER1, ER4, and ER5. 5. ER7 is not used as the register that can be saved (STM)/restored (LDM) when using STM/LDM instruction, because ER7 is the stack pointer. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 29 of 544 2.6.1 Table of Instructions Classified by Function Tables 2.3 to 2.10 summarize the instructions in each functional category. The notation used in tables 2.3 to 2.10 is defined below. Table 2.2 Symbol Rd Rs Rn ERn (EAd) (EAs) EXR CCR N Z V Operation Notation Description General register (destination)* General register (source)* General register* General register (32-bit register) Destination operand Source operand Extended control register Condition-code register N (negative) flag in CCR Z (zero) flag in CCR V (overflow) flag in CCR C C (carry) flag in CCR PC Program counter SP Stack pointer #IMM Immediate data disp Displacement + Addition – Subtraction × Multiplication ÷ Division ∧ Logical AND ∨ Logical OR ⊕ Logical exclusive OR → Move ∼ NOT (logical complement) :8/:16/:24/:32 8-, 16-, 24-, or 32-bit length Note: * General registers include 8-bit registers (R0H to R7H, R0L to R7L), 16-bit registers (R0 to R7, E0 to E7), and 32-bit registers (ER0 to ER7). Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 30 of 544 Table 2.3 Instruction MOV Data Transfer Instructions Size*1 B/W/L Function (EAs) → Rd, Rs → (EAd) Moves data between two general registers or between a general register and memory, or moves immediate data to a general register. Cannot be used in this LSI. Cannot be used in this LSI. @SP+ → Rn Pops a general register from the stack. POP.W Rn is identical to MOV.W @SP+, Rn. POP.L ERn is identical to MOV.L @SP+, ERn Rn → @-SP Pushes a general register onto the stack. PUSH.W Rn is identical to MOV.W Rn, @-SP. PUSH.L ERn is identical to MOV.L ERn, @-SP. @SP+ → Rn (register list) Pops two or more general registers from the stack. Rn (register list) → @-SP Pushes two or more general registers onto the stack. MOVFPE MOVTPE POP B B W/L PUSH W/L LDM*2 STM*2 L L Notes: 1. Size refers to the operand size. B: Byte W: Word L: Longword 2. ER7 is not used as the register that can be saved (STM)/restored (LDM) when using STM/LDM instruction, because ER7 is the stack pointer. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 31 of 544 Table 2.4 Instruction ADD SUB Arithmetic Operations Instructions (1) Size* B/W/L Function Rd ± Rs → Rd, Rd ± #IMM → Rd Performs addition or subtraction on data in two general registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register. (Subtraction on immediate data and data in a general register cannot be performed in bytes. Use the SUBX or ADD instruction.) Rd ± Rs ± C → Rd, Rd ± #IMM ± C → Rd Performs addition or subtraction with carry on data in two general registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register. Rd ± 1 → Rd, Rd ± 2 → Rd Adds or subtracts the value 1 or 2 to or from data in a general register. (Only the value 1 can be added to or subtracted from byte operands.) Rd ± 1 → Rd, Rd ± 2 → Rd, Rd ± 4 → Rd Adds or subtracts the value 1, 2, or 4 to or from data in a 32-bit register. Rd (decimal adjust) → Rd Decimal-adjusts an addition or subtraction result in a general register by referring to CCR to produce 4-bit BCD data. Rd × Rs → Rd Performs unsigned multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8 bits × 8 bits → 16 bits or 16 bits × 16 bits → 32 bits. Rd × Rs → Rd Performs signed multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8 bits × 8 bits → 16 bits or 16 bits × 16 bits → 32 bits. Rd ÷ Rs → Rd Performs unsigned division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits ÷ 8 bits → 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits ÷ 16 bits → 16-bit quotient and 16-bit remainder. ADDX SUBX B INC DEC B/W/L ADDS SUBS DAA DAS MULXU L B B/W MULXS B/W DIVXU B/W Note: * Size refers to the operand size. B: Byte W: Word L: Longword Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 32 of 544 Table 2.4 Instruction DIVXS Arithmetic Operations Instructions (2) Size*1 B/W Function Rd ÷ Rs → Rd Performs signed division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits ÷ 8 bits → 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits ÷ 16 bits → 16-bit quotient and 16-bit remainder. Rd – Rs, Rd – #IMM Compares data in a general register with data in another general register or with immediate data, and sets the CCR bits according to the result. 0 – Rd → Rd Takes the two's complement (arithmetic complement) of data in a general register. Rd (zero extension) → Rd Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by padding with zeros on the left. Rd (sign extension) → Rd Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by extending the sign bit. @ERd – 0, 1 → ( of @ERd) Tests memory contents, and sets the most significant bit (bit 7) to 1. CMP B/W/L NEG B/W/L EXTU W/L EXTS W/L TAS*2 B Notes: 1. Size refers to the operand size. B: Byte W: Word L: Longword 2. When using the TAS instruction, use registers ER0, ER1, ER4 and ER5. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 33 of 544 Table 2.5 Instruction AND Logic Operations Instructions Size* B/W/L Function Rd ∧ Rs → Rd, Rd ∧ #IMM → Rd Performs a logical AND operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. Rd ∨ Rs → Rd, Rd ∨ #IMM → Rd Performs a logical OR operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. Rd ⊕ Rs → Rd, Rd ⊕ #IMM → Rd Performs a logical exclusive OR operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. OR B/W/L XOR B/W/L ∼ Rd → Rd Takes the one's complement (logical complement) of data in a general register. Note: * Size refers to the operand size. B: Byte W: Word L: Longword NOT B/W/L Table 2.6 Instruction SHAL SHAR SHLL SHLR ROTL ROTR ROTXL ROTXR Shift Instructions Size* B/W/L Function Rd (shift) → Rd Performs an arithmetic shift on data in a general register. 1-bit or 2 bit shift is possible. Rd (shift) → Rd Performs a logical shift on data in a general register. 1-bit or 2 bit shift is possible. Rd (rotate) → Rd Rotates data in a general register. 1-bit or 2 bit rotation is possible. Rd (rotate) → Rd Rotates data including the carry flag in a general register. 1-bit or 2 bit rotation is possible. B/W/L B/W/L B/W/L Note: * Size refers to the operand size. B: Byte W: Word L: Longword Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 34 of 544 Table 2.7 Instruction BSET Bit Manipulation Instructions (1) Size* B Function 1 → ( of ) Sets a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to 1. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a general register. 0 → ( of ) Clears a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to 0. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a general register. ∼ ( of ) → ( of ) Inverts a specified bit in a general register or memory operand. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a general register. ∼ ( of ) → Z Tests a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and sets or clears the Z flag accordingly. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a general register. C ∧ ( of ) → C Logically ANDs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag. C ∧ ( of ) → C Logically ANDs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data. C ∨ ( of ) → C Logically ORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag. BCLR B BNOT B BTST B BAND B BIAND B BOR B BIOR Note: * B: Byte C ∨ (∼ of ) → C Logically ORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data. Size refers to the operand size. B Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 35 of 544 Table 2.7 Instruction BXOR Bit Manipulation Instructions (2) Size* B Function C ⊕ ( of ) → C Logically exclusive-ORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag. C ⊕ ∼ ( of ) → C Logically exclusive-ORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data. ( of ) → C Transfers a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to the carry flag. ∼ ( of ) → C Transfers the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to the carry flag. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data. C → ( of ) Transfers the carry flag value to a specified bit in a general register or memory operand. ∼ C → (. of ) Transfers the inverse of the carry flag value to a specified bit in a general register or memory operand. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data. BIXOR B BLD B BILD B BST B BIST B Note: * B: Byte Size refers to the operand size. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 36 of 544 Table 2.8 Instruction Bcc Branch Instructions Size — Function Branches to a specified address if a specified condition is true. The branching conditions are listed below. Mnemonic BRA (BT) BRN (BF) BHI BLS BCC (BHS) BCS (BLO) BNE BEQ BVC BVS BPL BMI BGE BLT BGT BLE Description Always (true) Never (false) High Low or same Carry clear (high or same) Carry set (low) Not equal Equal Overflow clear Overflow set Plus Minus Greater or equal Less than Greater than Less or equal Condition Always Never C∨Z=0 C∨Z=1 C=0 C=1 Z=0 Z=1 V=0 V=1 N=0 N=1 N⊕V=0 N⊕V=1 Z ∨ (N ⊕ V) = 0 Z ∨ (N ⊕ V) = 1 JMP BSR JSR RTS — — — — Branches unconditionally to a specified address. Branches to a subroutine at a specified address Branches to a subroutine at a specified address Returns from a subroutine Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 37 of 544 Table 2.9 Instruction TRAPA RTE SLEEP LDC System Control Instructions Size* — — — B/W Function Starts trap-instruction exception handling. Returns from an exception-handling routine. Causes a transition to a power-down state. (EAs) → CCR, (EAs) → EXR Moves the memory operand contents or immediate data to CCR or EXR. Although CCR and EXR are 8-bit registers, word-size transfers are performed between them and memory. The upper 8 bits are valid. B/W CCR → (EAd), EXR → (EAd) Transfers CCR or EXR contents to a general register or memory operand. Although CCR and EXR are 8-bit registers, word-size transfers are performed between them and memory. The upper 8 bits are valid. B CCR ∧ #IMM → CCR, EXR ∧ #IMM → EXR Logically ANDs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data. B CCR ∨ #IMM → CCR, EXR ∨ #IMM → EXR Logically ORs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data. B CCR ⊕ #IMM → CCR, EXR ⊕ #IMM → EXR Logically exclusive-ORs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data. — PC + 2 → PC Only increments the program counter. Size refers to the operand size. STC ANDC ORC XORC NOP Note: * B: Byte W: Word Table 2.10 Block Data Transfer Instructions Instruction EEPMOV.B Size — Function if R4L ≠ 0 then Repeat @ER5 + → @ER6+ R4L–1 → R4L Until R4L = 0 else next; if R4 ≠ 0 then Repeat @ER5 + → @ER6+ R4–1 → R4 Until R4 = 0 else next; Transfers a data block. Starting from the address set in ER5, transfers data for the number of bytes set in R4L or R4 to the address location set in ER6. Execution of the next instruction begins as soon as the transfer is completed. EEPMOV.W — Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 38 of 544 2.6.2 Basic Instruction Formats The H8S/2000 CPU instructions consist of 2-byte (1-word) units. An instruction consists of an operation field (op), a register field (r), an effective address extension (EA), and a condition field (cc). Figure 2.11 shows examples of instruction formats. • Operation field Indicates the function of the instruction, the addressing mode, and the operation to be carried out on the operand. The operation field always includes the first four bits of the instruction. Some instructions have two operation fields. • Register field Specifies a general register. Address registers are specified by 3 bits, and data registers by 3 bits or 4 bits. Some instructions have two register fields, and some have no register field. • Effective address extension 8, 16, or 32 bits specifying immediate data, an absolute address, or a displacement. • Condition field Specifies the branching condition of Bcc instructions. (1) Operation field only op NOP, RTS (2) Operation field and register fields op rn rm ADD.B Rn, Rm (3) Operation field, register fields, and effective address extension op EA (disp) rn rm MOV.B @(d:16, Rn), Rm (4) Operation field, effective address extension, and condition field op cc EA (disp) BRA d:16 Figure 2.11 Instruction Formats (Examples) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 39 of 544 2.7 Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation The H8S/2000 CPU supports the eight addressing modes listed in table 2.11. Each instruction uses a subset of these addressing modes. Arithmetic and logic operations instructions can use the register direct and immediate addressing modes. Data transfer instructions can use all addressing modes except program-counter relative and memory indirect. Bit manipulation instructions can use register direct, register indirect, or absolute addressing mode to specify an operand, and register direct (BSET, BCLR, BNOT, and BTST instructions) or immediate (3-bit) addressing mode to specify a bit number in the operand. Table 2.11 Addressing Modes No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Addressing Mode Register direct Register indirect Register indirect with displacement Register indirect with post-increment Register indirect with pre-decrement Absolute address Immediate Program-counter relative Memory indirect Symbol Rn @ERn @(d:16,ERn)/@(d:32,ERn) @ERn+ @–ERn @aa:8/@aa:16/@aa:24/@aa:32 #xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32 @(d:8,PC)/@(d:16,PC) @@aa:8 2.7.1 Register Direct—Rn The register field of the instruction code specifies an 8-, 16-, or 32-bit general register which contains the operand. R0H to R7H and R0L to R7L can be specified as 8-bit registers. R0 to R7 and E0 to E7 can be specified as 16-bit registers. ER0 to ER7 can be specified as 32-bit registers. 2.7.2 Register Indirect—@ERn The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn) which contains the address of a memory operand. If the address is a program instruction address, the lower 24 bits are valid and the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00). Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 40 of 544 2.7.3 Register Indirect with Displacement—@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:32, ERn) A 16-bit or 32-bit displacement contained in the instruction code is added to an address register (ERn) specified by the register field of the instruction, and the sum gives the address of a memory operand. A 16-bit displacement is sign-extended when added. 2.7.4 Register Indirect with Post-Increment or Pre-Decrement—@ERn+ or @-ERn Register Indirect with Post-Increment—@ERn+: The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn) which contains the address of a memory operand. After the operand is accessed, 1, 2, or 4 is added to the address register contents and the sum is stored in the address register. The value added is 1 for byte access, 2 for word access, and 4 for longword access. For word or longword transfer instructions, the register value should be even. Register Indirect with Pre-Decrement—@-ERn: The value 1, 2, or 4 is subtracted from an address register (ERn) specified by the register field in the instruction code, and the result becomes the address of a memory operand. The result is also stored in the address register. The value subtracted is 1 for byte access, 2 for word access, and 4 for longword access. For word or longword transfer instructions, the register value should be even. 2.7.5 Absolute Address—@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32 The instruction code contains the absolute address of a memory operand. The absolute address may be 8 bits long (@aa:8), 16 bits long (@aa:16), 24 bits long (@aa:24), or 32 bits long (@aa:32). Table 2.12 indicates the accessible absolute address ranges. To access data, the absolute address should be 8 bits (@aa:8), 16 bits (@aa:16), or 32 bits (@aa:32) long. For an 8-bit absolute address, the upper 16 bits are all assumed to be 1 (H'FFFF). For a 16-bit absolute address, the upper 16 bits are a sign extension. For a 32-bit absolute address, the entire address space is accessed. A 24-bit absolute address (@aa:24) indicates the address of a program instruction. The upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00). Table 2.12 Absolute Address Access Ranges Absolute Address Data address 8 bits (@aa:8) 16 bits (@aa:16) 32 bits (@aa:32) 24 bits (@aa:24) Normal Mode H'FF00 to H'FFFF H'0000 to H'FFFF Advanced Mode H'FFFF00 to H'FFFFFF H'000000 to H'007FFF, H'FF8000 to H'FFFFFF H'000000 to H'FFFFFF Program instruction address Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 41 of 544 2.7.6 Immediate—#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32 The 8-bit (#xx:8), 16-bit (#xx:16), or 32-bit (#xx:32) immediate data contained in an instruction code can be used directly as an operand. The ADDS, SUBS, INC, and DEC instructions implicitly contain immediate data in their instruction codes. Some bit manipulation instructions contain 3-bit immediate data in the instruction code, specifying a bit number. The TRAPA instruction contains 2-bit immediate data in its instruction code, specifying a vector address. 2.7.7 Program-Counter Relative—@(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC) This mode can be used by the Bcc and BSR instructions. An 8-bit or 16-bit displacement contained in the instruction code is sign-extended to 24 bits and added to the 24-bit address indicated by the PC value to generate a 24-bit branch address. Only the lower 24 bits of this branch address are valid; the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00). The PC value to which the displacement is added is the address of the first byte of the next instruction, so the possible branching range is –126 to +128 bytes (–63 to +64 words) or –32766 to +32768 bytes (–16383 to +16384 words) from the branch instruction. The resulting value should be an even number. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 42 of 544 2.7.8 Memory Indirect—@@aa:8 This mode can be used by the JMP and JSR instructions. The instruction code contains an 8-bit absolute address specifying a memory operand which contains a branch address. The upper bits of the 8-bit absolute address are all assumed to be 0, so the address range is 0 to 255 (H'0000 to H'00FF in normal mode, H'000000 to H'0000FF in advanced mode). In normal mode, the memory operand is a word operand and the branch address is 16 bits long. In advanced mode, the memory operand is a longword operand, the first byte of which is assumed to be 0 (H'00). Note that the top area of the address range in which the branch address is stored is also used for the exception vector area. For further details, refer to section 4, Exception Handling. If an odd address is specified in word or longword memory access, or as a branch address, the least significant bit is regarded as 0, causing data to be accessed or the instruction code to be fetched at the address preceding the specified address. (For further information, see section 2.5.2, Memory Data Formats.) Specified by @aa:8 Branch address Specified by @aa:8 Reserved Branch address (a) Normal Mode (b) Advanced Mode Figure 2.12 Branch Address Specification in Memory Indirect Addressing Mode Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 43 of 544 2.7.9 Effective Address Calculation Table 2.13 indicates how effective addresses are calculated in each addressing mode. In normal mode, the upper 8 bits of the effective address are ignored in order to generate a 16-bit address. Table 2.13 Effective Address Calculation (1) No 1 Addressing Mode and Instruction Format Register direct (Rn) Effective Address Calculation Effective Address (EA) Operand is general register contents. op 2 rm rn 31 0 Register indirect (@ERn) 31 24 23 0 General register contents op 3 r Don't care Register indirect with displacement @(d:16,ERn) or @(d:32,ERn) 31 0 General register contents op r disp 31 Sign extension 31 0 disp 24 23 0 Don't care 4 Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement • Register indirect with post-increment @ERn+ 31 0 31 24 23 0 General register contents Don't care op r 31 1, 2, or 4 • Register indirect with pre-decrement @-ERn 0 General register contents 31 24 23 0 Don't care op r Operand Size Byte Word Longword 1, 2, or 4 Offset 1 2 4 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 44 of 544 Table 2.13 Effective Address Calculation (2) No Addressing Mode and Instruction Format Absolute address Effective Address Calculation Effective Address (EA) 5 @aa:8 31 abs 24 23 87 0 op Don't care H'FFFF @aa:16 31 op abs 24 23 16 15 0 Don't care Sign extension @aa:24 op abs 31 24 23 0 Don't care @aa:32 op abs 31 24 23 0 Don't care 6 Immediate #xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32 Operand is immediate data. op IMM 7 Program-counter relative @(d:8,PC)/@(d:16,PC) op 23 PC contents 0 disp 23 Sign extension 0 disp 31 24 23 0 Don't care 8 Memory indirect @@aa:8 31 87 H'000000 15 Memory contents 0 abs 0 31 24 23 op abs 16 15 0 Don't care H'00 31 87 H'000000 abs 0 op abs 31 31 0 24 23 0 Don't care Memory contents Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 45 of 544 2.8 Processing States The H8S/2000 CPU has four main processing states: the reset state, exception handling state, program execution state, and program stop state. Figure 2.13 indicates the state transitions. • Reset state In this state the CPU and on-chip peripheral modules are all initialized and stopped. When the RES input goes low, all current processing stops and the CPU enters the reset state. All interrupts are masked in the reset state. Reset exception handling starts when the RES signal changes from low to high. For details, refer to section 4, Exception Handling. The reset state can also be entered by a watchdog timer overflow. • Exception-handling state The exception-handling state is a transient state that occurs when the CPU alters the normal processing flow due to an exception source, such as, a reset, trace, interrupt, or trap instruction. The CPU fetches a start address (vector) from the exception vector table and branches to that address. For further details, refer to section 4, Exception Handling. • Program execution state In this state the CPU executes program instructions in sequence. • Program stop state This is a power-down state in which the CPU stops operating. The program stop state occurs when a SLEEP instruction is executed or the CPU enters hardware standby mode. For details, refer to section 20, Power-Down Modes. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 46 of 544 Program execution state SLEEP instruction with LSON = 0, PSS = 0, SSBY = 1 SLEEP instruction with LSON = 0, SSBY = 0 End of exception handling Request for exception handling Sleep mode Interrupt request Exception-handling state External interrupt request RES = high Software standby mode Reset state*1 STBY = high, RES = low Hardware standby mode*2 Power-down state*3 Notes: 1. From any state except hardware standby mode, a transition to the reset state occurs whenever RES goes low. A transition can also be made to the reset state when the watchdog timer overflows. 2. From any state, a transition to hardware standby mode occurs when STBY goes low. 3. The power-down state also includes watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, etc. For details, refer to section 20, Power-Down Modes. Figure 2.13 State Transitions Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 47 of 544 2.9 2.9.1 Usage Notes Note on TAS Instruction Usage When using the TAS instruction, use registers ER0, ER1, ER4 and ER5. The TAS instruction is not generated by the Renesas Technology H8S and H8/300 series C/C++ compilers. When the TAS instruction is used as a user-defined intrinsic function, use registers ER0, ER1, ER4 and ER5. 2.9.2 Note on STM/LDM Instruction Usage ER7 is not used as the register that can be saved (STM)/restored (LDM) when using STM/LDM instruction, because ER7 is the stack pointer. Two, three, or four registers can be saved/restored by one STM/LDM instruction. The following ranges can be specified in the register list. Two registers: ER0—ER1, ER2—ER3, or ER4—ER5 Three registers: ER0—ER2 or ER4—ER6 Four registers: ER0—ER3 The STM/LDM instruction including ER7 is not generated by the Renesas Technology H8S and H8/300 series C/C++ compilers. 2.9.3 Note on Bit Manipulation Instructions The BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BST, and BIST instructions read data in byte units, manipulate the data of the target bit, and write data in byte units. Special care is required when using these instructions in cases where a register containing a write-only bit is used or a bit is directly manipulated for a port. In addition, the BCLR instruction can be used to clear the flag of the internal I/O register. In this case, if the flag to be cleared has been set to 1 by an interrupt processing routine, the flag need not be read before executing the BCLR instruction. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 48 of 544 2.9.4 EEPMOV Instruction 1. EEPMOV is a block-transfer instruction and transfers the byte size of data indicated by R4L, which starts from the address indicated by R5, to the address indicated by R6. R5 R6 R5 + R4L R6 + R4L 2. Set R4L and R6 so that the end address of the destination address (value of R6 + R4L) does not exceed H'FFFF (the value of R6 must not change from H'FFFF to H'0000 during execution). R5 R6 R5 + R4L Invalid H'FFFF R6 + R4L Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 49 of 544 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 50 of 544 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes 3.1 MCU Operating Mode Selection This LSI has two operating modes (modes 2 and 3). The operating mode is determined by the setting of the mode pins (MD1 and MD0). Table 3.1 shows the MCU operating mode selection. Table 3.1 lists the MCU operating modes. Table 3.1 MCU Operating Mode 2 3 MCU Operating Mode Selection CPU Operating Mode Advanced Normal MD1 1 MD0 0 1 Description Single-chip mode Single-chip mode On-Chip ROM Enabled Modes 2 and 3 set the operation in single-chip mode. Modes 0 and 1 cannot be used in this LSI. Thus, mode pins should be set to enable mode 2 or 3 in normal program execution state. Mode pins should not be changed during operation. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 51 of 544 3.2 Register Descriptions The following registers are related to the operating mode. Mode control register (MDCR) System control register (SYSCR) Serial timer control register (STCR) 3.2.1 Mode Control Register (MDCR) MDCR is used to monitor the current operating mode. Bit 7 6 to 2 1 0 Initial Bit Name Value EXPE — 0 All 0 R/W R/W Description Reserved The initial value should not be changed. Reserved These bits are always read as 0. These bits cannot be modified. R MDS1 MDS0 —* —* R R Mode Select 1 and 0 These bits indicate the input levels at mode pins (MD1 and MD0) (the current operating mode). Bits MDS1 and MDS0 correspond to MD1 and MD0, respectively. These bits are read-only bits and they cannot be written to. The mode pin (MD1 and MD0) input levels are latched into these bits when MDCR is read. These latches are canceled by a reset. Note: * The initial values are determined by the settings of the MD1 and MD0 pins. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 52 of 544 3.2.2 System Control Register (SYSCR) SYSCR selects a system pin function, monitors a reset source, selects the interrupt control mode and the detection edge for NMI, pin location selection, enables or disables register access to the on-chip peripheral modules, and enables or disables on-chip RAM address space. Bit 7 and 6 5 4 Initial Bit Name Value — INTM1 INTM0 All 0 0 0 R/W R/W R R/W Description Reserved The initial value should not be changed. These bits select the control mode of the interrupt controller. For details on the interrupt control modes and interrupt control select modes 1 and 0, see section 5.6, Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation. 00: Interrupt control mode 0 01: Interrupt control mode 1 10: Setting prohibited 11: Setting prohibited 3 XRST 1 R External Reset This bit indicates the reset source. A reset is caused by an external reset input, or when the watchdog timer overflows. 0: A reset is caused when the watchdog timer overflows. 1: A reset is caused by an external reset. 2 NMIEG 0 R/W NMI Edge Select Selects the valid edge of the NMI interrupt input. 0: An interrupt is requested at the falling edge of NMI input 1: An interrupt is requested at the rising edge of NMI input Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 53 of 544 Bit 1 Initial Bit Name Value HIE 0 R/W R/W Description Host Interface Enable Controls CPU access to the keyboard matrix interrupt, input pull-up MOS control registers (KMIMR, KMPCR, and KMIMRA), and the 8-bit timer (TMR_X and TMR_Y) registers (TCR_X/TCR_Y, TCSR_X/TCSR_Y, TICRR/TCORA_Y, TICRF/TCORB_Y, TCNT_X/TCNT_Y, TCORC/TISR, TCORA_X, and TCORB_X, TCONRI, and TCONRS). 0: In areas H'(FF)FFF0 to H'(FF)FFF7 and H'(FF)FFFC to H'(FF)FFFF, CPU access to 8-bit timer (TMR_X and TMR_Y) is permitted. 1: In areas H'(FF)FFF0 to H'(FF)FFF7 and H'(FF)FFFC to H'(FF)FFFF, CPU access to keyboard matrix interrupt and input pull-up MOS control registers is permitted. 0 RAME 1 R/W RAM Enable Enables or disables on-chip RAM. The RAME bit is initialized when the reset state is released. 0: On-chip RAM is disabled 1: On-chip RAM is enabled Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 54 of 544 3.2.3 Serial Timer Control Register (STCR) STCR enables or disables register access, IIC operating mode, and on-chip flash memory, and selects the input clock of the timer counter. Bit 7 Initial Bit Name Value IICS 0 R/W R/W Description I2C Extra Buffer Select Specifies bits 7 to 4 of port A as output buffers similar to SLC and SDA. These pins are used to implement 2 an I C interface only by software. 0: PA7 to PA4 are normal input/output pins. 1: PA7 to PA4 are input/output pins enabling bus driving. 6 5 IICX1 IICX0 0 0 R/W R/W I2C Transfer Rate Select 1 and 0 These bits control the IIC operation. These bits select a transfer rate in master mode together with bits 2 CKS2 to CKS0 in the I C bus mode register (ICMR). For details on the transfer rate, refer to table 13.3. I C Master Enable Enables or disables CPU access for IIC registers (ICCR, ICSR, ICDR/SARX, ICMR/SAR), and SCI registers (SMR, BRR, SCMR). 0: SCI_1 registers are accessed in an area from H'(FF)FF88 to H'(FF)FF89 and from H'(FF)FF8E to H'(FF)FF8F. 1: IIC_1 registers are accessed in an area from H'(FF)FF88 to H'(FF)FF89 and from H'(FF)FF8E to H'(FF)FF8F. IIC_0 registers are accessed in an area from H'(FF)FFD8 to H'(FF)FFD9 and from H'(FF)FFDE to H'(FF)FFDF. 2 4 IICE 0 R/W Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 55 of 544 Bit 3 Initial Bit Name Value FLSHE 0 R/W R/W Description Flash Memory Control Register Enable Enables or disables CPU access for flash memory registers (FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, EBR2), control registers in power-down state (SBYCR, LPWRCR, MSTPCRH, MSTPCRL), and control registers of onchip peripheral modules (PCSR, SYSCR2). 0: Registers in power-down state and control registers of on-chip peripheral modules are accessed in an area from H'(FF)FF80 to H'(FF)FF87. 1: Control registers of flash memory are accessed in an area from H'(FF)FF80 to H'(FF)FF87. 2 1 0 — ICKS1 ICKS0 0 0 0 R/(W) R/W R/W Reserved The initial value should not be changed. Internal Clock Source Select 1, 0 These bits select a clock to be input to the timer counter (TCNT) and a count condition together with bits CKS2 to CKS0 in the timer control register (TCR). For details, refer to section 10.3.4, Timer Control Register (TCR). 3.3 3.3.1 Operating Mode Descriptions Mode 2 The CPU can access a 16-Mbyte address space in advanced single-chip mode. The on-chip ROM is enabled. 3.3.2 Mode 3 The CPU can access a 64-Kbyte address space in normal single-chip mode. The on-chip ROM is enabled. The CPU can access a 56-kbyte address space in mode 3. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 56 of 544 3.4 Address Map Figures 3.1 and 3.2 show the address map in each operating mode. Mode 2 (EXPE = 0) Advanced mode Single-chip mode H'000000 H'0000 Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) Normal mode Single-chip mode On-chip ROM H'00FFFF On-chip ROM Reserved area H'01FFFF H'DFFF H'FFE080 H'FFE880 H'FFEFFF H'FFF800 H'FFFE4F H'FFFE50 H'FFFEFF H'FFFF00 H'FFFF7F H'FFFF80 H'FFFFFF Reserved area On-chip RAM H'E080 H'E880 H'EFFF Reserved area On-chip RAM Internal I/O registers 3 Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM (128 bytes) Internal I/O registers 1 H'F800 H'FE4F H'FE50 H'FEFF H'FF00 H'FF7F H'FF80 H'FFFF Internal I/O registers 3 Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM (128 bytes) Internal I/O registers 1 Figure 3.1 Address Map for H8S/2111B-B Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 57 of 544 Mode 2 (EXPE = 0) Advanced mode Single-chip mode H'000000 H'0000 Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) Normal mode Single-chip mode On-chip ROM H'00FFFF On-chip ROM Reserved area H'01FFFF H'DFFF H'FFE080 H'FFE480 H'FFEFFF H'FFF800 H'FFFE4F H'FFFE50 H'FFFEFF H'FFFF00 H'FFFF7F H'FFFF80 H'FFFFFF Reserved area On-chip RAM H'E080 H'E480 H'EFFF Reserved area On-chip RAM Internal I/O registers 3 Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM (128 bytes) Internal I/O registers 1 H'F800 H'FE4F H'FE50 H'FEFF H'FF00 H'FF7F H'FF80 H'FFFF Internal I/O registers 3 Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM (128 bytes) Internal I/O registers 1 Figure 3.2 Address Map for H8S/2111B-C Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 58 of 544 Section 4 Exception Handling 4.1 Exception Handling Types and Priority As table 4.1 indicates, exception handling may be caused by a reset, interrupt, direct transition, or trap instruction. Exception handling is prioritized as shown in table 4.1. If two or more exceptions occur simultaneously, they are accepted and processed in order of priority. Table 4.1 Priority High Exception Types and Priority Exception Type Reset Interrupt Start of Exception Handling Starts immediately after a low-to-high transition of the RES pin, or when the watchdog timer overflows. Starts when execution of the current instruction or exception handling ends, if an interrupt request has been issued. Interrupt detection is not performed on completion of ANDC, ORC, XORC, or LDC instruction execution, or on completion of reset exception handling. Starts when a direction transition occurs as the result of SLEEP instruction execution. Started by execution of a trap (TRAPA) instruction. Trap instruction exception handling requests are accepted at all times in program execution state. Direct transition Trap instruction Low Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 59 of 544 4.2 Exception Sources and Exception Vector Table Different vector addresses are assigned to different exception sources. Table 4.2 lists the exception sources and their vector addresses. Table 4.2 Exception Handling Vector Table Vector Address Exception Source Reset Reserved for system use Vector Number 0 1  5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Reserved for system use 12  15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24  111 Normal Mode H'0000 to H'0001 H'0002 to H'0003 | H'000A to H'000B H'000C to H'000D H'000E to H'000F H'0010 to H'0011 H'0012 to H'0013 H'0014 to H'0015 H'0016 to H'0017 H'0018 to H'0019 | H'001E to H'001F H'0020 to H'0021 H'0022 to H'0023 H'0024 to H'0025 H'0026 to H'0027 H'0028 to H'0029 H'002A to H'002B H'002C to H'002D H'002E to H'002F H'0030 to H'0031  H'00DE to H'00DF Advanced Mode H'000000 to H'000003 H'000004 to H'000007 | H'000014 to H'000017 H'000018 to H'00001B H'00001C to H'00001F H'000020 to H'000023 H'000024 to H'000027 H'000028 to H'00002B H'00002C to H'00002F H'000030 to H'000033 | H'00003C to H'00003F H'000040 to H'000043 H'000044 to H'000047 H'000048 to H'00004B H'00004C to H'00004F H'000050 to H'000053 H'000054 to H'000057 H'000058 to H'00005B H'00005C to H'00005F H'000060 to H'000063  H'0001BC to H'0001BF Direct transition External interrupt (NMI) Trap instruction (four sources) External interrupt IRQ0 IRQ1 IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 IRQ6 IRQ7 Internal interrupt* Note: * For details on the internal interrupt vector table, see section 5.5, Interrupt Exception Handling Vector Table. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 60 of 544 4.3 Reset A reset has the highest exception priority. When the RES pin goes low, all processing halts and this LSI enters the reset. To ensure that this LSI is reset, hold the RES pin low for at least 20 ms at power-on. To reset the chip during operation, hold the RES pin low for at least 20 states. A reset initializes the internal state of the CPU and the registers of on-chip peripheral modules. The chip can also be reset by overflow of the watchdog timer. For details, see section 11, Watchdog Timer (WDT). 4.3.1 Reset Exception Handling When the RES pin goes high after being held low for the necessary time, this LSI starts reset exception handling as follows: 1. The internal state of the CPU and the registers of the on-chip peripheral modules are initialized and the I bit is set to 1 in CCR. 2. The reset exception handling vector address is read and transferred to the PC, and program execution starts from the address indicated by the PC. Figure 4.1 shows an example of the reset sequence. Vector fetch φ Internal Prefetch of first program processing instruction RES Internal address bus (1) (3) Internal read signal Internal write signal High Internal data bus (2) (4) (1) Reset exception handling vector address ((1) = H'0000) (2) Start address (contents of reset exception handling vector address) (3) Start address ((3) = (2)) (4) First program instruction Figure 4.1 Reset Sequence (Mode 3) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 61 of 544 4.3.2 Interrupts after Reset If an interrupt is accepted after a reset and before the stack pointer (SP) is initialized, the PC and CCR will not be saved correctly, leading to a program crash. To prevent this, all interrupt requests, including NMI, are disabled immediately after a reset. Since the first instruction of a program is always executed immediately after the reset state ends, make sure that this instruction initializes the stack pointer (example: MOV.L #xx: 32, SP). 4.3.3 On-Chip Peripheral Modules after Reset is Cancelled After a reset is cancelled, the module stop control registers (MSTPCR) are initialized, and all modules operate in module stop mode. Therefore, the registers of on-chip peripheral modules cannot be read from or written to. To read from and write to these registers, clear module stop mode. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 62 of 544 4.4 Interrupt Exception Handling Interrupts are controlled by the interrupt controller. The sources to start interrupt exception handling are external interrupt sources (NMI, IRQ7 to IRQ0, KIN15 to KIN0, and WUE7 to WUE0) and internal interrupt sources from the on-chip peripheral modules. NMI is an interrupt with the highest priority. For details, refer to section 5, Interrupt Controller. Interrupt exception handling is conducted as follows: 1. The values in the program counter (PC) and condition code register (CCR) are saved to the stack. 2. A vector address corresponding to the interrupt source is generated, the start address is loaded from the vector table to the PC, and program execution begins from that address. 4.5 Trap Instruction Exception Handling Trap instruction exception handling starts when a TRAPA instruction is executed. Trap instruction exception handling can be executed at all times in the program execution state. Trap instruction exception handling is conducted as follows: 1. The values in the program counter (PC) and condition code register (CCR) are saved to the stack. 2. A vector address corresponding to the interrupt source is generated, the start address is loaded from the vector table to the PC, and program execution starts from that address. The TRAPA instruction fetches a start address from a vector table entry corresponding to a vector number from 0 to 3, as specified in the instruction code. Table 4.3 shows the status of CCR after execution of trap instruction exception handling. Table 4.3 Status of CCR after Trap Instruction Exception Handling CCR Interrupt Control Mode 0 1 [Legend] 1: Set to 1 —: Retains value prior to execution I 1 1 UI — 1 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 63 of 544 4.6 Stack Status after Exception Handling Figure 4.2 shows the stack after completion of trap instruction exception handling and interrupt exception handling. Normal mode Advanced mode SP CCR CCR* PC (16 bits) SP CCR PC (24 bits) Note: Ignored on return. Figure 4.2 Stack Status after Exception Handling Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 64 of 544 4.7 Usage Note When accessing word data or longword data, this LSI assumes that the lowest address bit is 0. The stack should always be accessed in words or longwords, and the value of the stack pointer (SP: ER7) should always be kept even. Use the following instructions to save registers: PUSH.W PUSH.L Rn ERn (or MOV.W Rn, @-SP) (or MOV.L ERn, @-SP) Use the following instructions to restore registers: POP.W POP.L Rn ERn (or MOV.W @SP+, Rn) (or MOV.L @SP+, ERn) Setting SP to an odd value may lead to a malfunction. Figure 4.3 shows an example of what happens when the SP value is odd. Address CCR SP PC SP R1L H'FFEFFA H'FFEFFB PC H'FFEFFC H'FFEFFD SP H'FFEFFF TRAPA instruction executed SP set to H'FFFEFF [Legend] MOV.B R1L, @-ER7 executed Contents of CCR lost Data saved above SP CCR: PC: R1L: SP: Condition code register Program counter General register R1L Stack pointer Note: This diagram illustrates an example in which the interrupt control mode is 0 in advanced mode. Figure 4.3 Operation when SP Value is Odd Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 65 of 544 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 66 of 544 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.1 Features • Two interrupt control modes Any of two interrupt control modes can be set by means of the INTM1 and INTM0 bits in the system control register (SYSCR). • Priorities settable with ICR An interrupt control register (ICR) is provided for setting interrupt priorities. Three priority levels can be set for each module for all interrupts except NMI and address break. • Independent vector addresses All interrupt sources are assigned independent vector addresses, making it unnecessary for the source to be identified in the interrupt handling routine. • Thirty-one external interrupts NMI is the highest-priority interrupt, and is accepted at all times. Rising edge or falling edge detection can be selected for NMI. Falling-edge, rising-edge, or both-edge detection, or level sensing, can be selected for IRQ7 to IRQ0. The IRQ6 interrupt is shared by the interrupt from the IRQ6 pin and eight external interrupt inputs (KIN7 to KIN0), and the IRQ7 interrupt is shared by the interrupt from the IRQ7 pin and sixteen external interrupt inputs (KIN15 to KIN8 and WUE7 to WUE0). KIN15 to KIN0 and WUE7 to WUE0 can be masked individually by the user program. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 67 of 544 INTM1, INTM0 SYSCR NMIEG NMI input IRQ input NMI input IRQ input ISR ISCR KMIMR KIN input WUE input CPU Interrupt request Vector number Priority check IER WUEMR KIN and WUE input I, UI CCR Internal interrupt request WOVI0 to IBFI3 Interrupt controller [Legend] ICR ICR: Interrupt control register ISCR: IRQ sense control register IER: IRQ enable register ISR: IRQ status register KMIMR: Keyboard matrix interrupt mask register WUEMR: Wake-up event interrupt mask register SYSCR: System control register Figure 5.1 Block Diagram of Interrupt Controller 5.2 Input/Output Pins Table 5.1 summarizes the pins of the interrupt controller. Table 5.1 Symbol NMI IRQ7 to IRQ0 Pin Configuration I/O Input Input Function Nonmaskable external interrupt Rising edge or falling edge can be selected Maskable external interrupts Rising edge, falling edge, both edges, or level sensing, can be selected individually for each pin. Maskable external interrupts Falling edge or level sensing can be selected. Maskable external interrupts Falling edge or level sensing can be selected. KIN15 to KIN0 WUE7 to WUE0 Input Input Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 68 of 544 5.3 Register Descriptions The interrupt controller has the following registers. For details on the system control register (SYSCR), refer to section 3.2.2, System Control Register (SYSCR). • • • • • • • • Interrupt control registers A to C (ICRA to ICRC) Address break control register (ABRKCR) Break address registers A to C (BARA to BARC) IRQ sense control registers (ISCRH, ISCRL) IRQ enable register (IER) IRQ status register (ISR) Keyboard matrix interrupt mask registers (KMIMRA, KMIMR) Wake-up event interrupt mask register (WUEMRB) Interrupt Control Registers A to C (ICRA to ICRC) 5.3.1 The ICR registers set interrupt control levels for interrupts other than NMI and address breaks. The correspondence between interrupt sources and ICRA to ICRC settings is shown in table 5.2. Bit 7 to 0 Bit Name ICRn7 to IRCn0 Initial Value All 0 R/W R/W Description Interrupt Control Level 0: Corresponding interrupt source is interrupt control level 0 (no priority) 1: Corresponding interrupt source is interrupt control level 1 (priority) [Legend] n: A to C Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 69 of 544 Table 5.2 Bit Correspondence between Interrupt Source and ICR Register ICRA ICRB ICRC — SCI_1 — IIC_0 IIC_1 TMR_A, TMR_B LPC — Bit Name 7 ICRn7 IRQ0 — 6 ICRn6 IRQ1 FRT 5 ICRn5 IRQ2, IRQ3 — 4 ICRn4 IRQ4, IRQ5 — 3 ICRn3 IRQ6, IRQ7 TMR_0 2 ICRn2 — TMR_1 1 ICRn1 WDT_0 TMR_X, TMR_Y 0 ICRn0 WDT_1 Keyboard buffer controller [Legend] n: A to C : Reserved. The write value should always be 0. 5.3.2 Address Break Control Register (ABRKCR) ABRKCR controls the address breaks. When both the CMF flag and BIE flag are set to 1, an address break is requested. Bit 7 Initial Bit Name Value CMF 0 R/W R Description Condition Match Flag Address break source flag. Indicates that an address specified by BARA to BARC is prefetched. [Setting condition] When an address specified by BARA to BARC is prefetched while the BIE flag is set to 1. [Clearing condition] When an exception handling is executed for an address break interrupt. Reserved These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Break Interrupt Enable Enables or disables address break. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 6 to 1 0 — All 0 R BIE 0 R/W Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 70 of 544 5.3.3 Break Address Registers A to C (BARA to BARC) The BAR registers specify an address that is to be a break address. An address in which the first byte of an instruction exists should be set as a break address. In normal mode, addresses A23 to A16 are not compared. • BARA Bit 7 to 0 Initial Bit Name Value A23 to A16 All 0 R/W R/W Description Addresses 23 to 16 The A23 to A16 bits are compared with A23 to A16 in the internal address bus. • BARB Bit 7 to 0 Initial Bit Name Value A15 to A8 All 0 R/W R/W Description Addresses 15 to 8 The A15 to A8 bits are compared with A15 to A8 in the internal address bus. • BARC Bit 7 to 1 0 Initial Bit Name Value A7 to A1 — All 0 R/W R/W Description Addresses 7 to 1 The A7 to A1 bits are compared with A7 to A1 in the internal address bus. Reserved This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 0 R Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 71 of 544 5.3.4 IRQ Sense Control Registers (ISCRH, ISCRL) The ISCR registers select the source that generates an interrupt request at pins IRQ7 to IRQ0. • ISCRH Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Bit Name Value IRQ7SCB IRQ7SCA IRQ6SCB IRQ6SCA IRQ5SCB IRQ5SCA IRQ4SCB IRQ4SCA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description IRQn Sense Control B IRQn Sense Control A 00: Interrupt request generated at low level of IRQn input 01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQn input 10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQn input 11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising edges of IRQn input (n = 7 to 4) • ISCRL Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Bit Name Value IRQ3SCB IRQ3SCA IRQ2SCB IRQ2SCA IRQ1SCB IRQ1SCA IRQ0SCB IRQ0SCA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description IRQn Sense Control B IRQn Sense Control A 00: Interrupt request generated at low level of IRQn input 01: Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQn input 10: Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQn input 11: Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising edges of IRQn input (n = 3 to 0) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 72 of 544 5.3.5 IRQ Enable Register (IER) IER controls the enabling and disabling of interrupt requests IRQ7 to IRQ0. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Bit Name Value IRQ7E IRQ6E IRQ5E IRQ4E IRQ3E IRQ2E IRQ1E IRQ0E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description IRQn Enable (n = 7 to 0) The IRQn interrupt request is enabled when this bit is 1. 5.3.6 IRQ Status Register (ISR) The ISR register is a flag register that indicates the status of IRQ7 to IRQ0 interrupt requests. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name IRQ7F IRQ6F IRQ5F IRQ4F IRQ3F IRQ2F IRQ1F IRQ0F Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/(W)* R/(W)* Description Note: * [Setting condition] When the interrupt source selected by the ISCR registers occurs R/(W)* [Clearing conditions] R/(W)* When reading IRQnF flag when IRQnF = 1, then R/(W)* writing 0 to IRQnF flag R/(W)* When interrupt exception handling is executed when R/(W)* low-level detection is set and IRQn input is high R/(W)* (n = 7 to 0) When IRQn interrupt exception handling is executed when falling-edge, rising-edge, or both-edge detection is set Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. 5.3.7 Keyboard Matrix Interrupt Mask Registers (KMIMRA, KMIMR) Wake-Up Event Interrupt Mask Register (WUEMRB) The KMIMRA, KMIMR, and WUEMRB registers enable or disable key-sensing interrupt inputs (KIN15 to KIN0), and wake-up event interrupt inputs (WUE7 to WUE0). Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 73 of 544 • KMIMRA Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Bit Name Value KMIMR15 KMIMR14 KMIMR13 KMIMR12 KMIMR11 KMIMR10 KMIMR9 KMIMR8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Keyboard Matrix Interrupt Mask 15 to 8 These bits enable or disable a key-sensing input interrupt request (KIN15 to KIN8). 0: Enables a key-sensing input interrupt request 1: Disables a key-sensing input interrupt request • KMIMR Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Bit Name Value KMIMR7 KMIMR6 KMIMR5 KMIMR4 KMIMR3 KMIMR2 KMIMR1 KMIMR0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Keyboard Matrix Interrupt Mask 7 to 0 These bits enable or disable a key-sensing input interrupt request (KIN7 to KIN0). KMIMR6 also performs interrupt request mask control for pin IRQ6. 0: Enables a key-sensing input interrupt request 1: Disables a key-sensing input interrupt request • WUEMRB Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Bit Name Value WUEMR7 WUEMR6 WUEMR5 WUEMR4 WUEMR3 WUEMR2 WUEMR1 WUEMR0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Wake-Up Event Interrupt Mask 7 to 0 These bits enable or disable a wake-up event input interrupt request (WUE7 to WUE0). 0: Enables a wake-up event input interrupt request 1: Disables a wake-up event input interrupt request Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 74 of 544 Figure 5.2 shows the relationship between interrupts IRQ7 and IRQ6, interrupts KIN15 to KIN0, interrupts WUE7 to WUE0, and registers KMIMRA, KMIMR, and WUEMRB. KMIMR0 (initial value 1) P60/KIN0 KMIMR5 (initial value 1) P65/KIN5 KMIMR6 (initial value 0) P66/KIN6/IRQ6 KMIMR7 (initial value 1) P67/KIN7/IRQ7 IRQ6 internal signal Edge level selection enable/disable circuit IRQ6 interrupt IRQ6E IRQ6SC KMIMR8 (initial value 1) PA0/KIN8 KMIMR9 (initial value 1) PA1/KIN9 IRQ7 internal signal Edge level selection enable/disable circuit IRQ7 interrupt WUEMR7 (initial value 1) PB7/WUE7 IRQ7E IRQ7SC Figure 5.2 Relationship between Interrupts IRQ7 and IRQ6, Interrupts KIN15 to KIN0, Interrupts WUE7 to WUE0, and Registers KMIMR, KMIMRA, and WUEMRB If any of bits KMIMR15 to KMIMR8 or WUEMRB7 to WUEMRB0 is cleared to 0, interrupt input from the IRQ7 pin will be ignored. When pins KIN7 to KIN0, KIN15 to KIN8, or WUE7 to WUE0 are used as key-sense interrupt input pins or wakeup event interrupt input pins, either lowlevel sensing or falling-edge sensing must be designated as the interrupt sense condition for the corresponding interrupt source (IRQ6 or IRQ7). Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 75 of 544 5.4 5.4.1 Interrupt Sources External Interrupts There are four types of external interrupts: NMI, IRQ7 to IRQ0, KIN15 to KIN0 and WUE7 to WUE0. WUE7 to WUE0 and KIN15 to KIN8 share the IRQ7 interrupt source, and KIN7 to KIN0 share the IRQ6 interrupt source. Of these, NMI, IRQ7, IRQ6, and IRQ2 to IRQ0 can be used to restore this LSI from software standby mode. NMI Interrupt: NMI is the highest-priority interrupt, and is always accepted by the CPU regardless of the interrupt control mode or the status of the CPU interrupt mask bits. The NMIEG bit in SYSCR can be used to select whether an interrupt is requested at a rising edge or a falling edge on the NMI pin. IRQ7 to IRQ0 Interrupts: Interrupts IRQ7 to IRQ0 are requested by an input signal at pins IRQ7 to IRQ0. Interrupts IRQ7 to IRQ0 have the following features: • The interrupt exception handling for interrupt requests IRQ7 to IRQ0 can be started at an independent vector address. • Using ISCR, it is possible to select whether an interrupt is generated by a low level, falling edge, rising edge, or both edges, at pins IRQ7 to IRQ0. • Enabling or disabling of interrupt requests IRQ7 to IRQ0 can be selected with IER. • Interrupt control levels can be specified by the ICR settings. • The status of interrupt requests IRQ7 to IRQ0 is indicated in ISR. ISR flags can be cleared to 0 by software. The detection of IRQ7 to IRQ0 interrupts does not depend on whether the relevant pin has been set for input or output. However, when a pin is used as an external interrupt input pin, do not clear the corresponding DDR to 0 to use the pin as an I/O pin for another function. A block diagram of interrupts IRQ7 to IRQ0 is shown in figure 5.3. IRQnSCA, IRQnSCB IRQnF Edge/level detection circuit IRQn input n = 7 to 0 Clear signal S R Q IRQn interrupt request IRQnE Figure 5.3 Block Diagram of Interrupts IRQ7 to IRQ0 When pin IRQ6 is used as an IRQ6 interrupt input pin, clear the KMIMR6 bit to 0. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 76 of 544 When pin IRQ7 is used as an IRQ7 interrupt pin, set all of bits KMIMR15 to KMIMR8 and WUEMR7 to WUEMR0 to 1. If any of these bits is cleared to 0, IRQ7 interrupt input from the IRQ7 pin will be ignored. Since interrupt request flags IRQ7F to IRQ0F are set each time the setting condition is satisfied, regardless of the IER setting, refer to a needed flag only. KIN15 to KIN0 Interrupts, WUE7 to WUE0 Interrupts: Interrupts KIN15 to KIN0 and WUE7 to WUE0 are requested by an input signal at pins KIN15 to KIN0 and WUE7 to WUE0. When pins KIN15 to KIN0 and WUE7 to WUE0 are used for key-sense input or wakeup event, clear the corresponding KMIMR and WUEMR bits to 0 in order to enable their key-sense input and wakeup event interrupts. Remaining unused KMIMR and WUEMR bits for key-sense input should be set to 1 in order to disable interrupts. Interrupts WUE7 to WUE0 and KIN15 to KIN8 generate IRQ7 interrupts, and interrupts KIN7 to KIN0 generate IRQ6 interrupts. The pin conditions for interrupt request generation, enable of interrupt requests, settings of interrupt control levels, and status display of interrupt requests depend on each setting and display of the IRQ7 or IRQ6 interrupt. When pins KIN7 to KIN0, KIN15 to KIN8, or WUE7 to WUE0 are used as key-sense interrupt input pins or wakeup event interrupt input pins, either low-level sensing or falling-edge sensing must be designated as the interrupt sense condition for the corresponding interrupt source (IRQ6 or IRQ7). 5.4.2 Internal Interrupts Internal interrupts issued from the on-chip peripheral modules have the following features: 1. For each on-chip peripheral module there are flags that indicate the interrupt request status, and enable bits that individually select enabling or disabling of these interrupts. When the enable bit for a particular interrupt source is set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller. 2. The control level for each interrupt can be set by ICR. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 77 of 544 5.5 Interrupt Exception Handling Vector Table Table 5.3 lists interrupt exception handling sources, vector addresses, and interrupt priorities. For default priorities, the lower the vector number, the higher the priority. Modules set at the same priority will conform to their default priorities. Priorities within a module are fixed. An interrupt control level can be specified for a module to which an ICR bit is assigned. Interrupt requests from modules that are set to control level 1 (priority) by the ICR bit setting and the I and UI bits in CCR are given priority and processed before interrupt requests from modules that are set to control level 0 (no priority). Table 5.3 Origin of Interrupt Source Interrupt Sources, Vector Addresses, and Interrupt Priorities Vector Address Name Vector Normal Number Mode 7 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 to 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 to 63 H'000E H'0020 H'0022 H'0024 H'0026 H'0028 H'002A H'002C H'002E H'0030 H'0032 H'0034 H'0036 H'0038 to H'005E H'0060 H'0062 H'0064 H'0066 H'0068 H'006A H'006C H'006E H'0070 to H'007E Advanced Mode H'00001C H'000040 H'000044 H'000048 H'00004C H'000050 H'000054 H'000058 H'00005C H'000060 H'000064 H'000068 H'00006C H'000070 to H'0000BC H'0000C0 H'0000C4 H'0000C8 H'0000CC H'0000D0 H'0000D4 H'0000D8 H'0000DC H'0000E0 to H'0000FC ICR — ICRA7 ICRA6 ICRA5 ICRA4 ICRA3 Priority High External pin NMI IRQ0 IRQ1 IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 IRQ6, KIN7 to KIN0 IRQ7, KIN15 to KIN8, WUE7 to WUE0 — WDT_0 WDT_1 — — Reserved for system use WOVI0 (Interval timer) WOVI1 (Interval timer) Address break Reserved for system use — ICRA1 ICRA0 — — FRT ICIA (Input capture A) ICIB (Input capture B) ICIC (Input capture C) ICID (Input capture D) OCIA (Output compare A) OCIB (Output compare B) FOVI (Overflow) Reserved for system use Reserved for system use ICRB6 — — Low Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 78 of 544 Origin of Interrupt Source TMR_0 Vector Address Name CMIA0 (Compare match A) CMIB0 (Compare match A) OVI0 (Overflow) Reserved for system use CMIA1 (Compare match A) CMIB1 (Compare match B) OVI1 (Overflow) Reserved for system use CMIAY (Compare match A) CMIBY (Compare match B) OVIY (Overflow) ICIX (Input capture X) Reserved for system use Vector Normal Number Mode 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 to 83 84 85 86 87 88 to 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 to 107 108 109 110 111 H'0080 H'0082 H'0084 H'0086 H'0088 H'008A H'008C H'008E H'0090 H'0092 H'0094 H'0096 H'0098 to H'00A6 H'00A8 H'00AA H'00AC H'00AE H'00B0 to H'00B6 H'00B8 H'00BA H'00BC H'00BE H'00C0 H'00C2 H'00C4 H'00C6 H'00C8 H'00CA H'00CC H'00CE H'00D0 to H'00D6 H'00D8 H'00DA H'00DC H'00DE Advanced Mode H'000100 H'000104 H'000108 H'00010C H'000110 H'000114 H'000118 H'00011C H'000120 H'000124 H'000128 H'00012C H'000130 to H'00014C H'000150 H'000154 H'000158 H'00015C H'000160 to H'00016C H'000170 H'000174 H'000178 H'00017C H'000180 H'000184 H'000188 H'00018C H'000190 H'000194 H'000198 H'00019C H'0001A0 to H'0001AC H'0001B0 H'0001B4 H'0001B8 H'0001BC ICRB0 ICRC3 ICR ICRB3 Priority High TMR_1 ICRB2 TMR_X, TMR_Y ICRB1 — — SCI_1 ERI1 (Reception error 1) RXI1 (Reception completion 1) TXI1 (Transmission data empty 1) TEI1 (Transmission end 1) Reserved for system use ICRC6 — — IIC_0 IICI0 (1-byte transmission/ reception completion) Reserved for system use IICI1 (1-byte transmission/ reception completion) Reserved for system use KBIA (Reception completion A) KBIB (Reception completion B) KBIC (Reception completion C) Reserved for system use CMIAAB (Compare match A) CMIBAB (Compare match B) OVIAB (Overflow) ICIA (Input capture A) Reserved for system use ICRC4 IIC_1 Keyboard buffer controller TMR_A, TMR_B ICRC2 — — LPC ERRI (Transfer error) IBF1 (IDR1 reception completion) IBF2 (IDR2 reception completion) IBF3 (IDR3 reception completion) ICRC1 Low Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 79 of 544 5.6 Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation The interrupt controller has two modes: Interrupt control mode 0 and interrupt control mode 1. Interrupt operations differ depending on the interrupt control mode. NMI interrupts and address break interrupts are always accepted except for in reset state or in hardware standby mode. The interrupt control mode is selected by SYSCR. Table 5.4 shows the interrupt control modes. Table 5.4 Interrupt Control Modes Priority Setting Registers ICR Interrupt SYSCR Control INTM1 INTM0 Mode 0 0 0 Interrupt Mask Bits I Description Interrupt mask control is performed by the I bit. Priority levels can be set with ICR. 3-level interrupt mask control is performed by the I bit. Priority levels can be set with ICR. 1 1 ICR I, UI 5.6.1 Interrupt Control Mode 0 In interrupt control mode 0, interrupt requests other than NMI and address breaks are masked by ICR and the I bit of the CCR in the CPU. Figure 5.4 shows a flowchart of the interrupt acceptance operation. 1. If an interrupt source occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller. 2. According to the interrupt control level specified in ICR, the interrupt controller only accepts an interrupt request with interrupt control level 1 (priority), and holds pending an interrupt request with interrupt control level 0 (no priority). If several interrupt requests are issued, an interrupt request with the highest priority is accepted according to the priority order, an interrupt handling is requested to the CPU, and other interrupt requests are held pending. 3. If the I bit in CCR is set to 1, only NMI and address break interrupts are accepted by the interrupt controller, and other interrupt requests are held pending. If the I bit is cleared to 0, any interrupt request is accepted. 4. When the CPU accepts an interrupt request, it starts interrupt exception handling after execution of the current instruction has been completed. 5. The PC and CCR are saved to the stack area by interrupt exception handling. The PC saved on the stack shows the address of the first instruction to be executed after returning from the interrupt handling routine. 6. Next, the I bit in CCR is set to 1. This masks all interrupts except for NMI and address break interrupts. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 80 of 544 7. The CPU generates a vector address for the accepted interrupt and starts execution of the interrupt handling routine at the address indicated by the contents of the vector address in the vector table. Program excution state Interrupt generated? Yes Yes No NMI No An interrupt with interrupt control level 1? No Hold pending Yes No IRQ0 Yes No IRQ1 Yes IRQ0 Yes IRQ1 IBFI3 Yes Yes IBFI3 Yes No No I=0 Yes No Save PC and CCR I 1 Read vector address Branch to interrupt handling routine Figure 5.4 Flowchart of Procedure up to Interrupt Acceptance in Interrupt Control Mode 0 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 81 of 544 5.6.2 Interrupt Control Mode 1 In interrupt control mode 1, mask control is applied to three levels for IRQ and on-chip peripheral module interrupt requests by comparing the I and UI bits in CCR in the CPU, and the ICR setting. • An interrupt request with interrupt control level 0 is accepted when the I bit in CCR is cleared to 0. When the I bit is set to 1, the interrupt request is held pending • An interrupt request with interrupt control level 1 is accepted when the I bit or UI bit in CCR is cleared to 0. When both I and UI bits are set to 1, the interrupt request is held pending. For instance, the state transition when the interrupt enable bit corresponding to each interrupt is set to 1, and ICRA to ICRC are set to H'20, H'00, and H'00, respectively (IRQ2 and IRQ3 interrupts are set to control level 1, and other interrupts are set to control level 0) is shown below. Figure 5.5 shows a state transition diagram. • All interrupt requests are accepted when I = 0. (Priority order: NMI > IRQ2 > IRQ3 > address break > IRQ0 > IRQ1 …) • Only NMI, IRQ2, IRQ3 and address break interrupt requests are accepted when I = 1 and UI = 0. • Only an NMI and address break interrupt request is accepted when I = 1 and UI = 1. I All interrupt requests are accepted I 0 0 1, UI Only NMI, address break, IRQ2, and IRQ3 interrupt requests are accepted I Exception handling execution or I 1, UI 1 0 UI 0 Exception handling execution or UI 1 Only NMI and address break interrupt requests are accepted Figure 5.5 State Transition in Interrupt Control Mode 1 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 82 of 544 Figure 5.6 shows a flowchart of the interrupt acceptance operation. 1. If an interrupt source occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller. 2. According to the interrupt control level specified in ICR, the interrupt controller only accepts an interrupt request with interrupt control level 1 (priority), and holds pending an interrupt request with interrupt control level 0 (no priority). If several interrupt requests are issued, an interrupt request with the highest priority is accepted according to the priority order, an interrupt handling is requested to the CPU, and other interrupt requests are held pending. 3. An interrupt request with interrupt control level 1 is accepted when the I bit is cleared to 0, or when the I bit is set to 1 while the UI bit is cleared to 0. An interrupt request with interrupt control level 0 is accepted when the I bit is cleared to 0. When the I bit is set to 1, only an NMI or address break interrupt request is accepted, and other interrupts are held pending. When both the I and UI bits are set to 1, only an NMI or address break interrupt request is accepted, and other interrupts are held pending. When the I bit is cleared to 0, the UI bit is not affected. 4. When the CPU accepts an interrupt request, it starts interrupt exception handling after execution of the current instruction has been completed. 5. The PC and CCR are saved to the stack area by interrupt exception handling. The PC saved on the stack shows the address of the first instruction to be executed after returning from the interrupt handling routine. 6. The I and UI bits in CCR are set to 1. This masks all interrupts except for an NMI or address break interrupt. 7. The CPU generates a vector address for the accepted interrupt and starts execution of the interrupt handling routine at the address indicated by the contents of the vector address in the vector table. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 83 of 544 Program excution state No Interrupt generated? Yes Yes NMI No An interrupt with interrupt control level 1? No Hold pending Yes No No IRQ1 Yes IFBFI3 Yes No IRQ0 Yes IRQ1 Yes IFBFI3 Yes No IRQ0 Yes I=0 Yes No I=0 No Yes No UI = 0 Yes Save PC and CCR I 1, UI 1 Read vector address Branch to interrupt handling routine Figure 5.6 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in Interrupt Control Mode 1 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 84 of 544 5.6.3 Interrupt is accepted Interrupt level decision and wait for end of instruction Instruction prefetch Stack access Vector fetch Internal processing Internal processing Prefetch of instruction in interrupt-handling routine φ Interrupt request signal Internal address bus (1) (3) (5) (7) (9) (11) (13) Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence Internal read signal Internal write signal Internal data bus Figure 5.7 shows the interrupt exception handling sequence. The example shown is for the case where interrupt control mode 0 is set in advanced mode, and the program area and stack area are in on-chip memory. Figure 5.7 Interrupt Exception Handling (2) (4) (6) (8) (10) (12) (14) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 85 of 544 (1) Instruction prefetch address (Instruction is not executed. Address is saved as PC contents, becoming return address.) (2) (4) Instruction code (not executed) Instruction prefetch address (Instruction is not executed.) (3) SP – 2 SP – 4 (5) (7) (6) (8) Saved PC and CCR (9) (11) Vector address (10) (12) Starting address of interrupt-handling routine (contents of vector address) (13) Starting address of interrupt-handling routine ((13) = (10) (12)) First instruction in interrupt-handling routine (14) 5.6.4 Interrupt Response Times Table 5.5 shows interrupt response times − the intervals between generation of an interrupt request and execution of the first instruction in the interrupt handling routine. The execution status symbols used in table 5.5 are explained in table 5.6. Table 5.5 1 2 Interrupt Response Times Normal Mode 1 No. Execution Status Advanced Mode Interrupt priority determination* 3 Number of wait states until executing 1 to (19 + 2·SI) instruction ends*2 3 PC, CCR stack save 2·SK 2·SK 4 Vector fetch SI 2·SI 5 Instruction fetch*3 2·SI 6 Internal processing*4 2 Total (using on-chip memory) 11 to 31 12 to 32 Notes: 1. Two states in case of internal interrupt. 2. Refers to MULXS and DIVXS instructions. 3. Prefetch after interrupt acceptance and prefetch of interrupt handling routine. 4. Internal processing after interrupt acceptance and internal processing after vector fetch. Table 5.6 Symbol Number of States in Interrupt Handling Routine Execution Status Object of Access Internal Memory 1 Instruction fetch SI Branch address read SJ Stack manipulation SK Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 86 of 544 5.7 5.7.1 Address Break Features This LSI can determine the specific address prefetch by the CPU to generate an address break interrupt by setting ABRKCR and BAR. If an address break interrupt is generated, the address break interrupt exception handling is performed. With this function, the execution start point of a program containing a bug is detected and execution is branched to the correcting program. 5.7.2 Block Diagram Figure 5.8 shows a block diagram of the address break. BAR ABRKCR Comparator Match signal Control logic Address break interrupt request Internal address Prefetch signal (internal signal) Figure 5.8 Address Break Block Diagram Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 87 of 544 5.7.3 Operation If the CPU prefetches an address specified in BAR by setting ABRKCR and BAR, an address break interrupt can be generated. This address break function generates an interrupt request to the interrupt controller at prefetch, and determines the priority by the interrupt controller. When an interrupt is accepted, an interrupt exception handling is activated after the current instruction has been completed. Note that the interrupt mask control according to the I and UI bits in CCR of the CPU is invalid to an address break interrupt. To use the address break function, set each register as follows: 1. Set a break address in the A23 to A1 bits in BAR. 2. Set the BIE bit in ABRKCR to 1 to enable the address break. When the BIE bit is cleared to 0, an address break is not requested. When the setting conditions are satisfied, the CMF flag in ABRKCR is set to 1 to request an interrupt. The interrupt source should be determined by the interrupt handling routine if necessary. 5.7.4 Usage Notes 1. In an address break, the break address should be an address where the first byte of the instruction exists. Otherwise, a break condition will not be satisfied. 2. In normal mode, addresses A23 to A16 are not compared. 3. When the branch instructions (Bcc, BSR), jump instructions (JMP, JSR), RST instruction, and RTE instruction are placed immediately prior to the address specified by BAR, a prefetch signal to the address may be output to request an address break by executing these instruction. It is necessary to take countermeasures: do not set a break address to an address immediately after these instructions, or determine whether interrupt handling is performed by satisfaction of a normal condition. 4. An address break interrupt is generated by combining the internal prefetch signal and an address. Therefore, the timing to enter the interrupt exception handling differs according to the instructions at the specified and at prior addresses and execution cycles. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 88 of 544 Figure 5.9 shows an example of address timing. (1) When a break address specified instruction is executed for one state in the program area and on-chip memory Instruction Instruction Instruction Instruction Instruction Internal fetch fetch fetch fetch fetch operation Save to stack Vector fetch Internal Instruction operation fetch φ Address bus H'0310 H'0312 H'0314 H'0316 H'0318 SP-2 SP-4 H'0036 NOP NOP execution execution NOP execution Interrupt exception handling Break request signal H'0310 H'0312 H'0314 H'0316 NOP NOP NOP NOP Break point NOP instruction is executed at break point address H'0312 and following address H'0314. Fetching is performed from address H'0316 after exception handling ends. (2) When a break address specified instruction is executed for two states in the program area and on-chip memory Instruction Instruction Instruction Instruction Instruction Internal fetch fetch fetch fetch fetch operation Save to stack Vector fetch Internal operation Instruction fetch φ Address bus H'0310 H'0312 H'0314 H'0316 H'0318 SP-2 SP-4 H'0036 NOP execution MOV.W execution Interrupt exception handling Break request signal H'0310 H'0312 H'0316 H'0318 NOP MOV.W #xx:16,Rd NOP NOP Break point MOV instruction is executed at break point address H'0312, and NOP instruction is not executed at the following address H'0314. Fetching is performed from address H'0316 after exception handling ends. Figure 5.9 Address Break Timing Example Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 89 of 544 5.8 5.8.1 Usage Notes Conflict between Interrupt Generation and Disabling When an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 to disable interrupt requests, the disabling becomes effective after execution of the instruction. When an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 by an instruction such as BCLR or MOV, and if an interrupt is generated during execution of the instruction, the interrupt concerned will still be enabled on completion of the instruction, so interrupt exception handling for that interrupt will be executed on completion of the instruction. However, if there is an interrupt request of higher priority than that interrupt, interrupt exception handling will be executed for the higher-priority interrupt, and the lower-priority interrupt will be ignored. The same rule is also applied when an interrupt source flag is cleared to 0. Figure 5.10 shows an example in which the CMIEA bit in the TMR's TCR register is cleared to 0. The above conflict will not occur if an enable bit or interrupt source flag is cleared to 0 while the interrupt is masked. TCR write cycle by CPU CMIA exception handling φ Internal address bus Internal write signal TCR address CMIEA CMFA CMIA interrupt signal Figure 5.10 Conflict between Interrupt Generation and Disabling Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 90 of 544 5.8.2 Instructions that Disable Interrupts The instructions that disable interrupts are LDC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC. After any of these instructions are executed, all interrupts including NMI are disabled and the next instruction is always executed. When the I bit or UI bit is set by one of these instructions, the new value becomes valid two states after execution of the instruction ends. 5.8.3 Interrupts during Execution of EEPMOV Instruction Interrupt operation differs between the EEPMOV.B instruction and the EEPMOV.W instruction. With the EEPMOV.B instruction, an interrupt request (including NMI) issued during the transfer is not accepted until the move is completed. With the EEPMOV.W instruction, if an interrupt request is issued during the transfer, interrupt exception handling starts at a break in the transfer cycle. The PC value saved on the stack in this case is the address of the next instruction. Therefore, if an interrupt is generated during execution of an EEPMOV.W instruction, the following coding should be used. L1: EEPMOV.W MOV.W BNE R4,R4 L1 5.8.4 IRQ Status Register (ISR) According to the pin status after a reset, IRQnF may be set to 1, so ISR should be read after a reset to write 0. (n = 7 to 0) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 91 of 544 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 92 of 544 Section 6 Bus Controller (BSC) Since this LSI does not have an externally extended function, it does not have an on-chip bus controller (BSC). Considering the software compatibility with similar products, you must be careful to set appropriate values to the control registers for the bus controller. 6.1 Register Descriptions The bus controller has the following registers. • Bus control register (BCR) • Wait state control register (WSCR) 6.1.1 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bus Control Register (BCR) Initial Bit Name Value — ICIS0 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Reserved The initial value should not be changed. Idle Cycle Insertion The initial value should not be changed. BRSTRM 0 BRSTS1 1 BRSTS0 0  IOS1 IOS0 0 1 1 Burst ROM Enable The initial value should not be changed. Burst Cycle Select 1 The initial value should not be changed. Burst Cycle Select 0 The initial value should not be changed. Reserved The initial value should not be changed. IOS Select 1, 0 The initial value should not be changed. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 93 of 544 6.1.2 Wait State Control Register (WSCR) Initial Bit Name Value — — ABW AST WMS1 WMS0 WC1 WC0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Reserved The initial value should not be changed. Bus Width Control The initial value should not be changed. Access State Control The initial value should not be changed. Wait Mode Select 1, 0 The initial value should not be changed. Wait Count 1, 0 The initial value should not be changed. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 94 of 544 Section 7 I/O Ports This LSI has fifteen I/O ports (ports 1 to 6, 8, 9, and A to G), and one input-only port (port 7). Table 7.1 is a summary of the port functions. The pins of each port also have other functions. Each port includes a data direction register (DDR) that controls input/output (not provided for the input-only port) and data registers (DR, ODR) that store output data. Ports 1 to 3, 6, and A to F have on-chip input pull-up MOSs. For ports A to F, the on/off state of the input pull-up MOS is controlled by DDR and ODR. Ports 1 to 3 and 6 have DDR and an input pull-up MOS control register (PCR) to control the on/off state of the input pull-up MOS. Ports 1 to 6, 8, 9, and A to F can drive a single TTL load and 30-pF capacitive load. All the I/O ports can drive a Darlington transistor when in output mode. Ports 1, 2, and 3 can drive an LED (10 mA sink current). VccB, which is independent of the VCC power supply, is supplied to Port A input/output. When the VccB voltage is 5 V, the pins on port A will be 5-V tolerant. PA4 to PA7 of port A have bus-buffer drive capability. P52 in port 5, P97 in port 9, P86 in port 8, P42 in port 4, and PG0 to PG 7 in port G are NMOS push-pull outputs. P52, P97, P86, P42, and PG0 to PG 7 are thus 5-V tolerant with DC characteristics dependent on the VCC voltage. For the P42, P52/ExSCK1, P86/SCK1, P97 outputs, and PG0 to PG7, connect pull-up resistors to pins to raise output-high-level voltage. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 95 of 544 Table 7.1 Port Port 1 Port Functions Mode 2and Mode 3 I/O Status On-chip input pullup MOSs Description General I/O port also functioning as PWM output pins Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Port 5 P17/PW7 P16/PW6 P15/PW5 P14/PW4 P13/PW3 P12/PW2 P11/PW1 P10/PW0 General I/O port P27 P26 P25 P24 P23 P22 P21 P20 P37/SERIRQ General I/O port also functioning as LPC P36/LCLK input/output pins P35/LRESET P34/LFRAME P33/LAD3 P32/LAD2 P31/LAD1 P30/LAD0 General I/O port also P47 functioning as TMR_0 and P46 TMR_1 input/output, and P45/TMRI1 IIC_1 input/output pins P44/TMO1 P43/TMCI1 P42/TMRI0/SDA1 P41/TMO0 P40/TMCI0 General I/O port also P52/ExSCK1*/SCL0 functioning as SCI_1 P51/ExRxD1* input/output and IIC_0 P50/ExTxD1* input/output pins On-chip input pullup MOSs On-chip input pullup MOSs Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 96 of 544 Port Port 6 Description General I/O port also functioning as interrupt input, FRT input/output, TMR_X and TMR_Y input/output, and keysense interrupt input Mode 2and Mode 3 P67/TMOX/KIN7/IRQ7 P66/FTOB/KIN6/IRQ6 P65/FTID/KIN5 P64/FTIC/KIN4 P63/FTIB/KIN3 P62/FTIA/KIN2/TMIY P61/FTOA/KIN1 P60/FTCI/KIN0/TMIX P77 P76 P75/AN5 P74/AN4 P73/AN3 P72/AN2 P71/AN1 P70/AN0 P86/IRQ5/SCK1/SCL1 P85/IRQ4/RxD1 P84/IRQ3/TxD1 P83/LPCPD P82/CLKRUN P81/GA20 P80/PME P97/SDA0 P96/φ/EXCL P95 P94 P93 P92/IRQ0 P91/IRQ1 P90/IRQ2/ADTRG I/O Status On-chip input pullup MOSs Port 7 General input port also functioning as A/D converter analog input Port 8 General I/O port also functioning as interrupt input, SCI_1 input/output, LPC input/output, and IIC_1 input/output pins Port 9 General I/O port also functioning as IIC_0 input/output, subclock input, φ output, interrupt input, and A/D converter external trigger input pins Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 97 of 544 Port Description Mode 2and Mode 3 PA7/KIN15/PS2CD PA6/KIN14/PS2CC PA5/KIN13/PS2BD PA4/KIN12/PS2BC PA3/KIN11/PS2AD PA2/KIN10/PS2AC PA1/KIN9 PA0/KIN8 PB7/WUE7 PB6/WUE6 PB5/WUE5 PB4/WUE4 PB3/WUE3 PB2/WUE2 PB1/WUE1/LSCI PB0/WUE0/LSMI PC7 PC6 PC5 PC4 PC3 PC2 PC1 PC0 PD7 PD6 PD5 PD4 PD3 PD2 PD1 PD0 I/O Status On-chip input pullup MOSs Port A General I/O port also functioning as key-sense interrupt input and keyboard buffer controller input/output pins Port B General I/O port also functioning as wakeup event interrupt input and LPC input/output pins On-chip input pullup MOSs Port C General I/O port On-chip input pullup MOSs Port D General I/O port On-chip input pullup MOSs Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 98 of 544 Port Description Mode 2and Mode 3 I/O Status PE7 On-chip input pullup MOSs PE6 PE5 PE4 PE3 PE2 PE1 PE0 Port F General I/O port also PF7/TMOY* On-chip input pullfunctioning as TMR_X, up MOSs PF6/ExTMOX* TMR_Y, TMR_A, and TMR_B input/output pins PF5/ExTMIY* PF4/ExTMIX* PF3/TMOB PF2/TMOA PF1/TMIB PF0/TMIA PG7/ExSCLB* Port G General I/O port also functioning as IIC_1 and PG6/ExSDAB* IIC_0 input/output pins PG5/ExSCLA* PG4/ExSDAA* PG3 PG2 PG1 PG0 Note: * The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. Port E General I/O port Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 99 of 544 7.1 Port 1 Port 1 is an 8-bit I/O port. Port 1 pins also function as PWM output pins. Port 1 has the following registers. • Port 1 data direction register (P1DDR) • Port 1 data register (P1DR) • Port 1 pull-up MOS control register (P1PCR) 7.1.1 Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR) P1DDR specifies input or output for the pins of port 1 on a bit-by-bit basis. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W Description The corresponding port 1 pins are output ports when the P1DDR bits are set to 1, and input ports when the P1DDR bits are cleared to 0. 7.1.2 Port 1 Data Register (P1DR) P1DR stores output data for the port 1 pins. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name P17DR P16DR P15DR P14DR P13DR P12DR P11DR P10DR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description If a port 1 read is performed while the P1DDR bits are set to 1, the P1DR values are read. If a port 1 read is performed while the P1DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 100 of 544 7.1.3 Port 1 Pull-Up MOS Control Register (P1PCR) P1PCR controls the on/off state of the port 1 on-chip input pull-up MOSs. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name P17PCR P16PCR P15PCR P14PCR P13PCR P12PCR P11PCR P10PCR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description When a P1PCR bit is set to 1 with the input port setting, the input pull-up MOS is turned on. 7.1.4 Pin Functions • P17/PW7 to P10/PW0 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the OEn bit in PWOERA of PWM and the P1nDDR bit. P1nDDR OEn Pin Function [Legend] n = 7 to 0 0  P17 to P10 input pins 1 0 P17 to P10 output pins 1 PW7 to PW0 output pins Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 101 of 544 7.1.5 Port 1 Input Pull-Up MOS Port 1 has an on-chip input pull-up MOS function that can be controlled by software. This input pull-up MOS function can be specified as on or off on a bit-by-bit basis. Table 7.2 summarizes the input pull-up MOS states. Table 7.2 Reset Input Pull-Up MOS States (Port 1) Hardware Standby Mode Software Standby Mode In Other Operations Off Off On/Off On/Off [Legend] Off: Input pull-up MOS is always off. On/Off: On when the pin is in the input state, P1DDR = 0, and P1PCR = 1: otherwise off. 7.2 Port 2 Port 2 is an 8-bit I/O port. Port 2 has an on-chip input pull-up MOS function that can be controlled by software. Port 2 has the following registers. • Port 2 data direction register (P2DDR) • Port 2 data register (P2DR) • Port 2 pull-up MOS control register (P2PCR) 7.2.1 Port 2 Data Direction Register (P2DDR) P2DDR specifies input or output for the pins of port 2 on a bit-by-bit basis. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name P27DDR P26DDR P25DDR P24DDR P23DDR P22DDR P21DDR P20DDR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W Description The corresponding port 2 pins are output ports when P2DDR bits are set to 1, and input ports when P2DDR bits are cleared to 0. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 102 of 544 7.2.2 Port 2 Data Register (P2DR)) P2DR stores output data for port 2. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name P27DR P26DR P25DR P24DR P23DR P22DR P21DR P20DR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description If a port 2 read is performed while P2DDR bits are set to 1, the P2DR values are read directly, regardless of the actual pin states. If a port 2 read is performed while P2DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. 7.2.3 Port 2 Pull-Up MOS Control Register (P2PCR) P2PCR controls the port 2 on-chip input pull-up MOSs. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name P27PCR P26PCR P25PCR P24PCR P23PCR P22PCR P21PCR P20PCR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description The input pull-up MOS is turned on when a P2PCR bit is set to 1 in the input port state. 7.2.4 Pin Functions • P27, P26, P25, P24, P23, P22, P21, P20 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the state of the P2nDDR bit. P2nDDR Pin Function [Legend] n = 7 to 0 0 P27 to P20 input pins 1 P27 to P20 output pins Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 103 of 544 7.2.5 Port 2 Input Pull-Up MOS Port 2 has an on-chip input pull-up MOS function that can be controlled by software. This input pull-up MOS function can be specified as on or off on a bit-by-bit basis. Table 7.3 summarizes the input pull-up MOS states. Table 7.3 Reset Off Input Pull-Up MOS States (Port 2) Hardware Standby Mode Off Software Standby Mode On/Off In Other Operations On/Off [Legend] Off: Input pull-up MOS is always off. On/Off: On when the pin is in the input state, P2DDR = 0, and P2PCR = 1; otherwise off. 7.3 Port 3 Port 3 is an 8-bit I/O port. Port 3 pins also function as LPC input/output pins. Port 3 has the following registers. • Port 3 data direction register (P3DDR) • Port 3 data register (P3DR) • Port 3 pull-up MOS control register (P3PCR) 7.3.1 Port 3 Data Direction Register (P3DDR) P3DDR specifies input or output for the pins of port 3 on a bit-by-bit basis. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name P37DDR P36DDR P35DDR P34DDR P33DDR P32DDR P31DDR P30DDR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W Description The corresponding port 3 pins are output ports when P3DDR bits are set to 1, and input ports when P3DDR bits are cleared to 0. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 104 of 544 7.3.2 Port 3 Data Register (P3DR) P3DR stores output data of port 3. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name P37DR P36DR P35DR P34DR P33DR P32DR P31DR P30DR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description If a port 3 read is performed while P3DDR bits are set to 1, the P3DR values are read directly, regardless of the actual pin states. If a port 3 read is performed while P3DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. 7.3.3 Port 3 Pull-Up MOS Control Register (P3PCR) P3PCR controls the port 3 on-chip input pull-up MOSs on a bit-by-bit basis. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name P37PCR P36PCR P35PCR P34PCR P33PCR P32PCR P31PCR P30PCR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description The input pull-up MOS is turned on when a P3PCR bit is set to 1 in the input port state. The input pull-up MOS function cannot be used when the host interface is enabled. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 105 of 544 7.3.4 Pin Functions • P37/SERIRQ, P36/LCLK, P35/LRESET, P34/LFRAME, P33/LAD3, P32/LAD2, P31/LAD1, P30/LAD0 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the LPC3E to LPC1E bits in HICR0 of the host interface (LPC) and the P3nDDR bit. LPCmE All 0 Not all 0 P3nDDR 0 1 0 Pin Function P37 to P30 input pins P37 to P30 output pins LPC input/output pins Note: The combination of bits not described in the above table must not be used. m = 3 to 1: LPC input/output pins (SERIRQ, LCLK, LRESET, LFRAME, LAD3 to LAD0) when at least one of LPC3E to LPC1E is set to 1. n = 7 to 0 7.3.5 Port 3 Input Pull-Up MOS Port 3 has an on-chip input pull-up MOS function that can be controlled by software. This input pull-up MOS function can be specified as on or off on a bit-by-bit basis. Table 7.4 summarizes the input pull-up MOS states. Table 7.4 Reset Input Pull-Up MOS States (Port 3) Hardware Standby Mode Software Standby Mode In Other Operations Off Off On/Off On/Off [Legend] Off: Input pull-up MOS is always off. On/Off: On when the pin is in the input state, P3DDR = 0, and P3PCR = 1; otherwise off. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 106 of 544 7.4 Port 4 Port 4 is an 8-bit I/O port. Port 4 pins also function as TMR_0 and TMR_1 I/O pins, and the IIC_1 I/O pin. The output type of P42 is NMOS push-pull output. The output type of SDA1 is NMOS open-drain output. Port 4 has the following registers. • Port 4 data direction register (P4DDR) • Port 4 data register (P4DR) 7.4.1 Port 4 Data Direction Register (P4DDR) P4DDR specifies input or output for the pins of port 4 on a bit-by-bit basis. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name P47DDR P46DDR P45DDR P44DDR P43DDR P42DDR P41DDR P40DDR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W Description When a bit in P4DDR is set to 1, the corresponding pin functions as an output port, and when cleared to 0, as an input port. 7.4.2 Port 4 Data Register (P4DR) P4DR stores output data for port 4. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name P47DR P46DR P45DR P44DR P43DR P42DR P41DR P40DR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description If a port 4 read is performed while P4DDR bits are set to 1, the P4DR values are read directly, regardless of the actual pin states. If a port 4 read is performed while P4DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 107 of 544 7.4.3 Pin Functions • P47 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the P47DDR bit. P47DDR Pin Function 0 P47 input pin 1 P47 output pin • P46 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the P46DDR bit. P46DDR Pin Function 0 P46 input pin 1 P46 output pin • P45/TMRI1 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the P45DDR bit. P45DDR Pin Function Note: * 0 P45 input pin 1 P45 output pin TMRI1 input pin When bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR1 of TMR_1 are set to 1, this pin is used as the TMRI1 input pin. • P44/TMO1 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the OS3 to OS0 bits in TCSR of TMR_1 and the P44DDR bit. OS3 to OS0 P44DDR Pin Function All 0 0 P44 input pin 1 P44 output pin Not all 0 — TMO1 output pin Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 108 of 544 • P43/TMCI1 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the state of the P43DDR bit. P43DDR Pin Function Note: * 0 P43 input pin 1 P43 output pin TMCI1 input pin* When the external clock is selected by the bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR1 of TMR_1, this pin is used as the TMCI1 input pin. • P42/TMRI0/SDA1 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the ICE bit in ICCR of IIC_1, the IIC1AS and the IIC1BS bits in PGCTL*2, and the P42DDR bit. P42ICE = ICE • (IIC1AS+IIC1BS)*2 P42ICE*2 P42DDR Pin Function Note: 0 P42 input pin 0 1 1 — P42 output pin SDA1 I/O pin TMRI0 input pin*1 1. SDA1 is an NMOS-only output, and has direct bus drive capability. When bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR0 of TMR_0 are set to 1, this pin is used as the TMRI0 input pin. When the P42 output pin is set, the output type is NMOS push-pull output. 2. The program development tool (emulator) does not support the function of PGCTL. Thus P42ICE is treated as ICE. • P41/TMO0 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the OS3 to OS0 bits in TCSR of TMR_0 and the P41DDR bit. OS3 to OS0 P41DDR Pin Function All 0 0 P41 input pin 1 P41 output pin Not all 0 — TMO0 output pin • P40/TMCI0 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the state of the P40DDR bit. P40DDR Pin Function Note: * 0 P40 input pin 1 P40 output pin TMCI0 input pin* When an external clock is selected with bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR0 of TMR_0, this pin is used as the TMCI0 input pin. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 109 of 544 7.5 Port 5 Port 5 is a 3-bit I/O port. Port 5 pins also function as SCI_1 extended I/O pins, and the IIC_0 I/O pin. P52 and ExSCK1 are NMOS push-pull outputs, and SCL0 is an NMOS open-drain output. Port 5 has the following registers. • Port 5 data direction register (P5DDR) • Port 5 data register (P5DR) 7.5.1 Port 5 Data Direction Register (P5DDR) P5DDR specifies input or output for the pins of port 5 on a bit-by-bit basis. Bit 7 to 3 2 1 0 Bit Name — P52DDR P51DDR P50DDR Initial Value All 1 0 0 0 R/W — W W W Description Reserved The initial value should not be changed. The corresponding port 5 pins are output ports when P5DDR bits are set to 1, and input ports when cleared to 0. As SCI_1 is initialized in software standby mode, the pin states are determined by the specifications of ICCR, PGCTL, P5DDR, and P5DR in IIC_0. 7.5.2 Port 5 Data Register (P5DR) P5DR stores output data for port 5 pins. Bit 7 to 3 2 1 0 Bit Name — P52DR P51DR P50DR Initial Value All 1 0 0 0 R/W — R/W R/W R/W Description Reserved The initial value should not be changed. If a port 5 read is performed while P5DDR bits are set to 1, the P5DR values are read directly, regardless of the actual pin states. If a port 5 read is performed while P5DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 110 of 544 7.5.3 Pin Functions • P52/ExSCK1*/SCL0 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the C/A bit in SMR of SCI_1, the CKE0 and CKE1 bits in SCR, the SPS1 bit*1 in SPSR, the ICE bit in ICCR of IIC_0, the IIC0AS and the IIC0BS bits in PGCTL*2, and the P52DDR bit. P52ICE = ICE • (IIC0AS+IIC0BS)*2 SPS1* CKE1 C/A CKE0 P52DDR Pin Function 1 2 0 0 — — — 0 P52 input pin 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 P52 input pin P52ICE* 1 1 1 — — — ExSCK1*1 input pin — — — 1 P52 output pin — — — — SCL0 I/O pin 0 0 0 — SCL0 I/O pin 1 1 P52 output pin — — ExSCK1*1 output pin — ExSCK1*1 output pin Note: 1. When this pin is used as the SCL0 I/O pin by setting 1 to the SPS1 bit of SPSR, the bits CKE1 and CKE0 in SCR of SCI_1 and the C/A bit in SMR must all be cleared to 0. SCL0 is an NMOS open-drain output. When set as the P52 output pin or ExSCK1 output pin, this pin is an NMOS push-pull output. 2. The program development tool (emulator) does not support the function of PGCTL. Thus P52ICE is treated as ICE. • P51/ExRxD1 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the RE bit in SCR of SCI_1, the SPS1 bit* in SPSR, and the P51DDR bit. SPS1* RE P51DDR Pin Function Note: * 0 P51 input pin 0 — 1 P51 output pin 0 1 1 — ExRxD1 input pin* 0 1 P51 input P51 output pin pin The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 111 of 544 • P50/ExTxD1 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TE bit in SCR of SCI_1, the SPS1 bit* in SPSR, and the P50DDR bit. SPS1* TE P50DDR Pin Function Note: * 0 — 0 P50 input pin 1 P50 output pin 1 0 1 — ExTxD1 output pin* 0 1 P50 input P50 output pin pin The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. 7.6 Port 6 Port 6 is an 8-bit I/O port. Port 6 pins also function as the FRT I/O pins, TMR_X I/O pins, TMR_Y input pin, key-sense interrupt input pins, and interrupt input pins. Port 6 has the following registers. • • • • Port 6 data direction register (P6DDR) Port 6 data register (P6DR) Port 6 pull-up MOS control register (KMPCR) System control register 2 (SYSCR2) Port 6 Data Direction Register (P6DDR) 7.6.1 P6DDR specifies input or output for the pins of port 6 on a bit-by-bit basis. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name P67DDR P66DDR P65DDR P64DDR P63DDR P62DDR P61DDR P60DDR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W Description The corresponding port 6 pins are output ports when P6DDR bits are set to 1, and input ports when cleared to 0. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 112 of 544 7.6.2 Port 6 Data Register (P6DR) P6DR stores output data for port 6. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name P67DR P66DR P65DR P64DR P63DR P62DR P61DR P60DR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description If a port 6 read is performed while P6DDR bits are set to 1, the P6DR values are read directly, regardless of the actual pin states. If a port 6 read is performed while P6DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. 7.6.3 Port 6 Pull-Up MOS Control Register (KMPCR) KMPCR controls the port 6 on-chip input pull-up MOSs on a bit-by-bit basis. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name KM7PCR KM6PCR KM5PCR KM4PCR KM3PCR KM2PCR KM1PCR KM0PCR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description The input pull-up MOS is turned on when a KMPCR bit is set to 1 with the input port setting. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 113 of 544 7.6.4 System Control Register 2 (SYSCR2) SYSCR2 is not available in this LSI although originally designed to control the port 6 operations. Bit 7 to 0 Bit Name — Initial Value All 0 R/W R/W Description Reserved The initial value should not be changed. 7.6.5 Pin Functions • P67/TMOX/KIN7/IRQ7 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the OS3 to OS0 bits in TCSR of TMR_X, the IOSX bit*2 in TCRXY, and the P67DDR bit. 1 Not all 0 — 0 1 — 0 1 P67 input P67 output TMOX output P67 input pin P67 output pin pin pin pin IRQ7 input pin, KIN7 input pin*1 Notes: 1. This pin is used as the IRQ7 input pin when bit IRQ7E is set to 1 in IER. It can always be used as the KIN7 input pin. 2. The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. IOSX* OS3 to OS0 P67DDR Pin Function All 0 2 0 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 114 of 544 • P66/FTOB/KIN6/IRQ6 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the OEB bit in TOCR of the FRT and the P66DDR bit. OEB P66DDR Pin Function Note: * 1 1 — P66 output pin FTOB output pin IRQ6 input pin, KIN6 input pin* This pin is used as the IRQ6 input pin when bit IRQ6E is set to 1 in IER while the KMIMR6 bit in KMIMR is 0. It can always be used as the KIN6 input pin. 0 P66 input pin 0 • P65/FTID/KIN5 P65DDR Pin Function Note: * 0 1 P65 input pin P65 output pin FTID input pin, KIN5 input pin* This pin can always be used as the FTID or KIN5 input pin. • P64/FTIC/KIN4 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the state of the P64DDR bit. P64DDR Pin Function Note: * 0 1 P64 input pin P64 output pin FTIC input pin, KIN4 input pin* This pin can always be used as the FTIC or KIN4 input pin. • P63/FTIB/KIN3 P63DDR Pin Function Note: * 0 1 P63 input pin P63 output pin FTIB input pin, KIN3 input pin* This pin can always be used as the FTIB or KIN3 input pin. • P62/FTIA/KIN2/TMIY P62DDR Pin Function Note: * 0 1 P62 input pin P62 output pin FTIA input pin, TMIY input pin, KIN2 input pin* This pin can always be used as the FTIA or KIN2 input pin. When the IOSY bit in TCRXY of TMR_Y is set to 0, this pin can be used as the TMIY input pin. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 115 of 544 • P61/FTOA/KIN1 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the OEA bit in TOCR of the FRT, and the P61DDR bit. OEA P61DDR Pin Function Note: * 0 0 P61 input pin 1 — FTOA input pin 1 P61 output pin KIN1 input pin* This pin can always be used as the KIN1 input pin. • P60/FTCI/KIN0/TMIX P60DDR Pin Function Note: * 0 1 P60 input pin P60 output pin FTCI input pin, TMIX input pin, KIN0 input pin* This pin is used as the FTCI input pin when an external clock is selected with bits CKS1 and CKS0 in TCR of the FRT. It can always be used as the KIN0 input pin. When the IOSX bit in TCRXY of TMR_X is set to 0, this pin can be used as the TMIX input pin. 7.6.6 Port 6 Input Pull-Up MOS Port 6 has an on-chip input pull-up MOS function that can be controlled by software. This input pull-up MOS function can be specified as on or off on a bit-by-bit basis. When a pin is designated as an on-chip peripheral module output pin, the input pull-up MOS is always off. Table 7.5 summarizes the input pull-up MOS states. Table 7.5 Reset Input Pull-Up MOS States (Port 6) Hardware Standby Mode Software Standby Mode In Other Operations Off Off On/Off On/Off [Legend] Off: Input pull-up MOS is always off. On/Off: On when the pin is in the input state, P6DDR = 0, and KMPCR = 1; otherwise off. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 116 of 544 7.7 Port 7 Port 7 is an 8-bit input only port. Port 7 pins also function as the A/D converter analog input pins. Port 7 has the following register. • Port 7 input data register (P7PIN) 7.7.1 Port 7 Input Data Register (P7PIN) P7PIN reflects the pin states of port 7. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description P77PIN Undefined* R When a P7PIN read is performed, the pin states are always read. P7PIN has the same address as PBDDR; P76PIN Undefined* R if a write is performed, data will be written into PBDDR P75PIN Undefined* R and the port B setting will be changed. P74PIN Undefined* R P73PIN Undefined* R P72PIN Undefined* R P71PIN Undefined* R P70PIN Undefined* R * Determined by the pin states of P77 to P70. 7.7.2 Pin Functions • P77, P76 Pin Function P77, P76 input pins • P75/AN5, P74/AN4, P73/AN3, P72/AN2, P71/AN1, P70/AN0 Pin Function Note: * P75 to P70 input pins AN5 to AN0 input pins* These pins can always be used as the AN5 to AN0 input pins respectively. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 117 of 544 7.8 Port 8 Port 8 is an 8-bit I/O port. Port 8 pins also function as SCI_1 I/O pins, the IIC_1 I/O pins, LPC I/O pins, and interrupt input pins. The output type of P86 and SCK1 is NMOS push-pull output. The output type of SCL1 is NMOS open-drain output and direct bus driving is enabled. Port 8 has the following registers. • Port 8 data direction register (P8DDR) • Port 8 data register (P8DR) 7.8.1 Port 8 Data Direction Register (P8DDR) P8DDR specifies input or output for the pins of port 8 on a bit-by-bit basis. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name — P86DDR P85DDR P84DDR P83DDR P82DDR P81DDR P80DDR Initial Value 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W — W W W W W W W Description Reserved The initial value should not be changed. P8DDR has the same address as PBPIN, and if read, the port B state will be returned. The corresponding port 8 pins are output ports when P8DDR bits are set to 1, and input ports when cleared to 0. 7.8.2 Port 8 Data Register (P8DR) P8DR stores output data for the port 8 pins (P86 to P80). Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name — P86DR P85DR P84DR P83DR P82DR P81DR P80DR Initial Value 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W — R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Reserved The initial value should not be changed. If a port 8 read is performed while P8DDR bits are set to 1, the P8DR values are read directly, regardless of the actual pin states. If a port 8 read is performed while P8DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 118 of 544 7.8.3 Pin Functions • P86/IRQ5/SCK1/SCL1 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the C/A bit in SMR of SCI_1, the CKE0 and CKE1 bits in SCR, the SPS1 bit*2 in SPSR, the ICE bit in ICCR of IIC_1, the IIC1AS and the IIC1BS bits in PGCTL*3, and the 86DDR bit. P86ICE = ICE • (IIC1AS+IIC1BS)*3 SPS1*2 P86ICE*3 CKE1 C/A CKE0 P86DDR Pin Function 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 — SCL1 I/O pin 0 1 1 — — — — SCL1 I/O pin 1 — — 1 — — — 0 1 — — — — 0 1 — — — 0 1 P86 P86 SCK1 SCK1 SCK1 P86 P86 input output output output input input pin output pin pin pin pin pin pin IRQ5 input pin*1 Notes: 1. When the IRQ5E bit in IER is set to 1, this pin is used as the IRQ5 input pin. When this pin is used as the SCL1 I/O pin, bits CKE1 and CKE0 in SCR of SCI_1 and bit C/A in SMR of SCI_1 must all be cleared to 0. When the P86 output pin and SCK1 output pin are set, the output type is NMOS push-pull output. SCL1 is an NMOS-only output, and has direct bus drive capability. 2. The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. 3. The program development tool (emulator) does not support the function of PGCTL. Thus P86ICE is treated as ICE. • P85/IRQ4/RxD1 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the RE bit in SCR of SCI_1, the SPS1 bit*2 in SPSR, and the P85DDR bit. 1 1 — 0 1 — 0 1 P85 input P85 output RxD1 input P85 input pin P85 output pin pin pin pin IRQ4 input pin*1 Notes: 1. When the IRQ4E bit in IER is set to 1, this pin is used as the IRQ4 input pin. 2. The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. SPS1* RE P85DDR Pin Function 0 2 0 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 119 of 544 • P84/IRQ3/TxD1 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TE bit in SCR of SCI_1, the SPS1 bit*2 in SPSR, and the P84DDR bit. 1 1 — 0 1 — 0 1 P84 input P84 output TxD1 P84 input pin P84 output pin pin pin output pin IRQ3 input pin*1 Notes: 1. When the IRQ3E bit in IER is set to 1, this pin is used as the IRQ3 input pin. 2. The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. SPS1* TE P84DDR Pin Function 0 2 0 • P83/LPCPD The pin function is switched as shown below according to the state of the P83DDR bit. P83DDR Pin Function Note: * 0 P83 input pin 1 P83 output pin LPCPD input pin* When at least one of bits LPC3E to LPC1E is set to 1 in HICR0, this pin is used as the LPCPD input pin. • P82/CLKRUN The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the LPC3E to LPC1E bits in HICR0, and the P82DDR bit. LPC3E to LPC1E All 0 Not all 0 P82DDR 0 1 0* Pin Function P82 input pin P82 output pin CLKRUN I/O pin Note: * When at least one of bits LPC3E to LPC1E is set to 1in HICR0, the P82DDR should be cleared to 0. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 120 of 544 • P81/GA20 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the FGA20E bit in HICR0 and the P81DDR bit. FGA20E P81DDR Pin Function Note: * 1 1 0* P81 output pin GA20 output pin GA20 input pin When bit FGA20E is set to 1 in HICR0, the P81DDR bit should be cleared to 0. 0 P81 input pin 0 • P80/PME The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the PMEE bit in HICR0 and the P80DDR bit. PMEE P80DDR Pin Function Note: * 0 P80 input pin 0 1 1 0* P80 output pin PME output pin PME input pin When bit PMEE is set to 1 in HICR0, the P80DDR bit should be cleared to 0. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 121 of 544 7.9 Port 9 Port 9 is an 8-bit I/O port. Port 9 pins also function as the interrupt input pins, IIC_0 I/O pin, subclock input pin, and system clock (φ) output pin. P97 is an NMOS push-pull output. SDA0 is an NMOS open-drain output, and has direct bus drive capability. Port 9 has the following registers. • Port 9 data direction register (P9DDR) • Port 9 data register (P9DR) 7.9.1 Port 9 Data Direction Register (P9DDR) P9DDR specifies input or output for the pins of port 9 on a bit-by-bit basis. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name P97DDR P96DDR P95DDR P94DDR P93DDR P92DDR P91DDR P90DDR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W Description When the corresponding P9DDR bits are set to 1, pin P96 functions as the φ output pin and pins P97 and P95 to P90 become output ports. When P9DDR bits are cleared to 0, the corresponding pins become input ports. 7.9.2 Port 9 Data Register (P9DR) P9DR stores output data for the port 9 pins. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Bit Name P97DR P96DR P95DR P94DR Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description With the exception of P96, if a port 9 read is performed while P9DDR bits are set to 1, the P9DR values are read directly, regardless of the actual pin states. If a port 9 read is performed while P9DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. For P96, the pin state is always read. Undefined* R 0 R/W 0 R/W P93DR 0 R/W P92DR 0 R/W P91DR 0 R/W P90DR 0 R/W * The initial value of bit 6 is determined according to the P96 pin state. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 122 of 544 7.9.3 Pin Functions • P97/SDA0 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the ICE bit in ICCR of IIC_0, the IIC0AS and the IIC0BS bits in PGCTL*, and the P97DDR bit. P97ICE = ICE • (IIC0AS+IIC0BS)* P97ICE* 0 1 P97DDR 0 1 — Pin Function P97 input pin P97 output pin SDA0 I/O pin Note: When this pin is set as the P97 output pin, it is an NMOS push-pull output. SDA0 is an NMOS open-drain output, and has direct bus drive capability. * The program development tool (emulator) does not support the function of PGCTL. Thus P97ICE is treated as ICE. • P96/φ/EXCL The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the EXCLE bit in LPWRCR and the P96DDR bit. P96DDR 0 1 EXCLE 0 1 0 Pin Function P96 input pin EXCL input pin φ output pin Note: * When this pin is used as the EXCL input pin, P96DDR should be cleared to 0. • P95 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the state of the P95DDR bit. P95DDR Pin Function 0 P95 input pin 1 P95 output pin • P94 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the state of the P94DDR bit. P94DDR Pin Function 0 P94 input pin 1 P94 output pin • P93 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the state of the P93DDR bit. P93DDR Pin Function 0 P93 input pin 1 P93 output pin Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 123 of 544 • P92/IRQ0 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the state of the P92DDR bit. P92DDR Pin Function Note: * 0 P92 input pin 1 P92 output pin IRQ0 input pin* When bit IRQ0E in IER is set to 1, this pin is used as the IRQ0 input pin. • P91/IRQ1 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the state of the P91DDR bit. P91DDR Pin Function Note: * 0 P91 input pin 1 P91 output pin IRQ1 input pin* When bit IRQ1E in IER is set to 1, this pin is used as the IRQ1 input pin. • P90/IRQ2/ADTRG The pin function is switched as shown below according to the state of the P90DDR bit. P90DDR Pin Function Note: * 0 1 P90 input pin P90 output pin IRQ2 input pin, ADTRG input pin* When the IRQ2E bit in IER is set to 1, this pin is used as the IRQ2 input pin. When both bits TRGS1 and TRGS0 in ADCR of the A/D converter are set to 1, this pin is used as the AGTRG input pin. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 124 of 544 7.10 Port A Port A is an 8-bit I/O port. Port A pins also function as keyboard buffer controller I/O pins, and key-sense interrupt input pins. Port A input/output operates by VccB power independent from the Vcc power. Up to 5 V can be applied to port A pins if VccB power is 5 V. Port A has the following registers. PADDR and PAPIN have the same address. • Port A data direction register (PADDR) • Port A output data register (PAODR) • Port A input data register (PAPIN) 7.10.1 Port A Data Direction Register (PADDR) PADDR specifies input or output for the pins of port A on a bit-by-bit basis. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PA7DDR PA6DDR PA5DDR PA4DDR PA3DDR PA2DDR PA1DDR PA0DDR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W Description The corresponding port A pins are output ports when PADDR bits are set to 1, and input ports when cleared to 0. PA7 to PA2 pins are used as the keyboard buffer controller I/O pins by setting the KBIOE bit to 1, while the I/O direction according to PA7DDR to PA2DDR is ignored. PADDR has the same address as PAPIN, if read, port A state is returned. 7.10.2 Port A Output Data Register (PAODR) PAODR stores output data for port A. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PA7ODR PA6ODR PA5ODR PA4ODR PA3ODR PA2ODR PA1ODR PA0ODR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description PAODR can always be read or written to, regardless of the contents of PADDR. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 125 of 544 7.10.3 Port A Input Data Register (PAPIN) PAPIN indicates the port A state. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description PA7PIN Undefined* R Reading PAPIN always returns the pin states. PAPIN has the same address as PADDR. If a write is PA6PIN Undefined* R performed, the port A settings will change. PA5PIN Undefined* R PA4PIN Undefined* R PA3PIN Undefined* R PA2PIN Undefined* R PA1PIN Undefined* R PA0PIN Undefined* R * The initial value is determined according to the PA7 to PA0 pin states. 7.10.4 Pin Functions • PA7/KIN15/PS2CD The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the KBIOE bit in KBCRH_2 of the keyboard buffer controller, and the PA7DDR bit. KBIOE PA7DDR Pin Function Note: * 0 PA7 input pin 0 1 1 — PA7 output pin PS2CD output pin KIN15 input pin, PS2CD input pin* When the KBIOE bit is set to 1 or the IICS bit in STCR is set to 1, this pin is an NMOS open-drain output, and has direct bus drive capability. This pin can always be used as the PS2CD or KIN15 input pin. • PA6/KIN14/PS2CC The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the KBIOE bit in KBCRH_2 of the keyboard buffer controller, and the PA6DDR bit. KBIOE PA6DDR Pin Function Note: * 0 PA6 input pin 0 1 1 — PA6 output pin PS2CC output pin KIN14 input pin, PS2CC input pin* When the KBIOE bit is set to 1 or the IICS bit in STCR is set to 1, this pin is an NMOS open-drain output, and has direct bus drive capability. This pin can always be used as the PS2CC or KIN14 input pin. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 126 of 544 • PA5/KIN13/PS2BD The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the KBIOE bit in KBCRH_1 of the keyboard buffer controller, and the PA5DDR bit. KBIOE PA5DDR Pin Function Note: * 1 1 — PA5 output pin PS2BD output pin KIN13 input pin, PS2BD input pin* When the KBIOE bit is set to 1 or the IICS bit in STCR is set to 1, this pin is an NMOS open-drain output, and has direct bus drive capability. This pin can always be used as the PS2BD or KIN13 input pin. 0 PA5 input pin 0 • PA4/KIN12/PS2BC The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the KBIOE bit in KBCRH_1 of the keyboard buffer controller, and the PA4DDR bit. KBIOE PA4DDR Pin Function Note: * 1 0 1 — PA4 input pin PA4 output pin PS2BC output pin KIN12 input pin, PS2BC input pin* When the KBIOE bit is set to 1 or the IICS bit in STCR is set to 1, this pin is an NMOS open-drain output, and has direct bus drive capability. This pin can always be used as the PS2BC or KIN12 input pin. 0 • PA3/KIN11/PS2AD The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the KBIOE bit in KBCRH_0 of the keyboard buffer controller, and the PA3DDR bit. KBIOE PA3DDR Pin Function Note: * 1 0 1 — PA3 input pin PA3 output pin PS2AD output pin KIN11 input pin, PS2AD input pin* When the KBIOE bit is set to 1, this pin is an NMOS open-drain output, and has direct bus drive capability. This pin can always be used as the PS2AD or KIN11 input pin. 0 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 127 of 544 • PA2/KIN10/PS2AC The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the KBIOE bit in KBCRH_0 of the keyboard buffer controller, and the PA2DDR bit. KBIOE PA2DDR Pin Function Note: * 1 1 — PA2 output pin PS2AC output pin KIN10 input pin, PS2AC input pin* When the KBIOE bit is set to 1, this pin is an NMOS open-drain output, and has direct bus drive capability. This pin can always be used as the PS2AC or KIN10 input pin. 0 PA2 input pin 0 • PA1/KIN9, PA0/KIN8 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the state of the PAnDDR bit. PAnDDR Pin Function Note: * 0 PAn input pin 1 PAn output pin KINm input pin* This pin can always be used as the KINm input pin. (n = 1 or 0, m = 9 or 8) 7.10.5 Port A Input Pull-Up MOS Port A has an on-chip input pull-up MOS function that can be controlled by software. This input pull-up MOS function can be specified as on or off on a bit-by-bit basis. The input pull-up MOS for pins PA7 to PA4 is always off when IICS is set to 1. When the keyboard buffer control pin function is selected for pins PA7 to PA2, the input pull-up MOS is always off. Table 7.6 summarizes the input pull-up MOS states. Table 7.6 Reset Input Pull-Up MOS States (Port A) Hardware Standby Mode Software Standby Mode In Other Operations Off Off On/Off On/Off [Legend] Off: Input pull-up MOS is always off. On/Off: On when the pin is in the input state, PADDR = 0, and PAODR = 1; otherwise off. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 128 of 544 7.11 Port B Port B is an 8-bit I/O port. Port B pins also have LPC input/output pins, and wakeup event interrupt input pins function. Port B has the following registers. • Port B data direction register (PBDDR) • Port B output data register (PBODR) • Port B input data register (PBPIN) 7.11.1 Port B Data Direction Register (PBDDR) PBDDR specifies input or output for the pins of port B on a bit-by-bit basis. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Bit Name Value PB7DDR 0 PB6DDR 0 PB5DDR 0 PB4DDR 0 PB3DDR PB2DDR PB1DDR PB0DDR 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W Description PBDDR has the same address as P7PIN, and if read, the port 7 pin states will be returned. A port B pin becomes an output port if the corresponding PBDDR bit is set to 1, and an input port if the bit is cleared to 0. 7.11.2 Port B Output Data Register (PBODR) PBODR stores output data for port B. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Bit Name Value PB7ODR PB6ODR PB5ODR PB4ODR PB3ODR PB2ODR PB1ODR PB0ODR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description PBODR can always be read or written to, regardless of the contents of PBDDR. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 129 of 544 7.11.3 Port B Input Data Register (PBPIN) PBPIN indicates the port B state. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Initial Bit Name Value PB7PIN R/W Description Reading PBPIN always returns the pin states. PBPIN has the same address as P8DDR. If a write is performed, data will be written to P8DDR and the port 8 settings will change. Undefined* R PB6PIN Undefined* R PB5PIN Undefined* R PB4PIN Undefined* R PB3PIN Undefined* R PB2PIN Undefined* R PB1PIN Undefined* R PB0PIN Undefined* R * The initial value is determined according to the PB7 to PB0 pin states. 7.11.4 Pin Functions • PB7/WUE7, PB6/WUE6, PB5/WUE5, PB4/WUE4, PB3/WUE3, PB2/WUE2 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the state of the PBnDDR bit. PBnDDR Pin Function Note: * 0 PBn input pin 1 PBn output pin WUEn input pin* This pin can always be used as the WUEn input pin. (n = 7 to 2) • PB1/WUE1/LSCI The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the LSCIE bit in HICR0 of the host interface (LPC) and the PB1DDR bit. 1 1 0*1 PB1 output pin LSCI output pin 2 WUE1 input pin* , LSCI input pin*2 Notes: 1. When the LSCIE bit in HICR0 is set to 1, the PB1DDR bit should be cleared to 0. 2. This pin can always be used as the WUE1 or LSCI input pin. 0 PB1input pin LSCIE PB1DDR Pin Function 0 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 130 of 544 • PB0/WUE0/LSMI The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the LSMIE bit in HICR0 of the host interface (LPC) and the PB0DDR bit. 1 1 0*1 PB0 output pin LSMI output pin 2 WUE0 input pin* , LSMI input pin*2 Notes: 1. When the LSMIE bit in HICR0 is set to 1, the PB0DDR bit should be cleared to 0. 2. This pin can always be used as the WUE0 or LSMI input pin. 0 PB0 input pin LSMIE PB0DDR Pin Function 0 7.11.5 Port B Input Pull-Up MOS Port B has an on-chip input pull-up MOS function that can be controlled by software. This input pull-up MOS function can be specified as on or off on a bit-by-bit basis. When a pin is designated as an on-chip peripheral module output pin, the input pull-up MOS is always off. Table 7.7 summarizes the input pull-up MOS states. Table 7.7 Reset Input Pull-Up MOS States (Port B) Hardware Standby Mode Software Standby Mode In Other Operations Off Off On/Off On/Off [Legend] Off: Input pull-up MOS is always off. On/Off: On when the pin is in the input state, PBDDR = 0, and PBODR = 1; otherwise off. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 131 of 544 7.12 Ports C, D Port C and port D are two sets of 8-bit I/O ports. Port C and port D have the following registers. • • • • • • • • Port C data direction register (PCDDR) Port C output data register (PCODR) Port C input data register (PCPIN) Port C Nch-OD control register (PCNOCR) Port D data direction register (PDDDR) Port D output data register (PDODR) Port D input data register (PDPIN) Port D Nch-OD control register (PDNOCR) Port C and Port D Data Direction Registers (PCDDR, PDDDR) 7.12.1 PCDDR and PDDDR select input or output for the pins of port C and port D on a bit-by-bit basis. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Bit Name Value PC7DDR PC6DDR PC5DDR PC4DDR PC3DDR PC2DDR PC1DDR PC0DDR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W Description 0: Port C pin is an input pin 1: Port C pin is an output pin PCDDR has the same address as PCPIN, and if read, the port C pin states will be returned. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Bit Name Value PD7DDR 0 PD6DDR 0 PD5DDR 0 PD4DDR 0 PD3DDR PD2DDR PD1DDR PD0DDR 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W Description 0: Port D pin is an input pin 1: Port D pin is an output pin PDDDR has the same address as PDPIN, and if read, the port D pin states will be returned. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 132 of 544 7.12.2 Port C and Port D Output Data Registers (PCODR, PDODR) PCODR and PDODR store output data for the pins on ports C and D. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Bit Name Value PC7ODR 0 PC6ODR PC5ODR PC4ODR PC3ODR PC2ODR PC1ODR PC0ODR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description PCODR can always be read or written to, regardless of the contents of PCDDR. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Bit Name Value PD7ODR PD6ODR PD5ODR PD4ODR PD3ODR PD2ODR PD1ODR PD0ODR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description PDODR can always be read or written to, regardless of the contents of PDDDR. 7.12.3 Port C and Port D Input Data Registers (PCPIN, PDPIN) Reading PCPIN and PDPIN always returns the pin states. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Initial Bit Name Value PC7PIN PC6PIN PC5PIN PC4PIN Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* Undefined* R/W R R R R Description PCPIN indicates the port C state. PCPIN has the same address as PCDDR. If a write is performed, the port C settings will change. PC3PIN Undefined* R PC2PIN Undefined* R PC1PIN Undefined* R PC0PIN Undefined* R * The initial value is determined according to the PC7 to PC0 pin states. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 133 of 544 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Initial Bit Name Value R/W Description PD7PIN Undefined* R PDPIN indicates the port D state. PDPIN has the same address as PDDDR. If a write is performed, the port D PD6PIN Undefined* R settings will change. PD5PIN Undefined* R PD4PIN Undefined* R PD3PIN Undefined* R PD2PIN Undefined* R PD1PIN Undefined* R PD0PIN Undefined* R * The initial value is determined according to the PD7 to PD0 pin states. 7.12.4 Port C and Port D Nch-OD Control Register (PCNOCR, PDNOCR) PCNOCR and PDNOCR specify the output driver type for pins on ports C and D which are configured as outputs on a bit-by-bit basis. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PC7NOCR PC6NOCR PC5NOCR PC4NOCR PC3NOCR PC2NOCR PC1NOCR PC0NOCR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description 0: CMOS (p-channel driver enabled) 1: N-channel open drain (p-channel driver disabled Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PD6NOCR PD5NOCR PD4NOCR PD3NOCR R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description 0: CMOS (p-channel driver enabled) 1: N-channel open drain (p-channel driver disabled) PD7NOCR 0 PD2NOCR 0 PD1NOCR 0 PD0NOCR 0 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 134 of 544 7.12.5 Pin Functions 0 — 0 OFF OFF OFF Input pin ON 1 0 ON OFF 1 0 1 OFF ON OFF Output pin 0 ON OFF 1 1 OFF DDR NOCR ODR N-ch. driver P-ch. driver Input pull-up MOS Pin function 7.12.6 Input Pull-Up MOS in Ports C and D Port C and port D have an on-chip input pull-up MOS function that can be controlled by software. This input pull-up MOS function can be switched on or off on a bit-by-bit basis. Table 7.8 is a summary of the input pull-up MOS states. Table 7.8 Reset Input Pull-Up MOS States (Port C and port D) Hardware Standby Mode Software Standby Mode Other Operations Off Off On/Off On/Off [Legend] Off: Input pull-up MOS is always off. On/Off: On when PCDDR = 0 and PCODR = 1 (PDDDR = 0 and PDODR = 1); otherwise off. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 135 of 544 7.13 Ports E, F Ports E and F are two sets of 8-bit I/O ports. Port F also functions as I/O pins for TMR_X*, TMR_Y*, TMR_A, and TMR_B. Ports E and F have the following registers. • • • • • • • • Port E data direction register (PEDDR) Port E output data register (PEODR) Port E input data register (PEPIN) Port E Nch-OD control register (PENOCR) Port F data direction register (PFDDR) Port F output data register (PFODR) Port F input data register (PFPIN) Port F Nch-OD control register (PFNOCR) The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. Port E and Port F Data Direction Registers (PEDDR, PFDDR) Note: * 7.13.1 PEDDR and PFDDR select input or output for the pins of port E and port F on a bit-by-bit basis. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PE7DDR PE6DDR PE5DDR PE4DDR PE3DDR PE2DDR PE1DDR PE0DDR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W Description 0: Port E pin is an input pin 1: Port E pin is an output pin PEDDR has the same address as PEPIN, and if read, the port E pin states will be returned. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PF7DDR PF6DDR PF5DDR PF4DDR PF3DDR PF2DDR PF1DDR PF0DDR R/W W W W W W W W W Description 0: Port F pin is an input pin 1: Port F pin is an output pin PFDDR has the same address as PFPIN, and if read, the port F pin states will be returned. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 136 of 544 7.13.2 Port E and Port F Output Data Registers (PEODR, PFODR) PEODR and PFODR store output data for the pins on ports E and F. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PE7ODR PE6ODR PE5ODR PE4ODR PE3ODR PE2ODR PE1ODR PE0ODR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description PEODR can always be read or written to, regardless of the contents of PEDDR. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PF7ODR PF6ODR PF5ODR PF4ODR PF3ODR PF2ODR PF1ODR PF0ODR R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description PFODR can always be read or written to, regardless of the contents of PFDDR. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 137 of 544 7.13.3 Port E and Port F Input Data Registers (PEPIN, PFPIN) Reading PEPIN and PFPIN always returns the pin states. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Bit Name PE7PIN Initial Value R/W Description PEPIN indicates the port E state. PEPIN has the same address as PEDDR. If a write is performed, the port E settings will change. Undefined* R PE6PIN Undefined* R PE5PIN Undefined* R PE4PIN Undefined* R PE3PIN Undefined* R PE2PIN Undefined* R PE1PIN Undefined* R PE0PIN Undefined* R * The initial value is determined according to the PE7 to PE0 pin states. Initial Value Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Bit Name R/W Description PF7PIN Undefined* R PFPIN indicates the port F state. PFPIN has the same address as PFDDR. If a write is performed, the port F PF6PIN Undefined* R settings will change. PF5PIN Undefined* R PF4PIN Undefined* R PF3PIN Undefined* R PF2PIN Undefined* R PF1PIN Undefined* R PF0PIN Undefined* R * The initial value is determined according to the PF7 to PF0 pin states. 7.13.4 Pin Functions • PF7/TMOY The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the IOSY bit* in TCRXY of TMT_Y, the OS3 to OS0 bits in TCSR_Y, and the PF7DDR bit. IOSY* OS3 to OS0 PF7DDR Pin Function Notes: * 0 — 1 All 0 Not all 0 — TMOY output pin* 0 1 0 1 PF7 PF7 PF7 PF7 input pin output pin input pin output pin The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 138 of 544 • PF6/ExTMOX The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the IOSX bit* in TCRXY of TMR_X, the OS3 to OS0 bits in TCSR_X, and the PF6DDR bit. IOSX* OS3 to OS0 PF6DDR Pin Function Notes: * 0 — 1 All 0 Not all 0 — ExTMOX output pin* 0 1 0 1 PF6 PF6 PF6 PF6 input pin output pin input pin output pin The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. • PF5/ExTMIY The pin function is switched as shown below according to the state of the PF5DDR bit. PF5DDR Pin Function Note: * 0 PF5 input pin 1 PF5 output pin ExTMIY input pin * The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. When the IOSY bit is set to 1, this pin can be used as the ExTMIY input pin. • PF4/ExTMIX The pin function is switched as shown below according to the state of the PF4DDR bit. PF4DDR Pin Function Note: * 0 PF4 input pin 1 PF4 output pin ExTMIX input pin* The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. When the IOSX bit is set to 1, this pin can be used as the ExTMIX input pin. • PF3/TMOB The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the OS3 to OS0 bits in TCSR_B of TMR_B and the PF3DDR bit. OS3 to OS0 PF3DDR Pin Function 0 PF3 input pin All 0 1 PF3 output pin Not all 0 — TMOB output pin Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 139 of 544 • PF2/TMOA The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the OS3 to OS0 bits in TCSR_A of TMR_A and the PF2DDR bit. OS3 to OS0 PF3DDR Pin Function All 0 0 PF2 input pin 1 PF2 output pin Not all 0 — TMOA output pin • PF1/TMIB The pin function is switched as shown below according to the state of the PF1DDR bit. PF1DDR Pin Function Note: * 0 PF1 input pin 1 PF1 output pin TMIB input pin* This pin can always be used as the TMIB input pin. • PF0/TMIA The pin function is switched as shown below according to the state of the PF0DDR bit. PF0DDR Pin Function Note: * 0 PF0 input pin 1 PF0 output pin TMIA input pin* This pin can always be used as the TMIA input pin. 7.13.5 Port E and Port F Nch-OD Control Register (PENOCR, PFNOCR) PENOCR and PFNOCR specify the output driver type for pins on ports E and F which are configured as outputs on a bit-by-bit basis. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PE7NOCR PE6NOCR PE5NOCR PE4NOCR PE3NOCR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description 0: CMOS (p-channel driver enabled) 1: N-channel open drain (p-channel driver disabled) PE2NOCR 0 PE1NOCR 0 PE0NOCR 0 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 140 of 544 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PF7NOCR PF6NOCR PF5NOCR PF4NOCR PF3NOCR PF2NOCR PF1NOCR PF0NOCR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description 0: CMOS (p-channel driver enabled) 1: N-channel open drain (p-channel driver disabled) 7.13.6 Pin Functions 1 0 0 ON OFF 1 OFF ON OFF Output pin* 0 ON OFF 1 1 OFF DDR 0 NOCR — ODR 0 1 N-ch. driver OFF P-ch. driver OFF Input pull-up OFF ON MOS Pin function Input pin Note: * Includes when set as the timer output pin. 7.13.7 Input Pull-Up MOS in Ports E and F Port E and port F have an on-chip input pull-up MOS function that can be controlled by software. This input pull-up MOS function can be switched on or off on a bit-by-bit basis. Table 7.9 is a summary of the input pull-up MOS states. Table 7.9 Reset Input Pull-Up MOS States (Port E and port F) Hardware Standby Mode Software Standby Mode Other Operations Off Off On/Off On/Off [Legend] Off: Input pull-up MOS is always off. On/Off: On when PEDDR = 0 and PEODR = 1 (PFDDR = 0 and PFODR = 1) with the pin in input state; otherwise off. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 141 of 544 7.14 Port G Port G is an 8-bit I/O port. Port G pins also function as IIC_0 and IIC_1 I/O pins. The output type of port G is NMOS push-pull output. The output type of ExSCLB*, ExSDAB*, ExSCLA*, and ExSDAA* is NMOS open-drain output and the pins can directly drive the bus. Port G has the following registers. For details of PGCTL, see section 13.3.9, Port G Control Register (PGCTL). • • • • • Port G data direction register (PGDDR) Port G output data register (PGODR) Port G input data register (PGPIN) Port G Nch-OD control register (PGNOCR) Port G control register (PGCTL)* The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. Port G Data Direction Register (PGDDR) Note: * 7.14.1 PGDDR selects input or output for the pins of port G on a bit-by-bit basis. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PG7DDR PG6DDR PG5DDR PG4DDR PG3DDR PG2DDR PG1DDR PG0DDR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W Description 0: Port G pin is an input pin 1: Port G pin is an output pin PGDDR has the same address as PGPIN, and if read, the port G pin states will be returned. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 142 of 544 7.14.2 Port G Output Data Register (PGODR) PGODR stores output data for the pins on port G. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PG7ODR PG6ODR PG5ODR PG4ODR PG3ODR PG2ODR PG1ODR PG0ODR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description PGODR can always be read or written to, regardless of the contents of PGDDR. 7.14.3 Port G Input Data Register (PGPIN) Reading PGPIN always returns the pin states. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description PG7PIN Undefined* R PGPIN indicates the port G state. PGPIN has the same address as PGDDR. If a write is performed, the port G PG6PIN Undefined* R settings will change. PG5PIN Undefined* R PG4PIN Undefined* R PG3PIN Undefined* R PG2PIN Undefined* R PG1PIN Undefined* R PG0PIN Undefined* R * The initial value is determined according to the PG7 to PG0 pin states. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 143 of 544 7.14.4 Pin Functions • PG7/ExSCLB The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the IIC1BS and the IIC0BS bits in PGCTL of the IIC* and the PG7DDR bit. IIC1BS and IIC0BS* All 0 Not all 0 PG7DDR 0 1 — Pin Function PG7 input pin PG7 output pin ExSCLB I/O pin* Note: * The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. The output type of ExSCLB is NMOS open-drain output and this pin has direct bus drive capability. • PG6/ExSDAB The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the IIC1BS and the IIC0BS bits in PGCTL of the IIC* and the PG6DDR bit. IIC1BS and IIC0BS* All 0 Not all 0 PG6DDR 0 1 — Pin Function PG6 input pin PG6 output pin ExSDAB I/O pin* Note: * The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. The output type of ExSDAB is NMOS open-drain output and this pin has direct bus drive capability. • PG5/ExSCLA The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the IIC1AS and the IIC0AS bits in PGCTL of the IIC* and the PG5DDR bit. IIC1AS and IIC0AS* All 0 Not all 0 PG5DDR 0 1 — Pin Function PG5 input pin PG5 output pin ExSCLA I/O pin* Note: * The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. The output type of ExSCLA is NMOS open-drain output and this pin has direct bus drive capability. • PG4/ExSDAA The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the IIC1AS and the IIC0AS bits in PGCTL of the IIC* and the PG4DDR bit. IIC1AS and IIC0AS* All 0 Not all 0 PG4DDR 0 1 — Pin Function PG4 input pin PG4 output pin ExSDAA I/O pin* Note: * The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. The output type of ExSDAA is NMOS open-drain output and this pin has direct bus drive capability. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 144 of 544 • PG3, PG2, PG1, PG0 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the state of the PGnDDR bit. PGnDDR Pin Function [Legend] n = 3 to 0 0 PGn input pin 1 PGn output pin 7.14.5 Port G Nch-OD Control Register (PGNOCR) PGNOCR specifies the output driver type for pins on port G which are configured as outputs on a bit-by-bit basis. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name PG7NOCR PG6NOCR PG5NOCR PG4NOCR PG3NOCR PG2NOCR PG1NOCR PG0NOCR Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description 0: NMOS push-pull (Vcc-side n-channel driver enabled) 1: Vss-side N-channel open drain (Vcc-side N-channel driver disabled) 7.14.6 Pin Functions 1 0 1 0 ON OFF 1 1 0 1 OFF ON OFF ON OFF Output pin* DDR 0 NOCR — ODR 0 Vss-side N-ch. driver OFF Vcc-side N-ch. driver OFF Pin function Input pin Note: * Except when set as IIC I/O pin. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 145 of 544 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 146 of 544 Section 8 8-Bit PWM Timer (PWM) This LSI has an on-chip pulse width modulation (PWM) timer with eight outputs. Eight output waveforms are generated from a common time base, enabling PWM output with a high carrier frequency to be produced using pulse division. Connecting a low pass filter externally to the LSI enables the PWM to function as an 8-bit D/A converter. 8.1 Features • Operable at a maximum carrier frequency of 625 kHz using pulse division (at 10 MHz operation) • Duty cycles from 0 to 100% with 1/256 resolution (100% duty realized by port output) • Direct or inverted PWM output, and PWM output enable/disable control Figure 8.1 shows a block diagram of the PWM timer. Port/PWM output control P10/PW0 P11/PW1 P12/PW2 P13/PW3 P14/PW4 P15/PW5 P16/PW6 P17/PW7 Comparator 0 Comparator 1 Comparator 2 Comparator 3 Comparator 4 Comparator 5 Comparator 6 Comparator 7 PWDR0 PWDR1 PWDR2 Module data bus Bus interface PWDR3 PWDR4 PWDR5 PWDR6 PWDR7 Internal data bus PWDPRA PWOERA P1DDR Clock counter PWSL Select clock PCSR [Legend] PWSL: PWM register select PWDR: PWM data register PWDPRA: PWM data polarity register A PWOERA: PWM output enable register A φ Internal clock PCSR: Peripheral clock select register P1DDR: Port 1 data direction register Note: * The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. φ/4096* φ/1024* φ/512* φ/256* φ/16 φ/8 φ/4 φ/2 Figure 8.1 Block Diagram of PWM Timer PWM0800B_000120040200 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 147 of 544 8.2 Input/Output Pins Table 8.1 shows the PWM output pins. Table 8.1 Name PWM output 7 to 0 Pin Configuration Abbreviation PW7 to PW0 I/O Output Function PWM timer pulse output 7 to 0 8.3 Register Descriptions The PWM has the following registers. To access PCSR, the FLSHE bit in the serial timer control register (STCR) must be cleared to 0. For details on the serial timer control register (STCR), see section 3.2.3, Serial Timer Control Register (STCR). • • • • • PWM register select (PWSL) PWM data registers 7 to 0 (PWDR7 to PWDR0) PWM data polarity register A (PWDPRA) PWM output enable register A (PWOERA) Peripheral clock select register (PCSR) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 148 of 544 8.3.1 PWM Register Select (PWSL) PWSL is used to select the input clock and the PWM data register. Bit 7 6 Bit Name PWCKE PWCKS Initial Value 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description PWM Clock Enable PWM Clock Select These bits, together with bits PWCKC, PWCKB and PWCKA in PCSR, select the internal clock input to TCNT in the PWM. For details, see table 8.2. The resolution, PWM conversion period, and carrier frequency depend on the selected internal clock, and can be obtained from the following equations. Resolution (minimum pulse width) = 1/internal clock frequency PWM conversion period = resolution × 256 Carrier frequency = 16/PWM conversion period With a 10 MHz system clock (φ), the resolution, PWM conversion period, and carrier frequency are as shown in table 8.3. 5 4 3 2 1 0 — — RS3 RS2 RS1 RS0 1 0 0 0 0 0 R R R/W R/W R/W R/W Reserved Always read as 1 and cannot be modified. Reserved Always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Register Select These bits select the PWM data register. 0000: PWDR0 selected 0001: PWDR1 selected 0010: PWDR2 selected 0011: PWDR3 selected 0100: PWDR4 selected 0101: PWDR5 selected 0110: PWDR6 selected 0111: PWDR7 selected 1xxx: No effect on operation [Legend] x: Don't care. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 149 of 544 Table 8.2 Internal Clock Selection PCSR PWCKC PWCKB PWCKA Description PWSL PWCKE 0 1 PWCKS — 0 1 — — 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 — — 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 — — 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Clock input is disabled φ (system clock) is selected φ/2 is selected φ/4 is selected φ/8 is selected φ/16 is selected φ/256 is selected* φ/512 is selected* φ/1024 is selected* φ/4096 is selected* (Initial value) Note: * The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. Table 8.3 Resolution, PWM Conversion Period, and Carrier Frequency when φ = 10 MHz Resolution 100 ns 200 ns 400 ns 800 ns 1.6 µs 25.6 µs 51.2 µs 102 µs 410 µs PWM Conversion Period 25.6 µs 51.2 µs 102 µs 205 µs 410 µs 6.55 ms 13.1 ms 26.2 ms 105 ms Carrier Frequency 625 kHz 312.5 kHz 156.3 kHz 78.1 kHz 39.1 kHz 2.4 kHz 1.2 kHz 610 kHz 152 kHz Internal Clock Frequency φ φ/2 φ/4 φ/8 φ/16 φ/256* φ/512* φ/1024* φ/4096* Note: * The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 150 of 544 8.3.2 PWM Data Registers 7 to 0 (PWDR7 to PWD0) PWDR are 8-bit readable/writable registers. The PWM has eight PWM data registers. Each PWDR specifies the duty cycle of the basic pulse to be output, and the number of additional pulses. The value set in PWDR corresponds to a 0 or 1 ratio in the conversion period. The upper four bits specify the duty cycle of the basic pulse as 0/16 to 15/16 with a resolution of 1/16. The lower four bits specify how many extra pulses are to be added within the conversion period comprising 16 basic pulses. Thus, a specification of 0/256 to 255/256 is possible for 0/1 ratios within the conversion period. For 256/256 (100%) output, port output should be used. 8.3.3 PWM Data Polarity Register A (PWDPRA) PWDPRA selects the PWM output phase. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name OS7 OS6 OS5 OS4 OS3 OS2 OS1 OS0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Output Select 7 to 0 These bits select the PWM output phase. Bits OS7 to OS0 correspond to outputs PW7 to PW0. 0: PWM direct output (PWDR value corresponds to high width of output) 1: PWM inverted output (PWDR value corresponds to low width of output) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 151 of 544 8.3.4 PWM Output Enable Register A (PWOERA) PWOERA switches between PWM output and port output. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name OE7 OE6 OE5 OE4 OE3 OE2 OE1 OE0 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Output Enable 7 to 0 These bits, together with P1DDR, specify the P1n/PWn pin state. Bits OE7 to OE0 correspond to outputs PW7 to PW0. P1nDDR 0 1 1 OEn: x: 0: 1: Pin state Port input Port output or PWM 256/256 output PWM output (0 to 255/256 output) [Legend] x: Don't care Note: n = 7 to 0 To perform PWM 256/256 output when DDR = 1 and OE = 0, the corresponding pin should be set to port output. DR data is output when the corresponding pin is used as port output. A value corresponding to PWM 256/256 output is determined by the OS bit, so the value should have been set to DR beforehand. 8.3.5 Peripheral Clock Select Register (PCSR) PCSR selects the PWM input clock. Bit 7 to 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Bit Name  PWCKC* PWCKB PWCKA  Initial Value All 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Reserved These bits cannot be modified. PWM Clock Select C, B, A Together with bits PWCKE and PWCKS in PWSL, these bits select the internal clock input to the clock counter in the PWM. For details, see table 8.2. Reserved These bits cannot be modified. The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 152 of 544 8.4 Operation The upper four bits of PWDR specify the duty cycle of the basic pulse as 0/16 to 15/16 with a resolution of 1/16. Table 8.4 shows the duty cycles of the basic pulse. Table 8.4 Duty Cycle of Basic Pulse Basic Pulse Waveform (Internal) H: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 L: Upper 4 Bits B'0000 B'0001 B'0010 B'0011 B'0100 B'0101 B'0110 B'0111 B'1000 B'1001 B'1010 B'1011 B'1100 B'1101 B'1110 B'1111 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 153 of 544 The lower four bits of PWDR specify the position of pulses added to the 16 basic pulses. An additional pulse adds a high period (when OS = 0) with a width equal to the resolution before the rising edge of a basic pulse. When the upper four bits of PWDR are B'0000, there is no rising edge of the basic pulse, but the timing for adding pulses is the same. Table 8.5 shows the positions of the additional pulses added to the basic pulses, and figure 8.2 shows an example of additional pulse timing. Table 8.5 Position of Pulses Added to Basic Pulses Basic Pulse No. Lower 4 Bits 0 B'0000 B'0001 B'0010 B'0011 B'0100 B'0101 B'0110 B'0111 B'1000 B'1001 B'1010 B'1011 B'1100 B'1101 B'1110 B'1111 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No additional pulse Resolution width With additional pulse Additioal pulse Figure 8.2 Example of Additional Pulse Timing (When Upper 4 Bits of PWDR = B'1000) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 154 of 544 8.4.1 PWM Setting Example 1-conversion cycle PWDR setting example H'7F 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Duty cycle 127/256 Basic waveform 112 pulses Additiona pulse 15 pulses H'80 128/256 128 pulses 0 pulses H'81 129/256 128 pulses 1 pulse H'82 130/256 128 pulses 2 pulses : Pulse added Combination of the basic pulse and added pulse outputs 0/256 to 255/256 of dudty cycle as low ripple wave form. Figure 8.3 Example of PWM Setting 8.4.2 Diagram of PWM Used as D/A Converter Figure 8.4 shows the diagram example when using the PWM pulse as the D/A converter. Analog signal with low ripple can be generated by connecting the low pass filter. Resistor : 120 kΩ Capacitor : 0.1 µF This LSI Low pass filter Reference value Figure 8.4 Example when PWM is Used as D/A Converter Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 155 of 544 8.5 8.5.1 Usage Notes Module Stop Mode Setting PWM operation can be enabled or disabled by the module stop control register. In the initial state, PWM operation is disabled. Access to PWM registers is enabled when module stop mode is cancelled. For details, see section 20, Power-Down Modes. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 156 of 544 Section 9 16-Bit Free-Running Timer (FRT) This LSI has an on-chip 16-bit free-running timer (FRT). The FRT operates on the basis of the 16bit free-running counter (FRC), and outputs two independent waveforms, and measures the input pulse width and external clock periods. 9.1 Features • Selection of four clock sources One of the three internal clocks (φ/2, φ/8, or φ/32), or an external clock input can be selected (enabling use as an external event counter). • Two independent comparators Two independent waveforms can be output. • Four independent input capture channels The rising or falling edge can be selected. Buffer modes can be specified. • Counter clearing The free-running counters can be cleared on compare-match A. • Seven independent interrupts Two compare-match interrupts, four input capture interrupts, and one overflow interrupt can be requested independently. • Special functions provided by automatic addition function The contents of OCRAR and OCRAF can be added to the contents of OCRA automatically, enabling a periodic waveform to be generated without software intervention. The contents of ICRD can be added automatically to the contents of OCRDM × 2, enabling input capture operations in this interval to be restricted. TIM8FR1A_010020020700 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 157 of 544 Figure 9.1 shows a block diagram of the FRT. External clock Internal clock φ/2 φ/8 φ/32 OCRAR/F FTCI Clock selector Clock OCRA Compare-match A FTOA Overflow Module data bus Comparator A Bus interface Internal data bus FTOB FTIA FTIB FTIC FTID FRC Clear Compare-match B Comparator B OCRB Input capture ICRA ICRB Control logic ICRC ICRD Comparator M Compare-match M ×1 ×2 OCRDM TCSR TIER TCR TOCR ICIA ICIB ICIC ICID Interrupt signal OCIA OCIB FOVI [Legend] OCRA, OCRB : Output compare register A, B (16-bit) OCRAR,OCRAF : Output compare register AR, AF (16-bit) OCRDM : Output compare register DM (16-bit) FRC : Free-running counter (16-bit) ICRA to ICRD : Input capture registers A to D (16-bit) TCSR : Timer control/status register (8-bit) TIER : Timer interrupt enable register (8-bit) TCR : Timer control register (8-bit) TOCR : Timer output compare control register (8-bit) Figure 9.1 Block Diagram of 16-Bit Free-Running Timer Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 158 of 544 9.2 Input/Output Pins Table 9.1 lists the FRT input and output pins. Table 9.1 Name Counter clock input pin Output compare A output pin Output compare B output pin Input capture A input pin Input capture B input pin Input capture C input pin Input capture D input pin Pin Configuration Abbreviation FTCI FTOA FTOB FTIA FTIB FTIC FTID I/O Input Output Output Input Input Input Input Function FRC counter clock input Output compare A output Output compare B output Input capture A input Input capture B input Input capture C input Input capture D input 9.3 Register Descriptions The FRT has the following registers. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Free-running counter (FRC) Output compare register A (OCRA) Output compare register B (OCRB) Input capture register A (ICRA) Input capture register B (ICRB) Input capture register C (ICRC) Input capture register D (ICRD) Output compare register AR (OCRAR) Output compare register AF (OCRAF) Output compare register DM (OCRDM) Timer interrupt enable register (TIER) Timer control/status register (TCSR) Timer control register (TCR) Timer output compare control register (TOCR) Note: OCRA and OCRB share the same address. Register selection is controlled by the OCRS bit in TOCR. ICRA, ICRB, and ICRC share the same addresses with OCRAR, OCRAF, and OCRDM. Register selection is controlled by the ICRS bit in TOCR. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 159 of 544 9.3.1 Free-Running Counter (FRC) FRC is a 16-bit readable/writable up-counter. The clock source is selected by bits CKS1 and CKS0 in TCR. FRC can be cleared by compare-match A. When FRC overflows from H'FFFF to H'0000, the overflow flag bit (OVF) in TCSR is set to 1. FRC should always be accessed in 16-bit units; cannot be accessed in 8-bit units. FRC is initialized to H'0000. 9.3.2 Output Compare Registers A and B (OCRA, OCRB) The FRT has two output compare registers, OCRA and OCRB, each of which is a 16-bit readable/writable register whose contents are continually compared with the value in FRC. When a match is detected (compare-match), the corresponding output compare flag (OCFA or OCFB) is set to 1 in TCSR. If the OEA or OEB bit in TOCR is set to 1, when the OCR and FRC values match, the output level selected by the OLVLA or OLVLB bit in TOCR is output at the output compare output pin (FTOA or FTOB). Following a reset, the FTOA and FTOB output levels are 0 until the first compare-match. OCR should always be accessed in 16-bit units; cannot be accessed in 8-bit units. OCR is initialized to H'FFFF. 9.3.3 Input Capture Registers A to D (ICRA to ICRD) The FRT has four input capture registers, ICRA to ICRD, each of which is a 16-bit read-only register. When the rising or falling edge of the signal at an input capture input pin (FTIA to FTID) is detected, the current FRC value is transferred to the corresponding input capture register (ICRA to ICRD). At the same time, the corresponding input capture flag (ICFA to ICFD) in TCSR is set to 1. The FRC contents are transferred to ICR regardless of the value of ICF. The input capture edge is selected by the input edge select bits (IEDGA to IEDGD) in TCR. ICRC and ICRD can be used as ICRA and ICRB buffer registers, respectively, by means of buffer enable bits A and B (BUFEA and BUFEB) in TCR. For example, if an input capture occurs when ICRC is specified as the ICRA buffer register, the FRC contents are transferred to ICRA, and then transferred to the buffer register ICRC. To ensure input capture, the input capture pulse width should be at least 1.5 system clocks (φ) for a single edge. When triggering is enabled on both edges, the input capture pulse width should be at least 2.5 system clocks (φ). ICRA to ICRD should always be accessed in 16-bit units; cannot be accessed in 8-bit units. ICR is initialized to H'0000. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 160 of 544 9.3.4 Output Compare Registers AR and AF (OCRAR, OCRAF) OCRAR and OCRAF are 16-bit readable/writable registers. When the OCRAMS bit in TOCR is set to 1, the operation of OCRA is changed to include the use of OCRAR and OCRAF. The contents of OCRAR and OCRAF are automatically added alternately to OCRA, and the result is written to OCRA. The write operation is performed on the occurrence of compare-match A. In the 1st compare-match A after setting the OCRAMS bit to 1, OCRAF is added. The operation due to compare-match A varies according to whether the compare-match follows addition of OCRAR or OCRAF. The value of the OLVLA bit in TOCR is ignored, and 1 is output on a compare-match A following addition of OCRAF, while 0 is output on a compare-match A following addition of OCRAR. When using the OCRA automatic addition function, do not select internal clock φ/2 as the FRC input clock together with a set value of H'0001 or less for OCRAR (or OCRAF). OCRAR and OCRAF should always be accessed in 16-bit units; cannot be accessed in 8-bit units. OCRAR and OCRAF are initialized to H'FFFF. 9.3.5 Output Compare Register DM (OCRDM) OCRDM is a 16-bit readable/writable register in which the upper 8 bits are fixed at H'00. When the ICRDMS bit in TOCR is set to 1 and the contents of OCRDM are other than H'0000, the operation of ICRD is changed to include the use of OCRDM. The point at which input capture D occurs is taken as the start of a mask interval. Next, twice the contents of OCRDM is added to the contents of ICRD, and the result is compared with the FRC value. The point at which the values match is taken as the end of the mask interval. New input capture D events are disabled during the mask interval. A mask interval is not generated when the contents of OCRDM are H'0000 while the ICRDMS bit is set to 1. OCRDM should always be accessed in 16-bit units; cannot be accessed in 8-bit units. OCRDM is initialized to H'0000. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 161 of 544 9.3.6 Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER) TIER enables and disables interrupt requests. Bit 7 Bit Name ICIAE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Input Capture Interrupt A Enable Selects whether to enable input capture interrupt A request (ICIA) when input capture flag A (ICFA) in TCSR is set to 1. 0: ICIA requested by ICFA is disabled 1: ICIA requested by ICFA is enabled 6 ICIBE 0 R/W Input Capture Interrupt B Enable Selects whether to enable input capture interrupt B request (ICIB) when input capture flag B (ICFB) in TCSR is set to 1. 0: ICIB requested by ICFB is disabled 1: ICIB requested by ICFB is enabled 5 ICICE 0 R/W Input Capture Interrupt C Enable Selects whether to enable input capture interrupt C request (ICIC) when input capture flag C (ICFC) in TCSR is set to 1. 0: ICIC requested by ICFC is disabled 1: ICIC requested by ICFC is enabled 4 ICIDE 0 R/W Input Capture Interrupt D Enable Selects whether to enable input capture interrupt D request (ICID) when input capture flag D (ICFD) in TCSR is set to 1. 0: ICID requested by ICFD is disabled 1: ICID requested by ICFD is enabled 3 OCIAE 0 R/W Output Compare Interrupt A Enable Selects whether to enable output compare interrupt A request (OCIA) when output compare flag A (OCFA) in TCSR is set to 1. 0: OCIA requested by OCFA is disabled 1: OCIA requested by OCFA is enabled Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 162 of 544 Bit 2 Bit Name OCIBE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Output Compare Interrupt B Enable Selects whether to enable output compare interrupt B request (OCIB) when output compare flag B (OCFB) in TCSR is set to 1. 0: OCIB requested by OCFB is disabled 1: OCIB requested by OCFB is enabled 1 OVIE 0 R/W Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable Selects whether to enable a free-running timer overflow request interrupt (FOVI) when the timer overflow flag (OVF) in TCSR is set to 1. 0: FOVI requested by OVF is disabled 1: FOVI requested by OVF is enabled 0 — 0 R Reserved This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified. 9.3.7 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) TCSR is used for counter clear selection and control of interrupt request signals. Bit 7 Bit Name ICFA Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* Description Input Capture Flag A This status flag indicates that the FRC value has been transferred to ICRA by means of an input capture signal. When BUFEA = 1, ICFA indicates that the old ICRA value has been moved into ICRC and the new FRC value has been transferred to ICRA. Only 0 can be written to this bit to clear the flag. [Setting condition] When an input capture signal causes the FRC value to be transferred to ICRA [Clearing condition] Read ICFA when ICFA = 1, then write 0 to ICFA Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 163 of 544 Bit 6 Bit Name ICFB Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* Description Input Capture Flag B This status flag indicates that the FRC value has been transferred to ICRB by means of an input capture signal. When BUFEB = 1, ICFB indicates that the old ICRB value has been moved into ICRD and the new FRC value has been transferred to ICRB. Only 0 can be written to this bit to clear the flag. [Setting condition] When an input capture signal causes the FRC value to be transferred to ICRB [Clearing condition] Read ICFB when ICFB = 1, then write 0 to ICFB 5 ICFC 0 R/(W)* Input Capture Flag C This status flag indicates that the FRC value has been transferred to ICRC by means of an input capture signal. When BUFEA = 1, on occurrence of an input capture signal specified by the IEDGC bit at the FTIC input pin, ICFC is set but data is not transferred to ICRC. In buffer operation, ICFC can be used as an external interrupt signal by setting the ICICE bit to 1. Only 0 can be written to this bit to clear the flag. [Setting condition] When an input capture signal is received [Clearing condition] Read ICFC when ICFC = 1, then write 0 to ICFC 4 ICFD 0 R/(W)* Input Capture Flag D This status flag indicates that the FRC value has been transferred to ICRD by means of an input capture signal. When BUFEB = 1, on occurrence of an input capture signal specified by the IEDGD bit at the FTID input pin, ICFD is set but data is not transferred to ICRD. In buffer operation, ICFD can be used as an external interrupt signal by setting the ICIDE bit to 1. Only 0 can be written to this bit to clear the flag. [Setting condition] When an input capture signal is received [Clearing condition] Read ICFD when ICFD = 1, then write 0 to ICFD Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 164 of 544 Bit 3 Bit Name OCFA Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* Description Output Compare Flag A This status flag indicates that the FRC value matches the OCRA value. Only 0 can be written to this bit to clear the flag. [Setting condition] When FRC = OCRA [Clearing condition] Read OCFA when OCFA = 1, then write 0 to OCFA 2 OCFB 0 R/(W)* Output Compare Flag B This status flag indicates that the FRC value matches the OCRB value. Only 0 can be written to this bit to clear the flag. [Setting condition] When FRC = OCRB [Clearing condition] Read OCFB when OCFB = 1, then write 0 to OCFB 1 OVF 0 R/(W)* Timer Overflow This status flag indicates that the FRC has overflowed. Only 0 can be written to this bit to clear the flag. [Setting condition] When FRC overflows (changes from H'FFFF to H'0000) [Clearing condition] Read OVF when OVF = 1, then write 0 to OVF 0 CCLRA 0 R/W Counter Clear A This bit selects whether the FRC is to be cleared at compare-match A (when the FRC and OCRA values match). 0: FRC clearing is disabled 1: FRC is cleared at compare-match A Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 165 of 544 9.3.8 Timer Control Register (TCR) TCR selects the rising or falling edge of the input capture signals, enables the input capture buffer mode, and selects the FRC clock source. Bit 7 Bit Name IEDGA Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Input Edge Select A Selects the rising or falling edge of the input capture A signal (FTIA). 0: Capture on the falling edge of FTIA 1: Capture on the rising edge of FTIA 6 IEDGB 0 R/W Input Edge Select B Selects the rising or falling edge of the input capture B signal (FTIB). 0: Capture on the falling edge of FTIB 1: Capture on the rising edge of FTIB 5 IEDGC 0 R/W Input Edge Select C Selects the rising or falling edge of the input capture C signal (FTIC). 0: Capture on the falling edge of FTIC 1: Capture on the rising edge of FTIC 4 IEDGD 0 R/W Input Edge Select D Selects the rising or falling edge of the input capture D signal (FTID). 0: Capture on the falling edge of FTID 1: Capture on the rising edge of FTID 3 BUFEA 0 R/W Buffer Enable A Selects whether ICRC is to be used as a buffer register for ICRA. 0: ICRC is not used as a buffer register for ICRA 1: ICRC is used as a buffer register for ICRA 2 BUFEB 0 R/W Buffer Enable B Selects whether ICRD is to be used as a buffer register for ICRB. 0: ICRD is not used as a buffer register for ICRB 1: ICRD is used as a buffer register for ICRB Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 166 of 544 Bit 1 0 Bit Name CKS1 CKS0 Initial Value 0 0 R/W R/W Description Clock Select 1, 0 Select clock source for FRC. 00: φ/2 internal clock source 01: φ/8 internal clock source 10: φ/32 internal clock source 11: External clock source (counting at FTCI rising edge) 9.3.9 Timer Output Compare Control Register (TOCR) TOCR enables output from the output compare pins, selects the output levels, switches access between output compare registers A and B, controls the ICRD and OCRA operating modes, and switches access to input capture registers A, B, and C. Bit 7 Bit Name ICRDMS Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Input Capture D Mode Select Specifies whether ICRD is used in the normal operating mode or in the operating mode using OCRDM. 0: The normal operating mode is specified for ICRD 1: The operating mode using OCRDM is specified for ICRD 6 OCRAMS 0 R/W Output Compare A Mode Select Specifies whether OCRA is used in the normal operating mode or in the operating mode using OCRAR and OCRAF. 0: The normal operating mode is specified for OCRA 1: The operating mode using OCRAR and OCRAF is specified for OCRA 5 ICRS 0 R/W Input Capture Register Select The same addresses are shared by ICRA and OCRAR, by ICRB and OCRAF, and by ICRC and OCRDM. The ICRS bit determines which registers are selected when the shared addresses are read from or written to. The operation of ICRA, ICRB, and ICRC is not affected. 0: ICRA, ICRB, and ICRC are selected 1: OCRAR, OCRAF, and OCRDM are selected Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 167 of 544 Bit 4 Bit Name OCRS Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Output Compare Register Select OCRA and OCRB share the same address. When this address is accessed, the OCRS bit selects which register is accessed. The operation of OCRA or OCRB is not affected. 0: OCRA is selected 1: OCRB is selected 3 OEA 0 R/W Output Enable A Enables or disables output of the output compare A output pin (FTOA). 0: Output compare A output is disabled 1: Output compare A output is enabled 2 OEB 0 R/W Output Enable B Enables or disables output of the output compare B output pin (FTOB). 0: Output compare B output is disabled 1: Output compare B output is enabled 1 OLVLA 0 R/W Output Level A Selects the level to be output at the output compare A output pin (FTOA) in response to compare-match A (signal indicating a match between the FRC and OCRA values). When the OCRAMS bit is 1, this bit is ignored. 0: 0 is output at compare-match A 1: 1 is output at compare-match A 0 OLVLB 0 R/W Output Level B Selects the level to be output at the output compare B output pin (FTOB) in response to compare-match B (signal indicating a match between the FRC and OCRB values). 0: 0 is output at compare-match B 1: 1 is output at compare-match B Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 168 of 544 9.4 9.4.1 Operation Pulse Output Figure 9.2 shows an example of 50%-duty pulses output with an arbitrary phase difference. When a compare match occurs while the CCLRA bit in TCSR is set to 1, the OLVLA and OLVLB bits are inverted by software. FRC H'FFFF Counter clear OCRA OCRB H'0000 FTOA FTOB Figure 9.2 Example of Pulse Output Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 169 of 544 9.5 9.5.1 Operation Timing FRC Increment Timing Figure 9.3 shows the FRC increment timing with an internal clock source. Figure 9.4 shows the increment timing with an external clock source. The pulse width of the external clock signal must be at least 1.5 system clocks (φ). The counter will not increment correctly if the pulse width is shorter than 1.5 system clocks (φ). φ Internal clock FRC input clock FRC N–1 N N+1 Figure 9.3 Increment Timing with Internal Clock Source φ External clock input pin FRC input clock FRC N N+1 Figure 9.4 Increment Timing with External Clock Source Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 170 of 544 9.5.2 Output Compare Output Timing A compare-match signal occurs at the last state when the FRC and OCR values match (at the timing when the FRC updates the counter value). When a compare-match signal occurs, the level selected by the OLVL bit in TOCR is output at the output compare pin (FTOA or FTOB). Figure 9.5 shows the timing of this operation for compare-match A. φ FRC N N+1 N N+1 OCRA N N Compare-match A signal Clear* OLVLA Output compare A output pin FTOA Note: * Indicates instruction execution by software. Figure 9.5 Timing of Output Compare A Output 9.5.3 FRC Clear Timing FRC can be cleared when compare-match A occurs. Figure 9.6 shows the timing of this operation. φ Compare-match A signal FRC N H'0000 Figure 9.6 Clearing of FRC by Compare-Match A Signal Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 171 of 544 9.5.4 Input Capture Input Timing The rising or falling edge can be selected for the input capture input timing by the IEDGA to IEDGD bits in TCR. Figure 9.7 shows the usual input capture timing when the rising edge is selected. φ Input capture input pin Input capture signal Figure 9.7 Input Capture Input Signal Timing (Usual Case) If ICRA to ICRAD are read when the corresponding input capture signal arrives, the internal input capture signal is delayed by one system clock (φ). Figure 9.8 shows the timing for this case. Read cycle of ICRA to ICRD T1 φ T2 Input capture input pin Input capture signal Figure 9.8 Input Capture Input Signal Timing (When ICRA to ICRD are Read) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 172 of 544 9.5.5 Buffered Input Capture Input Timing ICRC and ICRD can operate as buffers for ICRA and ICRB, respectively. Figure 9.9 shows how input capture operates when ICRC is used as ICRA's buffer register (BUFEA = 1) and IEDGA and IEDGC are set to different values (IEDGA = 0 and IEDGC = 1, or IEDGA = 1 and IEDGC = 0), so that input capture is performed on both the rising and falling edges of FTIA. φ FTIA Input capture signal FRC n n+1 N N+1 ICRA M n n N ICRC m M M n Figure 9.9 Buffered Input Capture Timing Even when ICRC or ICRD is used as a buffer register, its input capture flag is set by the selected transition of its input capture signal. For example, if ICRC is used to buffer ICRA, when the edge transition selected by the IEDGC bit occurs on the FTIC input capture line, ICFC will be set, and if the ICICE bit is set at this time, an interrupt will be requested. The FRC value will not be transferred to ICRC, however. In buffered input capture, if either set of two registers to which data will be transferred (ICRA and ICRC, or ICRB and ICRD) is being read when the input capture input signal arrives, input capture is delayed by one system clock (φ). Figure 9.10 shows the timing when BUFEA = 1. CPU read cycle of ICRA or ICRC T2 T1 φ FTIA Input capture signal Figure 9.10 Buffered Input Capture Timing (BUFEA = 1) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 173 of 544 9.5.6 Timing of Input Capture Flag (ICF) Setting The input capture flag, ICFA, ICFB, ICFC, or ICFD, is set to 1 by the input capture signal. The FRC value is simultaneously transferred to the corresponding input capture register (ICRA, ICRB, ICRC, or ICRD). Figure 9.11 shows the timing of setting the ICFA to ICFD flag. φ Input capture signal ICFA to ICFD FRC N ICRA to ICRD N Figure 9.11 Timing of Input Capture Flag (ICFA, ICFB, ICFC, or ICFD) Setting 9.5.7 Timing of Output Compare Flag (OCF) setting The output compare flag, OCFA or OCFB, is set to 1 by a compare-match signal generated when the FRC value matches the OCRA or OCRB value. This compare-match signal is generated at the last state in which the two values match, just before FRC increments to a new value. When the FRC and OCRA or OCRB value match, the compare-match signal is not generated until the next cycle of the clock source. Figure 9.12 shows the timing of setting the OCFA or OCFB flag. φ FRC OCRA, OCRB Compare-match signal N N N+1 OCFA, OCFB Figure 9.12 Timing of Output Compare Flag (OCFA or OCFB) Setting Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 174 of 544 9.5.8 Timing of FRC Overflow Flag Setting The FRC overflow flag (OVF) is set to 1 when FRC overflows (changes from H'FFFF to H'0000). Figure 9.13 shows the timing of setting the OVF flag. φ FRC H'FFFF H'0000 Overflow signal OVF Figure 9.13 Timing of Overflow Flag (OVF) Setting 9.5.9 Automatic Addition Timing When the OCRAMS bit in TOCR is set to 1, the contents of OCRAR and OCRAF are automatically added to OCRA alternately, and when an OCRA compare-match occurs a write to OCRA is performed. Figure 9.14 shows the OCRA write timing. φ FRC N N +1 OCRA N N+A OCRAR, OCRAF Compare-match signal A Figure 9.14 OCRA Automatic Addition Timing Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 175 of 544 9.5.10 Mask Signal Generation Timing When the ICRDMS bit in TOCR is set to 1 and the contents of OCRDM are other than H'0000, a signal that masks the ICRD input capture signal is generated. The mask signal is set by the input capture signal. The mask signal is cleared by the sum of the ICRD contents and twice the OCRDM contents, and an FRC compare-match. Figure 9.15 shows the timing of setting the mask signal. Figure 9.16 shows the timing of clearing the mask signal. φ Input capture signal Input capture mask signal Figure 9.15 Timing of Input Capture Mask Signal Setting φ FRC N N+1 ICRD + OCRDM × 2 Compare-match signal N Input capture mask signal Figure 9.16 Timing of Input Capture Mask Signal Clearing Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 176 of 544 9.6 Interrupt Sources The free-running timer can request seven interrupts: ICIA to ICID, OCIA, OCIB, and FOVI. Each interrupt can be enabled or disabled by an enable bit in TIER. Independent signals are sent to the interrupt controller for each interrupt. Table 9.2 lists the sources and priorities of these interrupts. Table 9.2 Interrupt ICIA ICIB ICIC ICID OCIA OCIB FOVI FRT Interrupt Sources Interrupt Source Input capture of ICRA Input capture of ICRB Input capture of ICRC Input capture of ICRD Compare match of OCRA Compare match of OCRB Overflow of FRC Interrupt Flag ICFA ICFB ICFC ICFD OCFA OCFB OVF Priority High Low 9.7 9.7.1 Usage Notes Conflict between FRC Write and Clear If an internal counter clear signal is generated during the state after an FRC write cycle, the clear signal takes priority and the write is not performed. Figure 9.17 shows the timing for this type of conflict. Write cycle of FRC T2 T1 φ Address Internal write signal Counter clear signal FRC address FRC N H'0000 Figure 9.17 FRC Write-Clear Conflict Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 177 of 544 9.7.2 Conflict between FRC Write and Increment If an FRC increment pulse is generated during the state after an FRC write cycle, the write takes priority and FRC is not incremented. Figure 9.18 shows the timing for this type of conflict. Write cycle of FRC T1 T2 φ Address Internal write signal FRC input clock FRC FRC address N Write data M Figure 9.18 FRC Write-Increment Conflict 9.7.3 Conflict between OCR Write and Compare-Match If a compare-match occurs during the state after an OCRA or OCRB write cycle, the write takes priority and the compare-match signal is disabled. Figure 9.19 shows the timing for this type of conflict. If automatic addition of OCRAR and OCRAF to OCRA is selected, and a compare-match occurs in the cycle following the OCRA, OCRAR, and OCRAF write cycle, the OCRA, OCRAR and OCRAF write takes priority and the compare-match signal is disabled. Consequently, the result of the automatic addition is not written to OCRA. Figure 9.20 shows the timing for this type of conflict. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 178 of 544 Write cycle of OCR T2 T1 φ Address OCR address Internal write signal FRC N N+1 OCR N Write data M Compare-match signal Disabled Figure 9.19 Conflict between OCR Write and Compare-Match (When Automatic Addition Function is Not Used) φ OCRAR (OCRAF) address Address Internal write signal OCRAR (OCRAF) Old data New data Compare-match signal Disabled FRC N N+1 OCR N Automatic addition is not performed because compare-match signals are disabled. Figure 9.20 Conflict between OCRAR/OCRAF Write and Compare-Match (When Automatic Addition Function is Used) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 179 of 544 9.7.4 Switching of Internal Clock and FRC Operation When the internal clock is changed, the changeover may cause FRC to increment. This depends on the time at which the clock is switched (bits CKS1 and CKS0 are rewritten), as shown in table 9.3. When an internal clock is used, the FRC clock is generated on detection of the falling edge of the internal clock scaled from the system clock (φ). If the clock is changed when the old source is high and the new source is low, as in case no. 3 in table 9.3, the changeover is regarded as a falling edge that triggers the FRC clock, and FRC is incremented. Switching between an internal clock and external clock can also cause FRC to increment. Table 9.3 Switching of Internal Clock and FRC Operation No. 1 Timing of Switchover by Means of CKS1 and CKS0 Bits Switching from low to low FRC Operation Clock before switchover Clock after switchover FRC clock FRC N N+1 CKS bit rewrite 2 Switching from low to high Clock before switchover Clock after switchover FRC clock FRC N N+1 N+2 CKS bit rewrite Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 180 of 544 No. 3 Timing of Switchover by Means of CKS1 and CKS0 Bits Switching from high to low FRC Operation Clock before switchover Clock after switchover * FRC clock FRC N N+1 N+2 CKS bit rewrite 4 Switching from high to high Clock before switchover Clock after switchover FRC clock FRC N N+1 N+2 CKS bit rewrite Note: * Generated on the assumption that the switchover is a falling edge; FRC is incremented. 9.7.5 Module Stop Mode Setting FRT operation can be enabled or disabled using the module stop control register. The initial setting is for FRT operation to be halted. Register access is enabled by canceling the module stop mode. For details, refer to section 20, Power-Down Modes. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 181 of 544 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 182 of 544 Section 10 8-Bit Timer (TMR) This LSI has an on-chip 8-bit timer module (TMR_0, TMR_1, TMR_Y, TMR_X, TMR_B, and TMR_A) with six channels operating on the basis of an 8-bit counter. The 8-bit timer module can be used as a multifunction timer in a variety of applications, such as generation of counter reset, interrupt requests, and pulse output with an arbitrary duty cycle using a compare-match signal with two registers. 10.1 Features Select of clock sources The counter input clock can be six internal clocks*1 and an external clock Select of three ways to clear the counters The counters can be cleared on compare-match A or compare-match B, or by an external reset signal Timer output controlled by two compare-match signals The timer output signal in each channel is controlled by two independent compare-match signals, enabling the timer to be used for various applications, such as the generation of pulse output or PWM output with an arbitrary duty cycle Cascading of two channels Cascading of TMR_0 and TMR_1,TMR_Y and TMR_X*2 or TMR_B and TMR_A Operation as a 16-bit timer can be performed using TMR_0/TMR_Y/TMR_B as the upper half and TMR_1/TMR_X/TMR_A as the lower half (16-bit count mode) TMR_1/TMR_X/TMR_A can be used to count TMR_0/TMR_Y/TMR_B compare-match occurrences (compare-match count mode) Multiple interrupt sources for each cannels Compare-match A: TMR_0, TMR_1, TMR_Y, TMR_B and TMR_A Compare-match B: TMR_0, TMR_1, TMR_Y, TMR_B and TMR_A Overflow: TMR_0, TMR_1, TMR_Y, TMR_B and TMR_A Input capture: TMR_X and TMR_A Input capture function (TMR_X and TMR_A) Notes: 1. The program development tool (emulator) supports three internal clocks. 2. The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. TIMH265B_000020040200 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 183 of 544 Table 10.1 TMR Function Item Count clock TMR_0 φ/2 φ/8 φ/32 φ/64 φ/256 φ/1024 I/O pins TMO0 TMCI0 TMRI0 Counter clear function Compare-match A Compare-match B External reset Pulse output Compare-match output 1 output Toggle output Cascaded connection 16-bit count mode Compare-match count mode Input capture function Interrupt source   • TCORA compare-match • TCORB compare-match • TCNT overflow O O O  • TCORA compare-match • TCORB compare-match • TCNT overflow   • TCORA compare-match • TCORB compare-match • TCNT overflow • Input capture O* O* O* O   • TCORA compare-match • TCORB compare-match • TCNT overflow O O O O • TCORA compare-match • TCORB compare-match • TCNT overflow • Input capture O O O O O O O O O O O O 0 output O O TMR_1 φ/2 φ/8 φ/64 φ/128 φ/1024 φ/2048 TMO1 TMCI1 TMRI1 Compare-match A Compare-match B External reset O O TMR_Y φ/4 φ/256 φ/2048 φ/4096* φ/8192* φ/16384* TMOY TMIY/ExTMIY (TMCIY/TMRIY) Compare-match A Compare-match B External reset O O TMR_X φ φ/2 φ/4 φ/2048* φ/4096* φ/8192* TMOX/ExTMOX TMIX/ExTMIX (TMCIX/TMRIX) Compare-match A Compare-match B External reset O O TMR_B φ/4 φ/256 φ/2048 φ/4096 φ/8192 φ/16384 TMOB TMIB(TMCIB/ TMRIB) Compare-match A Compare-match B External reset O O TMR_A φ φ/2 φ/4 φ/2048 φ/4096 φ/8192 TMOA TMIA(TMCIA/ TMRIA) Compare-match A Compare-match B External reset O O [Legend] O: Enable : Disable Note: * The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 184 of 544 Figures 10.1 to 10.3 show block diagrams of 8-bit timers. External clock sources TMCI0 TMCI1 Internal clock sources TMR_0 φ/2, φ/8, φ/32, φ/64, φ/256, φ/1024 TMR_1 φ/2, φ/8, φ/64, φ/128, φ/1024, φ/2048 Clock 1 Clock 0 Clock select TCORA_0 Compare-match A1 Compare-match A0 Overflow 1 Overflow 0 Clear 0 Clear 1 Compare-match B1 Compare-match B0 TMO1 TMRI1 Control logic TCORB_0 TCORB_1 Comparator B_0 Comparator B_1 TCORA_1 Comparator A_0 Comparator A_1 TMO0 TMRI0 TCNT_0 TCNT_1 Internal bus TCSR_0 TCSR_1 TCR_0 Interrupt signals CMIA0 CMIB0 OVI0 CMIA1 CMIB1 OVI1 [Legend] TCORA_1: TCORA_0: Time constant register A_0 TCORB_1: TCORB_0: Time constant register B_0 TCNT_1: TCNT_0: Timer counter_0 TCSR_1: TCSR_0: Timer control/status register_0 TCR_1: Timer control register_0 TCR_0: TCR_1 Time constant register A_1 Time constant register B_1 Timer counter_1 Timer control/status register_1 Timer control register_1 Figure 10.1 Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer (TMR_0 and TMR_1) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 185 of 544 External clock sources ExTMCIY*/TMCIY ExTMCIX*/TMCIX Internal clock sources TMR_X φ, φ/2, φ/4, φ/2048*, φ/4096*, φ/8192* TMR_Y φ/4, φ/256, φ/2048, φ/4096*, φ/8192*, φ/16384* Clock select Clock X Clock Y * TCORA_Y Compare-match AX Compare-match AY Overflow X Overflow Y Clear Y TCORA_X * Comparator A_Y Comparator A_X TCNT_Y Clear X TCNT_X TMOY* ExTMRIY*/TMRIY Compare-match BY Comparator B_Y Comparator B_X TCORB_Y Control logic ExTMOX*/TMOX ExTMRIX*/TMRIX Input capture TCORB_X TICRR TICRF TICR Compare-match C Comparator C + TCORC TCSR_Y TCR_Y TISR Interrupt signals CMIAY CMIBY OVIY ICIX [Legend] TCORA_Y: Time constant register A_Y TCORB_Y: Time constant register B_Y TCNT_Y: Timer counter_Y TCSR_Y: Timer control/status register_Y TCR_Y: Timer control register_Y TISR: Timer input select register TCORA_X: Time constant register A_X TCORB_X: Time constant register B_X TCNT_X: Timer counter_X TCSR_X: Timer control/status register_X TCR_X: Timer control register_X TICR: Input capture register TCORC: Time constant register C TICRR: Input capture register R TICRF: Input capture register F TCSR_X TCR_X Note: The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. Figure 10.2 Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer (TMR_Y and TMR_X) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 186 of 544 Internal bus Compare- match BX External clock sources TMCIB TMCIA Internal clock sources TMR_A φ, φ/2, φ/4, φ/2048, φ/4096, φ/8192 TMR_B φ/4, φ/256, φ/2048, φ/4096, φ/8192, φ/16384 Clock select Clock A Clock B TCORA_B TCORA_A Compare-match AA Compare-match AB Overflow A Overflow B Clear B Comparator A_B Comparator A_A TCNT_B TCNT_A Clear A TMOB TMRIB Control logic Compare-match BB Comparator B_B Comparator B_A TCORB_B TCORB_A TMOA TMRIA Input capture TICRR_A TICRF_A TICR_A TCSR_B TCR_B TISR_A Interrupt signals CMIAAB CMIBAB OVIAB ICIA [Legend] TCORA_B: Time constant register A_B TCORB_B: Time constant register B_B TCNT_B: Timer counter_B TCSR_B: Timer control/status register_B TCR_B: Timer control register_B TISR_B: Timer input select register_B TCSR_A TCR_A TCORA_A: Time constant register A_A TCORB_A: Time constant register B_A TCNT_A: Timer counter_A TCSR_A: Timer control/status register_A TCR_A: Timer control register_A TICR_A: Input capture register_A TICRR_A: Input capture register R_A TICRF_A: Input capture register F_A Figure 10.3 Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer (TMR_B and TMR_A) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 187 of 544 Internal bus Compare- match BA 10.2 Input/Output Pins Table 10.2 summarizes the input and output pins of the TMR. Table 10.2 Pin Configuration Channel TMR_0 Name Symbol I/O Output Input Input Output Input Input Input Output Output Function Output controlled by compare-match External clock input for the counter External reset input for the counter Output controlled by compare-match External clock input for the counter External reset input for the counter External clock input/ external reset input for the counter Output controlled by compare-match Output controlled by compare-match External clock input/ external reset input for the counter External clock input/ external reset input for the counter Output controlled by compare-match Output controlled by compare-match Timer output TMO0 Timer clock input TMCI0 Timer reset input TMRI0 Timer output Timer clock input Timer reset input Timer clock/ reset input Timer output Timer output Timer clock/ reset input Timer clock/ reset input Timer output Timer output TMO1 TMCI1 TMRI1 TMIY/ExTMIY* (TMCIY/TMRIY) TMOY* TMOX/ ExTMOX* TMR_1 TMR_Y TMR_X TMR_B TMIX/ExTMIX* Input (TMCIX/TMRIX) TMIB Input (TMCIB/TMRIB) TMOB Output TMOA Output TMR_A Note: * Timer clock/ TMIA Input External clock input/ reset input (TMCIA/TMRIA) external reset input for the counter The program development tool (emulator) does not support this pin. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 188 of 544 10.3 Register Descriptions The TMR has the following registers. For details on the serial timer control register, see section 3.2.3, Serial Timer Control Register (STCR). TMR_0 Timer counter_0 (TCNT_0) Time constant register A_0 (TCORA_0) Time constant register B_0 (TCORB_0) Timer control register_0 (TCR_0) Timer control/status register_0 (TCSR_0) TMR_1 Timer counter_1 (TCNT_1) Time constant register A_1 (TCORA_1) Time constant register B_1 (TCORB_1) Timer control register_1 (TCR_1) Timer control/status register_1 (TCSR_1) TMR_Y Timer counter_Y (TCNT_Y) Time constant register A_Y (TCORA_Y) Time constant register B_Y (TCORB_Y) Timer control register_Y (TCR_Y) Timer control/status register_Y (TCSR_Y) Timer input select register (TISR) Timer connection register S (TCONRS) TMR_X Timer counter_X (TCNT_X) Time constant register A_X (TCORA_X) Time constant register B_X (TCORB_X) Timer control register_X (TCR_X) Timer control/status register_X (TCSR_X) Input capture register (TICR) Time constant register (TCORC) Input capture register R (TICRR) Input capture register F (TICRF) Timer connection register I (TCONRI) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 189 of 544 For both TMR_Y and TMR_X Timer XY control register (TCRXY) TMR_B Timer counter_B (TCNT_B) Time constant register A_B (TCORA_B) Time constant register B_B (TCORB_B) Timer control register_B (TCR_B) Timer control/status register_B (TCSR_B) Timer input select register_B (TISR_B) TMR_A Timer counter_A (TCNT_A) Time constant register A_A (TCORA_A) Time constant register B_A (TCORB_A) Timer control register_A (TCR_A) Timer control/status register_A (TCSR_A) Input capture register_A (TICR_A) Input capture register R_A (TICRR_A) Input capture register F_A (TICRF_A) For both TMR_B and TMR_A Timer AB control register (TCRAB) Note: 1. Some of the registers of TMR_X and TMR_Y use the same address. The registers can be switched by the TMRX/Y bit in TCONRS. 2. The TCRXY is not supported by the program development tool (emulator). Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 190 of 544 10.3.1 Timer Counter (TCNT) Each TCNT is an 8-bit readable/writable up-counter. TCNT_0 and TCNT_1 comprise a single 16bit register, so they can be accessed together by word access. The clock source is selected by the CKS2 to CKS0 bits in TCR. TCNT can be cleared by an external reset input signal, comparematch A signal or compare-match B signal. The method of clearing can be selected by the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR. When TCNT overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00), the OVF bit in TCSR is set to 1. TCNT is initialized to H'00. TCNT_Y can be accessed when the HIE bit in SYSCR is 0 and the TMRX/Y bit in TCONRS is 1. TCNT_X can be accessed when the HIE bit in SYSCR is 0 and the TMRX/Y bit in TCONRS is 0. 10.3.2 Time Constant Register A (TCORA) TCORA is an 8-bit readable/writable register. TCORA_0 and TCORA_1 comprise a single 16-bit register, so they can be accessed together by word access. TCORA is continually compared with the value in TCNT. When a match is detected, the corresponding compare-match flag A (CMFA) in TCSR is set to 1. Note however that comparison is disabled during the T2 state of a TCORA write cycle. The timer output from the TMO pin can be freely controlled by these compare-match A signals and the settings of output select bits OS1 and OS0 in TCSR. TCORA is initialized to H'FF. TCORA_Y can be accessed when the HIE bit in SYSCR is 0 and the TMRX/Y bit in TCONRS is 1. TCORA_X can be accessed when the HIE bit in SYSCR is 0 and the TMRX/Y bit in TCONRS is 0. 10.3.3 Time Constant Register B (TCORB) TCORB is an 8-bit readable/writable register. TCORB_0 and TCORB_1 comprise a single 16-bit register, so they can be accessed together by word access. TCORB is continually compared with the value in TCNT. When a match is detected, the corresponding compare-match flag B (CMFB) in TCSR is set to 1. Note however that comparison is disabled during the T2 state of a TCORB write cycle. The timer output from the TMO pin can be freely controlled by these compare-match B signals and the settings of output select bits OS3 and OS2 in TCSR. TCORB is initialized to H'FF. TCORB_Y can be accessed when the HIE bit in SYSCR is 0 and the TMRX/Y bit in TCONRS is 1. TCORB_X can be accessed when the HIE bit in SYSCR is 0 and the TMRX/Y bit in TCONRS is 0. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 191 of 544 10.3.4 Timer Control Register (TCR) TCR selects the TCNT clock source and the condition by which TCNT is cleared, and enables/disables interrupt requests. TCR_Y can be accessed when the HIE bit in SYSCR is 0 and the TMRX/Y bit in TCONRS is 1. TCR_X can be accessed when the HIE bit in SYSCR is 0 and the TMRX/Y bit in TCONRS is 0. Bit 7 Bit Name CMIEB Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Compare-Match Interrupt Enable B Selects whether the CMFB interrupt request (CMIB) is enabled or disabled when the CMFB flag in TCSR is set to 1. For TMR_X, a CMIB interrupt does not occur irrespective of the value of this bit. 0: CMFB interrupt request (CMIB) is disabled 1: CMFB interrupt request (CMIB) is enabled Compare-Match Interrupt Enable A Selects whether the CMFA interrupt request (CMIA) is enabled or disabled when the CMFA flag in TCSR is set to 1. For TMR_X, a CMIA interrupt does not occur irrespective of the value of this bit. 0: CMFA interrupt request (CMIA) is disabled 1: CMFA interrupt request (CMIA) is enabled Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable Selects whether the OVF interrupt request (OVI) is enabled or disabled when the OVF flag in TCSR is set to 1. For TMR_X, an OVI interrupt does not occur irrespective of the value of this bit. 0: OVF interrupt request (OVI) is disabled 1: OVF interrupt request (OVI) is enabled Counter Clear 1, 0 These bits select the method by which the timer counter is cleared. 00: Clearing is disabled 01: Cleared on compare-match A 10: Cleared on compare-match B 11: Cleared on rising edge of external reset input Clock Select 2 to 0 These bits select the clock input to TCNT and count condition, together with the ICKS1 and ICKS0 bits in STCR. For details, see table 10.3. 6 CMIEA 0 R/W 5 OVIE 0 R/W 4 3 CCLR1 CCLR0 0 0 R/W R/W 2 1 0 CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 192 of 544 Table 10.3 Clock Input to TCNT and Count Condition (1) TCR Channel CKS2 TMR_0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 TMR_1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Common 1 1 1 Note: * CKS1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 CKS0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 — — — — — — — — — 0 1 0 1 0 1 — — — — STCR ICKS1 ICKS0 — 0 1 0 1 0 1 — — — — — — — — — — — — Description Disables clock input Increments at falling edge of internal clock φ/8 Increments at falling edge of internal clock φ/2 Increments at falling edge of internal clock φ/64 Increments at falling edge of internal clock φ/32 Increments at falling edge of internal clock φ/1024 Increments at falling edge of internal clock φ/256 Increments at overflow signal from TCNT_1* Disables clock input Increments at falling edge of internal clock φ/8 Increments at falling edge of internal clock φ/2 Increments at falling edge of internal clock φ/64 Increments at falling edge of internal clock φ/128 Increments at falling edge of internal clock φ/1024 Increments at falling edge of internal clock φ/2048 Increments at compare-match A from TCNT_0* Increments at rising edge of external clock Increments at falling edge of external clock Increments at both rising and falling edges of external clock If the TMR_0 clock input is set as the TCNT_1 overflow signal and the TMR_1 clock input is set as the TCNT_0 compare-match signal simultaneously, a count-up clock cannot be generated. These settings should not be made. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 193 of 544 Table 10.3 Clock Input to TCNT and Count Condition (2) TCR Channel CKS2 TMR_Y 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 TMR_X 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 CKS1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 CKS0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 — — — — — — — — — — — — — 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 — — — TCRXY*2 CKSX CKSY 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Description Disables clock input Increments at φ/4 Increments at φ/256 Increments at φ/2048 Disables clock input Disables clock input Increments at φ/4096 Increments at φ/8192 Increments at φ/16384 Increments at overflow signal from TCNT_X*1 Increments at rising edge of external clock Increments at falling edge of external clock Increments at both rising and falling edges of external clock Disables clock input Increments at φ Increments at φ/2 Increments at φ/4 Disables clock input Disables clock input Increments at φ/2048 Increments at φ/4096 Increments at φ/8192 Increments at compare-match A from TCNT_Y*1 Increments at rising edge of external clock Increments at falling edge of external clock Increments at both rising and falling edges of external clock Notes: 1. If the TMR_Y clock input is set as the TCNT_X overflow signal and the TMR_X clock input is set as the TCNT_Y compare-match signal simultaneously, a count-up clock cannot be generated. These settings should not be made. 2. The program development tool (emulator) does not support TCRXY. Selection of the internal clock is only available when CKSX = 0 and CKSY = 0. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 194 of 544 Table 10.3 Clock Input to TCNT and Count Condition (3) TCR Channel CKS2 TMR_B 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 TMR_A 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Notes: * CKS1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 CKS0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 — — — — — — — — — — — — — 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 — — — TCRAB CKSA CKSB 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Description Disables clock input Increments at φ/4 Increments at φ/256 Increments at φ/2048 Disables clock input Disables clock input Increments at φ/4096 Increments at φ/8192 Increments at φ/16384 Increments at overflow signal from TCNT_A* Increments at rising edge of external clock Increments at falling edge of external clock Increments at both rising and falling edges of external clock Disables clock input Increments at φ Increments at φ/2 Increments at φ/4 Disables clock input Disables clock input Increments at φ/2048 Increments at φ/4096 Increments at φ/8192 Increments at compare-match A from TCNT_B* Increments at rising edge of external clock Increments at falling edge of external clock Increments at both rising and falling edges of external clock If the TMR_B clock input is set as the TCNT_A overflow signal and the TMR_A clock input is set as the TCNT_B compare-match signal simultaneously, a count-up clock cannot be generated. These settings should not be made. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 195 of 544 10.3.5 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) TCSR indicates the status flags and controls compare-match output. TCSR_0 Bit 7 Description Compare-Match Flag B [Setting condition] When the values of TCNT_0 and TCORB_0 match [Clearing condition] Read CMFB when CMFB = 1, then write 0 in CMFB CMFA 0 R/(W)* Compare-Match Flag A [Setting condition] When the values of TCNT_0 and TCORA_0 match [Clearing condition] Read CMFA when CMFA = 1, then write 0 in CMFA OVF 0 R/(W)* Timer Overflow Flag [Setting condition] When TCNT_0 overflows from H'FF to H'00 [Clearing condition] Read OVF when OVF = 1, then write 0 in OVF ADTE 0 R/W A/D Trigger Enable Enables or disables A/D converter start requests by compare-match A. 0: A/D converter start requests by compare-match A are disabled 1: A/D converter start requests by compare-match A are enabled OS3 0 R/W Output Select 3, 2 These bits specify how the TMO0 pin output level is to OS2 0 R/W be changed by compare-match B of TCORB_0 and TCNT_0. 00: No change 01: 0 is output 10: 1 is output 11: Output is inverted (toggle output) OS1 0 R/W Output Select 1, 0 These bits specify how the TMO0 pin output level is to OS0 0 R/W be changed by compare-match A of TCORA_0 and TCNT_0. 00: No change 01: 0 is output 10: 1 is output 11: Output is inverted (toggle output) * Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. Bit Name CMFB Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 196 of 544 TCSR_1 Bit 7 Bit Name CMFB Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* Description 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Compare-Match Flag B [Setting condition] When the values of TCNT_1 and TCORB_1 match [Clearing condition] Read CMFB when CMFB = 1, then write 0 in CMFB CMFA 0 R/(W)* Compare-Match Flag A [Setting condition] When the values of TCNT_1 and TCORA_1 match [Clearing condition] Read CMFA when CMFA = 1, then write 0 in CMFA OVF 0 R/(W)* Timer Overflow Flag [Setting condition] When TCNT_1 overflows from H'FF to H'00 [Clearing condition] Read OVF when OVF = 1, then write 0 in OVF — 1 R Reserved This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified. OS3 0 R/W Output Select 3, 2 OS2 0 R/W These bits specify how the TMO1 pin output level is to be changed by compare-match B of TCORB_1 and TCNT_1. 00: No change 01: 0 is output 10: 1 is output 11: Output is inverted (toggle output) OS1 0 R/W Output Select 1, 0 OS0 0 R/W These bits specify how the TMO1 pin output level is to be changed by compare-match A of TCORA_1 and TCNT_1. 00: No change 01: 0 is output 10: 1 is output 11: Output is inverted (toggle output) * Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 197 of 544 TCSR_Y Bit 7 Bit Name CMFB Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)*1 Description Compare-Match Flag B [Setting condition] When the values of TCNT_Y and TCORB_Y match [Clearing condition] Read CMFB when CMFB = 1, then write 0 in CMFB Compare-Match Flag A [Setting condition] When the values of TCNT_Y and TCORA_Y match [Clearing condition] Read CMFA when CMFA = 1, then write 0 in CMFA Timer Overflow Flag [Setting condition] When TCNT_Y overflows from H'FF to H'00 [Clearing condition] Read OVF when OVF = 1, then write 0 in OVF Input Capture Interrupt Enable Enables or disables the ICF interrupt request (ICIX) when the ICF bit in TCSR_X is set to 1. 0: ICF interrupt request (ICIX) is disabled 1: ICF interrupt request (ICIX) is enabled 6 CMFA 0 R/(W)*1 5 OVF 0 R/(W)*1 4 ICIE 0 R/W Output Select 3, 2 2 These bits specify how the TMOY pin* output level is to be changed by compare-match B of TCORB_Y and TCNT_Y. 00: No change 01: 0 is output 10: 1 is output 11: Output is inverted (toggle output) 1 OS1 0 R/W Output Select 1, 0 2 0 OS0 0 R/W These bits specify how the TMOY pin* output level is to be changed by compare-match A of TCORA_Y and TCNT_Y. 00: No change 01: 0 is output 10: 1 is output 11: Output is inverted (toggle output) Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. 2. The program development tool (emulator) does not support this pin. 3 2 OS3 OS2 0 0 R/W R/W Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 198 of 544 TCSR_X Bit 7 Bit Name CMFB Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* Description 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Compare-Match Flag B [Setting condition] When the values of TCNT_X and TCORB_X match [Clearing condition] Read CMFB when CMFB = 1, then write 0 in CMFB CMFA 0 R/(W)* Compare-Match Flag A [Setting condition] When the values of TCNT_X and TCORA_X match [Clearing condition] Read CMFA when CMFA = 1, then write 0 in CMFA OVF 0 R/(W)* Timer Overflow Flag [Setting condition] When TCNT_X overflows from H'FF to H'00 [Clearing condition] Read OVF when OVF = 1, then write 0 in OVF ICF 0 R/(W)* Input Capture Flag [Setting condition] When a rising edge and falling edge is detected in the external reset signal in that order. [Clearing condition] Read ICF when ICF = 1, then write 0 in ICF OS3 0 R/W Output Select 3, 2 OS2 0 R/W These bits specify how the TMOX pin output level is to be changed by compare-match B of TCORB_X and TCNT_X. 00: No change 01: 0 is output 10: 1 is output 11: Output is inverted (toggle output) OS1 0 R/W Output Select 1, 0 OS0 0 R/W These bits specify how the TMOX pin output level is to be changed by compare-match A of TCORA_X and TCNT_X. 00: No change 01: 0 is output 10: 1 is output 11: Output is inverted (toggle output) * Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 199 of 544 TCSR_B Bit 7 Bit Name CMFB Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* Description Compare-Match Flag B [Setting condition] When the values of TCNT_B and TCORB_B match [Clearing condition] Read CMFB when CMFB = 1, then write 0 in CMFB Compare-Match Flag A [Setting condition] When the values of TCNT_B and TCORA_B match [Clearing condition] Read CMFA when CMFA = 1, then write 0 in CMFA Timer Overflow Flag [Setting condition] When TCNT_B overflows from H'FF to H'00 [Clearing condition] Read OVF when OVF = 1, then write 0 in OVF Input Capture Interrupt Enable Enables or disables the ICF interrupt request (ICIA) when the ICF bit in TCSR_A is set to 1. 0: ICF interrupt request (ICIA) is disabled 1: ICF interrupt request (ICIA) is enabled 6 CMFA 0 R/(W)* 5 OVF 0 R/(W)* 4 ICIE 0 R/W Output Select 3, 2 These bits specify how the TMOB pin output level is to be changed by compare-match B of TCORB_B and TCNT_B. 00: No change 01: 0 is output 10: 1 is output 11: Output is inverted (toggle output) 1 OS1 0 R/W Output Select 1, 0 0 OS0 0 R/W These bits specify how the TMOB pin output level is to be changed by compare-match A of TCORA_B and TCNT_B. 00: No change 01: 0 is output 10: 1 is output 11: Output is inverted (toggle output) Notes: * Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. 3 2 OS3 OS2 0 0 R/W R/W Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 200 of 544 TCSR_A Bit 7 Bit Name CMFB Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* Description 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: Compare-Match Flag B [Setting condition] When the values of TCNT_A and TCORB_A match [Clearing condition] Read CMFB when CMFB = 1, then write 0 in CMFB CMFA 0 R/(W)* Compare-Match Flag A [Setting condition] When the values of TCNT_A and TCORA_A match [Clearing condition] Read CMFA when CMFA = 1, then write 0 in CMFA OVF 0 R/(W)* Timer Overflow Flag [Setting condition] When TCNT_A overflows from H'FF to H'00 [Clearing condition] Read OVF when OVF = 1, then write 0 in OVF ICF 0 R/(W)* Input Capture Flag [Setting condition] When a rising edge and falling edge is detected in the external reset signal in that order. [Clearing condition] Read ICF when ICF = 1, then write 0 in ICF OS3 0 R/W Output Select 3, 2 OS2 0 R/W These bits specify how the TMOA pin output level is to be changed by compare-match B of TCORB_A and TCNT_A. 00: No change 01: 0 is output 10: 1 is output 11: Output is inverted (toggle output) OS1 0 R/W Output Select 1, 0 OS0 0 R/W These bits specify how the TMOA pin output level is to be changed by compare-match A of TCORA_A and TCNT_A. 00: No change 01: 0 is output 10: 1 is output 11: Output is inverted (toggle output) * Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 201 of 544 10.3.6 Time Constant Register (TCORC) TCORC is an 8-bit readable/writable register. The sum of contents of TCORC and TICR is always compared with TCNT. When a match is detected, a compare-match C signal is generated. However, comparison at the T2 state in the write cycle to TCORC and at the input capture cycle of TICR is disabled. TCORC is initialized to H'FF. 10.3.7 Input Capture Registers R and F (TICRR, TICRF, TICRR_A and TICRF_A) TICRR and TICRF are 8-bit read-only registers. While the ICST bit in TCONRI (TCRAB) is set to 1, the contents of TCNT are transferred at the rising edge and falling edge of the external reset input (TMRIX and TMRIA) in that order. The ICST bit is cleared to 0 when one capture operation ends. TICRR and TICRF are initialized to H'00. 10.3.8 Timer Input Select Register (TISR and TISR_B) TISR permits or prohibits a signal source of external clock/reset input for the counter. Bit 7 to 1 0 Initial Bit Name Value — IS All 1 0 R/W R/(W) R/W Description Reserved The initial value should not be changed. Input Select Selects a timer clock/reset input pin (TMIn) as the signal source of external clock/reset input for the TMR_n counter. 0: TMIn (TMCIn/TMRIn) is prohibited 1: TMIn (TMCIn/TMRIn) is permitted for input Note: n = Y and B Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 202 of 544 10.3.9 Timer Connection Register I (TCONRI) TCONRI controls the input capture function. Bit 7 to 5 4 Bit Name — ICST Initial Value All 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description Reserved The initial value should not be changed. Input Capture Start Bit TMR_X has input capture registers (TICRR and TICRF). TICRR and TICRF can measure the width of a pulse by means of a single capture operation under the control of the ICST bit. When a rising edge followed by a falling edge is detected on TMRIX after the ICST bit is set to 1, the contents of TCNT at those points are captured into TICRR and TICRF, respectively, and the ICST bit is cleared to 0. [Clearing condition] When a rising edge followed by a falling edge is detected on TMRIX [Setting condition] When 1 is written in ICST after reading ICST = 0 Reserved The initial values should not be modified. 3 to 0 — All 0 R/W 10.3.10 Timer Connection Register S (TCONRS) TCONRS selects whether to access TMR_X or TMR_Y registers. Bit 7 Bit Name TMR_X/Y Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description TMR_X/TMR_Y Access Select For details, see table 10.4. 0: The TMR_X registers are accessed at addresses H'(FF)FFF0 to H'(FF)FFF5 1: The TMR_Y registers are accessed at addresses H'(FF)FFF0 to H'(FF)FFF5 Reserved The initial values should not be modified. 6 to 0  All 0 R/W Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 203 of 544 Table 10.4 Registers Accessible by TMR_X/TMR_Y TMRX/Y 0 1 H'FFF0 TMR_X TCR_X TMR_Y TCR_Y H'FFF1 TMR_X TCSR_X TMR_Y TCSR_Y H'FFF2 TMR_X TICRR TMR_Y H'FFF3 TMR_X TICRF TMR_Y H'FFF4 TMR_X TCNT TMR_Y H'FFF5 TMR_X TCORC TMR_Y TISR H'FFF6 TMR_X H'FFF7 TMR_X TCORA_X TCORB_X TCORA_Y TCORB_Y TCNT_Y 10.3.11 Timer XY Control Register (TCRXY) TCRXY selects the TMR_X and TMR_Y output pins and internal clock. Bit 7 Bit Name IOSX Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description TMR_X I/O Select 0: Output to P67/TMOX and input from P60/TMIX 1: Output to PF6/ExTMOX and input from PF4/ExTMIX TMR_Y Output Enable 0: Output to PF7/TMOY is prohibited and input from P62/TMIY 1: Output to PF7/TMOY is permitted and input from PF5/ExTMIY TMR_X Clock Select For details about selection, see the clock conditions in table 10.3. 4 CKSY 0 R/W TMR_Y Clock Select For details about selection, see the clock conditions in table 10.3. 3 to 0 Note: * — Reserved The initial value should not be changed. The program development tool (emulator) does not support TCRXY. All 0 R/W 6 IOSY 0 R/W 5 CKSX 0 R/W Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 204 of 544 10.3.12 Timer AB Control Register (TCRAB) TCRAB selects the internal clock or controls the input capture function in the TMR_A and TMR_B. Bit 7, 6 5 Bit Name  CKSA Initial Value All 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description Reserved The initial value should not be modified. TMR_A Clock Select For details about selection, see the clock conditions in table 10.3. 4 CKSB 0 R/W TMR_B Clock Select For details about selection, see the clock conditions in table 10.3. 3 ICST 0 R/W Input Capture Start Bit TMR_A has input capture registers (TICRR_A and TICRF_A). TICRR and TICRF can measure the width of a pulse by means of a single capture operation under the control of the ICST bit. When a rising edge followed by a falling edge is detected on TMRIA after the ICST bit is set to 1, the contents of TCNT at those points are captured into TICRR and TICRF, respectively, and the ICST bit is cleared to 0. [Clearing condition] When a rising edge followed by a falling edge is detected on TMRIA [Setting condition] When 1 is written in ICST after reading ICST = 0 2 to 0 Note: * — Reserved The initial value should not be modified. The program development tool (emulator) does not support TCRXY. 0 R/W Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 205 of 544 10.4 10.4.1 Operation Pulse Output Figure 10.4 shows an example for outputting an arbitrary duty pulse. 1. Clear the CCLR1 bit in TCR to 0 so that TCNT is cleared according to the compare match of TCORA, and then set the CCLR0 bit to 1. 2. Set the OS3 to OS0 bits in TCSR to B'0110 so that 1 is output according to the compare match of TCORA and 0 is output according to the compare match of TCORB. According to the above settings, the waveforms with the TCORA cycle and TCORB pulse width can be output without the intervention of software. TCNT H'FF TCORA TCORB H'00 Counter clear TMO Figure 10.4 Pulse Output Example Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 206 of 544 10.5 10.5.1 Operation Timing TCNT Count Timing Figure 10.5 shows the TCNT count timing with an internal clock source. Figure 10.6 shows the TCNT count timing with an external clock source. The pulse width of the external clock signal must be at least 1.5 system clocks (φ) for a single edge and at least 2.5 system clocks (φ) for both edges. The counter will not increment correctly if the pulse width is less than these values. φ Internal clock TCNT input clock TCNT N–1 N N+1 Figure 10.5 Count Timing for Internal Clock Input φ External clock input pin TCNT input clock TCNT N–1 N N+1 Figure 10.6 Count Timing for External Clock Input (Both Edges) 10.5.2 Timing of CMFA and CMFB Setting at Compare-Match The CMFA and CMFB flags in TCSR are set to 1 by a compare-match signal generated when the TCNT and TCOR values match. The compare-match signal is generated at the last state in which the match is true, just when the timer counter is updated. Therefore, when TCNT and TCOR match, the compare-match signal is not generated until the next TCNT input clock. Figure 10.7 shows the timing of CMF flag setting. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 207 of 544 φ TCNT N N+1 TCOR Compare-match signal N CMF Figure 10.7 Timing of CMF Setting at Compare-Match 10.5.3 Timing of Timer Output at Compare-Match When a compare-match signal occurs, the timer output changes as specified by the OS3 to OS0 bits in TCSR. Figure 10.8 shows the timing of timer output when the output is set to toggle by a compare-match A signal. φ Compare-match A signal Timer output pin Figure 10.8 Timing of Toggled Timer Output by Compare-Match A Signal 10.5.4 Timing of Counter Clear at Compare-Match TCNT is cleared when compare-match A or compare-match B occurs, depending on the setting of the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR. Figure 10.9 shows the timing of clearing the counter by a compare-match. φ Compare-match signal TCNT N H'00 Figure 10.9 Timing of Counter Clear by Compare-Match Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 208 of 544 10.5.5 TCNT External Reset Timing TCNT is cleared at the rising edge of an external reset input, depending on the settings of the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR. The width of the clearing pulse must be at least 1.5 states. Figure 10.10 shows the timing of clearing the counter by an external reset input. φ External reset input pin Clear signal TCNT N–1 N H'00 Figure 10.10 Timing of Counter Clear by External Reset Input 10.5.6 Timing of Overflow Flag (OVF) Setting The OVF bit in TCSR is set to 1 when the TCNT overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00). Figure 10.11 shows the timing of OVF flag setting. φ TCNT Overflow signal H'FF H'00 OVF Figure 10.11 Timing of OVF Flag Setting Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 209 of 544 10.6 TMR_0 and TMR_1 Cascaded Connection If bits CKS2 to CKS0 in either TCR_0 or TCR_1 are set to B'100, the 8-bit timers of the two channels are cascaded. With this configuration, the 16-bit count mode or compare-match count mode is available. 10.6.1 16-Bit Count Mode When bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR_0 are set to B'100, the timer functions as a single 16-bit timer with TMR_0 occupying the upper 8 bits and TMR_1 occupying the lower 8 bits. Setting of compare-match flags The CMF flag in TCSR_0 is set to 1 when a 16-bit compare-match occurs. The CMF flag in TCSR_1 is set to 1 when a lower 8-bit compare-match occurs. Counter clear specification If the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR_0 have been set for counter clear at compare-match, the 16-bit counter (TCNT_0 and TCNT_1 together) is cleared when a 16-bit comparematch occurs. The 16-bit counter (TCNT_0 and TCNT_1 together) is also cleared when counter clear by the TMI0 pin has been set. The settings of the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR_1 are ignored. The lower 8 bits cannot be cleared independently. Pin output Control of output from the TMO0 pin by bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSR_0 is in accordance with the 16-bit compare-match conditions. Control of output from the TMO1 pin by bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSR_1 is in accordance with the lower 8-bit compare-match conditions. 10.6.2 Compare-Match Count Mode When bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR_1 are B'100, TCNT_1 counts the occurrence of compare-match A for TMR_0. TMR_0 and TMR_1 are controlled independently. Conditions such as setting of the CMF flag, generation of interrupts, output from the TMO pin, and counter clearing are in accordance with the settings for each or TMR_0 and TMR_1. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 210 of 544 10.7 TMR_Y and TMR_X Cascaded Connection If bits CKS2 to CKS0 in either TCR_Y or TCR_X are set to B'100, the 8-bit timers of the two channels are cascaded. With this configuration, 16-bit count mode or compare-match count mode can be selected by the settings of the CKSX and CKSY bits in TCRXY. 10.7.1 16-Bit Count Mode When bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR_Y are set to B'100 and the CKSY bit in TCRXY is set to 1, the timer functions as a single 16-bit timer with TMR_Y occupying the upper eight bits and TMR_X occupying the lower 8 bits. Setting of compare-match flags The CMF flag in TCSR_Y is set to 1 when an upper 8-bit compare-match occurs. The CMF flag in TCSR_X is set to 1 when a lower 8-bit compare-match occurs. Counter clear specification If the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR_Y have been set for counter clear at compare-match, only the upper eight bits of TCNT_Y are cleared. The upper eight bits of TCNT_Y are also cleared when counter clear by the TMRIY pin has been set. The settings of the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR_X are enabled, and the lower 8 bits of TCNT_X can be cleared by the counter. Pin output Control of output from the TMOY pin by bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSR_Y is in accordance with the upper 8-bit compare-match conditions. Control of output from the TMOX pin by bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSR_X is in accordance with the lower 8-bit compare-match conditions. Note: The program development tool (emulator) does not support 16-bit count mode. 10.7.2 Compare-Match Count Mode When bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR_X are set to B'100 and the CKSX bit in TCRXY is set to 1, TCNT_X counts the occurrence of compare-match A for TMR_Y. TMR_X and TMR_Y are controlled independently. Conditions such as setting of the CMF flag, generation of interrupts, output from the TMO pin, and counter clearing are in accordance with the settings for each channel. Note: The program development tool (emulator) does not support compare-match count mode. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 211 of 544 10.7.3 Input Capture Operation TMR_X has input capture registers (TICRR and TICRF). A narrow pulse width can be measured with TICRR and TICRF, using a single capture. If the falling edge of TMRIX (TMR_X input capture input signal) is detected after its rising edge has been detected, the value of TCNT_X at that time is transferred to both TICRR and TICRF. 10.8 TMR_B and TMR_A Cascaded Connection If bits CKS2 to CKS0 in either TCR_B or TCR_A are set to B'100, the 8-bit timers of the two channels are cascaded. With this configuration, 16-bit count mode or compare-match count mode can be selected by the settings of the CKSA and CKSB bits in TCRAB. 10.8.1 16-Bit Count Mode When bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR_B are set to B'100 and the CKSB bit in TCRAB is set to 1, the timer functions as a single 16-bit timer with TMR_B occupying the upper eight bits and TMR_A occupying the lower 8 bits. Setting of compare-match flags The CMF flag in TCSR_B is set to 1 when an upper 8-bit compare-match occurs. The CMF flag in TCSR_A is set to 1 when a lower 8-bit compare-match occurs. Counter clear specification If the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR_B have been set for counter clear at compare-match, only the upper eight bits of TCNT_B are cleared. The upper eight bits of TCNT_B are also cleared when counter clear by the TMRIB pin has been set. The settings of the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR_A are enabled, and the lower 8 bits of TCNT_A can be cleared by the counter. Pin output Control of output from the TMOB pin by bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSR_B is in accordance with the upper 8-bit compare-match conditions. Control of output from the TMOA pin by bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSR_A is in accordance with the lower 8-bit compare-match conditions. 10.8.2 Compare-Match Count Mode When bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR_A are set to B'100 and the CKSA bit in TCRAB is set to 1, TCNT_A counts the occurrence of compare-match A for TMR_B. TMR_A and TMR_B are controlled independently. Conditions such as setting of the CMF flag, generation of interrupts, output from the TMO pin, and counter clearing are in accordance with the settings for each channel. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 212 of 544 10.8.3 Input Capture Operation TMR_A has input capture registers (TICRR_A and TICRF_A). A narrow pulse width can be measured with TICRR and TICRF, using a single capture. If the falling edge of TMRIA (TMR_A input capture input signal) is detected after its rising edge has been detected, the value of TCNT_A at that time is transferred to both TICRR and TICRF. Input Capture Signal Input Timing: Figure 10.12 shows the timing of the input capture operation. φ TMRIX TMRIA Input capture signal TCNT_X TCNT_A TICRR n n+1 N N+1 M n n TICRF m m N Figure 10.12 Timing of Input Capture Operation If the input capture signal is input while TICRR and TICRF are being read, the input capture signal is delayed by one system clock (φ) cycle. Figure 10.13 shows the timing of this operation. TICRR, TICRF read cycle T1 T2 φ TMRIX TMRIA Input capture signal Figure 10.13 Timing of Input Capture Signal (Input capture signal is input during TICRR and TICRF read) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 213 of 544 Selection of Input Capture Signal Input: TMRIX (input capture input signal of TMR_X) is selected according to the setting of the ICST bit in TCONRI. The input capture signal selection is shown in table 10.5. Table 10.5 Input Capture Signal Selection TCONRI Bit 4 ICST 0 1 Description Input capture function not used TMIX pin input selection TMRIA (input capture input signal of TMR_A) is selected according to the setting of the ICST but in TCRAB. The input capture signal selection is shown in table 10.6. Table 10.6 Input Capture Signal Selection TCRAB Bit 3 ICST 0 1 Description Input capture function not used TMIA pin input selection Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 214 of 544 10.9 Interrupt Sources TMR_0, TMR_1, and TMR_Y can generate three types of interrupts: CMIA, CMIB, and OVI. TMR_X can generate an ICIX interrupt. TMR_A can generate four types of interrupts, CMIA, CMIB, OVI and ICIA. Table 10.7 shows the interrupt sources and priorities. Each interrupt source can be enabled or disabled independently by interrupt enable bits in TCR or TCSR. Independent signals are sent to the interrupt controller for each interrupt. Table 10.7 Interrupt Sources of 8-Bit Timers TMR_0, TMR_1, TMR_Y, TMR_X TMR_B, and TMR_A Channel TMR_0 Name CMIA0 CMIB0 OVI0 CMIA1 CMIB1 OVI1 CMIAY CMIBY OVIY TMR_X TMR_B, TMR_A ICIX CMIAAB CMIBAB Interrupt Source TCORA_0 compare-match TCORB_0 compare-match TCNT_0 overflow TCORA_1 compare-match TCORB_1 compare-match TCNT_1 overflow TCORA_Y compare-match TCORB_Y compare-match TCNT_Y overflow Input capture TCORA_A, TCORA_B compare-match* Interrupt Flag CMFA CMFB OVF CMFA CMFB OVF CMFA CMFB OVF ICF CMFA Interrupt Priority High TMR_1 TMR_Y TMR_A Note: * TCORB_A, TCORB_B CMFB compare-match* OVIAB TCNT_A, TCNT_B overflow* OVF ICIA Input capture ICF Low The interrupt sources for TMR_B and TMR_A are allocated to the same vector addresses. The bits CMIEB, CMIEA, and OVIE in TCR register of TMR_B or TMR_A should be set to 1. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 215 of 544 10.10 Usage Notes 10.10.1 Conflict between TCNT Write and Counter Clear If a counter clear signal is generated during the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle as shown in figure 10.14, clearing takes priority and the counter write is not performed. TCNT write cycle by CPU T2 T1 φ Address Internal write signal Counter clear signal T 3* TCNT address TCNT Note: * TMR_A, TMR_B N H'00 Figure 10.14 Conflict between TCNT Write and Clear 10.10.2 Conflict between TCNT Write and Count-Up If a count-up occurs during the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle as shown in figure 10.15, the counter write takes priority and the counter is not incremented. TCNT write cycle by CPU T2 T1 φ Address Internal write signal T3* TCNT address TCNT input clock TCNT N Counter write data M Note: * TMR_A, TMR_B Figure 10.15 Conflict between TCNT Write and Count-Up Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 216 of 544 10.10.3 Conflict between TCOR Write and Compare-Match If a compare-match occurs during the T2 state of a TCOR write cycle as shown in figure 10.16, the TCOR write takes priority and the compare-match signal is disabled. With TMR_X, and TMR_A, a TICR input capture conflicts with a compare-match in the same way as with a write to TCORC. In this case also, the input capture takes priority and the compare-match signal is disabled. TCOR write cycle by CPU T2 T1 T3* φ Address Internal write signal TCOR address TCNT TCOR N N TCOR write data N+1 M Compare-match signal Note: * TMR_A, TMR_B Disabled Figure 10.16 Conflict between TCOR Write and Compare-Match 10.10.4 Conflict between Compare-Matches A and B If compare-matches A and B occur at the same time, the operation follows the output status that is defined for compare-match A or B, according to the priority of the timer output shown in table 10.8. Table 10.8 Timer Output Priorities Output Setting Toggle output 1 output 0 output No change Priority High Low Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 217 of 544 10.10.5 Switching of Internal Clocks and TCNT Operation TCNT may increment erroneously when the internal clock is switched over. Table 10.9 shows the relationship between the timing at which the internal clock is switched (by writing to the CKS1 and CKS0 bits) and the TCNT operation. When the TCNT clock is generated from an internal clock, the falling edge of the internal clock pulse is detected. If clock switching causes a change from high to low level, as shown in no. 3 in table 10.9, a TCNT clock pulse is generated on the assumption that the switchover is a falling edge, and TCNT is incremented. Erroneous incrementation can also happen when switching between internal and external clocks. Table 10.9 Switching of Internal Clocks and TCNT Operation Timing of Switchover by Means of CKS1 and CKS0 Bits Clock switching from low to low level*1 No. 1 TCNT Clock Operation Clock before switchover Clock after switchover TCNT clock TCNT N CKS bit rewrite N+1 2 Clock switching from low to high level∗2 Clock before switchover Clock after switchover TCNT clock TCNT N N+1 N+2 CKS bit rewrite Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 218 of 544 No. 3 Timing of Switchover by Means of CKS1 and CKS0 Bits Clock switching from high to low level∗3 TCNT Clock Operation Clock before switchover Clock after switchover TCNT clock *4 TCNT N N+1 CKS bit rewrite N+2 4 Clock switching from high to high level Clock before switchover Clock after switchover TCNT clock TCNT N N+1 N+2 CKS bit rewrite Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. Includes switching from low to stop, and from stop to low. Includes switching from stop to high. Includes switching from high to stop. Generated on the assumption that the switchover is a falling edge; TCNT is incremented. 10.10.6 Mode Setting with Cascaded Connection If the 16-bit count mode and compare-match count mode are set simultaneously, the input clock pulses for TCNT_0 and TCNT_1, and TCNT_X and TCNT_Y and TCNT_A and TCNT_B are not generated, and thus the counters will stop operating. Simultaneous setting of these two modes should therefore be avoided. 10.10.7 Module Stop Mode Setting TMR operation can be enabled or disabled using the module stop control register. The initial setting is for TMR operation to be halted. Register access is enabled by canceling the module stop mode. For details, refer to section 20, Power-Down Modes. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 219 of 544 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 220 of 544 Section 11 Watchdog Timer (WDT) This LSI incorporates two watchdog timer channels (WDT_0 and WDT_1). The watchdog timer can generate an internal reset signal or an internal NMI interrupt signal if a system crash prevents the CPU from writing to the timer counter, thus allowing it to overflow. Simultaneously, it can output an overflow signal (RESO) externally. When this watchdog function is not needed, the WDT can be used as an interval timer. In interval timer operation, an interval timer interrupt is generated each time the counter overflows. A block diagram of the WDT_0 and WDT_1 is shown in figure 11.1. 11.1 Features • Selectable from eight (WDT_0) or 16 (WDT_1) counter input clocks. • Switchable between watchdog timer mode and interval timer mode Watchdog Timer Mode: • If the counter overflows, an internal reset or an internal NMI interrupt is generated. • When the LSI is selected to be internally reset at counter overflow, a low level signal is output from the RESO pin if the counter overflows. Internal Timer Mode: • If the counter overflows, an internal timer interrupt (WOVI) is generated. WDT0102A_020020040200 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 221 of 544 WOVI0 (Interrupt request signal) Internal NMI (Interrupt request signal*2) RESO signal*1 Internal reset signal*1 Interrupt control Reset control Overflow Clock Clock selection φ/2 φ/64 φ/128 φ/512 φ/2048 φ/8192 φ/32768 φ/131072 Internal clock TCNT_0 TCSR_0 Module bus Bus interface WDT_0 WOVI1 (Interrupt request signal) Internal NMI (Interrupt request signal*2) Interrupt control Reset control Overflow Clock Clock selection RESO signal*1 Internal reset signal*1 φ/2 φ/64 φ/128 φ/512 φ/2048 φ/8192 φ/32768 φ/131072 Internal clock φSUB/2 φSUB/4 φSUB/8 φSUB/16 φSUB/32 φSUB/64 φSUB/128 φSUB/256 TCNT_1 TCSR_1 Module bus Bus interface WDT_1 [Legend] TCSR_0 : Timer control/status register_0 TCNT_0 : Timer counter_0 TCSR_1 : Timer control/status register_1 TCNT_1 : Timer counter_1 Notes: 1. The RESO signal outputs the low level signal when the internal reset signal is generated due to a TCNT overflow of either WDT_0 or WDT_1. The internal reset signal first resets the WDT in which the overflow has occurred first. 2. The internal NMI interrupt signal can be independently output from either WDT_0 or WDT_1. The interrupt controller does not distinguish the NMI interrupt request from WDT_0 from that from WDT_1. Figure 11.1 Block Diagram of WDT Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 222 of 544 Internal bus Internal bus 11.2 Input/Output Pins The WDT has the pins listed in table 11.1. Table 11.1 Pin Configuration Name Reset output pin Symbol RESO I/O Output Input Function Outputs the counter overflow signal in watchdog timer mode Inputs the clock pulses to the WDT_1 prescaler counter External sub-clock input pin EXCL 11.3 Register Descriptions The WDT has the following registers. To prevent accidental overwriting, TCSR and TCNT have to be written to in a method different from normal registers. For details, refer to section 11.6.1, Notes on Register Access. For details on the system control register, refer to section 3.2.2, System Control Register (SYSCR). • Timer counter (TCNT) • Timer control/status register (TCSR) 11.3.1 Timer Counter (TCNT) TCNT is an 8-bit readable/writable up-counter. TCNT is initialized to H'00 when the TME bit in the timer control/status register (TCSR) is cleared to 0. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 223 of 544 11.3.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) TCSR selects the clock source to be input to TCNT, and the timer mode. • TCSR_0 Bit 7 Bit Name OVF Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* 1 Description Overflow Flag Indicates that TCNT has overflowed (changes from H'FF to H'00). [Setting condition] When TCNT overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00) However, when internal reset request generation is selected in watchdog timer mode, OVF is cleared automatically by the internal reset. [Clearing conditions] • • When TCSR is read when OVF = 1* , then 0 is written to OVF When 0 is written to TME 2 6 WT/IT 0 R/W Timer Mode Select Selects whether the WDT is used as a watchdog timer or interval timer. 0: Interval timer mode 1: Watchdog timer mode 5 TME 0 R/W Timer Enable When this bit is set to 1, TCNT starts counting. When this bit is cleared, TCNT stops counting and is initialized to H'00. 4 3 — RST/NMI 0 0 R/(W) R/W Reserved The initial value should not be modified. Reset or NMI Selects to request an internal reset or an NMI interrupt when TCNT has overflowed. 0: An NMI interrupt is requested 1: An internal reset is requested Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 224 of 544 Bit 2 1 0 Bit Name CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 Initial Value 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Clock Select 2 to 0 Selects the clock source to be input to. The overflow frequency for φ = 10 MHz is enclosed in parentheses. 000: φ/2 (frequency: 51.2 µs) 001: φ/64 (frequency: 1.64 ms) 010: φ/128 (frequency: 3.28 ms) 011: φ/512 (frequency: 13.1 ms) 100: φ/2048 (frequency: 52.4 ms) 101: φ/8192 (frequency: 209.7 ms) 110: φ/32768 (frequency: 0.84 s) 111: φ/131072 (frequency: 3.36 s) Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. 2. When OVF is polled with the interval timer interrupt disabled, OVF = 1 must be read at least twice. • TCSR_1 Bit 7 Bit Name OVF Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* 1 Description Overflow Flag Indicates that TCNT has overflowed (changes from H'FF to H'00). [Setting condition] When TCNT overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00) However, when internal reset request generation is selected in watchdog timer mode, OVF is cleared automatically by the internal reset. [Clearing conditions] When TCSR is read when OVF = 1*2, then 0 is written to OVF When 0 is written to TME Timer Mode Select Selects whether the WDT is used as a watchdog timer or interval timer. 0: Interval timer mode 1: Watchdog timer mode Timer Enable When this bit is set to 1, TCNT starts counting. When this bit is cleared, TCNT stops counting and is initialized to H'00. 6 WT/IT 0 R/W 5 TME 0 R/W Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 225 of 544 Bit 4 Bit Name PSS Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Prescaler Select Selects the clock source to be input to TCNT. 0: Counts the divided cycle of φ–based prescaler (PSM) 1: Counts the divided cycle of φSUB–based prescaler (PSS) 3 RST/NMI 0 R/W Reset or NMI Selects to request an internal reset or an NMI interrupt when TCNT has overflowed. 0: An NMI interrupt is requested 1: An internal reset is requested 2 1 0 CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Clock Select 2 to 0 Selects the clock source to be input to TCNT. The overflow cycle for φ = 10 MHz and φSUB = 32.768 kHz is enclosed in parentheses. When PSS = 0: 000: φ/2 (frequency: 51.2 µs) 001: φ/64 (frequency: 1.64 ms) 010: φ/128 (frequency: 3.28 ms) 011: φ/512 (frequency: 13.1 ms) 100: φ/2048 (frequency: 52.4 ms) 101: φ/8192 (frequency: 209.7 ms) 110: φ/32768 (frequency: 0.84 s) 111: φ/131072 (frequency: 3.36 s) When PSS = 1: 000: φSUB/2 (cycle: 15.6 ms) 001: φSUB/4 (cycle: 31.3 ms) 010: φSUB/8 (cycle: 62.5 ms) 011: φSUB/16 (cycle: 125 ms) 100: φSUB/32 (cycle: 250 ms) 101: φSUB/64 (cycle: 500 ms) 110: φSUB/128 (cycle: 1 s) 111: φ/256 (cycle: 2 s) Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. 2. When OVF is polled with the interval timer interrupt disabled, OVF = 1 must be read at least twice. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 226 of 544 11.4 11.4.1 Operation Watchdog Timer Mode To use the WDT as a watchdog timer, set the WT/IT bit and the TME bit in TCSR to 1. While the WDT is used as a watchdog timer, if TCNT overflows without being rewritten because of a system malfunction or another error, an internal reset or NMI interrupt request is generated. TCNT does not overflow while the system is operating normally. Software must prevent TCNT overflows by rewriting the TCNT value (normally be writing H'00) before overflows occurs. If the RST/NMI bit of TCSR is set to 1, when the TCNT overflows, an internal reset signal for this LSI is issued for 518 system clocks, and the low level signal is simultaneously output from the RESO pin for 132 states, as shown in figure 11.2. If the RST/NMI bit is cleared to 0, when the TCNT overflows, an NMI interrupt request is generated. Here, the output from the RESO pin remains high. An internal reset request from the watchdog timer and a reset input from the RES pin are processed in the same vector. Reset source can be identified by the XRST bit status in SYSCR. If a reset caused by a signal input to the RES pin occurs at the same time as a reset caused by a WDT overflow, the RES pin reset has priority and the XRST bit in SYSCR is set to 1. An NMI interrupt request from the watchdog timer and an interrupt request from the NMI pin are processed in the same vector. Do not handle an NMI interrupt request from the watchdog timer and an interrupt request from the NMI pin at the same time. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 227 of 544 TCNT value Overflow H'FF H'00 WT/IT = 1 TME = 1 Write H'00 to TCNT OVF = 1* RESO and internal reset signals generated Time WT/IT = 1 Write H'00 to TME = 1 TCNT RESO signal 132 system clocks Internal reset signal 518 system clocks [Legend] WT/IT: Timer mode select bit TME: Timer enable bit Overflow flag OVF: Note: * After the OVF bit becomes 1, it is cleared to 0 by an internal reset. The XRST bit is also cleared to 0. Figure 11.2 Watchdog Timer Mode (RST/NMI = 1) Operation Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 228 of 544 11.4.2 Interval Timer Mode When the WDT is used as an interval timer, an interval timer interrupt (WOVI) is generated each time the TCNT overflows, as shown in figure 11.3. Therefore, an interrupt can be generated at intervals. When the TCNT overflows in interval timer mode, an interval timer interrupt (WOVI) is requested at the same time the OVF bit of TCSR is set to 1. The timing is shown figure 11.4. TCNT value H'FF Overflow Overflow Overflow Overflow H'00 WT/IT = 0 TME = 1 WOVI WOVI WOVI WOVI Time [Legend] WOVI : Internal timer interrupt request occurrence Figure 11.3 Interval Timer Mode Operation φ TCNT Overflow signal (internal signal) OVF H'FF H'00 Figure 11.4 OVF Flag Set Timing Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 229 of 544 11.4.3 RESO Signal Output Timing When TCNT overflows in watchdog timer mode, the OVF bit in TCSR is set to 1. When the RST/NMI bit is 1 here, the internal reset signal is generated for the entire LSI. At the same time, the low level signal is output from the RESO pin. The timing is shown in figure 11.5. φ TCNT Overflow signal (internal signal) H'FF H'00 OVF RESO signal 132 states Internal reset signal 518 states Figure 11.5 Output Timing of RESO signal 11.5 Interrupt Sources During interval timer mode operation, an overflow generates an interval timer interrupt (WOVI). The interval timer interrupt is requested whenever the OVF flag is set to 1 in TCSR. OVF must be cleared to 0 in the interrupt handling routine. When the NMI interrupt request is selected in watchdog timer mode, an NMI interrupt request is generated by an overflow. Table 11.2 WDT Interrupt Source Name WOVI Interrupt Source TCNT overflow Interrupt Flag OVF Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 230 of 544 11.6 11.6.1 Usage Notes Notes on Register Access The watchdog timer's registers, TCNT and TCSR differ from other registers in being more difficult to write to. The procedures for writing to and reading from these registers are given below. Writing to TCNT and TCSR (Example of WDT_0): These registers must be written to by a word transfer instruction. They cannot be written to by a byte transfer instruction. TCNT and TCSR both have the same write address. Therefore, satisfy the relative condition shown in figure 11.6 to write to TCNT or TCSR. To write to TCNT, the upper bytes must contain the value H'5A and the lower bytes must contain the write data before the transfer instruction execution. To write to TCSR, the upper bytes must contain the value H'A5 and the lower bytes must contain the write data. 15 Address : H'FFA8 0 H'5A 87 Write data 0 15 Address : H'FFA8 0 H'A5 87 Write data 0 Figure 11.6 Writing to TCNT and TCSR (WDT_0) Reading from TCNT and TCSR (Example of WDT_0): These registers are read in the same way as other registers. The read address is H'FFA8 for TCSR and H'FFA9 for TCNT. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 231 of 544 11.6.2 Conflict between Timer Counter (TCNT) Write and Increment If a timer counter clock pulse is generated during the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, the write takes priority and the timer counter is not incremented. Figure 11.7 shows this operation. TCNT write cycle T1 T2 φ Address Internal write signal TCNT input clock TCNT N Counter write data M Figure 11.7 Conflict between TCNT Write and Increment 11.6.3 Changing Values of CKS2 to CKS0 Bits If bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCSR are written to while the WDT is operating, errors could occur in the incrementation. Software must stop the watchdog timer (by clearing the TME bit to 0) before changing the values of bits CKS2 to CKS0. 11.6.4 Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode If the mode is switched from watchdog timer to interval timer, while the WDT is operating, errors could occur in the incrementation. Software must stop the watchdog timer (by clearing the TME bit to 0) before switching the mode. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 232 of 544 11.6.5 System Reset by RESO Signal Inputting the RESO output signal to the RESO pin of this LSI prevents the LSI from being initialized correctly; the RESO signal must not be logically connected to the RES pin of the LSI. To reset the entire system by the RESO signal, use the circuit as shown in figure 11.8. This LSI Reset input RES Reset signal for entire system RESO Figure 11.8 Sample Circuit for Resetting System by RESO Signal 11.6.6 Counter Values during Transitions between High-Speed, Sub-Active, and Watch Modes When developing a program with a program development tool (emulator), pay attention to the followings. When WDT_1 is used as a clock counter and is allowed to transit between high-speed mode and sub-active or watch mode, the counter does not display the correct value due to internal clock switching. Specifically, when transiting from high-speed mode to sub-active or watch mode, that is, when the control clock for WDT_1 switches from the main clock to the sub-clock, the counter incrementing timing is delayed for approximately two to three clock cycles. Similarly, when transiting from sub-active or watch mode to high-speed mode, the clock is not supplied until stabilized internal oscillation is available because the main clock oscillator is halted in sub-clock mode. The counter is therefore prevented from incrementing for the time specified by the STS2 to STS0 bits in SBYCR after internal oscillation starts, thus producing counter value differences for this time. Special care must be taken when using WDT_1 as a clock counter. Note that no counter value difference is produced while operated in the same mode. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 233 of 544 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 234 of 544 Section 12 Serial Communication Interface (SCI) This LSI has a serial communication interface (SCI). The SCI can handle both asynchronous and clocked synchronous serial communication. Asynchronous serial data communication can be carried out with standard asynchronous communication chips such as a Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) or Asynchronous Communication Interface Adapter (ACIA). A function is also provided for serial communication between processors (multiprocessor communication function) in asynchronous mode. 12.1 Features • Choice of asynchronous or clocked synchronous serial communication mode • Full-duplex communication capability The transmitter and receiver are mutually independent, enabling transmission and reception to be executed simultaneously. Double-buffering is used in both the transmitter and the receiver, enabling continuous transmission and continuous reception of serial data. • The on-chip baud rate generator allows any bit rate to be selected An external clock can be selected as a transfer clock source. • Choice of LSB-first or MSB-first transfer (except in the case of asynchronous mode 7-bit data) • Four interrupt sources Four interrupt sources — transmit-end, transmit-data-empty, receive-data-full, and receive error — that can issue requests. Asynchronous Mode: • • • • • Data length: 7 or 8 bits Stop bit length: 1 or 2 bits Parity: Even, odd, or none Receive error detection: Parity, overrun, and framing errors Break detection: Break can be detected by reading the RxD pin level directly in case of a framing error Clocked Synchronous Mode: • Data length: 8 bits • Receive error detection: Overrun errors • Serial data communication with other LSIs that have the clock synchronized communication function A block diagram of the SCI is shown in figure 12.1. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 235 of 544 SCI0022C_000020020800 Internal data bus Bus interface Module data bus RDR TDR SCMR SSR SCR BRR φ Baud rate generator ExRxD*/RxD RSR TSR SMR Transmission/ reception control φ/4 φ/16 φ/64 ExTxD*/TxD Parity check Parity generation Clock External clock ExSCK*/SCK [Legend] RSR: Receive shift register RDR: Receive data register TSR: Transmit shift register TDR: Transmit data register SMR: Serial mode register TEI TXI RXI ERI SCR: SSR: SCMR: BRR: Serial control register Serial status register Smart card mode register Bit rate register Note: * The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. Figure 12.1 Block Diagram of SCI 12.2 Input/Output Pins Table 12.1 shows the input/output pins for each SCI channel. Table 12.1 Pin Configuration Channel 1 Symbol*1 SCK1/ ExSCK1*2 RxD1/ ExRxD1*2 TxD1/ ExTxD1*2 Input/Output Input/Output Input Output Function Channel 1 clock input/output Channel 1 receive data input Channel 1 transmit data output Notes: 1. Pin names SCK, RxD, and TxD are used in the text for all channels, omitting the channel designation. 2. The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 236 of 544 12.3 Register Descriptions The SCI has the following registers. • • • • • • • • • • Receive shift register (RSR) Receive data register (RDR) Transmit data register (TDR) Transmit shift register (TSR) Serial mode register (SMR) Serial control register (SCR) Serial status register (SSR) Serial interface mode register (SCMR) Bit rate register (BRR) Serial pin select register (SPSR)* Note: * The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. 12.3.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR) RSR is a shift register used to receive serial data that converts it into parallel data. When one frame of data has been received, it is transferred to RDR automatically. RSR cannot be directly accessed by the CPU. 12.3.2 Receive Data Register (RDR) RDR is an 8-bit register that stores receive data. When the SCI has received one frame of serial data, it transfers the received serial data from RSR to RDR where it is stored. After this, RSR can receive the next data. Since RSR and RDR function as a double buffer in this way, continuous receive operations can be performed. After confirming that the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, read RDR for only once. RDR cannot be written to by the CPU. RDR is initialized to H'00. 12.3.3 Transmit Data Register (TDR) TDR is an 8-bit register that stores transmit data. When the SCI detects that TSR is empty, it transfers the transmit data written in TDR to TSR and starts transmission. The double-buffered structures of TDR and TSR enables continuous serial transmission. If the next transmit data has already been written to TDR when one frame of data is transmitted, the SCI transfers the written data to TSR to continue transmission. Although TDR can be read from or written to by the CPU at all times, to achieve reliable serial transmission, write transmit data to TDR for only once after confirming that the TDRE bit in SSR is set to 1. TDR is initialized to H'FF. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 237 of 544 12.3.4 Transmit Shift Register (TSR) TSR is a shift register that transmits serial data. To perform serial data transmission, the SCI first transfers transmit data from TDR to TSR, then sends the data to the TxD pin. TSR cannot be directly accessed by the CPU. 12.3.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR) SMR is used to set the SCI's serial transfer format and select the on-chip baud rate generator clock source. Bit 7 Bit Name C/A Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Communication Mode 0: Asynchronous mode 1: Clocked synchronous mode Character Length (enabled only in asynchronous mode) 0: Selects 8 bits as the data length. 1: Selects 7 bits as the data length. LSB-first is fixed and the MSB of TDR is not transmitted in transmission. In clocked synchronous mode, a fixed data length of 8 bits is used. Parity Enable (enabled only in asynchronous mode) When this bit is set to 1, the parity bit is added to transmit data before transmission, and the parity bit is checked in reception. For a multiprocessor format, parity bit addition and checking are not performed regardless of the PE bit setting. Parity Mode (enabled only when the PE bit is 1 in asynchronous mode) 0: Selects even parity. 1: Selects odd parity. Stop Bit Length (enabled only in asynchronous mode) Selects the stop bit length in transmission. 0: 1 stop bit 1: 2 stop bits In reception, only the first stop bit is checked. If the second stop bit is 0, it is treated as the start bit of the next transmit frame. 6 CHR 0 R/W 5 PE 0 R/W 4 O/E 0 R/W 3 STOP 0 R/W Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 238 of 544 Bit 2 Bit Name MP Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Multiprocessor Mode (enabled only in asynchronous mode) When this bit is set to 1, the multiprocessor communication function is enabled. The PE bit and O/E bit settings are invalid in multiprocessor mode. Clock Select 1,0 These bits select the clock source for the on-chip baud rate generator. 00: φ clock (n = 0) 01: φ/4 clock (n = 1) 10: φ/16 clock (n = 2) 11: φ/64 clock (n = 3) For the relation between the bit rate register setting and the baud rate, see section 12.3.9, Bit Rate Register (BRR). n is the decimal display of the value of n in BRR. 1 0 CKS1 CKS0 0 0 R/W R/W 12.3.6 Serial Control Register (SCR) SCR is a register that performs enabling or disabling of SCI transfer operations and interrupt requests, and selection of the transfer clock source. For details on interrupt requests, refer to section 12.7, Interrupt Sources. Bit 7 Bit Name TIE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Transmit Interrupt Enable When this bit is set to 1, a TXI interrupt request is enabled. 6 RIE 0 R/W Receive Interrupt Enable When this bit is set to 1, RXI and ERI interrupt requests are enabled. 5 4 TE RE 0 0 R/W R/W Transmit Enable When this bit is set to 1, transmission is enabled. Receive Enable When this bit is set to 1, reception is enabled. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 239 of 544 Bit 3 Bit Name MPIE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (enabled only when the MP bit in SMR is 1 in asynchronous mode) When this bit is set to 1, receive data in which the multiprocessor bit is 0 is skipped, and setting of the RDRF, FER, and ORER status flags in SSR is disabled. On receiving data in which the multiprocessor bit is 1, this bit is automatically cleared and normal reception is resumed. For details, refer to section 12.5, Multiprocessor Communication Function. 2 TEIE 0 R/W Transmit End Interrupt Enable When this bit is set to 1, a TEI interrupt request is enabled. 1 0 CKE1 CKE0 0 0 R/W R/W Clock Enable 1, 0 These bits select the clock source and SCK pin function. Asynchronous mode 00: Internal clock (SCK pin functions as I/O port.) 01: Internal clock (Outputs a clock of the same frequency as the bit rate from the SCK pin.) 1X: External clock (Inputs a clock with a frequency 16 times the bit rate from the SCK pin.) Clocked synchronous mode 0X: Internal clock (SCK pin functions as clock output.) 1X: External clock (SCK pin functions as clock input.) [Legend] X: Don't care Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 240 of 544 12.3.7 Serial Status Register (SSR) SSR is a register containing status flags of the SCI and multiprocessor bits for transfer. TDRE, RDRF, ORER, PER, and FER can only be cleared. Bit 7 Bit Name TDRE Initial Value 1 R/W R/(W)* Description Transmit Data Register Empty Indicates whether TDR contains transmit data. [Setting conditions] • • When the TE bit in SCR is 0 When data is transferred from TDR to TSR and TDR is ready for data write When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1 [Clearing conditions] • 6 RDRF 0 R/(W)* Receive Data Register Full Indicates that receive data is stored in RDR. [Setting condition] • When serial reception ends normally and receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR When 0 is written to RDRF after reading RDRF = 1 [Clearing conditions] • The RDRF flag is not affected and retains its previous value when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0. 5 ORER 0 R/(W)* Overrun Error [Setting condition] • • 4 FER 0 R/(W)* When the next data is received while RDRF = 1 When 0 is written to ORER after reading ORER = 1 [Clearing condition] Framing Error [Setting condition] • • When the stop bit is 0 When 0 is written to FER after reading FER = 1 [Clearing condition] In 2-stop-bit mode, only the first stop bit is checked. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 241 of 544 Bit 3 Bit Name PER Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* Description Parity Error [Setting condition] • • When a parity error is detected during reception When 0 is written to PER after reading PER = 1 [Clearing condition] 2 TEND 1 R Transmit End [Setting conditions] • • When the TE bit in SCR is 0 When TDRE = 1 at transmission of the last bit of a 1-byte serial transmit character When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE = 1 [Clearing conditions] • 1 MPB 0 R Multiprocessor Bit MPB stores the multiprocessor bit in the receive frame. When the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0 its previous state is retained. 0 MPBT 0 R/W Multiprocessor Bit Transfer MPBT stores the multiprocessor bit to be added to the transmit frame. Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 242 of 544 12.3.8 Serial Interface Mode Register (SCMR) SCMR selects SCI functions and its format. Bit 7 to 4 Bit Name — Initial Value All 1 R/W R Description Reserved These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified. 3 SDIR 0 R/W Data Transfer Direction Selects the serial/parallel conversion format. 0: TDR contents are transmitted with LSB-first. Receive data is stored as LSB first in RDR. 1: TDR contents are transmitted with MSB-first. Receive data is stored as MSB first in RDR. The SDIR bit is valid only when the 8-bit data format is used for transmission/reception; when the 7-bit data format is used, data is always transmitted/received with LSB-first. 2 SINV 0 R/W Data Invert Specifies inversion of the data logic level. The SINV bit does not affect the logic level of the parity bit. When the parity bit is inverted, invert the O/E bit in SMR. 0: TDR contents are transmitted as they are. Receive data is stored as it is in RDR. 1: TDR contents are inverted before being transmitted. Receive data is stored in inverted form in RDR. 1 0 — SMIF 1 0 R R/W Reserved This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified. Serial Communication Interface Mode Select: 0: Normal asynchronous or clocked synchronous mode 1: Reserved mode Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 243 of 544 12.3.9 Bit Rate Register (BRR) BRR is an 8-bit register that adjusts the bit rate. As the SCI performs baud rate generator control independently for each channel, different bit rates can be set for each channel. Table 12.2 shows the relationships between the N setting in BRR and bit rate B for normal asynchronous mode and clocked synchronous mode. The initial value of BRR is H'FF, and it can be read from or written to by the CPU at all times. Table 12.2 Relationships between N Setting in BRR and Bit Rate B Mode Asynchronous mode Bit Rate B= φ × 106 64 × 2 2n-1 Error × (N + 1) Error (%) = { φ × 106 B × 64 × 2 2n-1 × (N + 1) - 1 } × 100 Clocked synchronous mode B= φ × 106 64 × 2 2n-1 — × (N + 1) [Legend] B: Bit rate (bit/s) N: BRR setting for baud rate generator (0 ≤ N ≤ 255) φ: Operating frequency (MHz) n: Determined by the SMR settings shown in the following table. SMR Setting CKS1 0 0 1 1 CKS0 0 1 0 1 n 0 1 2 3 Table 12.3 shows sample N settings in BRR in normal asynchronous mode. Table 12.4 shows the maximum bit rate settable for each frequency. Table 12.6 shows sample N settings in BRR in clocked synchronous mode. Tables 12.5 and 12.7 show the maximum bit rates with external clock input. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 244 of 544 Table 12.3 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (1) Operating Frequency φ (MHz) 4 Bit Rate (bit/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 n 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 — 0 — N 70 207 103 207 103 51 25 12 — 3 — Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 — 0.00 — n 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4.9152 N 86 255 127 255 127 63 31 15 7 4 3 Error (%) 0.31 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 –1.70 0.00 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 88 64 129 64 129 64 32 15 7 4 3 5 Error (%) –0.25 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 –1.36 1.73 1.73 0.00 1.73 [Legend] —: Can be set, but there will be a degree of error. Note: * Make the settings so that the error does not exceed 1%. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 245 of 544 Table 12.3 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (2) Operating Frequency φ (MHz) 6 Bit Rate (bit/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 106 77 155 77 155 77 38 19 9 5 4 Error (%) –0.44 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 –2.34 –2.34 0.00 –2.34 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6.144 N 108 79 159 79 159 79 39 19 9 5 4 Error (%) 0.08 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 2.40 0.00 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 — 0 7.3728 N 130 95 191 95 191 95 47 23 11 — 5 Error (%) –0.07 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 — 0.00 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 — N 141 103 207 103 207 103 51 25 12 7 — 8 Error (%) 0.03 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.00 — Operating Frequency φ (MHz) 9.8304 Bit Rate (bit/s) 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 31250 38400 n 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 174 127 255 127 255 127 63 31 15 9 7 Error (%) –0.26 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 –1.70 0.00 n 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 177 129 64 129 64 129 64 32 15 9 7 10 Error (%) –0.25 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 –1.36 1.73 0.00 1.73 [Legend] —: Can be set, but there will be a degree of error. Note: * Make the settings so that the error does not exceed 1%. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 246 of 544 Table 12.4 Maximum Bit Rate for Each Frequency (Asynchronous Mode) Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s) 125000 153600 156250 187500 192000 230400 250000 Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s) 307200 312500 φ (MHz) 4 4.9152 5 6 6.144 7.3728 8 n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 φ (MHz) 9.8304 10 n 0 0 N 0 0 Table 12.5 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Asynchronous Mode) φ (MHz) 4 4.9152 5 6 6.144 7.3728 8 External Input Maximum Bit Clock (MHz) Rate (bit/s) 1.0000 1.2288 1.2500 15.000 1.5360 1.8432 2.0000 62500 76800 78125 93750 96000 115200 125000 φ (MHz) 9.8304 10 External Input Maximum Bit Clock (MHz) Rate (bit/s) 2.4576 2.5000 153600 156250 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 247 of 544 Table 12.6 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode) Operating Frequency φ (MHz) Bit Rate (bit/s) 110 250 500 1k 2.5k 5k 10k 25k 50k 100k 250k 500k 1M 2.5M 5M [Legend] Blank: Cannot be set. —: Can be set, but there will be a degree of error. *: Continuous transfer or reception is not possible. — 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 n — 249 124 249 99 199 99 39 19 9 3 1* 0 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 124 249 124 199 99 199 79 39 19 7 3 1 0 0* — — — 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 — — — 249 124 249 99 49 24 9 4 N n 8 N n 10 N Table 12.7 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Clocked Synchronous Mode) φ (MHz) 4 6 8 10 External Input Clock (MHz) 0.6667 1.0000 1.3333 1.6667 Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s) 666666.7 1000000.0 1333333.3 1666666.7 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 248 of 544 12.3.10 Serial Pin Select Register (SPSR) SPSR selects the serial I/O pins. SPSR should be set before initialization. Do not set during communication. Bit 7 Bit Name SPS1 Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Serial Port Select Selects the serial I/O pins. 0: P86/SCK1, P85/RxD1, P84/TxD1 1: P52/ExSCK1, P51/ExRxD1, P50/ExTxD1 6 to 0 — All 0 R/W Reserved The initial value should not be changed. Note: The program development tool (emulator) does not support SPSR. 12.4 Operation in Asynchronous Mode Figure 12.2 shows the general format for asynchronous serial communication. One frame consists of a start bit (low level), followed by transmit/receive data, a parity bit, and finally stop bits (high level). In asynchronous serial communication, the transmission line is usually held in the mark state (high level). The SCI monitors the transmission line, and when it goes to the space state (low level), recognizes a start bit and starts serial communication. Inside the SCI, the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full-duplex communication. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a double-buffered structure, so that data can be read or written during transmission or reception, enabling continuous data transfer and reception. Idle state (mark state) 1 0/1 Parity bit 1 bit or none 1 Serial data LSB 0 Start bit 1 bit MSB D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 1 1 D0 Stop bit Transmit/receive data 7 or 8 bits One unit of transfer data (character or frame) 1 or 2 bits Figure 12.2 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 249 of 544 12.4.1 Data Transfer Format Table 12.8 shows the data transfer formats that can be used in asynchronous mode. Any of 12 transfer formats can be selected according to the SMR setting. For details on the multiprocessor bit, refer to section 12.5, Multiprocessor Communication Function. Table 12.8 Serial Transfer Formats (Asynchronous Mode) SMR Settings CHR 0 Serial Transmit/Receive Format and Frame Length STOP 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 PE 0 MP 0 S 8-bit data STOP 0 0 0 1 S 8-bit data STOP STOP 0 1 0 0 S 8-bit data P STOP 0 1 0 1 S 8-bit data P STOP STOP 1 0 0 0 S 7-bit data STOP 1 0 0 1 S 7-bit data STOP STOP 1 1 0 0 S 7-bit data P STOP 1 1 0 1 S 7-bit data P STOP STOP 0 — 1 0 S 8-bit data MPB STOP 0 — 1 1 S 8-bit data MPB STOP STOP 1 — 1 0 S 7-bit data MPB STOP 1 — 1 1 S 7-bit data MPB STOP STOP Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 250 of 544 12.4.2 Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Asynchronous Mode In asynchronous mode, the SCI operates on a basic clock with a frequency of 16 times the bit rate. In reception, the SCI samples the falling edge of the start bit using the basic clock, and performs internal synchronization. Since receive data is latched internally at the rising edge of the 8th pulse of the basic clock, data is latched at the middle of each bit, as shown in figure 12.3. Thus the reception margin in asynchronous mode is determined by formula (1) below. M = } (0.5 – 1 D – 0.5 )– (1 + F) – (L – 0.5) F } × 100 2N N [%] ... Formula (1) [Legend] M: Reception margin (%) N : Ratio of bit rate to clock (N = 16) D : Clock duty (D = 0.5 to 1.0) L : Frame length (L = 9 to 12) F : Absolute value of clock rate deviation Assuming values of F = 0 and D = 0.5 in formula (1), the reception margin is determined by the formula below. M = {0.5 – 1/(2 × 16)} × 100 [%] = 46.875 % However, this is only the computed value, and a margin of 20% to 30% should be allowed in system design. 16 clocks 8 clocks 0 Internal basic clock 7 15 0 7 15 0 Receive data (RxD) Synchronization sampling timing Start bit D0 D1 Data sampling timing Figure 12.3 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 251 of 544 12.4.3 Clock Either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external clock input at the SCK pin can be selected as the SCI's transfer clock, according to the setting of the C/A bit in SMR and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR. When an external clock is input at the SCK pin, the clock frequency should be 16 times the bit rate used. When the SCI is operated on an internal clock, the clock can be output from the SCK pin. The frequency of the clock output in this case is equal to the bit rate, and the phase is such that the rising edge of the clock is in the middle of the transmit data, as shown in figure 12.4. SCK TxD 0 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 0/1 1 1 1 frame Figure 12.4 Relation between Output Clock and Transmit Data Phase (Asynchronous Mode) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 252 of 544 12.4.4 SCI Initialization (Asynchronous Mode) Before transmitting and receiving data, you should first clear the TE and RE bits in SCR to 0, then initialize the SCI as shown in figure 12.5. When the operating mode, transfer format, etc., is changed, the TE and RE bits must be cleared to 0 before making the change using the following procedure. When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the TDRE flag in SSR is set to 1. Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does not initialize the contents of the RDRF, PER, FER, and ORER flags in SSR, or the contents of RDR. When an external clock is used in asynchronous mode, the clock must be supplied even during initialization. [1] Set the clock selection in SCR. Be sure to clear bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE, and bits TE and RE, to 0. When the clock is selected in asynchronous mode, it is output immediately after SCR settings are made. [2] Set the data transfer/receive format in SMR and SCMR. [3] Write a value corresponding to the bit rate to BRR. Not necessary if an external clock is used. [4] Wait at least one bit interval, then set the TE bit or RE bit in SCR to 1. Also set the RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits. Setting the TE and RE bits enables the TxD and RxD pins to be used. [4] Start initialization Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0 Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR (TE and RE bits are 0) [1] Set data transfer/receive format in SMR and SCMR Set value in BRR [2] [3] Wait No 1-bit interval elapsed? Yes Set TE and RE bits in SCR to 1, and set RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits Figure 12.5 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 253 of 544 12.4.5 Data Transmission (Asynchronous Mode) Figure 12.6 shows an example of the operation for transmission in asynchronous mode. In transmission, the SCI operates as described below. 1. The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR, and if it is cleared to 0, recognizes that data has been written to TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR. 2. After transferring data from TDR to TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts transmission. If the TIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a transmit data empty interrupt request (TXI) is generated. Because the TXI interrupt routine writes the next transmit data to TDR before transmission of the current transmit data has finished, continuous transmission can be enabled. 3. Data is sent from the TxD pin in the following order: start bit, transmit data, parity bit or multiprocessor bit (may be omitted depending on the format), and stop bit. 4. The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the stop bit. 5. If the TDRE flag is 0, the data is transferred from TDR to TSR, the stop bit is sent, and then serial transmission of the next frame is started. 6. If the TDRE flag is 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, the stop bit is sent, and then the “mark state” is entered in which 1 is output. If the TEIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a TEI interrupt request is generated. Figure 12.7 shows a sample flowchart for transmission in asynchronous mode. Start bit Data Parity Stop Start bit bit bit Data Parity Stop bit bit 1 0 D0 D1 D7 0/1 1 0 D0 D1 D7 0/1 1 1 Idle state (mark state) TDRE TEND TXI interrupt Data written to TDR and TXI interrupt request generated TDRE flag cleared to 0 in request generated TXI interrupt handling routine TEI interrupt request generated 1 frame Figure 12.6 Example of SCI Transmit Operation in Asynchronous Mode (Example with 8Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 254 of 544 Initialization Start transmission [1] [1] SCI initialization: The TxD pin is automatically designated as the transmit data output pin. After the TE bit is set to 1, a frame of 1s is output, and transmission is enabled. SCI status check and transmit data write: Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0. Serial transmission continuation procedure: To continue serial transmission, read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is possible, then write data to TDR, and clear the TDRE flag to 0. Read TDRE flag in SSR [2] [2] No TDRE = 1 Yes Write transmit data to TDR and clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0 [3] No All data transmitted? [4] Yes [3] Read TEND flag in SSR Break output at the end of serial transmission: To output a break in serial transmission, set DDR for the port corresponding to the TxD pin to 1, clear DR to 0, then clear the TE bit in SCR to 0. No TEND = 1 Yes No Break output? Yes Clear DR to 0 and set DDR to 1 [4] Clear TE bit in SCR to 0 Figure 12.7 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 255 of 544 12.4.6 Serial Data Reception (Asynchronous Mode) Figure 12.8 shows an example of the operation for reception in asynchronous mode. In serial reception, the SCI operates as described below. 1. The SCI monitors the communication line, and if a start bit is detected, performs internal synchronization, receives receive data in RSR, and checks the parity bit and stop bit. 2. If an overrun error (when reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag in SSR is still set to 1) occurs, the ORER bit in SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated. Receive data is not transferred to RDR. The RDRF flag remains to be set to 1. 3. If a parity error is detected, the PER bit in SSR is set to 1 and receive data is transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated. 4. If a framing error (when the stop bit is 0) is detected, the FER bit in SSR is set to 1 and receive data is transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated. 5. If reception finishes successfully, the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, and receive data is transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an RXI interrupt request is generated. Because the RXI interrupt routine reads the receive data transferred to RDR before reception of the next receive data has finished, continuous reception can be enabled. Start bit 0 D0 D1 Data D7 Parity Stop Start bit bit bit 0/1 1 0 D0 D1 Data D7 Parity Stop bit bit 0/1 0 1 1 Idle state (mark state) RDRF FER RXI interrupt request generated 1 frame RDR data read and RDRF flag cleared to 0 in RXI interrupt handling routine ERI interrupt request generated by framing error Figure 12.8 Example of SCI Receive Operation in Asynchronous Mode (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit) Table 12.9 shows the states of the SSR status flags and receive data handling when a receive error is detected. If a receive error is detected, the RDRF flag retains its state before receiving data. Reception cannot be resumed while a receive error flag is set to 1. Accordingly, clear the ORER, FER, PER, and RDRF bits to 0 before resuming reception. Figure 12.9 shows a sample flow chart for serial data reception. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 256 of 544 Table 12.9 SSR Status Flags and Receive Data Handling SSR Status Flag RDRF* 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Note: * ORER 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 FER 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 PER 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 Receive Data Lost Transferred to RDR Transferred to RDR Lost Lost Transferred to RDR Lost Receive Error Type Overrun error Framing error Parity error Overrun error + framing error Overrun error + parity error Framing error + parity error Overrun error + framing error + parity error The RDRF flag retains the state it had before data reception. Initialization Start reception [1] [1] SCI initialization: The RxD pin is automatically designated as the receive data input pin. [2] [3] Receive error processing and break detection: Read ORER, PER, and If a receive error occurs, read the ORER, [2] FER flags in SSR PER, and FER flags in SSR to identify the error. After performing the appropriate Yes error processing, ensure that the ORER, PER ∨ FER ∨ ORER = 1 PER, and FER flags are all cleared to 0. [3] Reception cannot be resumed if any of No Error processing these flags are set to 1. In the case of a framing error, a break can be detected by (Continued on next page) reading the value of the input port corresponding to the RxD pin. [4] Read RDRF flag in SSR No [4] SCI status check and receive data read: Read SSR and check that RDRF = 1, then read the receive data in RDR and clear the RDRF flag to 0. Transition of the RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can also be identified by an RXI interrupt. [5] Serial reception continuation procedure: To continue serial reception, before the stop bit for the current frame is received, read the RDRF flag, read RDR, and clear the RDRF flag to 0. RDRF = 1 Yes Read receive data in RDR, and clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0 No All data received? Yes Clear RE bit in SCR to 0 [5] [Legend] ∨ : Logical OR Figure 12.9 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart (1) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 257 of 544 [3] Error processing No ORER = 1 Yes Overrun error processing No FER = 1 Yes Break? Yes No Framing error processing Clear RE bit in SCR to 0 No PER = 1 Yes Parity error processing Clear ORER, PER, and FER flags in SSR to 0 Figure 12.9 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart (2) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 258 of 544 12.5 Multiprocessor Communication Function Use of the multiprocessor communication function enables data transfer to be performed among a number of processors sharing communication lines by means of asynchronous serial communication using the multiprocessor format, in which a multiprocessor bit is added to the transfer data. When multiprocessor communication is carried out, each receiving station is addressed by a unique ID code. The serial communication cycle consists of two component cycles: an ID transmission cycle which specifies the receiving station, and a data transmission cycle for the specified receiving station. The multiprocessor bit is used to differentiate between the ID transmission cycle and the data transmission cycle. If the multiprocessor bit is 1, the cycle is an ID transmission cycle, and if the multiprocessor bit is 0, the cycle is a data transmission cycle. Figure 12.10 shows an example of inter-processor communication using the multiprocessor format. The transmitting station first sends the ID code of the receiving station with which it wants to perform serial communication as data with a 1 multiprocessor bit added. It then sends transmit data as data with a 0 multiprocessor bit added. The receiving station skips data until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is sent. When data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received, the receiving station compares that data with its own ID. The station whose ID matches then receives the data sent next. Stations whose ID does not match continue to skip data until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is again received. The SCI uses the MPIE bit in SCR to implement this function. When the MPIE bit is set to 1, transfer of receive data from RSR to RDR, error flag detection, and setting the SSR status flags, RDRF, FER, and ORER in SSR to 1 are prohibited until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received. On reception of a receive character with a 1 multiprocessor bit, the MPB bit in SSR is set to 1 and the MPIE bit is automatically cleared, thus normal reception is resumed. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an RXI interrupt is generated. When the multiprocessor format is selected, the parity bit setting is invalid. All other bit settings are the same as those in normal asynchronous mode. The clock used for multiprocessor communication is the same as that in normal asynchronous mode. Transmitting station Serial communication line Receiving station A (ID = 01) Serial data H'01 Receiving station B (ID = 02) Receiving station C (ID = 03) H'AA Receiving station D (ID = 04) (MPB = 1) [Legend] MPB: Multiprocessor bit (MPB = 0) Data transmission cycle = Data transmission to receiving station specified by ID ID transmission cycle = receiving station specification Figure 12.10 Example of Communication Using Multiprocessor Format (Transmission of Data H'AA to Receiving Station A) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 259 of 544 12.5.1 Multiprocessor Serial Data Transmission Figure 12.11 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial data transmission. For an ID transmission cycle, set the MPBT bit in SSR to 1 before transmission. For a data transmission cycle, clear the MPBT bit in SSR to 0 before transmission. All other SCI operations are the same as those in asynchronous mode. [1] SCI initialization: The TxD pin is automatically designated as the transmit data output pin. After the TE bit is set to 1, a frame of 1s is output, and transmission is enabled. [2] SCI status check and transmit data write: Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR. Set the MPBT bit in SSR to 0 or 1. Finally, clear the TDRE flag to 0. [3] Serial transmission continuation procedure: To continue serial transmission, be sure to read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is possible, then write data to TDR, and then clear the TDRE flag to 0. [4] Break output at the end of serial transmission: To output a break in serial transmission, set port DDR to 1, clear DR to 0, and then clear the TE bit in SCR to 0. Initialization Start transmission [1] Read TDRE flag in SSR No [2] TDRE = 1 Yes Write transmit data to TDR and set MPBT bit in SSR Clear TDRE flag to 0 All data transmitted? Yes Read TEND flag in SSR No [3] TEND = 1 Yes Break output? Yes Clear DR to 0 and set DDR to 1 No No [4] Clear TE bit in SCR to 0 Figure 12.11 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Transmission Flowchart Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 260 of 544 12.5.2 Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception Figure 12.13 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial data reception. If the MPIE bit in SCR is set to 1, data is skipped until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is sent. On receiving data with a 1 multiprocessor bit, the receive data is transferred to RDR. An RXI interrupt request is generated at this time. All other SCI operations are the same as in asynchronous mode. Figure 12.12 shows an example of SCI operation for multiprocessor format reception. Start bit Data (ID1) MPB Stop bit Start bit Data (Data 1) Stop MPB bit 1 1 0 D0 D1 D7 1 1 0 D0 D1 D7 0 1 Idle state (mark state) MPIE RDRF RDR value MPIE = 0 ID1 RXI interrupt request (multiprocessor interrupt) generated RDR data read and RDRF flag cleared to 0 in RXI interrupt handling routine If not this station’s ID, MPIE bit is set to 1 again RXI interrupt request is not generated, and RDR retains its state (a) Data does not match station’s ID 1 Start bit 0 D0 D1 Data (ID2) D7 Stop MPB bit 1 1 Start bit 0 D0 Data (Data 2) D1 D7 Stop MPB bit 0 1 1 Idle state (mark state) MPIE RDRF RDR value ID1 MPIE = 0 ID2 Data 2 MPIE bit set to 1 again RXI interrupt request (multiprocessor interrupt) generated RDR data read and RDRF flag cleared to 0 in RXI interrupt handling routine Matches this station’s ID, so reception continues, and data is received in RXI interrupt service routine (b) Data matches station’s ID Figure 12.12 Example of SCI Receive Operation (Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 261 of 544 Initialization Start reception [1] [1] SCI initialization: The RxD pin is automatically designated as the receive data input pin. ID reception cycle: Set the MPIE bit in SCR to 1. SCI status check, ID reception and comparison: Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR and compare it with this station’s ID. If the data is not this station’s ID, set the MPIE bit to 1 again, and clear the RDRF flag to 0. If the data is this station’s ID, clear the RDRF flag to 0. SCI status check and data reception: Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the data in RDR. Receive error processing and break detection: If a receive error occurs, read the ORER and FER flags in SSR to identify the error. After performing the appropriate error processing, ensure that the ORER and FER flags are all cleared to 0. Reception cannot be resumed if either of these flags is set to 1. In the case of a framing error, a break can be detected by reading the RxD pin value. [2] Set MPIE bit in SCR to 1 Read ORER and FER flags in SSR Yes [2] [3] FER ∨ ORER = 1 No Read RDRF flag in SSR No RDRF = 1 Yes Read receive data in RDR No This station’s ID? Yes Read ORER and FER flags in SSR [3] [4] [5] FER ∨ ORER = 1 No Read RDRF flag in SSR Yes [Legend] ∨ : Logical OR [4] No RDRF = 1 Yes Read receive data in RDR No All data received? Yes Clear RE bit in SCR to 0 (Continued on next page) [5] Error processing Figure 12.13 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (1) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 262 of 544 [5] Error processing No ORER = 1 Yes Overrun error processing No FER = 1 Yes Yes Break? No Framing error processing Clear RE bit in SCR to 0 Clear ORER, PER, and FER flags in SSR to 0 Figure 12.13 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (2) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 263 of 544 12.6 Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode Figure 12.14 shows the general format for clocked synchronous communication. In clocked synchronous mode, data is transmitted or received in synchronization with clock pulses. One character in transfer data consists of 8-bit data. In data transmission, the SCI outputs data from one falling edge of the synchronization clock to the next. In data reception, the SCI receives data in synchronization with the rising edge of the synchronization clock. After 8-bit data is output, the transmission line holds the MSB state. In clocked synchronous mode, no parity or multiprocessor bit is added. Inside the SCI, the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling fullduplex communication by use of a common clock. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a double-buffered structure, so that the next transmit data can be written during transmission or the previous receive data can be read during reception, enabling continuous data transfer. One unit of transfer data (character or frame) * * Synchronization clock LSB MSB Serial data Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Don’t care Note: * High except in continuous transfer/reception Don’t care Figure 12.14 Data Format in Clocked Synchronous Communication (LSB-First) 12.6.1 Clock Either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external synchronization clock input at the SCK pin can be selected, according to the setting of the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR. When the SCI is operated on an internal clock, the synchronization clock is output from the SCK pin. Eight synchronization clock pulses are output in the transfer of one character, and when no transfer is performed the clock is fixed high. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 264 of 544 12.6.2 SCI Initialization (Clocked Synchronous Mode) Before transmitting and receiving data, you should first clear the TE and RE bits in SCR to 0, then initialize the SCI as described in a sample flowchart in figure 12.15. When the operating mode, transfer format, etc., is changed, the TE and RE bits must be cleared to 0 before making the change using the following procedure. When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the TDRE flag in SSR is set to 1. However, clearing the RE bit to 0 does not initialize the RDRF, PER, FER, and ORER flags in SSR, or RDR. [1] Set the clock selection in SCR. Be sure to clear bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE, TE and RE to 0. [2] Set the data transfer/receive format in SMR and SCMR. [1] [3] Write a value corresponding to the bit rate to BRR. This step is not necessary if an external clock is used. [4] Wait at least one bit interval, then set the TE bit or RE bit in SCR to 1. Also set the RIE, TIE TEIE, and MPIE bits. Setting the TE and RE bits enables the TxD and RxD pins to be used. Start initialization Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0 Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR (TE and RE bits are 0) Set data transfer/receive format in SMR and SCMR Set value in BRR Wait No [2] [3] 1-bit interval elapsed? Yes Set TE and RE bits in SCR to 1, and set RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits [4] Note: * In simultaneous transmit and receive operations, the TE and RE bits should both be cleared Figure 12.15 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 265 of 544 12.6.3 Serial Data Transmission (Clocked Synchronous Mode) Figure 12.16 shows an example of SCI operation for transmission in clocked synchronous mode. In serial transmission, the SCI operates as described below. 1. The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR, and if it is 0, recognizes that data has been written to TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR. 2. After transferring data from TDR to TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts transmission. If the TIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a TXI interrupt request is generated. Because the TXI interrupt routine writes the next transmit data to TDR before transmission of the current transmit data has finished, continuous transmission can be enabled. 3. 8-bit data is sent from the TxD pin synchronized with the output clock when output clock mode has been specified and synchronized with the input clock when use of an external clock has been specified. 4. The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the last bit. 5. If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, data is transferred from TDR to TSR, and serial transmission of the next frame is started. 6. If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, and the TxD pin maintains the output state of the last bit. If the TEIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a TEI interrupt request is generated. The SCK pin is fixed high. Figure 12.17 shows a sample flow chart for serial data transmission. Even if the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, transmission will not start while a receive error flag (ORER, FER, or PER) is set to 1. Make sure to clear the receive error flags to 0 before starting transmission. Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does not clear the receive error flags. Transfer direction Synchronization clock Serial data TDRE TEND Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 6 Bit 7 TXI interrupt request generated Data written to TDR and TDRE flag cleared to 0 in TXI interrupt handling routine 1 frame TXI interrupt request generated TEI interrupt request generated Figure 12.16 Example of SCI Transmit Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 266 of 544 Initialization Start transmission [1] [1] SCI initialization: The TxD pin is automatically designated as the transmit data output pin. [2] SCI status check and transmit data write: Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0. [3] Serial transmission continuation procedure: To continue serial transmission, be sure to read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is possible, then Read TDRE flag in SSR No [2] TDRE = 1 Yes Write transmit data to TDR and clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0 All data transmitted? Yes Read TEND flag in SSR No [3] TEND = 1 Yes Clear TE bit in SCR to 0 No Figure 12.17 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 267 of 544 12.6.4 Serial Data Reception (Clocked Synchronous Mode) Figure 12.18 shows an example of SCI operation for reception in clocked synchronous mode. In serial reception, the SCI operates as described below. 1. The SCI performs internal initialization in synchronization with a synchronization clock input or output, starts receiving data, and stores the receive data in RSR. 2. If an overrun error (when reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag is still set to 1) occurs, the ORER bit in SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated. Receive data is not transferred to RDR. The RDRF flag remains to be set to 1. 3. If reception finishes successfully, the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, and receive data is transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an RXI interrupt request is generated. Because the RXI interrupt routine reads the receive data transferred to RDR before reception of the next receive data has finished, continuous reception can be enabled. Synchronization clock Serial data RDRF ORER RXI interrupt request generated RDR data read and RDRF flag cleared to 0 in RXI interrupt handling routine 1 frame RXI interrupt request generated ERI interrupt request generated by overrun error Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 6 Bit 7 Figure 12.18 Example of SCI Receive Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode Reception cannot be resumed while a receive error flag is set to 1. Accordingly, clear the ORER, FER, PER, and RDRF bits to 0 before resuming reception. Figure 12.19 shows a sample flowchart for serial data reception. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 268 of 544 Initialization Start reception [1] [1] SCI initialization: The RxD pin is automatically designated as the receive data input pin. [2] [3] Receive error processing: If a receive error occurs, read the ORER flag in SSR, and after performing the appropriate error processing, clear the ORER flag to 0. Transfer cannot be resumed if the ORER flag is set to 1. Read ORER flag in SSR [2] ORER = 1 Yes [3] No Error processing No No (Continued below) [4] SCI status check and receive data read: Read RDRF flag in SSR [4] Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR and clear the RDRF flag RDRF = 1 to 0. Yes Transition of the RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can also be identified by an RXI Read receive data in RDR and interrupt. clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0 [5] Serial reception continuation procedure: [5] All data received? Yes Clear RE bit in SCR to 0 [3] Error processing Overrun error processing Clear ORER flag in SSR to 0 Figure 12.19 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart 12.6.5 Simultaneous Serial Data Transmission and Reception (Clocked Synchronous Mode) Figure 12.20 shows a sample flowchart for simultaneous serial transmit and receive operations. After initializing the SCI, the following procedure should be used for simultaneous serial data transmit and receive operations. To switch from transmit mode to simultaneous transmit and receive mode, check that the SCI has finished transmission and the TDRE and TEND flags in SSR are set to 1, clear the TE bit in SCR to 0, and then set the TE and RE bits to 1 simultaneously with a single instruction. To switch from receive mode to simultaneous transmit and receive mode, check that the SCI has finished reception, and clear the RE bit to 0. Then after checking that the RDRF bit in SSR and receive error flags (ORER, FER, and PER) are cleared to 0, set the TE and RE bits to 1 simultaneously with a single instruction. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 269 of 544 Initialization Start transmission/reception [1] Read TDRE flag in SSR No TDRE = 1 Yes Write transmit data to TDR and clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0 [2] [1] SCI initialization: The TxD pin is designated as the transmit data output pin, and the RxD pin is designated as the receive data input pin, enabling simultaneous transmit and receive operations. [2] SCI status check and transmit data write: Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0. Transition of the TDRE flag from 0 to 1 can also be identified by a TXI interrupt. [3] Receive error processing: If a receive error occurs, read the ORER flag in SSR, and after performing the appropriate error processing, clear the ORER flag to 0. Transmission/reception cannot be resumed if the ORER flag is set to 1. [4] SCI status check and receive data read: Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR and clear the RDRF flag to 0. Transition of the RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can also be identified by an RXI interrupt. [5] Serial transmission/reception continuation procedure: To continue serial transmission/ reception, before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is received, finish reading the RDRF flag, reading RDR, and clearing the RDRF flag to 0. Also, before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is transmitted, read 1 from the Read ORER flag in SSR Yes [3] Error processing [4] ORER = 1 No Read RDRF flag in SSR No RDRF = 1 Yes Read receive data in RDR, and clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0 No All data received? Yes Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0 [5] Note: * When switching from transmit or receive operation to simultaneous transmit and receive operations, first clear the TE bit and RE bit to 0, then set both these bits to 1 simultaneously. Figure 12.20 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Transmission and Reception Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 270 of 544 12.7 Interrupt Sources Table 12.10 shows the interrupt sources in serial communication interface. A different interrupt vector is assigned to each interrupt source, and individual interrupt sources can be enabled or disabled using the enable bits in SCR. When the TDRE flag in SSR is set to 1, a TXI interrupt request is generated. When the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, a TEI interrupt request is generated. When the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1, an RXI interrupt request is generated. When the ORER, PER, or FER flag in SSR is set to 1, an ERI interrupt request is generated. A TEI interrupt is requested when the TEND flag is set to 1 while the TEIE bit is set to 1. If a TEI interrupt and a TXI interrupt are requested simultaneously, the TXI interrupt has priority for acceptance. However, note that if the TDRE and TEND flags are cleared simultaneously by the TXI interrupt routine, the SCI cannot branch to the TEI interrupt routine later. Table 12.10 SCI Interrupt Sources Channel 1 Name ERI1 RXI1 TXI1 TEI1 Interrupt Source Receive error Receive data full Transmit data empty Transmit end Interrupt Flag ORER, FER, PER RDRF TDRE TEND Low Priority High Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 271 of 544 12.8 12.8.1 Usage Notes Module Stop Mode Setting SCI operation can be disabled or enabled using the module stop control register. The initial setting is for SCI operation to be halted. Register access is enabled by clearing module stop mode. For details, refer to section 20, Power-Down Modes. 12.8.2 Break Detection and Processing When framing error detection is performed, a break can be detected by reading the RxD pin value directly. In a break, the input from the RxD pin becomes all 0s, and so the FER flag in SSR is set, and the PER flag may also be set. Note that, since the SCI continues the receive operation even after receiving a break, even if the FER flag is cleared to 0, it will be set to 1 again. 12.8.3 Mark State and Break Detection When the TE bit in SCR is 0, the TxD pin is used as an I/O port whose direction (input or output) and level are determined by DR and DDR of the port. This can be used to set the TxD pin to the mark state (high level) or send a break during serial data transmission. To maintain the communication line at mark state until TE is set to 1, set both DDR and DR to 1. Since the TE bit is cleared to 0 at this point, the TxD pin becomes an I/O port, and 1 is output from the TxD pin. To send a break during serial transmission, first set DDR to 1 and DR to 0, and then clear the TE bit to 0. When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the transmitter is initialized regardless of the current transmission state, the TxD pin becomes an I/O port, and 0 is output from the TxD pin. 12.8.4 Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operations (Clocked Synchronous Mode Only) Transmission cannot be started when a receive error flag (ORER, FER, or RER) is SSR is set to 1, even if the TDRE flag in SSR is cleared to 0. Be sure to clear the receive error flags to 0 before starting transmission. Note also that the receive error flags cannot be cleared to 0 even if the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0. 12.8.5 Relation between Writing to TDR and TDRE Flag Data can be written to TDR irrespective of the TDRE flag status in SSR. However, if the new data is written to TDR when the TDRE flag is 0, that is, when the previous data has not been transferred to TSR yet, the previous data in TDR is lost. Be sure to write transmit data to TDR after verifying that the TDRE flag is set to 1. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 272 of 544 12.8.6 SCI Operations during Mode Transitions Transmission: Before making a transition to module stop, software standby, or sub-sleep mode, stop all transmit operations (TE = TIE = TEIE = 0). TSR, TDR, and SSR are reset. The states of the output pins during each mode depend on the port settings, and the pins output a high-level signal after mode cancellation. If a transition is made during data transmission, the data being transmitted will be undefined. To transmit data in the same transmission mode after mode cancellation, set TE to 1, read SSR, write to TDR, clear TDRE in this order, and then start transmission. To transmit data in a different transmission mode, initialize the SCI first. Figure 12.21 shows a sample flowchart for mode transition during transmission. Figures 12.22 and 12.23 show the pin states during transmission. Reception: Before making a transition to module stop, software standby, watch, sub-active, or sub-sleep mode, stop reception (RE = 0). RSR, RDR, and SSR are reset. If a transition is made during data reception, the data being received will be invalid. To receive data in the same reception mode after mode cancellation, set RE to 1, and then start reception. To receive data in a different reception mode, initialize the SCI first. Figure 12.24 shows a sample flowchart for mode transition during reception. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 273 of 544 Transmission All data transmitted? No [1] Yes Read TEND flag in SSR [1] Data being transmitted is lost halfway. Data can be normally transmitted from the CPU by setting TE to 1, reading SSR, writing to TDR, and clearing TDRE to 0 after mode cancellation. [2] Also clear TIE and TEIE to 0 when they are 1. [3] Module stop, watch, sub-active, and sub-sleep modes are included. TEND = 1 No Yes TE = 0 [2] [3] Make transition to software standby mode etc. Cancel software standby mode etc. Change operating mode? No Yes Initialization TE = 1 Start transmission Figure 12.21 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Transmission Transition to Software standby Transmission end software standby mode cancelled mode Transmission start TE bit SCK output pin TxD output pin Port input/output Port input/output High output Start SCI TxD output Stop Port input/output High output Port SCI TxD output Port Figure 12.22 Pin States during Transmission in Asynchronous Mode (Internal Clock) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 274 of 544 Transmission start Transmission end Transition to Software standby software standby mode cancelled mode TE bit SCK output pin TxD output pin Port input/output Port input/output Marking output SCI TxD output Last TxD bit retained Port input/output Port High output* SCI TxD output Port Note: * Initialized in software standby mode Figure 12.23 Pin States during Transmission in Clocked Synchronous Mode (Internal Clock) Reception Read RDRF flag in SSR RDRF = 1 Yes Read receive data in RDR No [1] [1] Data being received will be invalid. [2] Module stop, watch, sub-active, and sub-sleep modes are included RE = 0 [2] Make transition to software standby mode etc. Cancel software standby mode etc. No Change operating mode? Yes Initialization RE = 1 Start reception Figure 12.24 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Reception Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 275 of 544 12.8.7 Switching from SCK Pins to Port Pins When SCK pins are switched to port pins after transmission has completed, pins are enabled for port output after outputting a low pulse of half a cycle as shown in figure 12.25. Low pulse of half a cycle SCK/Port 1. Transmission end Data TE C/A CKE1 CKE0 Bit 6 Bit 7 2. TE = 0 3. C/A = 0 4. Low pulse output Figure 12.25 Switching from SCK Pins to Port Pins To prevent the low pulse output that is generated when switching the SCK pins to the port pins, specify the SCK pins for input (pull up the SCK/port pins externally), and follow the procedure below with DDR = 1, DR = 1, C/A = 1, CKE1 = 0, CKE1 = 0, and TE = 1. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. End serial data transmission TE bit = 0 CKE1 bit = 1 C/A bit = 0 (switch to port output) CKE1 bit = 0 High output SCK/Port Data TE C/A 3. CKE1 = 1 CKE1 CKE0 Bit 6 1. Transmission end Bit 7 2. TE = 0 4. C/A = 0 5. CKE1 = 0 Figure 12.26 Prevention of Low Pulse Output at Switching from SCK Pins to Port Pins Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 276 of 544 Section 13 I2C Bus Interface (IIC) This LSI has a two-channel I2C bus interface. The I2C bus interface conforms to and provides a subset of the Philips I2C bus (inter-IC bus) interface functions. The register configuration that controls the I2C bus differs partly from the Philips configuration, however. 13.1 Features • Selection of addressing format or non-addressing format  I2C bus format: addressing format with an acknowledge bit, for master/slave operation  Clocked synchronous serial format: non-addressing format without an acknowledge bit, for master operation only • Conforms to Philips I2C bus interface (I2C bus format) • Two ways of setting slave address (I2C bus format) • Start and stop conditions generated automatically in master mode (I2C bus format) • Selection of the acknowledge output level in reception (I2C bus format) • Automatic loading of an acknowledge bit in transmission (I2C bus format) • Wait function in master mode (I2C bus format)  A wait can be inserted by driving the SCL pin low after data transfer, excluding acknowledgement.  The wait can be cleared by clearing the interrupt flag. • Wait function (I2C bus format)  A wait request can be generated by driving the SCL pin low after data transfer.  The wait request is cleared when the next transfer becomes possible. • Interrupt sources  Data transfer end (including when a transition to transmit mode with I2C bus format occurs, when ICDR data is transferred, or during a wait state)  Address match: When any slave address matches or the general call address is received in slave receive mode with I2C bus format (including address reception after loss of master arbitration)  Start condition detection (in master mode)  Stop condition detection (in slave mode) • Selection of 16 internal clocks (in master mode) • Direct bus drive (SCL/SDA pin)  Eight pins—P52/SCL0, P97/SDA0, P86/SCL1, P42/SDA1, PG4/ExSDAA, PG5/ExSCLA, PG6/ExSDAB, and PG7/ExSCLB—(normally NMOS push-pull outputs) function as NMOS open-drain outputs when the bus drive function is selected. IFIIC60B_010020040200 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 277 of 544 • Selectable input/output pins*  Pins, PG4/ExSDAA, PG5/ExSCLA, PG6/ExSDAB, and PG7/ExSCLB, are selectable for the I2C bus input/output pin in each channel. Note: * The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. Figure 13.1 shows a block diagram of the I2C bus interface. Figure 13.2 shows an example of I/O pin connections to external circuits. Since I2C bus interface I/O pins are different in structure from normal port pins, they have different specifications for permissible applied voltages. For details, see section 22, Electrical Characteristics. ICXR φ SCL ExSCLA* ExSCLB* Pin selection circuit PS Clock control ICCR Noise canceler ICMR PGCTL Bus state decision circuit Arbitration decision circuit ICSR ICDRT SDA ExSDAA* ExSDAB* Pin selection circuit Output data control circuit ICDRS ICDRR Noise canceler Address comparator [Legend] ICCR: I2C bus control register ICMR: I2C bus mode register ICSR: I2C bus status register ICDR: I2C bus data register ICXR: I2C bus extended control register Slave address register SAR: SARX: Slave address register X Prescaler PS: PGCTL: Port G control register SAR, SARX Interrupt generator Interrupt request Note: * The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. Figure 13.1 Block Diagram of I2C Bus Interface Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 278 of 544 Internal data bus VCC VDD VCC SCL SCL in SCL out SDA SCL SDA SDA in SDA out (Master) This LSI SCL SDA SCL in SCL out SCL in SCL out SDA in SDA out (Slave 1) SDA in SDA out (Slave 2) Figure 13.2 I2C Bus Interface Connections (Example: This LSI as Master) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 279 of 544 SCL SDA 13.2 Input/Output Pins Table 13.1 summarizes the input/output pins used by the I2C bus interface. The serial clock I/O pin for each channel can be selected from the three pins*. The serial data I/O pin for each channel can be selected form the three pins*. Do not set multiple pins as the serial clock I/O pin or serial data I/O pin for a single channel. Note: * The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. Table 13.1 Pin Configuration Channel 0 Symbol*1 SCL0 SDA0 1  SCL1 SDA1 ExSCLA* 2 2 Input/Output Input/Output Input/Output Input/Output Input/Output Input/Output Input/Output Input/Output Input/Output Function Serial clock input/output pin of IIC_0 Serial data input/output pin of IIC_0 Serial clock input/output pin of IIC_1 Serial data input/output pin of IIC_1 Serial clock input/output pin of IIC_0 or IIC_1 Serial data input/output pin of IIC_0 or IIC_1 Serial clock input/output pin of IIC_0 or IIC_1 Serial data input/output pin of IIC_0 or IIC_1 ExSDAA* ExSCLB*2 ExSDAB* 2 Notes: 1. In the text, the channel subscript is omitted, and only SCL and SDA are used. 2. The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 280 of 544 13.3 Register Descriptions The I2C bus interface has the following registers. Registers ICDR and SARX and registers ICMR and SAR are allocated to the same addresses. Accessible registers differ depending on the ICE bit in ICCR. When the ICE bit is cleared to 0, SAR and SARX can be accessed, and when the ICE bit is set to 1, ICMR and ICDR can be accessed. For details on the serial timer control register, see section 3.2.3, Serial Timer Control Register (STCR). • I2C bus data register (ICDR) • Slave address register (SAR) • Second slave address register (SARX) • I2C bus mode register (ICMR) • I2C bus control register (ICCR) • I2C bus status register (ICSR) • DDC switch register (DDCSWR)*1 • I2C bus extended control register (ICXR) • Port G control register (PGCTL)*2 Notes: 1. DDCSWR is available only for IIC_0. 2. PGCTL register is common to IIC_0 and IIC_1. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 281 of 544 13.3.1 I2C Bus Data Register (ICDR) ICDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that is used as a transmit data register when transmitting and a receive data register when receiving. ICDR is internally divided into a shift register (ICDRS), receive buffer (ICDRR), and transmit buffer (ICDRT). Data transfers among these three registers are performed automatically in accordance with changes in the bus state, and they affect the status of internal flags such as ICDRE and ICDRF. In master transmit mode with the I2C bus format, writing transmit data to ICDR should be performed after start condition detection. When the start condition is detected, previous write data is ignored. In slave transmit mode, writing should be performed after the slave addresses match and the TRS bit is automatically changed to 1. If the IIC is in transmit mode (TRS = 1) and ICDRT has the next transmit data (the ICDRE flag is 0) after successful transmission/reception of one frame of data using ICDRS, data is transferred automatically from ICDRT to ICDRS. If the IIC is in transmit mode (TRS = 1) and ICDRT has the next data (the ICDRE flag is 0), data is transferred automatically from ICDRT to ICDRS, following transmission of one frame of data using ICDRS. When the ICDRE flag is 1 and the next transmit data writing is waited, data is transferred automatically from ICDRT to ICDRS by writing to ICDR. If I2C is in receive mode (TRS = 0), no data is transferred from ICDRT to ICDRS. Note that data should not be written to ICDR in receive mode. Reading receive data from ICDR is performed after data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR. If I2C is in receive mode and no previous data remains in ICDRR (the ICDRF flag is 0), data is transferred automatically from ICDRS to ICDRR, following reception of one frame of data using ICDRS. If additional data is received while the ICDRF flag is 1, data is transferred automatically from ICDRS to ICDRR by reading from ICDR. In transmit mode, no data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR. Always set I2C to receive mode before reading from ICDR. If the number of bits in a frame, excluding the acknowledge bit, is less than eight, transmit data and receive data are stored differently. Transmit data should be written justified toward the MSB side when MLS = 0 in ICMR, and toward the LSB side when MLS = 1. Receive data bits should be read from the LSB side when MLS = 0, and from the MSB side when MLS = 1. ICDR can be written to and read from only when the ICE bit is set to 1 in ICCR. The initial value of ICDR is undefined. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 282 of 544 13.3.2 Slave Address Register (SAR) SAR sets the slave address and selects the communication format. If the LSI is in slave mode with the I2C bus format selected, when the FS bit is set to 0 and the upper 7 bits of SAR match the upper 7 bits of the first frame received after a start condition, the LSI operates as the slave device specified by the master device. SAR can be accessed only when the ICE bit in ICCR is cleared to 0. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name SVA6 SVA5 SVA4 SVA3 SVA2 SVA1 SVA0 FS Initial Value R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Format Select Selects the communication format together with the FSX bit in SARX. See table 13.2. This bit should be set to 0 when general call address recognition is performed. Description Slave Address 6 to 0 Set a slave address. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 283 of 544 13.3.3 Second Slave Address Register (SARX) SARX sets the second slave address and selects the communication format. If the LSI is in slave mode with the I2C bus format selected, when the FSX bit is set to 0 and the upper 7 bits of SARX match the upper 7 bits of the first frame received after a start condition, the LSI operates as the slave device specified by the master device. SARX can be accessed only when the ICE bit in ICCR is cleared to 0. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name SVAX6 SVAX5 SVAX4 SVAX3 SVAX2 SVAX1 SVAX0 FSX Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Format Select X Selects the communication format together with the FS bit in SAR. See table 13.2. Description Second Slave Address 6 to 0 Set the second slave address. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 284 of 544 Table 13.2 Communication Format SAR FS 0 SARX FSX 0 Operating Mode I2C bus format • • 1 2 SAR and SARX slave addresses recognized General call address recognized SAR slave address recognized SARX slave address ignored General call address recognized SAR slave address ignored SARX slave address recognized General call address ignored SAR and SARX slave addresses ignored General call address ignored I C bus format • • • 1 0 I C bus format • • • 2 1 Clocked synchronous serial format • • • I2C bus format: addressing format with an acknowledge bit • Clocked synchronous serial format: non-addressing format without an acknowledge bit, for master mode only Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 285 of 544 13.3.4 I2C Bus Mode Register (ICMR) ICMR sets the communication format and transfer rate. It can only be accessed when the ICE bit in ICCR is set to 1. Bit 7 Bit Name MLS Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description MSB-First/LSB-First Select 0: MSB-first 1: LSB-first Set this bit to 0 when the I C bus format is used. 6 WAIT 0 R/W Wait Insertion Bit This bit is valid only in master mode with the I C bus format. 0: Data and the acknowledge bit are transferred consecutively with no wait inserted. 1: After the fall of the clock for the final data bit (8 clock), the IRIC flag is set to 1 in ICCR, and a wait state begins (with SCL at the low level). When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0 in ICCR, the wait ends and the acknowledge bit is transferred. For details, see section 13.4.7, IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control. 5 4 3 CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Transfer Clock Select 2 to 0 These bits are used only in master mode. These bits select the required transfer rate, together with the IICX1 (IIC_1) and IICX0 (IIC_0) bits in STCR. See table 13.3. th 2 2 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 286 of 544 Bit 2 1 0 Bit Name BC2 BC1 BC0 Initial Value 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Bit Counter 2 to 0 These bits specify the number of bits to be transferred next. Bit BC2 to BC0 settings should be made during an interval between transfer frames. If bits BC2 to BC0 are set to a value other than 000, the setting should be made while the SCL line is low. The bit counter is initialized to 000 when a start condition is detected. The value returns to 000 at the end of a data transfer. I C Bus Format 000: 9 bits 001: 2 bits 010: 3 bits 011: 4 bits 100: 5 bits 101: 6 bits 110: 7 bits 111: 8 bits 2 Clocked Synchronous Serial Mode 000: 8 bits 001: 1 bits 010: 2 bits 011: 3 bits 100: 4 bits 101: 5 bits 110: 6 bits 111: 7 bits Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 287 of 544 Table 13.3 I2C Transfer Rate STCR Bits 5 and 6 IICX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit 5 CKS2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 ICMR Bit 4 CKS1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Bit 3 CKS0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Clock φ/28 φ/40 φ/48 φ/64 φ/80 φ/100 φ/112 φ/128 φ/56 φ/80 φ/96 φ/128 φ/160 φ/200 φ/224 φ/256 φ = 5 MHz 179 kHz 125 kHz 104 kHz 78.1 kHz 62.5 kHz 50.0 kHz 44.6 kHz 39.1 kHz 89.3 kHz 62.5 kHz 52.1 kHz 39.1 kHz 31.3 kHz 25.0 kHz 22.3 kHz 19.5 kHz Transfer Rate φ = 8 MHz 286 kHz 200 kHz 167 kHz 125 kHz 100 kHz 80.0 kHz 71.4 kHz 62.5 kHz 143 kHz 100 kHz 83.3 kHz 62.5 kHz 50.0 kHz 40.0 kHz 35.7 kHz 31.3 kHz φ = 10 MHz 357 kHz 250 kHz 208 kHz 156 kHz 125 kHz 100 kHz 89.3 kHz 78.1 kHz 179 kHz 125 kHz 104 kHz 78.1 kHz 62.5 kHz 50.0 kHz 44.6 kHz 39.1 kHz Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 288 of 544 13.3.5 I2C Bus Control Register (ICCR) ICCR controls the I2C bus interface and performs interrupt flag confirmation. Bit 7 Bit Name ICE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description I2C Bus Interface Enable 0: I C bus interface modules are stopped and I C bus interface module internal state is initialized. SAR and SARX can be accessed. 1: I C bus interface modules can perform transfer operation, and the ports function as the SCL and SDA input/output pins. ICMR and ICDR can be accessed. 6 IEIC 0 R/W I2C Bus Interface Interrupt Enable 0: Disables interrupts from the I C bus interface to the CPU 1: Enables interrupts from the I2C bus interface to the CPU. 5 4 MST TRS 0 0 R/W R/W Master/Slave Select Transmit/Receive Select MST 0 0 1 1 TRS 0 1 0 1 : Slave receive mode : Slave transmit mode : Master receive mode : Master transmit mode 2 2 2 2 Both these bits will be cleared by hardware when they 2 lose in a bus contention in master mode with the I C bus 2 format. In slave receive mode with I C bus format, the R/W bit in the first frame immediately after the start condition sets these bits in receive mode or transmit mode automatically by hardware. Modification of the TRS bit during transfer is deferred until transfer is completed, and the changeover is made after completion of the transfer. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 289 of 544 Bit 5 4 Bit Name MST TRS Initial Value 0 0 R/W R/W Description [MST clearing conditions] 1. When 0 is written by software 2. When lost in bus contention in I2C bus format master mode [MST setting conditions] 1. When 1 is written by software (for MST clearing condition 1) 2. When 1 is written in MST after reading MST = 0 (for MST clearing condition 2) [TRS clearing conditions] 1. When 0 is written by software (except for TRS setting condition 3) 2. When 0 is written in TRS after reading TRS = 1 (for TRS setting condition 3) 3. When lost in bus contention in I2C bus format master mode [TRS setting conditions] 1. When 1 is written by software (except for TRS clearing condition 3) 2. When 1 is written in TRS after reading TRS = 0 (for TRS clearing condition 3) 3. When 1 is received as the R/W bit after the first frame address matching in I2C bus format slave mode 3 ACKE 0 R/W Acknowledge Bit Decision and Selection 0: The value of the acknowledge bit is ignored, and continuous transfer is performed. The value of the received acknowledge bit is not indicated by the ACKB bit in ICSR, which is always 0. 1: If the received acknowledge bit is 1, continuous transfer is halted. Depending on the receiving device, the acknowledge bit may be significant, in indicating completion of processing of the received data, for instance, or may be fixed at 1 and have no significance. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 290 of 544 Bit 2 0 Initial Bit Name Value BBSY SCP 0 1 R/W R/W* W Description Bus Busy Start Condition/Stop Condition Prohibit In master mode: • • Writing 0 in BBSY and 0 in SCP: A stop condition is issued Writing 1 in BBSY and 0 in SCP: A start condition and a restart condition are issued Writing to the BBSY flag is disabled. In slave mode: • [BBSY setting condition] When the SDA level changes from high to low under the condition of SCL = high, assuming that the start condition has been issued. [BBSY clearing condition] When the SDA level changes from low to high under the condition of SCL = high, assuming that the stop condition has been issued. To issue a start/stop condition, use the MOV instruction. The I C bus interface must be set in master transmit mode before the issue of a start condition. Set MST to 1 and TRS to 1 before writing 1 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. The BBSY flag can be read to check whether the I2C bus (SCL, SDA) is busy or free. The SCP bit is always read as 1. If 0 is written, the data is not stored. Note: * The value in BBSY flag does not change even if written. 2 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 291 of 544 Bit 1 Bit Name IRIC Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* Description I2C Bus Interface Interrupt Request Flag Indicates that the I C bus interface has issued an interrupt request to the CPU. IRIC is set at different times depending on the FS bit in SAR, the FSX bit in SARX, and the WAIT bit in ICMR. See section 13.4.7, IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control. The conditions under which IRIC is set also differ depending on the setting of the ACKE bit in ICCR. [Setting conditions] I C bus format master mode: • When a start condition is detected in the bus line state after a start condition is issued (when the ICDRE flag is set to 1 because of first frame transmission) When a wait is inserted between the data and acknowledge bit when the WAIT bit is 1 (fall of the 8th transmit/receive clock) At the end of data transfer (rise of the 9th transmit/receive clock while no wait is inserted) When a slave address is received after bus arbitration is lost (the first frame after the start condition) If 1 is received as the acknowledge bit (when the ACKB bit in ICSR is set to 1) when the ACKE bit is 1 When the AL flag is set to 1 after bus arbitration is lost while the ALIE bit is 1 When the slave address (SVA or SVAX) matches (when the AAS or AASX flag in ICSR is set to 1) and at the end of data transfer up to the subsequent retransmission start condition or stop condition detection (rise of the 9th transmit/receive clock) When the general call address is detected (when 0 is received as the R/W bit and the ADZ flag in ICSR is set to 1) and at the end of data reception up to the subsequent retransmission start condition or stop condition detection (rise of the 9th receive clock) If 1 is received as the acknowledge bit (when the ACKB bit in ICSR is set to 1) while the ACKE bit is 1 When a stop condition is detected (when the STOP or ESTP flag in ICSR is set to 1) while the STOPIM bit is 0 2 2 • • • • • I2C bus format slave mode: • • • • Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 292 of 544 Bit 1 Bit Name IRIC Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* Description Clocked synchronous serial format mode: • • At the end of data transfer (rise of the 8th transmit/receive) When a start condition is detected When the ICDRE or ICDRF flag is set to 1 in any operating mode: • When a start condition is detected in transmit mode (when a start condition is detected in transmit mode and the ICDRE flag is set to 1) When data is transferred among ICDR and buffer (when data is transferred from ICDRT to ICDRS in transmit mode and the ICDRE flag is set to 1, or when data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR in receive mode and the ICDRF flag is set to 1) When 0 is written in IRIC after reading IRIC = 1 • [Clearing conditions] • Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. When, with the I2C bus format selected, IRIC is set to 1 and an interrupt is generated, other flags must be checked in order to identify the source that set IRIC to 1. Although each source has a corresponding flag, caution is needed at the end of a transfer. When the ICDRE or ICDRF flag is set, the IRTR flag may or may not be set. The IRTR flag is not set at the end of a data transfer up to detection of a retransmission start condition or stop condition after a slave address (SVA) or general call address match in I2C bus format slave mode. Tables 13.4 and 13.5 show the relationship between the flags and the transfer states. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 293 of 544 Table 13.4 Flags and Transfer States (Master Mode) MST 1 1 1 1 TRS 1 1 — 1 BBSY ESTP STOP IRTR AASX AL 0 0 0 0 AAS 0↓ 0 0 0 ADZ 0↓ 0 0 0 ACKB ICDRF ICDRE State Idle state (flag clearing required) Start condition detected Wait state Transmission end (ACKE=1 and ACKB=1) Transmission end with ICDRE=0 ICDR write with the above state Transmission end with ICDRE=1 ICDR write with the above state or after start condition detected Automatic data transfer from ICDRT to ICDRS with the above state Reception end with ICDRF=0 ICDR read with the above state Reception end with ICDRF=1 ICDR read with the above state Automatic data transfer from ICDRS to ICDRR with the above state Arbitration lost Stop condition detected 0 1↑ 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1↑ — — 0↓ 0 0 0 0 0 — 1↑ — — — — 0 1↑ — — 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1↑ — — — 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 — — — — 1↑ 0↓ 1 0↓ 1 1 1 0 0 1↑ 0 0 0 0 0 — 1↑ 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1↑ — — — 1↑ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 — — — — — 1↑ 0↓ 1 0↓ 1↑ — — — — — 0↓ 1 0↓ — 1 0↓ 0 0 0 0 — — 0 0 1↑ 0 0 0 0 0 — — — — — 0↓ [Legend] 0: 0-state retained 1: 1-state retained —: Previous state retained 0↓: Cleared to 0 Set to 1 1↑: Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 294 of 544 Table 13.5 Flags and Transfer States (Slave Mode) MST 0 TRS 0 BBSY ESTP STOP IRTR AASX AL 0 AAS 0 ADZ 0 ACKB ICDRF ICDRE State Idle state (flag clearing required) 0 0 0 0 0 0 — 0 0 0 1↑ 0 0 0 0↓ 0 0 0 0 — 1↑ Start condition detected 0 1↑/0 *1 1 0 0 0 0 — 1↑ 0 0 1↑ 1 SAR match in first frame (SARX≠SAR) 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 — 1↑ 1↑ 0 1↑ 1 General call address match in first frame (SARX≠H’00) 0 1↑/0 *1 1 0 0 1↑ 1↑ — 0 0 0 1↑ 1 SARS match in first frame (SAR≠SARX) 0 1 1 0 0 — — — — 0 1↑ — — Transmission end (ACKE=1 and ACKB=1) 0 1 1 0 0 1↑/0 *1 — — — 0 0 — 1↑ Transmission end with ICDRE=0 0 1 1 0 0 — — 0↓ 0↓ 0 0 — 0↓ ICDR write with the above state 0 1 1 0 0 — — — — 1 0 1 Transmission end with ICDRE=1 0 1 1 0 0 — — 0↓ 0↓ 0 0 0↓ ICDR write with the above state 0 1 1 0 0 1↑/0 *2 — 0 0 0 0 1↑ Automatic data transfer from ICDRT to ICDRS with the above state 0 0 1 0 0 1↑/0 *2 — — — — — 1↑ — Reception end with ICDRF=0 0 0 1 0 0 — — 0↓ 0↓ 0↓ — 0↓ — ICDR read with the above state Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 295 of 544 Table 13.5 Flags and Transfer States (Slave Mode) (cont) MST 0 0 0 TRS 0 0 0 BBSY ESTP STOP IRTR AASX AL — 0↓ 0 AAS — 0↓ 0 ADZ — 0↓ 0 ACKB ICDRF ICDRE State Reception end with ICDRF=1 ICDR read with the above state Automatic data transfer from ICDRS to ICDRR with the above state Stop condition detected 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 — — 1↑/0 *2 — — — — — — 1 0↓ 1↑ — — — 0 — 0↓ 1↑/0 *3 0/1↑ *3 — — — — — — — 0↓ [Legend] 0: 0-state retained 1: 1-state retained —: Previous state retained Cleared to 0 0↓: Set to 1 1↑: Notes: 1. Set to 1 when 1 is received as a R/W bit following an address. 2. Set to 1 when the AASX bit is set to 1. 3. When ESTP = 1, STOP is 0, or when STOP = 1, ESTP is 0. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 296 of 544 13.3.6 I2C Bus Status Register (ICSR) ICSR consists of status flags. Also see tables 13.4 and 13.5. Bit 7 Bit Name ESTP Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* Description Error Stop Condition Detection Flag This bit is valid in I2C bus format slave mode. [Setting condition] When a stop condition is detected during frame transfer. [Clearing conditions] • • 6 STOP 0 R/(W)* When 0 is written in ESTP after reading ESTP = 1 When the IRIC flag in ICCR is cleared to 0 Normal Stop Condition Detection Flag This bit is valid in I2C bus format slave mode. [Setting condition] When a stop condition is detected after frame transfer completion. [Clearing conditions] • • When 0 is written in STOP after reading STOP = 1 When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0 5 IRTR 0 R/(W)* I C Bus Interface Continuous Transfer Interrupt Request Flag Indicates that the I2C bus interface has issued an interrupt request to the CPU, and the source is completion of reception/transmission of one frame in continuous transmission/reception. When the IRTR flag is set to 1, the IRIC flag is also set to 1 at the same time. [Setting conditions] I2C bus format slave mode: • When the ICDRE or ICDRF flag in ICDR is set to 1 when AASX = 1 2 Master mode or clocked synchronous serial format mode with I2C bus format: • • • When the ICDRE or ICDRF flag is set to 1 When 0 is written after reading IRTR = 1 When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0 while ICE is 1 [Clearing conditions] Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 297 of 544 Bit 4 Bit Name AASX Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* Description Second Slave Address Recognition Flag In I2C bus format slave receive mode, this flag is set to 1 if the first frame following a start condition matches bits SVAX6 to SVAX0 in SARX. [Setting condition] When the second slave address is detected in slave receive mode and FSX = 0 in SARX [Clearing conditions] • • • When 0 is written in AASX after reading AASX = 1 When a start condition is detected In master mode 3 AL 0 R/(W)* Arbitration Lost Flag Indicates that arbitration was lost in master mode. [Setting conditions] When ALSL = 0 • • If the internal SDA and SDA pin disagree at the rise of SCL in master transmit mode If the internal SCL line is high at the fall of SCL in master transmit mode If the internal SDA and SDA pin disagree at the rise of SCL in master transmit mode If the SDA pin is driven low by another device 2 before the I C bus interface drives the SDA pin low, after the start condition instruction was executed in master transmit mode When ICDR is written to (transmit mode) or read from (receive mode) When 0 is written in AL after reading AL = 1 When ALSL = 1 • • [Clearing conditions] • • Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 298 of 544 Bit 2 Bit Name AAS Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* Description Slave Address Recognition Flag In I2C bus format slave receive mode, this flag is set to 1 if the first frame following a start condition matches bits SVA6 to SVA0 in SAR, or if the general call address (H'00) is detected. [Setting condition] When the slave address or general call address (one frame including a R/W bit is H’00) is detected in slave receive mode and FS = 0 in SAR [Clearing conditions] • • • When ICDR is written to (transmit mode) or read from (receive mode) When 0 is written in AAS after reading AAS = 1 In master mode 2 1 ADZ 0 R/(W)* General Call Address Recognition Flag In I C bus format slave receive mode, this flag is set to 1 if the first frame following a start condition is the general call address (H'00). [Setting condition] When the general call address (one frame including a R/W bit is H’00) is detected in slave receive mode and FS = 0 or FSX = 0 [Clearing conditions] • • • When ICDR is written to (transmit mode) or read from (receive mode) When 0 is written in ADZ after reading ADZ = 1 In master mode If a general call address is detected while FS = 1 and FSX = 0, the ADZ flag is set to 1; however, the general call address is not recognized (AAS flag is not set to 1). Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 299 of 544 Bit 0 Initial Bit Name Value ACKB 0 R/W R/W Description Acknowledge Bit Stores acknowledge data. Transmit mode: [Setting condition] When 1 is received as the acknowledge bit when ACKE = 1 in transmit mode [Clearing conditions] • • When 0 is received as the acknowledge bit when ACKE = 1 in transmit mode When 0 is written to the ACKE bit Receive mode: 0: Returns 0 as acknowledge data after data reception 1: Returns 1 as acknowledge data after data reception When this bit is read, the value loaded from the bus line (returned by the receiving device) is read in transmission (when TRS = 1). In reception (when TRS = 0), the value set by internal software is read. When this bit is written, acknowledge data that is returned after receiving is rewritten regardless of the TRS value. If bit in ICSR is written using bitmanipulation instructions, the acknowledge data should be re-set since the acknowledge data setting is rewritten by the ACKB bit reading value. Write the ACKE bit to 0 to clear the ACKB flag to 0, before transmission is ended and a stop condition is issued in master mode, or before transmission is ended and SDA is released to issue a stop condition by a master device. Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 300 of 544 13.3.7 DDC Switch Register (DDCSWR) DDCSWR controls IIC internal latch clearance. Bit 7 to 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name — — CLR3 CLR2 CLR1 CLR0 Initial Value All 0 0 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R W* W* W* W* Description Reserved The initial value should not be changed. Reserved IIC Clear 3 to 0 Controls initialization of the internal state of IIC_0 and IIC_1. 00--: Setting prohibited 0100: Setting prohibited 0101: IIC_0 internal latch cleared 0110: IIC_1 internal latch cleared 0111: IIC_0 and IIC_1 internal latches cleared 1---: Invalid setting When a write operation is performed on these bits, a clear signal is generated for the internal latch circuit of the corresponding module, and the internal state of the IIC module is initialized. These bits can only be written to; they are always read as 1. Write data to this bit is not retained. To perform IIC clearance, bits CLR3 to CLR0 must be written to simultaneously using an MOV instruction. Do not use a bit manipulation instruction such as BCLR. When clearing is required again, all the bits must be written to in accordance with the setting. Note: * This bit is always read as 1. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 301 of 544 13.3.8 I2C Bus Extended Control Register (ICXR) ICXR enables or disables the I2C bus interface interrupt generation and continuous receive operation, and indicates the status of receive/transmit operations. Bit 7 Bit Name STOPIM Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Stop Condition Interrupt Source Mask Enables or disables the interrupt generation when the stop condition is detected in slave mode. 0: Enables IRIC flag setting and interrupt generation when the stop condition is detected (STOP = 1 or ESTP = 1) in slave mode. 1: Disables IRIC flag setting and interrupt generation when the stop condition is detected. 6 HNDS 0 R/W Handshake Receive Operation Select Enables or disables continuous receive operation in receive mode. 0: Enables continuous receive operation 1: Disables continuous receive operation When the HNDS bit is cleared to 0, receive operation is performed continuously after data has been received successfully while ICDRF flag is 0. When the HNDS bit is set to 1, SCL is fixed to the low level and the next data transfer is disabled after data has been received successfully while the ICDRF flag is 0. The bus line is released and next receive operation is enabled by reading the receive data in ICDR. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 302 of 544 Bit 5 Bit Name ICDRF Initial Value 0 R/W R Description Receive Data Read Request Flag Indicates the ICDR (ICDRR) status in receive mode. 0: Indicates that the data has been already read from ICDR (ICDRR) or ICDR is initialized. 1: Indicates that data has been received successfully and transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR, and the data is ready to be read out. [Setting conditions] • When data is received successfully and transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR. (1) When data is received successfully while ICDRF = 0 (at the rise of the 9th clock pulse). (2) When ICDR is read successfully in receive mode after data was received while ICDRF = 1. [Clearing conditions] • • • When ICDR (ICDRR) is read. When 0 is written to the ICE bit. When the IIC is internally initialized using the CLR3 to CLR0 bits in DDCSWR. When ICDRF is set due to the condition (2) above, ICDRF is temporarily cleared to 0 when ICDR (ICDRR) is read; however, since data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR immediately, ICDRF is set to 1 again. Note that ICDR cannot be read successfully in transmit mode (TRS = 1) because data is not transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR. Be sure to read data from ICDR in receive mode (TRS = 0). Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 303 of 544 Bit 4 Initial Bit Name Value ICDRE 0 R/W R Description Transmit Data Write Request Flag Indicates the ICDR (ICDRT) status in transmit mode. 0: Indicates that the data has been already written to ICDR (ICDRT) or ICDR is initialized. 1: Indicates that data has been transferred from ICDRT to ICDRS and is being transmitted, or the start condition has been detected or transmission has been complete, thus allowing the next data to be written to. [Setting conditions] • • When the start condition is detected from the bus 2 line state with I C bus format or serial format. When data is transferred from ICDRT to ICDRS. 1. When data transmission completed while ICDRE = 0 (at the rise of the 9th clock pulse). 2. When data is written to ICDR in transmit mode after data transmission was completed while ICDRE = 1. [Clearing conditions] • • • • When data is written to ICDR (ICDRT). When the stop condition is detected with I C bus format or serial format. When 0 is written to the ICE bit. When the IIC is internally initialized using the CLR3 to CLR0 bits in DDCSWR. 2 2 Note that if the ACKE bit is set to 1 with I C bus format thus enabling acknowledge bit decision, ICDRE is not set when data transmission is completed while the acknowledge bit is 1. When ICDRE is set due to the condition (2) above, ICDRE is temporarily cleared to 0 when data is written to ICDR (ICDRT); however, since data is transferred from ICDRT to ICDRS immediately, ICDRE is set to 1 again. Do not write data to ICDR when TRS = 0 because the ICDRE flag value is invalid during the time. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 304 of 544 Bit 3 Bit Name ALIE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Arbitration Lost Interrupt Enable Enables or disables IRIC flag setting and interrupt generation when arbitration is lost. 0: Disables interrupt request when arbitration is lost. 1: Enables interrupt request when arbitration is lost. 2 ALSL 0 R/W Arbitration Lost Condition Select Selects the condition under which arbitration is lost. 0: When the SDA pin state disagrees with the data that IIC bus interface outputs at the rise of SCL, or when the SCL pin is driven low by another device. 1: When the SDA pin state disagrees with the data that IIC bus interface outputs at the rise of SCL, or when the SDA line is driven low by another device in idle state or after the start condition instruction was executed. 1 0 FNC1 FNC0 0 0 R/W R/W Function Bit Cancels some restrictions on usage. For details, see section 13.6, Usage Notes. 00: Restrictions on operation remaining in effect 01: Setting prohibited 10: Setting prohibited 11: Restrictions on operation canceled Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 305 of 544 13.3.9 Port G Control Register (PGCTL) PGCTL selects the input/output pin for IIC. Bit 7 6 Bit Name IIC1BS IIC1AS Initial Value 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description IIC_1 Input/Output Select B, A Selects input/output pins for IIC_1 channel IIC1BS 0 0 1 1 4, 5 3 2  IIC0BS IIC0AS All 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Reserved The initial value should not be changed. IIC_0 Input/Output Select B, A Selects input/output pins for IIC_1 channel IIC0BS IIC0AS 0 0 1 1 1, 0  All 0 R/W Reserved The initial value should not be changed. Notes: 1. The program development tool (emulator) does not support this function. 2. If multiple pins are selected as the serial clock I/O pin or serial data I/O pin for each channel, the operation is not guaranteed. If a single pin is selected for both channels at 2 the same time, the operation is not guaranteed. When pins are switched, the I C bus must be free. 0: 1: 0: 1: Selects P97/SDA0 and P52/SCL0 as IIC_0 I/O pins Selects PG4/ExSDAA and 1 PG5/ExSCLA as IIC_0 I/O pins* Selects PG6/ExSDAB and 1 PG7/ExSCLB as IIC_0 I/O pins* Setting prohibited* 2 IIC1AS 0: 1: 0: 1: Selects P42/SDA1 and P86/SCL1 as IIC_1 I/O pins Selects PG4/ExSDAA and 1 PG5/ExSCLA as IIC_1 I/O pins* Selects PG6/ExSDAB and 1 PG7/ExSCLB as IIC_1 I/O pins* Setting prohibited* 2 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 306 of 544 13.4 Operation The I2C bus interface has an I2C bus format and a serial format. 13.4.1 I2C Bus Data Format The I2C bus format is an addressing format with an acknowledge bit. This is shown in figure 13.3. The first frame following a start condition always consists of 9 bits. The serial format is a non-addressing format with no acknowledge bit. This is shown in figure 13.4. Figure 13.5 shows the I2C bus timing. The symbols used in figures 13.3 to 13.5 are explained in table 13.6. (a) FS = 0 or FSX = 0 S 1 SLA 7 1 R/W 1 A 1 DATA n A 1 m A/A 1 P 1 Transfer bit count (n = 1 to 8) Transfer frame count (m ≥ 1) (b) Start condition retransmission FS = 0 or FSX = 0 S 1 SLA 7 1 R/W 1 A 1 DATA n1 m1 A/A 1 S 1 SLA 7 1 R/W 1 A 1 DATA n2 m2 Upper row: Transfer bit count (n1, n2 = 1 to 8) Lower row: Transfer frame count (m1, m2 ≥ 1) A/A 1 P 1 Figure 13.3 I2C Bus Data Format (I2C Bus Format) FS = 1 and FSX = 1 S 1 DATA 8 1 DATA n m P 1 Transfer bit count (n = 1 to 8) Transfer frame count (m ≥ 1) Figure 13.4 I2C Bus Data Format (Serial Format) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 307 of 544 SDA SCL 1 to 7 S SLA 8 R/W 9 A 1 to 7 DATA 8 9 A 1 to 7 DATA 8 9 A/A P Figure 13.5 I2C Bus Timing Table 13.6 I2C Bus Data Format Symbols Legend S SLA R/W A Start condition. The master device drives SDA from high to low while SCL is high. Slave address. The master device selects the slave device. Indicates the direction of data transfer: from the slave device to the master device when R/W is 1, or from the master device to the slave device when R/W is 0 Acknowledge. The receiving device drives SDA low to acknowledge a transfer. (The slave device returns acknowledge in master transmit mode, and the master device returns acknowledge in master receive mode.) Transferred data. The bit length of transferred data is set with the BC2 to BC0 bits in ICMR. The MSB first or LSB first is switched with the MLS bit in ICMR. Stop condition. The master device drives SDA from low to high while SCL is high. DATA P Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 308 of 544 13.4.2 Initialization Initialize the IIC by the procedure shown in figure 13.6 before starting transmission/reception of data. Start initialization Set MSTP4 = 0 (IIC_0) MSTP3 = 0 (IIC_1) (MSTPCRL) Set IICE = 1 in STCR Cancel module stop mode Enable the CPU accessing to the IIC control register and data register Enable SAR and SARX to be accessed Set ICE = 0 in ICCR Set SAR and SARX Set ICE = 1 in ICCR Set the first and second slave addresses and IIC communication format (SVA6 to SVA0, FS, SVAX6 to SVAX0, and FSX) Enable ICMR and ICDR to be accessed Use SCL/SDA pin as an IIC port Set acknowledge bit (ACKB) Set transfer rate (IICX) Set communication format, wait insertion, and transfer rate (MLS, WAIT, CKS2 to CKS0) Enable interrupt (STOPIM, HNDS, ALIE, ALSL, FNC1, and FNC0) Set interrupt enable, transfer mode, and acknowledge decision (IEIC, MST, TRS, and ACKE) Set ICSR Set STCR Set ICMR Set ICXR Set ICCR > Figure 13.6 Sample Flowchart for IIC Initialization Note: Be sure to modify ICMR after transmit/receive operation has been completed. If ICMR is modified during transmit/receive operation, bit counter BC2 to BC0 will be modified erroneously, thus causing incorrect operation. 13.4.3 Master Transmit Operation In I2C bus format master transmit mode, the master device outputs the transmit clock and transmit data, and the slave device returns an acknowledge signal. Figure 13.7 shows the sample flowchart for the operations in master transmit mode. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 309 of 544 Start Initialize IIC Read BBSY flag in ICCR No [1] Initialization [2] Test the status of the SCL and SDA lines. BBSY = 0? Yes Set MST = 1 and TRS = 1 in ICCR Set BBSY =1 and SCP = 0 in ICCR Read IRIC flag in ICCR [3] Select master transmit mode. [4] Start condition issuance [5] Wait for a start condition generation No IRIC = 1? Yes Write transmit data in ICDR Clear IRIC flag in ICCR [6] Set transmit data for the first byte (slave address + R/W). (After writing to ICDR, clear IRIC flag continuously.) [7] Wait for 1 byte to be transmitted. Read IRIC flag in ICCR No IRIC = 1? Yes Read ACKB bit in ICSR ACKB = 0? No Yes [8] Test the acknowledge bit transferred from the slave device. Transmit mode? No Master receive mode Yes Write transmit data in ICDR Clear IRIC flag in ICCR Read IRIC flag in ICCR [9] Set transmit data for the second and subsequent bytes. (After writing to ICDR, clear IRIC flag continuously.) [10] Wait for 1 byte to be transmitted. No IRIC = 1? Yes Read ACKB bit in ICSR [11] Determine end of tranfer No End of transmission? or ACKB = 1? Yes Clear IRIC flag in ICCR Set BBSY = 0 and SCP = 0 in ICCR End [12] Stop condition issuance Figure 13.7 Sample Flowchart for Operations in Master Transmit Mode Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 310 of 544 The transmission procedure and operations by which data is sequentially transmitted in synchronization with ICDR (ICDRT) write operations, are described below. 1. 2. 3. 4. Initialize the IIC as described in section 13.4.2, Initialization. Read the BBSY flag in ICCR to confirm that the bus is free. Set bits MST and TRS to 1 in ICCR to select master transmit mode. Write 1 to BBSY and 0 to SCP in ICCR. This changes SDA from high to low when SCL is high, and generates the start condition. 5. Then the IRIC and IRTR flags are set to 1. If the IEIC bit in ICCR has been set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU. 6. Write the data (slave address + R/W) to ICDR. With the I2C bus format (when the FS bit in SAR or the FSX bit in SARX is 0), the first frame data following the start condition indicates the 7-bit slave address and transmit/receive direction (R/W). To determine the end of the transfer, the IRIC flag is cleared to 0. After writing to ICDR, clear IRIC continuously so no other interrupt handling routine is executed. If the time for transmission of one frame of data has passed before the IRIC clearing, the end of transmission cannot be determined. The master device sequentially sends the transmission clock and the data written to ICDR. The selected slave device (i.e. the slave device with the matching slave address) drives SDA low at the 9th transmit clock pulse and returns an acknowledge signal. 7. When one frame of data has been transmitted, the IRIC flag is set to 1 at the rise of the 9th transmit clock pulse. After one frame has been transmitted, SCL is automatically fixed low in synchronization with the internal clock until the next transmit data is written. 8. Read the ACKB bit in ICSR to confirm that ACKB is cleared to 0. When the slave device has not acknowledged (ACKB bit is 1), operate step [12] to end transmission, and retry the transmit operation. 9. Write the transmit data to ICDR. As indicating the end of the transfer, the IRIC flag is cleared to 0. Perform the ICDR write and the IRIC flag clearing sequentially, just as in step [6]. Transmission of the next frame is performed in synchronization with the internal clock. 10. When one frame of data has been transmitted, the IRIC flag is set to 1 at the rise of the 9th transmit clock pulse. After one frame has been transmitted, SCL is automatically fixed low in synchronization with the internal clock until the next transmit data is written. 11. Read the ACKB bit in ICSR. Confirm that the slave device has been acknowledged (ACKB bit is 0). When there is still data to be transmitted, go to step [9] to continue the next transmission operation. When the slave device has not acknowledged (ACKB bit is set to 1), operate step [12] to end transmission. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 311 of 544 12. Clear the IRIC flag to 0. Write 0 to ACKE in ICCR, to clear received ACKB contents to 0. Write 0 to BBSY and SCP in ICCR. This changes SDA from low to high when SCL is high, and generates the stop condition. Start condition generation SCL (master output) SDA (master output) SDA (slave output) ICDRE 1 Bit 7 2 Bit 6 3 Bit 5 4 Bit 4 5 Bit 3 6 Bit 2 7 Bit 1 8 Bit 0 R/W [7] A 9 1 Bit 7 2 Bit 6 Slave address [5] Data 1 IRIC Interrupt request Interrupt request IRTR ICDRT Address + R/W Address + R/W Data 1 ICDRS Data 1 Note:* Data write in ICDR prohibited User processing [4] BBSY set to 1 [6] ICDR write SCP cleared to 0 (start condition issuance) [6] IRIC clear [9] ICDR write [9] IRIC clear Figure 13.8 Example of Operation Timing in Master Transmit Mode (MLS = WAIT = 0) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 312 of 544 Start condition issuance SCL (master output) 8 9 1 Bit 7 2 Bit 6 3 Bit 5 4 Bit 4 5 Bit 3 6 Bit 2 7 Bit 1 8 Bit 0 9 SDA Bit 0 (master output) Data 1 SDA (slave output) ICDRE [7] Data 2 [10] A A IRIC IRTR ICDR Data 1 Data 2 User processing [9] ICDR write [9] IRIC clear [11] ACKB read [12] IRIC clear [12] Set BBSY = 1and SCP = 0 (Stop condition issuance) Figure 13.9 Example of Stop Condition Issuance Operation Timing in Master Transmit Mode (MLS = WAIT = 0) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 313 of 544 13.4.4 Master Receive Operation In I2C bus format master receive mode, the master device outputs the receive clock, receives data, and returns an acknowledge signal. The slave device transmits data. The master device transmits data containing the slave address and R/W (1: read) in the first frame following the start condition issuance in master transmit mode, selects the slave device, and then switches the mode for receive operation. Receive Operation Using the HNDS Function (HNDS = 1): Figure 13.10 shows the sample flowchart for the operations in master receive mode (HNDS = 1). Master receive mode Set TRS = 0 in ICCR Set ACKB = 0 in ICSR [1] Select receive mode. Set HNDS = 1 in ICXR Clear IRIC flag in ICCR Yes [2] Start receiving. The first read is a dummy read. [5] Read the receive data (for the second and subsequent read) Is next receive the last one? Last receive? No Read ICDR Read IRIC flag in ICCR No [3] Wait for 1 byte to be received. (Set IRIC at the rise of the 9th clock for the receive frame) IRIC = 1? Yes Clear IRIC flag in ICCR [4] Clear IRIC flag. Set ACKB = 1 in ICSR Read ICDR [6] Set acknowledge data for the last reception. [7] Read the receive data. Dummy read to start receiving if the first frame is the last receive data. [8] Wait for 1 byte to be received. Read IRIC flag in ICCR No IRIC = 1? Yes Clear IRIC flag in ICCR Set TRS = 1 in ICCR Read ICDR [9] Clear IRIC flag. [10] Read the receive data. Set BBSY = 0 and SCP = 0 in ICCR [11] Set stop condition issuance. Generate stop condition. End Figure 13.10 Sample Flowchart for Operations in Master Receive Mode (HNDS = 1) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 314 of 544 The reception procedure and operations using the HNDS function, by which the data reception process is provided in 1-byte units with SCL fixed low at each data reception, are described below. 1. Clear the TRS bit in ICCR to 0 to switch from transmit mode to receive mode. Clear the ACKB bit in ICSR to 0 (acknowledge data setting). Set the HNDS bit in ICXR to 1. Clear the IRIC flag to 0 to determine the end of reception. Go to step [6] to halt reception operation if the first frame is the last receive data. 2. When ICDR is read (dummy data read), reception is started, the receive clock is output in synchronization with the internal clock, and data is received. (Data from the SDA pin is sequentially transferred to ICDRS in synchronization with the rise of the receive clock pulses.) 3. The master device drives SDA low to return the acknowledge data at the 9th receive clock pulse. The receive data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR at the rise of the 9th clock pulse, setting the ICDRF, IRIC, and IRTR flags to 1. If the IEIC bit has been set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU. The master device drives SCL low from the fall of the 9th receive clock pulse to the ICDR data reading. 4. Clear the IRIC flag to clear the wait state. Go to step [6] to halt reception operation if the next frame is the last receive data. 5. Read ICDR receive data. This clears the ICDRF flag to 0. The master device outputs the receive clock continuously to receive the next data. Data can be received continuously by repeating steps [3] to [5]. 6. Set the ACKB bit to 1 so as to return the acknowledge data for the last reception. 7. Read ICDR receive data. This clears the ICDRF flag to 0. The master device outputs the receive clock to receive data. 8. When one frame of data has been received, the ICDRF, IRIC, and IRTR flags are set to 1 at the rise of the 9th receive clock pulse. 9. Clear the IRIC flag to 0. 10. Read ICDR receive data after setting the TRS bit. This clears the ICDRF flag to 0. 11. Clear the BBSY bit and SCP bit to 0 in ICCR. This changes SDA from low to high when SCL is high, and generates the stop condition. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 315 of 544 Master transmit mode Master receive mode SCL is fixed low until ICDR is read SCL is fixed low until ICDR is read 5 Bit 3 6 Bit 2 7 Bit 1 8 Bit 0 [3] A 9 1 Bit 7 2 Bit 6 SCL (master output) SDA (slave output) SDA (master output) IRIC IRTR ICDRF ICDRR 9 A 1 Bit 7 2 Bit 6 3 Bit 5 4 Bit 4 Data 1 Data 2 Undefined value Data 1 User processing [1] TRS=0 clear [1] IRIC clear [2] IRIC read (Dummy read) [4] IRIC clear [5] ICDR read (Data 1) Figure 13.11 Example of Operation Timing in Master Receive Mode (MLS = WAIT = 0, HNDS = 1) SCL is fixed low until stop condition is issued 5 Bit 3 6 Bit 2 7 Bit 1 8 Bit 0 [8] A 9 SCL is fixed low until ICDR is read SCL (master output) SDA (slave output) SDA (master output) IRIC IRTR ICDRF ICDRR Data 1 Data 2 7 Bit 1 8 Bit 0 [3] A 9 1 Bit 7 2 Bit 6 3 Bit 5 4 Bit 4 Stop condition generation Data 2 Data 3 Data 3 [10] ICDR read (Data 3) [11] Set BBSY = 0 and SCP = 0 (Stop condition instruction issuance) User processing [4] IRIC clear [7] ICDR read (Data 2) [6] Set ACKB = 1 [9] IRIC clear Figure 13.12 Example of Stop Condition Issuance Operation Timing in Master Receive Mode (MLS = WAIT = 0, HNDS = 1) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 316 of 544 Receive Operation Using the Wait Function: Figures 13.13 and 13.14 show the sample flowcharts for the operations in master receive mode (WAIT = 1). Master receive mode Set TRS = 0 in ICCR Set ACKB = 0 in ICSR Set HNDS = 0 in ICXR Clear IRIC flag in ICCR [1] Select receive mode. Set WAIT = 1 in ICMR Read ICDR [2] Start receiving. The first read is a dummy read. Read IRIC flag in ICCR No IRIC = 1? Yes [3] Wait for a receive wait (Set IRIC at the fall of the 8th clock) or, Wait for 1 byte to be received (Set IRIC at the rise of the 9th clock) No IRTR = 1? [4] Determine end of reception Yes Is next receive the last one? Last receive? No Read ICDR Yes [5] Read the receive data. [6] Clear IRIC flag. (to end the wait insertion) Clear IRIC flag in ICCR Set ACKB = 1 in ICSR Wait for one clock pulse Set TRS = 1 in ICCR Read ICDR Clear IRIC flag in ICCR [7] Set acknowledge data for the last reception. [8] Wait for TRS setting [9] Set TRS for stop condition issuance [10] Read the receive data. [11] Clear IRIC flag. (to end the wait insertion) Read IRIC flag in ICCR No IRIC=1? [12] Wait for a receive wait (Set IRIC at the fall of the 8th clock) or, Wait for 1 byte to be received (Set IRIC at the rise of the 9th clock) Yes IRTR=1? No Yes [13] Determine end of reception Clear IRIC flag in ICCR [14] Clear IRIC. (to end the wait insertion) Set WAIT = 0 in ICMR Clear IRIC flag in ICCR Read ICDR [15] Clear wait mode. Clear IRIC flag. ( IRIC flag should be cleared to 0 after setting WAIT = 0.) [16] Read the last receive data. [17] Generate stop condition Set BBSY= 0 and SCP= 0 in ICCR End Figure 13.13 Sample Flowchart for Operations in Master Receive Mode (receiving multiple bytes) (WAIT = 1) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 317 of 544 Slave receive mode Set TRS = 0 in ICCR Set ACKB = 0 in ICSR Set HNDS = 0 in ICXR Clear IRIC flag in ICCR [1] Select receive mode. Set WAIT = 0 in ICMR Read ICDR Read IRIC flag in ICCR No IRIC = 1? Yes [3] Wait for a receive wait (Set IRIC at the fall of the 8th clock) [2] Start receiving. The first read is a dummy read. Set ACKB = 1 in ICSR Set TRS = 1 in ICCR [7] Set acknowledge data for the last reception. [9] Set TRS for stop condition issuance Clear IRIC flag in ICCR [11] Clear IRIC flag. (to end the wait insertion) [12] Wait for 1 byte to be received. (Set IRIC at the rise of the 9th clock) Read IRIC flag in ICCR No IRIC = 1? Yes Set WAIT = 0 in ICMR Clear IRIC flag in ICCR Read ICDR Set BBSY = 0 and SCP = 0 in ICCR [15] Clear wait mode. Clear IRIC flag. (IRIC flag should be cleared to 0 after setting WAIT = 0.) [16] Read the last receive data [17] Generate stop condition End Figure 13.14 Sample Flowchart for Operations in Master Receive Mode (receiving a single byte) (WAIT = 1) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 318 of 544 The reception procedure and operations using the wait function (WAIT bit), by which data is sequentially received in synchronization with ICDR (ICDRR) read operations, are described below. The following describes the multiple-byte reception procedure. In single-byte reception, some steps of the following procedure are omitted. At this time, follow the procedure shown in figure 13.14. 1. Clear the TRS bit in ICCR to 0 to switch from transmit mode to receive mode. Clear the ACKB bit in ICSR to 0 to set the acknowledge data. Clear the HNDS bit in ICXR to 0 to cancel the handshake function. Clear the IRIC flag to 0, and then set the WAIT bit in ICMR to 1. 2. When ICDR is read (dummy data is read), reception is started, the receive clock is output in synchronization with the internal clock, and data is received. 3. The IRIC flag is set to 1 in either of the following cases. If the IEIC bit in ICCR has been set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU.  At the fall of the 8th receive clock pulse for one frame SCL is automatically fixed low in synchronization with the internal clock until the IRIC flag clearing.  At the rise of the 9th receive clock pulse for one frame The IRTR and ICDRF flags are set to 1, indicating that one frame of data has been received. The master device outputs the receive clock continuously to receive the next data. 4. Read the IRTR flag in ICSR. If the IRTR flag is 0, execute step [6] to clear the IRIC flag to 0 to release the wait state. If the IRTR flag is 1 and the next data is the last receive data, execute step [7] to halt reception. 5. If IRTR flag is 1, read ICDR receive data. 6. Clear the IRIC flag. When the flag is set as the first case in step [3], the master device outputs the 9th clock and drives SDA low at the 9th receive clock pulse to return an acknowledge signal. Data can be received continuously by repeating steps [3] to [6]. 7. Set the ACKB bit in ICSR to 1 so as to return the acknowledge data for the last reception. 8. After the IRIC flag is set to 1, wait for at least one clock pulse until the rise of the first clock pulse for the next receive data. 9. Set the TRS bit in ICCR to 1 to switch from receive mode to transmit mode. The TRS bit value becomes valid when the rising edge of the next 9th clock pulse is input. 10. Read the ICDR receive data. 11. Clear the IRIC flag to 0. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 319 of 544 12. The IRIC flag is set to 1 in either of the following cases.  At the fall of the 8th receive clock pulse for one frame SCL is automatically fixed low in synchronization with the internal clock until the IRIC flag is cleared.  At the rise of the 9th receive clock pulse for one frame The IRTR and ICDRF flags are set to 1, indicating that one frame of data has been received. The master device outputs the receive clock continuously to receive the next data. 13. Read the IRTR flag in ICSR. If the IRTR flag is 0, execute step [14] to clear the IRIC flag to 0 to release the wait state. If the IRTR flag is 1 and data reception is complete, execute step [15] to issue the stop condition. 14. If IRTR flag is 0, clear the IRIC flag to 0 to release the wait state. Execute step [12] to read the IRIC flag to detect the end of reception. 15. Clear the WAIT bit in CMR to cancel the wait mode. Then, clear the IRIC flag. Clearing of the IRIC flag should be done while WAIT = 0. (If the WAIT bit is cleared to 0 after clearing the IRIC flag and then an instruction to issue a stop condition is executed, the stop condition may not be issued correctly.) 16. Read the last ICDR receive data. 17. Clear the BBSY bit and SCP bit to 0 in ICCR. This changes SDA from low to high when SCL is high, and generates the stop condition. Master tansmit mode Master receive mode SCL (master output) 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 SDA (slave output) SDA (master output) A Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Data 1 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 [3] A Bit 7 [3] Bit 6 Bit 5 Data 2 Bit 4 Bit 3 IRIC IRTR [4]IRTR=0 [4] IRTR=1 ICDR Data 1 User processing [1] TRS cleared to 0 IRIC cleard to 0 [2] ICDR read (dummy read) [6] IRIC clear [5] ICDR read [6] IRIC clear (to end wait insertion) (Data 1) Figure 13.15 Example of Master Receive Mode Operation Timing (MLS = ACKB = 0, WAIT = 1) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 320 of 544 [8] Wait for one clock pulse Stop condition generation SCL (master output) 8 9 1 Bit 7 [3] A 2 Bit 6 3 Bit 5 4 Bit 4 5 Bit 3 6 Bit 2 7 Bit 1 8 Bit 0 [12] A [12] 9 SDA Bit 0 (slave output) Data 2 [3] SDA (master output) IRIC IRTR ICDR [4] IRTR=0 Data 3 [4] IRTR=1 [13] IRTR=0 [13] IRTR=1 Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 [15] WAIT cleared to 0, IRIC clear [14] IRIC clear [17] Stop condition issuance [16] ICDR read (Data 3) User processing [6] IRIC clear [11] IRIC clear [10] ICDR read (Data 2) [9] Set TRS=1 [7] Set ACKB=1 Figure 13.16 Example of Stop Condition Issuance Timing in Master Receive Mode (MLS = ACKB = 0, WAIT = 1) 13.4.5 Slave Receive Operation In I2C bus format slave receive mode, the master device outputs the transmit clock and transmit data, and the slave device returns an acknowledge signal. The slave device operates as the device specified by the master device when the slave address in the first frame following the start condition that is issued by the master device matches its own address. Receive Operation Using the HNDS Function (HNDS = 1): Figure 13.17 shows the sample flowchart for the operations in slave receive mode (HNDS = 1). Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 321 of 544 Slave receive mode Initialize IIC [1] Initialization. Select slave receive mode. Set MST = 0 and TRS = 0 in ICCR Set ACKB = 0 in ICSR and HNDS = 1 in ICXR Read IRIC flag in ICCR No ICDRF = 1? [2] Read the receive data remaining unread. Yes Read ICDR, clear IRIC flag Read IRIC flag in ICCR No [3] to [7] Wait for one byte to be received (slave address + R/W) IRIC = 1? Yes Clear IRIC flag in ICCR [8] Clear IRIC Read AASX, AAS and ADZ in ICSR AAS = 1 and ADZ = 1? Yes General call address processing * Description omitted No Read TRS in ICCR Yes TRS = 1? No Yes Last reception? No Slave transmit mode Read ICDR [10] Read the receive data. The first read is a dummy read. Read IRIC flag in ICCR No [5] to [7] Wait for the reception to end. IRIC = 1? Yes Clear IRIC flag in ICCR [8] Clear IRIC flag. Set ACKB = 1 in ICSR [9] Set acknowledge data for the last reception. [10] Read the receive data. Read ICDR Read IRIC flag in ICCR No [5] to [7] Wait for the reception to end or [11] Detect stop condition. IRIC = 1? Yes ESTP = 1 or STOP = 1? No Clear IRIC in ICCR Yes [12] Confirm STOP bit. [8] Clear IRIC flag. [12] Clear IRIC flag. Clear IRIC in ICCR End Figure 13.17 Sample Flowchart for Operations in Slave Receive Mode (HNDS = 1) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 322 of 544 The reception procedure and operations using the HNDS bit function, by which data reception process is provided in 1-byte unit with SCL being fixed low at every data reception, are described below. 1. Initialize the IIC as described in section 13.4.2, Initialization. Clear the MST and TRS bits to 0 to set slave receive mode, and set the HNDS bit to 1 and the ACKB bit to 0. Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR to 0 to see the end of reception. 2. Confirm that the ICDRF flag is 0. If the ICDRF flag is set to 1, read the ICDR and then clear the IRIC flag to 0. 3. When the start condition output by the master device is detected, the BBSY flag in ICCR is set to 1. The master device then outputs the 7-bit slave address and transmit/receive direction (R/W), in synchronization with the transmit clock pulses. 4. When the slave address matches in the first frame following the start condition, the device operates as the slave device specified by the master device. If the 8th data bit (R/W) is 0, the TRS bit remains cleared to 0, and slave receive operation is performed. If the 8th data bit (R/W) is 1, the TRS bit is set to 1, and slave transmit operation is performed. When the slave address does not match, receive operation is halted until the next start condition is detected. 5. At the 9th clock pulse of the receive frame, the slave device returns the data in the ACKB bit as an acknowledge signal. 6. At the rise of the 9th clock pulse, the IRIC flag is set to 1. If the IEIC bit has been set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU. If the AASX bit has been set to 1, IRTR flag is also set to 1. 7. At the rise of the 9th clock pulse, the receive data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR, setting the ICDRF flag to 1. The slave device drives SCL low from the fall of the 9th receive clock pulse until data is read from ICDR. 8. Confirm that the STOP bit is cleared to 0, and clear the IRIC flag to 0. 9. If the next frame is the last receive frame, set the ACKB bit to 1. 10. If ICDR is read, the ICDRF flag is cleared to 0, releasing the SCL bus line. This enables the master device to transfer the next data. Receive operations can be performed continuously by repeating steps [5] to [10]. 11. When the stop condition is detected (SDA is changed from low to high when SCL is high), the BBSY flag is cleared to 0 and the STOP bit is set to 1. If the STOPIM bit has been cleared to 0, the IRIC flag is set to 1. 12. Confirm that the STOP bit is set to 1, and clear the IRIC flag to 0. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 323 of 544 Start condition generation [7] SCL is fixed low until ICDR is read 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 SCL (Pin waveform) SCL (master output) SCL (slave output) SDA (master output) SDA (slave output) IRIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 R/W Bit 7 Bit 6 Data 1 Slave address [6] A Interrupt request occurrence ICDRF ICDRS Address+R/W Address+R/W ICDRR Undefined value User processing [2] ICDR read [8] IRIC clear [10] ICDR read (dummy read) Figure 13.18 Example of Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing (1) (MLS = 0, HNDS= 1) Stop condition generation [7] SCL is fixed low until ICDR is read [7] SCL is fixed low until ICDR is read 4 5 6 7 8 9 SCL (master output) SCL (slave output) SDA (master output) Data (n-1) 8 9 1 2 3 Bit 0 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 [6] Data (n) [6] [11] SDA (slave output) IRIC A A ICDRF ICDRS Data (n-1) Data (n) Data (n-1) ICDRR Data (n-2) Data (n) User processing [8] IRIC clear [5] ICDR read (Data (n-1)) [9] Set ACKB=1 [8] IRIC clear [10] ICDR read (Data (n)) [12] IRIC clear Figure 13.19 Example of Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing (2) (MLS = 0, HNDS= 1) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 324 of 544 Continuous Receive Operation: Figure 13.20 shows the sample flowchart for the operations in slave receive mode (HNDS = 0). Slave receive mode Set MST = 0 and TRS = 0 in ICCR [1] Select slave receive mode. Set ACKB = 0 in ICSR Set HNDS = 0 in ICXR Clear IRIC in ICCR ICDRF = 1? No [2] Read the receive data remaining unread. Yes Read ICDR Read IRIC in ICCR No IRIC = 1? Yes [3] to [7] Wait for one byte to be received (slave address + R/W) (Set IRIC at the rise of the 9th clock) Clear IRIC in ICCR Read AASX, AAS and ADZ in ICSR AAS = 1 and ADZ = 1? [8] Clear IRIC Yes General call address processing * Description omitted No Read TRS in ICCR TRS = 1? No Yes Slave transmit mode (n-2)th-byte reception? No * n: Address + total number of bytes received Wait for one frame Set ACKB = 1 in ICSR No [9] Wait for ACKB setting and set acknowledge data for the last reception (after the rise of the 9th clock of (n-1)th byte data) [10] Read the receive data. The first read is a dummy read. ICDRF = 1? Yes Read ICDR Read IRIC in ICCR No [11] Wait for one byte to be received (Set IRIC at the rise of the 9th clock) IRIC = 1? [12] Detect stop condition ESTP = 1 or STOP = 1? Yes No Clear IRIC in ICCR [13] Clear IRIC ICDRF = 1? Yes No [14] Read the last receive data Read ICDR Clear IRIC in ICCR [15] Clear IRIC End Figure 13.20 Sample Flowchart for Operations in Slave Receive Mode (HNDS = 0) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 325 of 544 The reception procedure and operations in slave receive are described below. 1. Initialize the IIC as described in section 13.4.2, Initialization. Clear the MST and TRS bits to 0 to set slave receive mode, and set the HNDS and ACKB bits to 0. Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR to 0 to see the end of reception. 2. Confirm that the ICDRF flag is 0. If the ICDRF flag is set to 1, read the ICDR and then clear the IRIC flag to 0. 3. When the start condition output by the master device is detected, the BBSY flag in ICCR is set to 1. The master device then outputs the 7-bit slave address and transmit/receive direction (R/W) in synchronization with the transmit clock pulses. 4. When the slave address matches in the first frame following the start condition, the device operates as the slave device specified by the master device. If the 8th data bit (R/W) is 0, the TRS bit remains cleared to 0, and slave transmit operation is performed. When the slave address does not match, receive operation is halted until the next start condition is detected. 5. At the 9th clock pulse of the receive frame, the slave device returns the data in the ACKB bit as an acknowledge signal. 6. At the rise of the 9th clock pulse, the IRIC flag is set to 1. If the IEIC bit has been set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU. If the AASX bit has been set to 1, the IRTR flag is also set to 1. 7. At the rise of the 9th clock pulse, the receive data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR, setting the ICDRF flag to 1. 8. Confirm that the STOP bit is cleared to 0 and clear the ICIC flag to 0. 9. If the next read data is the third last receive frame, wait for at least one frame time to set the ACKB bit. Set the ACKB bit after the rise of the 9th clock pulse of the second last receive frame. 10. Confirm that the ICDRF flag is set to 1 and read ICDR. This clears the ICDRF flag to 0. 11. At the rise of the 9th clock pulse or when the receive data is transferred from IRDRS to ICDRR due to ICDR read operation, the IRIC and ICDRF flags are set to 1. 12. When the stop condition is detected (SDA is changed from low to high when SCL is high), the BBSY flag is cleared to 0 and the STOP or ESTP flag is set to 1. If the STOPIM bit has been cleared to 0, the IRIC flag is set to 1. In this case, execute step [14] to read the last receive data. 13. Clear the IRIC flag to 0. Receive operations can be performed continuously by repeating steps [9] to [13]. 14. Confirm that the ICDRF flag is set to 1, and read ICDR. 15. Clear the IRIC flag. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 326 of 544 Start condition issuance SCL (master output) SDA (master output) SDA (slave output) IRIC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 R/W Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 [6] A Data 1 Slave address ICDRF ICDRS Address+R/W [7] Data 1 Address+R/W ICDRR User processing [8] IRIC clear [10] ICDR read Figure 13.21 Example of Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing (1) (MLS = ACKB = 0, HNDS = 0) Start condition detection SCL (master output) 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SDA (master output) Bit 0 Data n-2 SDA (slave output) IRIC ICDRF ICDRS ICDRR User processing Data n-2 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 [11] A Data n-1 [11] A Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Data n [11] A [11] Data n-1 Data n-2 [9] Wait for one frame [13] IRIC clear Data n-1 Data n Data n [13] IRIC clear [10] ICDR read [10] ICDR read (Data n-1) (Data n-2) [9] Set ACKB = 1 [13] IRIC clear [14] ICDR read (Data n) [15] IRIC clear Figure 13.22 Example of Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing (2) (MLS = ACKB = 0, HNDS = 0) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 327 of 544 13.4.6 Slave Transmit Operation If the slave address matches to the address in the first frame (address reception frame) following the start condition detection when the 8th bit data (R/W) is 1 (read), the TRS bit in ICCR is automatically set to 1 and the mode changes to slave transmit mode. Figure 13.23 shows the sample flowchart for the operations in slave transmit mode. Slave transmit mode Clear IRIC in ICCR [1], [2] If the slave address matches to the address in the first frame following the start condition detection and the R/W bit is 1 in slave recieve mode, the mode changes to slave transmit mode. [3], [5] Set transmit data for the second and subsequent bytes. Write transmit data in ICDR Clear IRIC in ICCR Read IRIC in ICCR [3], [4] Wait for 1 byte to be transmitted. No IRIC = 1? Yes Read ACKB in ICSR [4] Determine end of transfer. No End of transmission (ACKB = 1)? Yes Clear IRIC in ICCR [6] Read IRIC in ICCR [7] Clear acknowledge bit data Clear ACKE to 0 in ICCR (ACKB=0 clear) Set TRS = 0 in ICCR Read ICDR [8] Set slave receive mode. [9] Dummy read (to release the SCL line). [10] Wait for stop condition Read IRIC in ICCR No IRIC = 1? Yes Clear IRIC in ICCR End Figure 13.23 Sample Flowchart for Slave Transmit Mode Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 328 of 544 In slave transmit mode, the slave device outputs the transmit data, while the master device outputs the receive clock and returns an acknowledge signal. The transmission procedure and operations in slave transmit mode are described below. 1. Initialize slave receive mode and wait for slave address reception. 2. When the slave address matches in the first frame following detection of the start condition, the slave device drives SDA low at the 9th clock pulse and returns an acknowledge signal. If the 8th data bit (R/W) is 1, the TRS bit in ICCR is set to 1, and the mode changes to slave transmit mode automatically. The IRIC flag is set to 1 at the rise of the 9th clock. If the IEIC bit in ICCR has been set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU. At the same time, the ICDRE flag is set to 1. The slave device drives SCL low from the fall of the transmit clock until ICDR data is written, to disable the master device to output the next transfer clock. 3. After clearing the IRIC flag to 0, write data to ICDR. At this time, the ICDRE flag is cleared to 0. The written data is transferred to ICDRS, and the ICDRE and IRIC flags are set to 1 again. The slave device sequentially sends the data written into ICDRS in accordance with the clock output by the master device. The IRIC flag is cleared to 0 to detect the end of transmission. Processing from ICDR writing to the IRIC flag clearing should be performed continuously. Prevent any other interrupt processing from being inserted. 4. The master device drives SDA low at the 9th clock pulse, and returns an acknowledge signal. As this acknowledge signal is stored in the ACKB bit in ICSR, this bit can be used to determine whether the transfer operation was performed successfully. When one frame of data has been transmitted, the IRIC flag in ICCR is set to 1 at the rise of the 9th transmit clock pulse. When the ICDRE flag is 0, the data written into ICDR is transferred to ICDRS, transmission starts, and the ICDRE and IRIC flags are set to 1 again. If the ICDRE flag has been set to 1, this slave device drives SCL low from the fall of the transmit clock until data is written to ICDR. 5. To continue transmission, write the next data to be transmitted into ICDR. The ICDRE flag is cleared to 0. The IRIC flag is cleared to 0 to detect the end of transmission. Processing from ICDR writing to the IRIC flag clearing should be performed continuously. Prevent any other interrupt processing from being inserted. Transmit operations can be performed continuously by repeating steps [4] and [5]. 6. Clear the IRIC flag to 0. 7. To end transmission, clear the ACKE bit in ICCR to 0, to clear the acknowledge bit stored in the ACKB bit to 0. 8. Clear the TRS bit to 0 for the next address reception, to set slave receive mode. 9. Dummy-read ICDR to release SDA on the slave side. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 329 of 544 10. When the stop condition is detected, that is, when SDA is changed from low to high when SCL is high, the BBSY flag in ICCR is cleared to 0 and the STOP flag in ICSR is set to 1. When the STOPIM bit in ICXR is 0, the IRIC flag is set to 1. If the IRIC flag has been set, it is cleared to 0. Slave receive mode SCL (master output) SDA (slave output) Slave transmit mode 8 9 1 Bit 7 2 Bit 6 3 Bit 5 4 Bit 4 Data 1 5 Bit 3 6 Bit 2 7 Bit 1 8 Bit 0 9 1 Bit 7 [4] 2 Bit 6 A [2] Data 2 SDA (master output) R/W IRIC A ICDRE ICDR User processing [3] IRIC clear Data 1 Data 2 [5] IRIC clear [5] ICDR write [3] ICDR write [3] IRIC clear Figure 13.24 Example of Slave Transmit Mode Operation Timing (MLS = 0) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 330 of 544 13.4.7 IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control The interrupt request flag (IRIC) is set at different times depending on the WAIT bit in ICMR, the FS bit in SAR, and the FSX bit in SARX. If the ICDRE or ICDRF flag is set to 1, SCL is automatically held low after one frame has been transferred in synchronization with the internal clock. Figures 13.25 to 13.27 show the IRIC set timing and SCL control. When WAIT = 0, and FS = 0 or FSX = 0 (I2C bus format, no wait) SCL 7 8 9 1 2 3 SDA 7 8 A 1 2 3 IRIC User processing Clear IRIC (a) Data transfer ends with ICDRE = 0 at transmission, or ICDRF = 0 at reception. SCL 7 8 9 1 SDA 7 8 A 1 IRIC User processing Clear IRIC Write to ICDR (transmit) or read from ICDR (receive) Clear IRIC (b) Data transfer ends with ICDRE = 1 at transmission, or ICDRF = 1 at reception. Figure 13.25 IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control (1) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 331 of 544 When WAIT = 1, and FS = 0 or FSX = 0 (I2C bus format, wait inserted) SCL 8 9 1 2 3 SDA 8 A 1 2 3 IRIC User processing Clear IRIC Clear IRIC (a) Data transfer ends with ICDRE=0 at transmission, or ICDRF=0 at reception. SCL 8 9 1 SDA 8 A 1 IRIC User processing Clear IRIC Write to ICDR (transmit) or read from ICDR (receive) Clear IRIC (b) Data transfer ends with ICDRE=1 at transmission, or ICDRF=1 at reception. Figure 13.26 IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control (2) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 332 of 544 When FS = 1 and FSX = 1 (clocked synchronous serial format) SCL 7 8 1 2 3 4 SDA 7 8 1 2 3 4 IRIC User processing Clear IRIC (a) Data transfer ends with ICDRE = 0 at transmission, or ICDRF = 0 at reception. SCL 7 8 1 SDA 7 8 1 IRIC User processing Clear IRIC Write to ICDR (transmit) or read from ICDR (receive) Clear IRIC (b) Data transfer ends with ICDRE =1 at transmission, or ICDRF = 1 at reception. Figure 13.27 IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control (3) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 333 of 544 13.4.8 Noise Canceller The logic levels at the SCL and SDA pins are routed through noise cancellers before being latched internally. Figure 13.28 shows a block diagram of the noise canceller. The noise canceller consists of two cascaded latches and a match detector. The SCL (or SDA) pin input signal is sampled on the system clock, but is not passed forward to the next circuit unless the outputs of both latches agree. If they do not agree, the previous value is held. Sampling clock C SCL or D SDA input signal Latch Q D C Q Latch Match detector Internal SCL or SDA signal System clock cycle Sampling clock Figure 13.28 Block Diagram of Noise Canceler Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 334 of 544 13.4.9 Initialization of Internal State The IIC has a function for forcible initialization of its internal state if a deadlock occurs during communication. Initialization is executed in accordance with the setting of bits CLR3 to CLR0 in DDCSWR or clearing ICE bit. For details on the setting of bits CLR3 to CLR0, see section 13.3.7, DDC Switch Register (DDCSWR). Scope of Initialization: The initialization executed by this function covers the following items: • ICDRE and ICDRF internal flags • Transmit/receive sequencer and internal operating clock counter • Internal latches for retaining the output state of the SCL and SDA pins (wait, clock, data output, etc.) The following items are not initialized: • Actual register values (ICDR, SAR, SARX, ICMR, ICCR, ICSR, ICXR (except for the ICDRE and ICDRF flags), and PGCTL) • Internal latches used to retain register read information for setting/clearing flags in ICMR, ICCR, and ICSR • The value of the ICMR bit counter (BC2 to BC0) • Generated interrupt sources (interrupt sources transferred to the interrupt controller) Notes on Initialization: • Interrupt flags and interrupt sources are not cleared, and so flag clearing measures must be taken as necessary. • Basically, other register flags are not cleared either, and so flag clearing measures must be taken as necessary. • When initialization is executed by DDCSWR, the write data for bits CLR3 to CLR0 is not retained. To perform IIC clearance, bits CLR3 to CLR0 must be written to simultaneously using an MOV instruction. Do not use a bit manipulation instruction such as BCLR. • Similarly, when clearing is required again, all the bits must be written to simultaneously in accordance with the setting. • If a flag clearing setting is made during transmission/reception, the IIC module will stop transmitting/receiving at that point and the SCL and SDA pins will be released. When transmission/reception is started again, register initialization, etc., must be carried out as necessary to enable correct communication as a system. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 335 of 544 The value of the BBSY bit cannot be modified directly by this module clear function, but since the stop condition pin waveform is generated according to the state and release timing of the SCL and SDA pins, the BBSY bit may be cleared as a result. Similarly, state switching of other bits and flags may also have an effect. To prevent problems caused by these factors, the following procedure should be used when initializing the IIC state. 1. Execute initialization of the internal state according to the setting of bits CLR3 to CLR0 or ICE bit clearing. 2. Execute a stop condition issuance instruction (write 0 to BBSY and SCP) to clear the BBSY bit to 0, and wait for two transfer rate clock cycles. 3. Re-execute initialization of the internal state according to the setting of bits CLR3 to CLR0 or ICE bit clearing. 4. Initialize (re-set) the IIC registers. 13.5 Interrupt Sources The IIC has interrupt source IICI. Table 13.7 shows the interrupt sources and priority. Individual interrupt sources can be enabled or disabled using the enable bits in ICCR, and are sent to the interrupt controller independently. Table 13.7 IIC Interrupt Sources Channel 0 1 Name IICI0 IICI1 Enable Bit IEIC IEIC Interrupt Source I C bus interface interrupt request I2C bus interface interrupt request 2 Interrupt Flag IRIC IRIC Priority High Low Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 336 of 544 13.6 Usage Notes 1. In master mode, if an instruction to generate a start condition is issued and then an instruction to generate a stop condition is issued before the start condition is output to the I2C bus, neither condition will be output correctly. To output the start condition followed by the stop condition, after issuing the instruction that generates the start condition, read DR in each I2C bus output pin, and check that SCL and SDA are both low. The pin states can be monitored by reading DR even if the ICE bit is set to 1. Then issue the instruction that generates the stop condition. Note that SCL may not yet have gone low when BBSY is cleared to 0. 2. Either of the following two conditions will start the next transfer. Pay attention to these conditions when accessing to ICDR.  Write to ICDR when ICE = 1 and TRS = 1 (including automatic transfer from ICDRT to ICDRS)  Read from ICDR when ICE = 1 and TRS = 0 (including automatic transfer from ICDRS to ICDRR) 3. Table 13.8 shows the timing of SCL and SDA outputs in synchronization with the internal clock. Timings on the bus are determined by the rise and fall times of signals affected by the bus load capacitance, series resistance, and parallel resistance. Table 13.8 I2C Bus Timing (SCL and SDA Outputs) Item SCL output cycle time SCL output high pulse width SCL output low pulse width SDA output bus free time Start condition output hold time Retransmission start condition output setup time Stop condition output setup time Data output setup time (master) Data output setup time (slave) Data output hold time Note: * tSDAHO 6tcyc when IICX is 0, 12tcyc when 1. Symbol tSCLO tSCLHO tSCLLO tBUFO tSTAHO tSTASO tSTOSO tSDASO Output Timing 28tcyc to 256tcyc 0.5tSCLO 0.5tSCLO 0.5tSCLO – 1tcyc 0.5tSCLO – 1tcyc 1tSCLO 0.5tSCLO + 2tcyc 1tSCLLO – 3tcyc 1tSCLL – (6tcyc or 12tcyc*) 3tcyc ns Unit ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns Notes See figure 22.22. 4. SCL and SDA inputs are sampled in synchronization with the internal clock. The AC timing therefore depends on the system clock cycle tcyc, as shown in section 22, Electrical Characteristics. Note that the I2C bus interface AC timing specifications will not be met with a system clock frequency of less than 5 MHz. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 337 of 544 5. The I2C bus interface specification for the SCL rise time tsr is 1000 ns or less (300 ns for highspeed mode). In master mode, the I2C bus interface monitors the SCL line and synchronizes one bit at a time during communication. If tsr (the time for SCL to go from low to VIH) exceeds the time determined by the input clock of the I2C bus interface, the high period of SCL is extended. The SCL rise time is determined by the pull-up resistance and load capacitance of the SCL line. To insure proper operation at the set transfer rate, adjust the pull-up resistance and load capacitance so that the SCL rise time does not exceed the values given in table 13.9. Table 13.9 Permissible SCL Rise Time (tsr) Values Time Indication [ns] I C Bus Specification φ = 5 MHz (Max.) Standard mode 1000 1000 300 1000 300 2 IICX 0 tcyc Indication 7.5 tcyc 17.5 tcyc φ= 8 MHz 937 300 1000 300 φ= 10 MHz 750 300 1000 300 High-speed mode 300 1 Standard mode 1000 High-speed mode 300 6. The I2C bus interface specifications for the SCL and SDA rise and fall times are under 1000 ns and 300 ns. The I2C bus interface SCL and SDA output timing is prescribed by tcyc, as shown in table 13.8. However, because of the rise and fall times, the I2C bus interface specifications may not be satisfied at the maximum transfer rate. Table 13.10 shows output timing calculations for different operating frequencies, including the worst-case influence of rise and fall times. tBUFO fails to meet the I2C bus interface specifications at any frequency. The solution is either (a) to provide coding to secure the necessary interval (approximately 1 µs) between issuance of a stop condition and issuance of a start condition, or (b) to select devices whose input timing permits this output timing for use as slave devices connected to the I2C bus. tSCLLO in high-speed mode and tSTASO in standard mode fail to satisfy the I2C bus interface specifications for worst-case calculations of tSr/tSf. Possible solutions that should be investigated include (a) adjusting the rise and fall times by means of a pull-up resistor and capacitive load, (b) reducing the transfer rate to meet the specifications, or (c) selecting devices whose input timing permits this output timing for use as slave devices connected to the I2C bus. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 338 of 544 Table 13.10 I2C Bus Timing (with Maximum Influence of tSr/tSf) Time Indication (at Maximum Transfer Rate) [ns] I2C Bus tSr/tSf SpecifiInfluence cation (Max.) (Min.) Standard mode High-speed mode tSCLLO 0.5 tSCLO (–tSf) Standard mode High-speed mode tBUFO 0.5 tSCLO –1 tcyc (–tSr) 0.5 tSCLO –1 tcyc (–tSf) 1 tSCLO (–tSr) Standard mode High-speed mode Standard mode High-speed mode Standard mode High-speed mode tSTOSO 0.5 tSCLO + 2 tcyc (–tSr) 3 Item tSCLHO tcyc Indication 0.5 tSCLO (–tSr) φ= 5 MHz 4000 950 4750 1000* 1 φ= 8 MHz 4000 950 4750 1000* 3875* 825* 1 1 φ= 10 MHz 4000 950 4750 1000* 3900* 850* 1 1 –1000 –300 –250 –250 –1000 –300 –250 –250 –1000 –300 –1000 –300 –1000 –300 –1000 4000 600 4700 1300 4700 1300 4000 600 4700 600 4000 600 250 100 250 3800* 750* 1 1 1 1 tSTAHO 4550 800 9000 2200 4400 1350 3100 400 1300 4625 875 9000 2200 4250 1200 3325 625 2200 4650 900 9000 2200 4200 1150 3400 700 2500 tSTASO Standard mode High-speed mode Standard mode High-speed mode Standard mode tSDASO 1 tSCLLO* –3 tcyc (master) (–tSr) tSDASO (slave) 1 tSCLL* 3 –12 tcyc* (–tSr) 3 tcyc 2 High-speed mode Standard mode High-speed mode 2 –300 0 0 100 0 0 –1400* 600 600 1 –500* 375 375 1 –200* 300 300 1 tSDAHO Notes: 1. Does not meet the I C bus interface specification. Remedial action such as the following is necessary: (a) secure a start/stop condition issuance interval; (b) adjust the rise and fall times by means of a pull-up resistor and capacitive load; (c) reduce the transfer rate; (d) select slave devices whose input timing permits this output timing. The values in the above table will vary depending on the settings of the IICX bit and bits CKS0 to CKS2. Depending on the frequency it may not be possible to achieve the 2 maximum transfer rate; therefore, whether or not the I C bus interface specifications are met must be determined in accordance with the actual setting conditions. 2. Value when the IICX bit is set to 1. When the IICX bit is cleared to 0, the value is (tSCLL – 6tcyc). 2 3. Calculated using the I C bus specification values (standard mode: 4700 ns min.; highspeed mode: 1300 ns min.). Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 339 of 544 7. Notes on ICDR read at end of master reception To halt reception at the end of a receive operation in master receive mode, set the TRS bit to 1 and write 0 to BBSY and SCP in ICCR. This changes SDA from low to high when SCL is high, and generates the stop condition. After this, receive data can be read by means of an ICDR read, but if data remains in the buffer the ICDRS receive data will not be transferred to ICDR (ICDRR), and so it will not be possible to read the second byte of data. If it is necessary to read the second byte of data, issue the stop condition in master receive mode (i.e. with the TRS bit cleared to 0). When reading the receive data, first confirm that the BBSY bit in ICCR is cleared to 0, the stop condition has been generated, and the bus has been released, then read ICDR with TRS cleared to 0. Note that if the receive data (ICDR data) is read in the interval between execution of the instruction for issuance of the stop condition (writing of 0 to BBSY and SCP in ICCR) and the actual generation of the stop condition, the clock may not be output correctly in subsequent master transmission. Clearing of the MST bit after completion of master transmission/reception, or other modifications of IIC control bits to change the transmit/receive operating mode or settings, must be carried out during interval (a) in figure 13.29 (after confirming that the BBSY bit in ICCR has been cleared to 0). Stop condition (a) SDA SCL Internal clock BBSY bit Bit 0 8 A 9 Start condition Master receive mode ICDR read disabled period Execution of instruction for issuing stop condition (write 0 to BBSY and SCP) Confirmation of stop condition issuance (read BBSY = 0) Start condition issuance Figure 13.29 Notes on Reading Master Receive Data Note: This restriction on usage can be canceled by setting the FNC1 and FNC0 bits to 1 in ICXR. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 340 of 544 8. Notes on start condition issuance for retransmission Figure 13.30 shows the timing of start condition issuance for retransmission, and the timing for subsequently writing data to ICDR, together with the corresponding flowchart. Write the transmit data to ICDR after the start condition for retransmission is issued and then the start condition is actually generated. IRIC = 1? Yes Clear IRIC in ICSR No [1] [1] Wait for end of 1-byte transfer [2] Determine whether SCL is low [3] Issue start condition instruction for retransmission Start condition issuance? Yes Read SCL pin SCL = Low? Yes Set BBSY = 1, SCP = 0 (ICSR) No Other processing [4] Determine whether start condition is generated or not [5] Set transmit data (slave address + R/W) No [2] Note:* Program so that processing from [3] to [5] is executed continuously. [3] IRIC = 1? Yes Write transmit data to ICDR No [4] [5] Start condition generation (retransmission) SCL 9 SDA ACK bit7 IRIC [5] ICDR write (transmit data) [4] IRIC determination [1] IRIC determination [3] (Retransmission) Start condition instruction issuance [2] Determination of SCL = Low Figure 13.30 Flowchart for Start Condition Issuance Instruction for Retransmission and Timing Note: This restriction on usage can be canceled by setting the FNC1 and FNC0 bits to 1 in ICXR. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 341 of 544 9. Note on when I2C bus interface stop condition instruction is issued In cases where the rise time of the 9th clock of SCL exceeds the stipulated value because of a large bus load capacity or where a slave device in which a wait can be inserted by driving the SCL pin low is used, the stop condition instruction should be issued after reading SCL after the rise of the 9th clock pulse and determining that it is low. 9th clock VIH Secures a high period SCL SCL is detected as low because the rise of the waveform is delayed SDA Stop condition generation IRIC [1] SCL = low determination [2] Stop condition instruction issuance Figure 13.31 Stop Condition Issuance Timing Note: This restriction on usage can be canceled by setting the FNC1 and FNC0 bits to 1 in ICXR. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 342 of 544 10. Note on IRIC flag clear when the wait function is used If the rise time of SCL exceeds the stipulated value or a slave device in which a wait can be inserted by driving the SCL pin low is used when the wait function is used in I2C bust interface master mode, the IRIC flag should be cleared after determining that the SCL is low, as described below. If the IRIC flag is cleared to 0 when WAIT = 1 while the SCL is extending the high level time, the SDA level may change before the SCL goes low, which may generate a start or stop condition erroneously. Secures a high period SCL VIH SCL = low detected SDA IRIC [1] SCL = low determination [2] IRIC clear Figure 13.32 IRIC Flag Clearing Timing when WAIT = 1 Note: This restriction on usage can be canceled by setting the FNC1 and FNC0 bits to 1 in ICXR. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 343 of 544 11. Note on ICDR read and ICCR access in slave transmit mode In I2C bus interface slave transmit mode, do not read ICDR or do not read/write from/to ICCR during the time shaded in figure 13.33. However, such read and write operations cause no problem in interrupt handling processing that is generated in synchronization with the rising edge of the 9th clock pulse because the shaded time has passed before making the transition to interrupt handling. To handle interrupts securely, be sure to keep either of the following conditions.  Read ICDR data that has been received so far or read/write from/to ICCR before starting the receive operation of the next slave address.  Monitor the BC2 to BC0 bit counter in ICMR; when the count is 000 (8th or 9th clock pulse), wait for at least two transfer clock times in order to read ICDR or read/write from/to ICCR during the time other than the shaded time. Waveform at problem occurrence ICDR write SDA R/W A Bit 7 SCL 8 9 TRS bit Address reception Data transmission ICDR read and ICCR read/write are disabled (6 system clock period) The rise of the 9th clock is detected Figure 13.33 ICDR Read and ICCR Access Timing in Slave Transmit Mode Note: This restriction on usage can be canceled by setting the FNC1 and FNC0 bits to 1 in ICXR. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 344 of 544 12. Note on TRS bit setting in slave mode In I2C bus interface slave mode, if the TRS bit value in ICCR is set after detecting the rising edge of the 9th clock pulse or the stop condition before detecting the next rising edge on the SCL pin (the time indicated as (a) in figure 13.34), the bit value becomes valid immediately when it is set. However, if the TRS bit is set during the other time (the time indicated as (b) in figure 13.34), the bit value is suspended and remains invalid until the rising edge of the 9th clock pulse or the stop condition is detected. Therefore, when the address is received after the restart condition is input without the stop condition, the effective TRS bit value remains 1 (transmit mode) internally and thus the acknowledge bit is not transmitted after the address has been received at the 9th clock pulse. To receive the address in slave mode, clear the TRS bit to 0 during the time indicated as (a) in figure 13.34. To release the SCL low level that is held by means of the wait function in slave mode, clear the TRS bit to and then dummy-read ICDR. Restart condition (a) SDA (b) A SCL 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 TRS Data transmission Address reception TRS bit setting is suspended in this period ICDR dummy read TRS bit setting The rise of the 9th clock is detected The rise of the 9th clock is detected Figure 13.34 TRS Bit Set Timing in Slave Mode Note: This restriction on usage can be canceled by setting the FNC1 and FNC0 bits to 1 in ICXR. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 345 of 544 13. Note on ICDR read in transmit mode and ICDR write in receive mode If ICDR is read in transmit mode (TRS = 1) or ICDR is written to in receive mode (TRS = 0), the SCL pin may not be held low in some cases after transmit/receive operation has been completed, thus inconveniently allowing clock pulses to be output on the SCL bus line before ICDR is accessed correctly. To access ICDR correctly, read ICDR after setting receive mode or write to ICDR after setting transmit mode. 14. Note on ACKE and TRS bits in slave mode In the I2C bus interface, if 1 is received as the acknowledge bit value (ACKB = 1) in transmit mode (TRS = 1) and then the address is received in slave mode without performing appropriate processing, interrupt handling may start at the rising edge of the 9th clock pulse even when the address does not match. Similarly, if the start condition or address is transmitted from the master device in slave transmit mode (TRS = 1), the IRIC flag may be set after the ICDRE flag is set and 1 received as the acknowledge bit value (ACKB = 1), thus causing an interrupt source even when the address does not match. To use the I2C bus interface module in slave mode, be sure to follow the procedures below. A. When having received 1 as the acknowledge bit value for the last transmit data at the end of a series of transmit operation, clear the ACKE bit in ICCR once to initialize the ACKB bit to 0. B. Set receive mode (TRS = 0) before the next start condition is input in slave mode. Complete transmit operation by the procedure shown in figure 13.23, in order to switch from slave transmit mode to slave receive mode. 15. Note on Arbitration Lost in Master Mode The I2C bus interface recognizes the data in transmit/receive frame as an address when arbitration is lost in master mode and a transition to slave receive mode is automatically carried out. When arbitration is lost not in the first frame but in the second frame or subsequent frame, transmit/receive data that is not an address is compared with the value set in the SAR or SARX register as an address. If the receive data matches with the address in the SAR or SARX register, the I2C bus interface erroneously recognizes that the address call has occurred. (See figure 13.35.) In multi-master mode, a bus conflict could happen. When the I2C bus interface is operated in master mode, check the state of the AL bit in the ICSR register every time after one frame of data has been transmitted or received. When arbitration is lost during transmitting the second frame or subsequent frame, take avoidance measures. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 346 of 544 • Arbitration is lost • The AL flag in ICSR is set to 1 bus interface (Master transmit mode) I2C S SLA R/W A DATA1 Transmit data does not match Transmit data match Transmit timing match Other device (Master transmit mode) S SLA R/W A DATA2 A DATA3 A Data contention I2C bus interface (Slave receive mode) S SLA R/W A SLA R/W A DATA4 A • Receive address is ignored • Automatically transferred to slave receive mode • Receive data is recognized as an address • When the receive data matches to the address set in the SAR or SARX register, the I2C bus interface operates as a slave device. Figure 13.35 Diagram of Erroneous Operation when Arbitration is Lost Though it is prohibited in the normal I2C protocol, the same problem may occur when the MST bit is erroneously set to 1 and a transition to master mode is occurred during data transmission or reception in slave mode. In multi-master mode, pay attention to the setting of the MST bit when a bus conflict may occur. In this case, the MST bit in the ICCR register should be set to 1 according to the order below. A. Make sure that the BBSY flag in the ICCR register is 0 and the bus is free before setting the MST bit. B. Set the MST bit to 1. C. To confirm that the bus was not entered to the busy state while the MST bit is being set, check that the BBSY flag in the ICCR register is 0 immediately after the MST bit has been set. Note: Above restriction can be cleared by setting bits FNC1 and FNC0 in the ICXR register. 13.6.1 Module Stop Mode Setting The IIC operation can be enabled or disabled using the module stop control register. The initial setting is for the IIC operation to be halted. Register access is enabled by canceling module stop mode. For details, see section 20, Power-Down Modes. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 347 of 544 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 348 of 544 Section 14 Keyboard Buffer Controller This LSI has three on-chip keyboard buffer controller channels. The keyboard buffer controller is provided with functions conforming to the PS/2 interface specifications. Data transfer using the keyboard buffer controller employs a data line (KD) and a clock line (KCLK), providing economical use of connectors, board surface area, etc. Figure 14.1 shows a block diagram of the keyboard buffer controller. 14.1 • • • • Features Conforms to PS/2 interface specifications Direct bus drive (via the KCLK and KD pins) Interrupt sources: on completion of data reception and on detection of clock edge Error detection: parity error and stop bit monitoring Internal data bus KBBR KDI Control logic KCLKI Parity KBCRH KCLK (PS2AC, PS2BC, PS2CC) KDO KCLKO KBCRL Register counter value KBI interrupt [Legend] KD: KCLK: KBBR: KBCRH: KBCRL: KBC data I/O pin KBC clock I/O pin Keyboard data buffer register Keyboard control register H Keyboard control register L Figure 14.1 Block Diagram of Keyboard Buffer Controller IFKEY10A_000020020700 Module data bus Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 349 of 544 Bus interface KD (PS2AD, PS2BD, PS2CD) Figure 14.2 shows how the keyboard buffer controller is connected. Vcc Vcc System side KCLK in Clock KCLK out Keyboard side KCLK in KCLK out KD in Data KD out KD in KD out Keyboard buffer controller (This LSI) I/F Figure 14.2 Keyboard Buffer Controller Connection 14.2 Input/Output Pins Table 14.1 lists the input/output pins used by the keyboard buffer controller. Table 14.1 Pin Configuration Channel 0 1 2 Note: * Name KBC clock I/O pin (KCLK0) KBC data I/O pin (KD0) KBC clock I/O pin (KCLK1) KBC data I/O pin (KD1) KBC clock I/O pin (KCLK2) KBC data I/O pin (KD2) Abbreviation* PS2AC PS2AD PS2BC PS2BD PS2CC PS2CD I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O Function KBC clock input/output KBC data input/output KBC clock input/output KBC data input/output KBC clock input/output KBC data input/output These are the external I/O pin names. In the text, clock I/O pins are referred to as KCLK and data I/O pins as KD, omitting the channel designations. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 350 of 544 14.3 Register Descriptions The keyboard buffer controller has the following registers for each channel. • Keyboard control register H (KBCRH) • Keyboard control register L (KBCRL) • Keyboard data buffer register (KBBR) 14.3.1 Keyboard Control Register H (KBCRH) KBCRH indicates the operating status of the keyboard buffer controller. Bit 7 Bit Name KBIOE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Keyboard In/Out Enable Selects whether or not the keyboard buffer controller is used. 0: The keyboard buffer controller is non-operational (KCLK and KD signal pins have port functions) 1: The keyboard buffer controller is enabled for transmission and reception (KCLK and KD signal pins are in the bus drive state) 6 KCLKI 1 R/W Keyboard Clock In Monitors the KCLK I/O pin. This bit cannot be modified. 0: KCLK I/O pin is low 1: KCLK I/O pin is high 5 KDI 1 R/W Keyboard Data In: Monitors the KDI I/O pin. This bit cannot be modified. 0: KD I/O pin is low 1: KD I/O pin is high 4 KBFSEL 1 R/W Keyboard Buffer Register Full Select Selects whether the KBF bit is used as the keyboard buffer register full flag or as the KCLK fall interrupt flag. When KBFSEL is cleared to 0, the KBE bit in KBCRL should be cleared to 0 to disable reception. 0: KBF bit is used as KCLK fall interrupt flag 1: KBF bit is used as keyboard buffer register full flag Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 351 of 544 Bit 3 Bit Name KBIE Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Keyboard Interrupt Enable Enables or disables interrupts from the keyboard buffer controller to the CPU. 0: Interrupt requests are disabled 1: Interrupt requests are enabled 2 KBF 0 R/(W)* Keyboard Buffer Register Full Indicates that data reception has been completed and the received data is in KBBR. 0: [Clearing condition] Read KBF when KBF =1, then write 0 in KBF 1: [Setting conditions] • When data has been received normally and has been transferred to KBBR while KBFSEL = 1 (keyboard buffer register full flag) When a KCLK falling edge is detected while KBFSEL = 0 (KCLK interrupt flag) • 1 PER 0 R/(W)* Parity Error Indicates that an odd parity error has occurred. 0: [Clearing condition] Read PER when PER =1, then write 0 in PER 1: [Setting condition] When an odd parity error occurs 0 KBS 0 R Keyboard Stop Indicates the receive data stop bit. Valid only when KBF = 1. 0: 0 stop bit received 1: 1 stop bit received Note: * Only 0 can be written for clearing the flag. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 352 of 544 14.3.2 Keyboard Control Register L (KBCRL) KBCRL enables the receive counter count and controls the keyboard buffer controller pin output. Bit 7 Initial Bit Name Value KBE 0 R/W R/W Description Keyboard Enable Enables or disables loading of receive data into KBBR. 0: Loading of receive data into KBBR is disabled 1: Loading of receive data into KBBR is enabled Keyboard Clock Out Controls KBC clock I/O pin output. 0: KBC clock I/O pin is low 1: KBC clock I/O pin is high Keyboard Data Out Controls KBC data I/O pin output. 0: KBC data I/O pin is low 1: KBC data I/O pin is high Reserved This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified. Receive Counter These bits indicate the received data bit. Their value is incremented on the fall of KCLK. These bits cannot be modified. The receive counter is initialized to 0000 by a reset and when 0 is written in KBE. Its value returns to 0000 after a stop bit is received. 0000: — 0001: Start bit 0010: KB0 0011: KB1 0100: KB2 0101: KB3 0110: KB4 0111: KB5 1000: KB6 1001: KB7 1010: Parity bit 1011: — 11- - : — 6 KCLKO 1 R/W 5 KDO 1 R/W 4 3 2 1 0 — RXCR3 RXCR2 RXCR1 RXCR0 1 0 0 0 0 — R R R R Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 353 of 544 14.3.3 Keyboard Data Buffer Register (KBBR) KBBR stores receive data. Its value is valid only when KBF = 1. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Bit Name Value KB7 KB6 KB5 KB4 KB3 KB2 KB1 KB0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R R R R R R R R Description Keyboard Data 7 to 0 8-bit read only data. Initialized to H'00 by a reset, in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode, and when KBIOE is cleared to 0. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 354 of 544 14.4 14.4.1 Operation Receive Operation In a receive operation, both KCLK (clock) and KD (data) are outputs on the keyboard side and inputs on this LSI chip (system) side. KD receives a start bit, 8 data bits (LSB-first), an odd parity bit, and a stop bit, in that order. The KD value is valid when KCLK is low. A sample receive processing flowchart is shown in figure 14.3, and the receive timing in figure 14.4. Start [1] Set the KBIOE bit to 1 in KBCRL. Set KBIOE bit [1] [2] Read KBCRH, and if the KCLKI and KDI bits are both 1, set the KBE bit (receive enabled state). [3] Detect the start bit output on the keyboard side and receive data in synchronization with the fall of KCLK. Keyboard side in data transmission state. Execute receive abort processing. [4] When a stop bit is received, the keyboard buffer controller drives KCLK low to disable keyboard transmission (automatic I/O inhibit). If the KBIE bit is set to 1 in KBCRH, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU at the same time. [5] Perform receive data processing. [6] Clear the KBF flag to 0 in KBCRL. At the same time, the system automatically drives KCLK high, setting the receive enabled state. The receive operation can be continued by repeating steps [3] to [6]. Read KBCRH KCLKI and KDI bits both 1? Yes Set KBE bit [2] No [3] Receive enabled state KBF = 1? Yes PER = 0? Yes KBS = 1? Yes Read KBBR No [4] No No Error handling [5] Receive data processing Clear KBF flag (receive enabled state) [6] Figure 14.3 Sample Receive Processing Flowchart Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 355 of 544 Flag cleared Receive processing/ error handling KCLK (pin state) KD (pin state) KCLK (input) KCLK (output) KB7 to KB0 Previous data KB0 KB1 Automatic I/O inhibit 1 Start bit 2 3 9 10 11 0 1 7 Parity bit Stop bit Receive data PER KBS KBF [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] Figure 14.4 Receive Timing 14.4.2 Transmit Operation In a transmit operation, KCLK (clock) is an output on the keyboard side, and KD (data) is an output on the chip (system) side. KD outputs a start bit, 8 data bits (LSB-first), an odd parity bit, and a stop bit, in that order. The KD value is valid when KCLK is high. A sample transmit processing flowchart is shown in figure 14.5, and the transmit timing in figure 14.6. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 356 of 544 Start Set KBIOE bit Read KBCRH KCLKI and KDI bits both 1? Yes Set I/O inhibit (KCLKO = 0) KBE = 0 (KBBR reception prohibited) Wait Set start bit (KDO = 0) Set I/O inhibit (KCLKO = 1) i=0 [6] No [4] KCLKO remains at 0 [5] KDO remains at 0 KDO remains at 1 [1] [2] No [1] Set the KBE bit to 1 in KBCRH. [2] Read KBCRH, and if the KCLKI and KDI bits are both 1, write 0 in the KCLKO bit (set I/O inhibit). [3] Write 0 in the KBE bit (prohibit KBBR receive operation). [4] Write 0 in the KDO bit (set start bit). 2 (Continued on [5] Write 1 in the KCLKO bit (clear I/O inhibit). next page) [6] Read KBCRH, and when KCLKI = 0, set the transmit data in the KDO bit (LSBfirst). Next, set the parity bit and stop bit in the KDO bit. [7] After transmitting the stop bit, read KBCRL and confirm that KDI = 0 (receive completed notification from the keyboard). [8] Read KBCRH. Confirm that the KCLKI and KDI bits are both 1. The transmit operation can be continued by repeating steps [2] to [8]. [3] Read KBCRH KCLKI = 0? Yes Set transmit data (KDO = D(i)) Read KBCRH KCLKI = 1? Yes i=i+1 i > 9? Yes Read KBCRH KCLKI = 1? No i = 0 to 7: Transmit data i = 8: Parity bit i = 9: Stop bit No No Yes 1 (Continued on next page) Figure 14.5 Sample Transmit Processing Flowchart (1) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 357 of 544 1 Read KBCRH No 2 Yes KDI = 0? * Yes [8] Read KBCRH No Error handling No [7] Keyboard side in data transmission state. Execute receive abort processing. KCLKI = 0? KCLK = 1? Yes Transmit end state (KCLK = high, KD = high) To receive operation or transmit operation Note: * To switch to reception after transmission, set KBE to 1 (KBBR receive enable) while KCLKI is low. Figure 14.5 Sample Transmit Processing Flowchart (2) KCLK (pin state) KD (pin state) KCLK (output) KD (output) KCLK (input) KD (input) Receive completed notification 1 2 8 9 10 11 Start bit 0 1 7 Parity bit Stop bit I/O inhibit Start bit 0 1 7 Parity bit Stop bit [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] Figure 14.6 Transmit Timing Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 358 of 544 14.4.3 Receive Abort This LSI (system side) can forcibly abort transmission from the device connected to it (keyboard side) in the event of a protocol error, etc. In this case, the system holds the clock low. During reception, the keyboard also outputs a clock for synchronization, and the clock is monitored when the keyboard output clock is high. If the clock is low at this time, the keyboard judges that there is an abort request from the system, and data transmission from the keyboard is aborted. Thus the system can abort reception by holding the clock low for a certain period. A sample receive abort processing flowchart is shown in figure 14.7, and the receive abort timing in figure 14.8. [1] Read KBCRL, and if KBF = 1, perform processing 1. [2] Read KBCRH, and if the value of bits RXCR3 to RXCR0 is less than B'1001, write 0 in KCLKO to abort reception. If the value of bits RXCR3 to RXCR0 is B'1001 or greater, wait until stop bit reception is completed, then perform receive data processing, and proceed to the next operation. Start Receive state Read KBCRL KBF = 0? Yes Read KBCRH No Processing 1 No [1] RXCR3 to RXCR0 ≥ B'1001? Yes Disable receive abort requests [3] [3] If the value of bits RXCR3 to RXCR0 is B'1001 or greater, the parity bit is being received. With the PS2 interface, a receive abort [2] request following parity bit KCLKO = 0 reception is disabled. Wait until (receive abort request) stop bit reception is completed, perform receive data processing and clear the KBF flag, then Retransmit proceed to the next operation. command transmission No (data)? Yes KBE = 0 (disable KBBR reception and clear receive counter) Set start bit (KDO = 0) Clear I/O inhibit (KCLKO = 1) Transmit data KBE = 0 (disable KBBR reception and clear receive counter) KBE = 1 (enable KB operation) Clear I/O inhibit (KCLKO = 1) To transmit operation To receive operation Figure 14.7 Sample Receive Abort Processing Flowchart (1) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 359 of 544 Processing 1 [1] On the system side, drive the KCLK pin low, setting the I/O inhibit state. Receive operation ends normally [1] Receive data processing Clear KBF flag (KCLK = High) Transmit enabled state. If there is transmit data, the data is transmitted. Figure 14.7 Sample Receive Abort Processing Flowchart (2) Keyboard side monitors clock during receive operation (transmit operation as seen from keyboard), and aborts receive operation during this period. Reception in progress KCLK (pin state) KD (pin state) KCLK (input) KCLK (output) KD (input) KD (output) Receive abort request Start bit Transmit operation Figure 14.8 Receive Abort and Transmit Start (Transmission/Reception Switchover) Timing Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 360 of 544 14.4.4 KCLKI and KDI Read Timing Figure 14.9 shows the KCLKI and KDI read timing. T1 T2 φ* Internal read signal KCLK, KD (pin state) KCLKI, KDI (register) Internal data bus (read data) Note: * The φ clock shown here is scaled by 1/N in medium-speed mode when the operating mode is active mode. Figure 14.9 KCLKI and KDI Read Timing 14.4.5 KCLKO and KDO Write Timing Figure 14.10 shows the KLCKO and KDO write timing and the KCLK and KD pin states. T1 T2 φ* Internal write signal KCLKO, KDO (register) KCLK, KD (pin state) The φ clock shown here is scaled by 1/N in medium-speed mode when the operating mode is active mode. Note: * Figure 14.10 KCLKO and KDO Write Timing Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 361 of 544 14.4.6 KBF Setting Timing and KCLK Control Figure 14.11 shows the KBF setting timing and the KCLK pin states. φ* KCLK (pin) Internal KCLK Falling edge signal RXCR3 to RXCR0 KBF 11th fall B'1010 B'0000 KCLK (output) Automatic I/O inhibit Note: * The φ clock shown here is scaled by 1/N in medium-speed mode when the operating mode is active mode. Figure 14.11 KBF Setting and KCLK Automatic I/O Inhibit Generation Timing Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 362 of 544 14.4.7 Receive Timing Figure 14.12 shows the receive timing. φ* KCLK (pin) KD (pin) Internal KCLK (KCLKI) Falling edge signal RXCR3 to RXCR0 Internal KD (KDI) KBBR7 to KBBR0 The φ clock shown here is scaled by 1/N in medium-speed mode when the operating mode is active mode. N N+1 N+2 Note: * Figure 14.12 Receive Counter and KBBR Data Load Timing Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 363 of 544 14.4.8 KCLK Fall Interrupt Operation In this device, clearing the KBFSEL bit to 0 in KBCRH enables the KBF bit in KBCRL to be used as a flag for the interrupt generated by the fall of KCLK input. Figure 14.13 shows the setting method and an example of operation. Start Set KBIOE KBE = 0 (KBBR reception disabled) KBFSEL = 0 KBIE = 1 (KCLK falling edge interrupts enabled) KCLK (pin state) KBF bit KCLK pin fall detected? Yes KBF = 1 (interrupt generated) Interrupt handling Clear KBF No Interrupt generated Cleared by software Interrupt generated Note: * The KBF setting timing is the same as the timing of KBF setting and KCLK automatic I/O inhibit bit generation in figure 14.11. When the KBF bit is used as the KCLK input fall interrupt flag, the automatic I/O inhibit function does not operate. Figure 14.13 Example of KCLK Input Fall Interrupt Operation Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 364 of 544 14.5 14.5.1 Usage Notes KBIOE Setting and KCLK Falling Edge Detection When KBIOE is 0, the internal KCLK and internal KD settings are fixed at 1. Therefore, if the KCLK pin is low when the KBIOE bit is set to 1, the edge detection circuit operates and the KCLK falling edge is detected. If the KBFSEL bit and KBE bit are both 0 at this time, the KBF bit is set. Figure 14.14 shows the timing of KBIOE setting and KCLK falling edge detection. T1 φ T2 KCLK (pin) Internal KCLK (KCLKI) KBIOE Falling edge signal KBFSEL KBE KBF Figure 14.14 KBIOE Setting and KCLK Falling Edge Detection Timing Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 365 of 544 14.5.2 Module Stop Mode Setting Keyboard buffer controller operation can be enabled or disabled using the module stop control register. The initial setting is for keyboard buffer controller operation to be halted. Register access is enabled by canceling module stop mode. For details, refer to section 20, Power-Down Modes. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 366 of 544 Section 15 Host Interface (LPC) This LSI has an on-chip LPC interface. The LPC performs serial transfer of cycle type, address, and data, synchronized with the 33 MHz PCI clock. It uses four signal lines for address/data, and one for host interrupt requests. This LPC module supports only I/O read cycle and I/O write cycle transfers. It is also provided with power-down functions that can control the PCI clock and shut down the host interface. 15.1 Features • Supports LPC interface I/O read cycles and I/O write cycles  Uses four signal lines (LAD3 to LAD0) to transfer the cycle type, address, and data.  Uses three control signals: clock (LCLK), reset (LRESET), and frame (LFRAME). • Has three register sets comprising data and status registers  The basic register set comprises three bytes: an input register (IDR), output register (ODR), and status register (STR).  Channels 1 and 2 have fixed I/O addresses of H'60/H'64 and H'62/H'66, respectively. A fast A20 gate function is also provided.  The I/O address can be set for channel 3. Sixteen bidirectional data register bytes can be manipulated in addition to the basic register set. • Supports SERIRQ  Host interrupt requests are transferred serially on a single signal line (SERIRQ).  On channel 1, HIRQ1 and HIRQ12 can be generated.  On channels 2 and 3, SMI, HIRQ6, and HIRQ9 to HIRQ11 can be generated.  Operation can be switched between quiet mode and continuous mode.  The CLKRUN signal can be manipulated to restart the PCI clock (LCLK). • Eleven interrupt sources  The LPC module can be shut down by inputting the LPCPD signal.  Three pins, PME, LSMI, and LSCI, are provided for general input/output. IFHSTL0A_020020040200 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 367 of 544 Figure 15.1 shows a block diagram of the LPC. Module data bus TWR0MW TWR1–15 IDR3 IDR2 IDR1 SIRQCR0 Cycle detection SIRQCR1 CLKRUN Parallel → serial conversion SERIRQ Serial → parallel conversion Control logic HISEL LPCPD LFRAME Address match LRESET LCLK LAD0 to LAD3 H'0060/64 H'0062/66 LADR3 LSCIE LSCIB LSCI input PB1 I/O LSMIE LSMIB LSMI input PB0 I/O PMEE PMEB PME input P80 I/O HICR0 LSCI Serial ← parallel conversion LSMI SYNC output TWR0SW TWR1–15 ODR3 ODR2 ODR1 STR3 STR2 STR1 PME HICR1 HICR2 HICR3 GA20 Internal interrupt control IBFI1 IBFI2 IBFI3 ERRI Two-way register 0MW Two-way register 0SW Two-way data registers 1 to 15 SERIEQ control registers 0 and 1 Host interface select register [Legend] HICR0 to HICR3: Host interface control registers 0 to 3 LADR3H, 3L: LPC channel 3 address register 3H and 3L IDR1 to IDR3: Input data registers 1 to 3 ODR1 to DOR3: Output data registers 1 to 3 STR1 to STR3: Status registers 1 to 3 TWR0MW: TWR0SW: TWR1 to TWR15: SERIRQ0, 1: HISEL: Figure 15.1 Block Diagram of LPC Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 368 of 544 15.2 Input/Output Pins Table 15.1 lists the input and output pins of the LPC module. Table 15.1 Pin Configuration Name LPC address/ data 3 to 0 LPC frame LPC reset LPC clock Abbreviation Port LAD3 to LAD0 LFRAME LRESET LCLK I/O Function Serial (4-signal-line) transfer cycle type/address/data signals, synchronized with LCLK Transfer cycle start and forced termination signal LPC interface reset signal 33 MHz PCI clock signal Serialized host interrupt request signal, synchronized with LCLK (SMI, IRQ1, IRQ6, IRQ9 to IRQ12) 2 P33 to Input/ P30 output P34 P35 P36 P37 Input*1 Input*1 Input Input/ 1 output* Serialized interrupt request SERIRQ LSCI general output LSMI general output PME general output GATE A20 LPC clock run LSCI LSMI PME GA20 CLKRUN PB1 PB0 P80 P81 P82 Output*1, *2 General output Output* * General output Output*1, *2 General output Output*1, *2 A20 gate control signal output Input/ LCLK restart request signal in output*1, *2 case of serial host interrupt request Input*1 LPC module shutdown signal 1, LPC power-down LPCPD P83 Notes: 1. Pin state monitoring input is possible in addition to the LPC interface control input/output function. 2. Only 0 can be output. If 1 is output, the pin goes to the high-impedance state, so an external resistor is necessary to pull the signal up to VCC. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 369 of 544 15.3 Register Descriptions The LPC has the following registers. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Host interface control register 0 (HICR0) Host interface control register 1 (HICR1) Host interface control register 2 (HICR2) Host interface control register 3 (HICR3) LPC channel 3 address registers (LADR3H, LADR3L) Input data register 1 (IDR1) Output data register 1 (ODR1) Status register 1 (STR1) Input data register 2 (IDR2) Output data register 2 (ODR2) Status register 2 (STR2) Input data register 3 (IDR3) Output data register 3 (ODR3) Status register 3 (STR3) Bidirectional data registers 0 to 15 (TWR0 to TWR15) SERIRQ control register 0 (SIRQCR0) SERIRQ control register 1 (SIRQCR1) Host interface select register (HISEL) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 370 of 544 15.3.1 Host Interface Control Registers 0 and 1 (HICR0, HICR1) HICR0 and HICR1 contain control bits that enable or disable host interface functions, control bits that determine pin output and the internal state of the host interface, and status flags that monitor the internal state of the host interface. • HICR0 Bit 7 6 5 Bit Name LPC3E LPC2E LPC1E R/W Initial Value Slave Host Description 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W — — — LPC Enable 3 to 1 Enable or disable the host interface function in singlechip mode. When the host interface is enabled (one of the three bits is set to 1), processing for data transfer between the slave processor (this LSI) and the host processor is performed using pins LAD3 to LAD0, LFRAME, LRESET, LCLK, SERIRQ, CLKRUN, and LPCPD. • LPC3E 0: LPC channel 3 operation is disabled No address (LADR3) matches for IDR3, ODR3, STR3, or TWR0 to TWR15 1: LPC channel 3 operation is enabled • LPC2E 0: LPC channel 2 operation is disabled No address (H'0062, 66) matches for IDR2, ODR2, or STR2 1: LPC channel 2 operation is enabled • LPC1E 0: LPC channel 1 operation is disabled No address (H'0060, 64) matches for IDR1, ODR1, or STR1 1: LPC channel 1 operation is enabled Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 371 of 544 Bit 4 Bit Name FGA20E R/W Initial Value Slave Host Description 0 R/W — Fast A20 Gate Function Enable Enables or disables the fast A20 gate function. When the fast A20 gate is disabled, the normal A20 gate can be implemented by firmware operation of the P81 output. When the fast A20 gate function is enabled, the DDR bit for P81 must not be set to 1. 0: Fast A20 gate function disabled • • • Other function of pin P81 is enabled GA20 output internal state is initialized to 1 GA20 pin output is open-drain (external VCC pull-up resistor required) 1: Fast A20 gate function enabled 3 SDWNE 0 R/W — LPC Software Shutdown Enable Controls host interface shutdown. For details of the LPC shutdown function, and the scope of initialization by an LPC reset and an LPC shutdown, see section 15.4.4, Host Interface Shutdown Function (LPCPD). 0: Normal state, LPC software shutdown setting enabled [Clearing conditions] • • • Writing 0 LPC hardware reset or LPC software reset LPC hardware shutdown release (rising edge of LPCPD signal) Hardware shutdown state when LPCPD signal is low Writing 1 after reading SDWNE = 0 1: LPC hardware shutdown state setting enabled • • [Setting condition] Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 372 of 544 Bit 2 Bit Name PMEE R/W Initial Value Slave Host Description 0 R/W — PME output Enable Controls PME output in combination with the PMEB bit in HICR1. PME pin output is open-drain, and an external pull-up resistor is needed to pull the output up to VCC When the PME output function is used, the DDR bit for P80 must not be set to 1. PMEE PMEB 0 x: PME output disabled, other function of pin is enabled 1 0: PME output enabled, PME pin output goes to 0 level 1 1: PME output enabled, PME pin output is high-impedance LSMI output Enable Controls LSMI output in combination with the LSMIB bit in HICR1. LSMI pin output is open-drain, and an external pull-up resistor is needed to pull the output up to VCC When the LSMI output function is used, the DDR bit for PB0 must not be set to 1. LSMIE LSMIB 0 x: LSMI output disabled, other function of pin is enabled 1 0: LSMI output enabled, LSMI pin output goes to 0 level 1 1: LSMI output enabled, LSMI pin output is high-impedance LSCI output Enable Controls LSCI output in combination with the LSCIB bit in HICR1. LSCI pin output is open-drain, and an external pull-up resistor is needed to pull the output up to VCC When the LSCI output function is used, the DDR bit for PB1 must not be set to 1. LSCIE LSCIB 0 x: LSCI output disabled, other function of pin is enabled 1 0: LSCI output enabled, LSCI pin output goes to 0 level 1 1: LSCI output enabled, LSCI pin output is high-impedance 1 LSMIE 0 R/W — 0 LSCIE 0 R/W — [Legend] X: Don't care Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 373 of 544 • HICR1 Bit 7 Bit Name LPCBSY R/W Initial Value Slave Host Description 0 R/W — LPC Busy Indicates that the host interface is processing a transfer cycle. 0: Host interface is in transfer cycle wait state • • Bus idle, or transfer cycle not subject to processing is in progress Cycle type or address indeterminate during transfer cycle LPC hardware reset or LPC software reset LPC hardware shutdown or LPC software shutdown Forced termination (abort) of transfer cycle subject to processing Normal termination of transfer cycle subject to processing [Clearing conditions] • • • • 1: Host interface is performing transfer cycle processing [Setting condition] • 6 CLKREQ 0 R — Match of cycle type and address LCLK Request Indicates that the host interface's SERIRQ output is requesting a restart of LCLK. 0: No LCLK restart request [Clearing conditions] • • • • LPC hardware reset or LPC software reset LPC hardware shutdown or LPC software shutdown SERIRQ is set to continuous mode There are no further interrupts for transfer to the host in quiet mode 1: LCLK restart request issued [Setting condition] • In quiet mode, SERIRQ interrupt output becomes necessary while LCLK is stopped Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 374 of 544 Bit 5 Bit Name IRQBSY R/W Initial Value Slave Host Description 0 R — SERIRQ Busy Indicates that the host interface's SERIRQ signal is engaged in transfer processing. 0: SERIRQ transfer frame wait state [Clearing conditions] • • • LPC hardware reset or LPC software reset LPC hardware shutdown or LPC software shutdown End of SERIRQ transfer frame 1: SERIRQ transfer processing in progress [Setting condition] • 4 LRSTB 0 — — Start of SERIRQ transfer frame LPC Software Reset Bit Resets the host interface. For the scope of initialization by an LPC reset, see section 15.4.4, Host Interface Shutdown Function (LPCPD). 0: Normal state [Clearing conditions] • • Writing 0 LPC hardware reset 1: LPC software reset state [Setting condition] • Writing 1 after reading LRSTB = 0 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 375 of 544 Bit 3 Bit Name SDWNB R/W Initial Value Slave Host Description 0 R/W — LPC Software Shutdown Bit Controls host interface shutdown. For details of the LPC shutdown function, and the scope of initialization by an LPC reset and an LPC shutdown, see section 15.4.4, Host Interface Shutdown Function (LPCPD). 0: Normal state [Clearing conditions] • • • • Writing 0 LPC hardware reset or LPC software reset LPC hardware shutdown LPC hardware shutdown release (rising edge of LPCPD signal when SDWNE = 0) 1: LPC software shutdown state [Setting condition] • Writing 1 after reading SDWNB = 0 2 PMEB 0 R/W — PME Output Bit Controls PME output in combination with the PMEE bit. For details, refer to description on the PMEE bit in HICR0. 1 LSMIB 0 R/W — LSMI Output Bit Controls LSMI output in combination with the LSMIE bit. For details, refer to description on the LSMIE bit in HICR0. 0 LSCIB 0 R/W — LSCI output Bit Controls LSCI output in combination with the LSCIE bit. For details, refer to description on the LSCIE bit in HICR0. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 376 of 544 15.3.2 Host Interface Control Registers 2 and 3 (HICR2, HICR3) Bits 6 to 0 in HICR2 control interrupts from the host interface (LPC) module to the slave processor (this LSI). Bit 7 in HICR2 and HICR3 monitor host interface pin states. The pin states can be monitored regardless of the host interface operating state or the operating state of the functions that use pin multiplexing. • HICR2 Bit Bit Name 7 6 GA20 LRST Initial Value R/W Slave Host Description — GA20 Pin Monitor LPC Reset Interrupt Flag This bit is a flag that generates an ERRI interrupt when an LPC hardware reset occurs. 0: [Clearing conditions] • Writing 0 after reading LRST = 1 1: [Setting condition] • LRESET pin falling edge detection 5 SDWN 0 R/(W)* — LPC Shutdown Interrupt Flag This bit is a flag that generates an ERRI interrupt when an LPC hardware shutdown request is generated. 0: [Clearing conditions] • Writing 0 after reading SDWN = 1 • LPC hardware reset and LPC software reset 1: [Setting condition] • LPCPD pin falling edge detection 4 ABRT 0 R/(W)* — LPC Abort Interrupt Flag This bit is a flag that generates an ERRI interrupt when a forced termination (abort) of an LPC transfer cycle occurs. 0: [Clearing conditions] • Writing 0 after reading ABRT = 1 • LPC hardware reset and LPC software reset • LPC hardware shutdown and LPC software shutdown 1: [Setting condition] • LFRAME pin falling edge detection during LPC transfer cycle Undefined R 0 R/(W)* — Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 377 of 544 Bit 3 Bit Name IBFIE3 R/W Initial Value Slave Host 0 R/W — 2 IBFIE2 0 R/W — 1 IBFIE1 0 R/W — 0 ERRIE 0 R/W — Description IDR3 and TWR Receive Completion Interrupt Enable Enables or disables IBFI3 interrupt to the slave processor (this LSI). 0: Input data register IDR3 and TWR receive completed interrupt requests disabled 1: [When TWRIE = 0 in LADR3] Input data register (IDR3) receive completed interrupt requests enabled [When TWRIE = 1 in LADR3] Input data register (IDR3) and TWR receive completed interrupt requests enabled IDR2 Receive Completion Interrupt Enable Enables or disables IBFI2 interrupt to the slave processor (this LSI). 0: Input data register (IDR2) receive completed interrupt requests disabled 1: Input data register (IDR2) receive completed interrupt requests enabled IDR1 Receive Completion Interrupt Enable Enables or disables IBFI1 interrupt to the slave processor (this LSI). 0: Input data register (IDR1) receive completed interrupt requests disabled 1: Input data register (IDR1) receive completed interrupt requests enabled Error Interrupt Enable Enables or disables ERRI interrupt to the slave processor (this LSI). 0: Error interrupt requests disabled 1: Error interrupt requests enabled Note: * Only 0 can be written to bits 6 to 4, to clear the flag. • HICR3 R/W Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name Initial Value Slave Host Description LFRAME CLKRUN SERIRQ LRESET LPCPD PME LSMI LSCI Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined R R R R R R R R — — — — — — — — LFRAME Pin Monitor CLKRUN Pin Monitor SERIRQ Pin Monitor LRESET Pin Monitor LPCPD Pin Monitor PME Pin Monitor LSMI Pin Monitor LSCI Pin Monitor Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 378 of 544 15.3.3 LPC Channel 3 Address Register (LADR3) LADR3 comprises two 8-bit readable/writable registers that perform LPC channel-3 host address setting and control the operation of the bidirectional data registers. The contents of the address field in LADR3 must not be changed while channel 3 is operating (while LPC3E is set to 1). • LADR3H Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Channel 3 Address Bits 15 to 8: When LPC3E = 1, an I/O address received in an LPC I/O cycle is compared with the contents of LADR3. When determining an IDR3, ODR3, or STR3 address match, bit 0 of LADR3 is regarded as 0, and the value of bit 2 is ignored. When determining a TWR0 to TWR15 address match, bit 4 of LADR3 is inverted, and the values of bits 3 to 0 are ignored. Register selection according to the bits ignored in address match determination is as shown in table 15.2. • LADR3L Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 Bit Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3  Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reserved This bit is readable/writable, however, only 0 should be written to this bit. 1 0 Bit 1 TWRE 0 0 R/W R/W Channel 3 Address Bit 1 Bidirectional Data Register Enable Enables or disables bidirectional data register operation. 0: TWR operation is disabled TWR-related I/O address match determination is halted 1: TWR operation is enabled Description Channel 3 Address Bits 7 to 3 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 379 of 544 Table 15.2 Register Selection I/O Address Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 0 0 1 Bit 4 Bit 4 0 0 1 Bit 2 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 Bit 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 I/O read I/O read TWR0SW read TWR1 to TWR15 read Transfer Cycle I/O write I/O write I/O read I/O read I/O write I/O write Host Register Selection IDR3 write, C/D3 ← 0 IDR3 write, C/D3 ← 1 ODR3 read STR3 read TWR0MW write TWR1 to TWR15 write 15.3.4 Input Data Registers 1 to 3 (IDR1 to IDR3) The IDR registers are 8-bit read-only registers for the slave processor (this LSI), and 8-bit writeonly registers for the host processor. The registers selected from the host according to the I/O address are shown in the following table. For information on IDR3 selection, see section 15.3.3, LPC Channel 3 Address Register (LADR3). Data transferred in an LPC I/O write cycle is written to the selected register. The state of bit 2 of the I/O address is latched into the C/D bit in STR, to indicate whether the written information is a command or data. The initial values of IDR1 to IDR3 are undefined. I/O Address Bits 15 to 4 0000 0000 0110 0000 0000 0110 0000 0000 0110 0000 0000 0110 Bit 3 0 0 0 0 Bit 2 0 1 0 1 Bit 1 0 0 1 1 Bit 0 0 0 0 0 Transfer Cycle I/O write I/O write I/O write I/O write Host Register Selection IDR1 write, C/D1 ← 0 IDR1 write, C/D1 ← 1 IDR2 write, C/D2 ← 0 IDR2 write, C/D2 ← 1 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 380 of 544 15.3.5 Output Data Registers 1 to 3 (ODR1 to ODR3) The ODR registers are 8-bit readable/writable registers for the slave processor (this LSI), and 8-bit read-only registers for the host processor. The registers selected from the host according to the I/O address are shown in the following table. For information on ODR3 selection, see section 15.3.3, LPC Channel 3 Address Register (LADR3). In an LPC I/O read cycle, the data in the selected register is transferred to the host. The initial values of ODR1 to ODR3 are undefined. I/O Address Bits 15 to 4 0000 0000 0110 0000 0000 0110 Bit 3 0 0 Bit 2 0 0 Bit 1 0 1 Bit 0 0 0 Transfer Cycle I/O read I/O read Host Register Selection ODR1 read ODR2 read 15.3.6 Bidirectional Data Registers 0 to 15 (TWR0 to TWR15) The TWR registers are sixteen 8-bit readable/writable registers to both the slave processor (this LSI) and the host processor. In TWR0, however, two registers (TWR0MW and TWR0SW) are allocated to the same address for both the host address and the slave address. TWR0MW is a write-only register for the host processor, and a read-only register for the slave processor, while TWR0SW is a write-only register for the slave processor and a read-only register for the host processor. When the host and slave processors begin a write, after the respective TWR0 registers have been written to, access right arbitration for simultaneous access is performed by checking the status flags to see if those writes were valid. For the registers selected from the host according to the I/O address, see section 15.3.3, LPC Channel 3 Address Register (LADR3). Data transferred in an LPC I/O write cycle is written to the selected register; in an LPC I/O read cycle, the data in the selected register is transferred to the host. The initial values of TWR0 to TWR15 are undefined. 15.3.7 Status Registers 1 to 3 (STR1 to STR3) The STR registers are 8-bit registers that indicate status information during host interface processing. Bits 3, 1, and 0 of STR1 to STR3, and bits 7 to 4 of STR3, are read-only bits for both the host processor and the slave processor (this LSI). However, only 0 can be written to bit 0 of STR1 to STR3 and bits 6 and 4 of STR3, from the slave processor (this LSI), in order to clear the flags to 0. The registers selected from the host processor according to the I/O address are shown in the following table. For information on STR3 selection, see section 15.3.3, LPC Channel 3 Address Register (LADR3). In an LPC I/O read cycle, the data in the selected register is transferred to the host processor. The initial values of STR1 to STR3 are H'00. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 381 of 544 I/O Address Bits 15 to 4 0000 0000 0110 0000 0000 0110 Bit 3 0 0 Bit 2 1 1 Bit 1 0 1 Bit 0 0 0 Transfer Cycle I/O read I/O read Host Register Selection STR1 read STR2 read • STR1 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Bit Name DBU17 DBU16 DBU15 DBU14 C/D1 R/W Initial Value Slave Host Description 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R R R R Defined by User The user can use these bits as necessary. Command/Data When the host processor writes to an IDR register, bit 2 of the I/O address is written into this bit to indicate whether IDR contains data or a command. 0: Contents of data register (IDR) are data 1: Contents of data register (IDR) are a command Defined by User The user can use this bit as necessary. Input Buffer Full Set to 1 when the host processor writes to IDR. This bit is an internal interrupt source to the slave processor (this LSI). IBF is cleared to 0 when the slave processor reads IDR. The IBF1 flag setting and clearing conditions are different when the fast A20 gate is used. For details see table 15.3. 0: [Clearing condition] When the slave processor reads IDR 1: [Setting condition] When the host processor writes to IDR using I/O write cycle Output Buffer Full Set to 1 when the slave processor (this LSI) writes to ODR. Cleared to 0 when the host processor reads ODR. 0: [Clearing condition] When the host processor reads ODR using I/O read cycle, or the slave processor writes 0 to the OBF bit 1: [Setting condition] When the slave processor writes to ODR 2 1 DBU12 IBF1 0 0 R/W R R R 0 OBF1 0 R/(W)* R Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 382 of 544 • STR2 R/W Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Bit Name Initial Value Slave Host Description DBU27 DBU26 DBU25 DBU24 C/D2 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R R R R Command/Data When the host processor writes to an IDR register, bit 2 of the I/O address is written into this bit to indicate whether IDR contains data or a command. 0: Contents of data register (IDR) are data 1: Contents of data register (IDR) are a command 2 1 DBU22 IBF2 0 0 R/W R R R Defined by User The user can use this bit as necessary. Input Buffer Full Set to 1 when the host processor writes to IDR. This bit is an internal interrupt source to the slave processor (this LSI). IBF is cleared to 0 when the slave processor reads IDR. The IBF1 flag setting and clearing conditions are different when the fast A20 gate is used. For details see table 15.3. 0: [Clearing condition] When the slave processor reads IDR 1: [Setting condition] When the host processor writes to IDR using I/O write cycle 0 OBF2 0 R/(W)* R Output Buffer Full Set to 1 when the slave processor (this LSI) writes to ODR. Cleared to 0 when the host processor reads ODR. 0: [Clearing condition] When the host processor reads ODR using I/O read cycle, or the slave processor writes 0 to the OBF bit 1: [Setting condition] When the slave processor writes to ODR Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. Defined by User The user can use these bits as necessary. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 383 of 544 • STR3 (TWRE = 1 or SELSTR3 = 0) Bit 7 Bit Name IBF3B R/W Initial Value Slave Host Description 0 R R Bidirectional Data Register Input Buffer Full Set to 1 when the host processor writes to TWR15. This is an internal interrupt source to the slave processor (this LSI). IBF3B is cleared to 0 when the slave processor reads TWR15. 0: [Clearing condition] When the slave processor reads TWR15 1: [Setting condition] When the host processor writes to TWR15 using I/O write cycle Bidirectional Data Register Output Buffer Full Set to 1 when the slave processor (this LSI) writes to TWR15. OBF3B is cleared to 0 when the host processor reads TWR15. 0: [Clearing condition] When the host processor reads TWR15 using I/O read cycle, or the slave processor writes 0 to the OBF3B bit 1: [Setting condition] When the slave processor writes to TWR15 Master Write Mode Flag Set to 1 when the host processor writes to TWR0. MWMF is cleared to 0 when the slave processor (this LSI) reads TWR15. 0: [Clearing condition] When the slave processor reads TWR15 1: [Setting condition] When the host processor writes to TWR0 using I/O write cycle while SWMF = 0 Slave Write Mode Flag Set to 1 when the slave processor (this LSI) writes to TWR0. In the event of simultaneous writes by the master and the slave, the master write has priority. SWMF is cleared to 0 when the host reads TWR15 0: [Clearing condition] When the host processor reads TWR15 using I/O read cycle, or the slave processor writes 0 to the SWMF bit 1: [Setting condition] When the slave processor writes to TWR0 while MWMF = 0 6 OBF3B 0 R/(W)* R 5 MWMF 0 R R 4 SWMF 0 R/(W)* R Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 384 of 544 Bit 3 Bit Name C/D3 R/W Initial Value Slave Host Description 0 R R Command/Data When the host processor writes to an IDR register, bit 2 of the I/O address is written into this bit to indicate whether IDR contains data or a command. 0: Contents of data register (IDR) are data 1: Contents of data register (IDR) are a command 2 1 DBU32 IBF3A 0 0 R/W R R R Defined by User The user can use this bit as necessary. Input Buffer Full Set to 1 when the host processor writes to IDR. This bit is an internal interrupt source to the slave processor (this LSI). IBF is cleared to 0 when the slave processor reads IDR. The IBF1 flag setting and clearing conditions are different when the fast A20 gate is used. For details see table 15.3. 0: [Clearing condition] When the slave processor reads IDR 1: [Setting condition] When the host processor writes to IDR using I/O write cycle 0 OBF3A 0 R/(W)* R Output Buffer Full Set to 1 when the slave processor (this LSI) writes to ODR. OBF3A is cleared to 0 when the host processor reads ODR. 0: [Clearing condition] When the host processor reads ODR using I/O read cycle, or the slave processor writes 0 to the OBF bit 1: [Setting condition] When the slave processor writes to ODR Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 385 of 544 • STR3 (TWRE = 0 and SELSTR3 = 1) R/W Initial Bit Name Value Slave Host Description DBU37 DBU36 DBU35 DBU34 C/D3 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R R R R Command/Data When the host processor writes to an IDR register, bit 2 of the I/O address is written into this bit to indicate whether IDR contains data or a command. 0: Contents of data register (IDR) are data 1: Contents of data register (IDR) are a command 2 1 DBU32 IBF3A 0 0 R/W R R R Defined by User The user can use this bit as necessary. Input Buffer Full Set to 1 when the host processor writes to IDR. This bit is an internal interrupt source to the slave processor (this LSI). IBF is cleared to 0 when the slave processor reads IDR. The IBF1 flag setting and clearing conditions are different when the fast A20 gate is used. For details see table 15.3. 0: [Clearing condition] When the slave processor reads IDR 1: [Setting condition] When the host processor writes to IDR using I/O write cycle 0 OBF3A 0 R/(W)* R Output Buffer Full Set to 1 when the slave processor (this LSI) writes to ODR. OBF3A is cleared to 0 when the host processor reads ODR. 0: [Clearing condition] When the host processor reads ODR using I/O read cycle, or the slave processor writes 0 to the OBF bit 1: [Setting condition] When the slave processor writes to ODR Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. Defined by User The user can use these bits as necessary. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 386 of 544 15.3.8 SERIRQ Control Registers 0 and 1 (SIRQCR0, SIRQCR1) The SIRQCR registers contain status bits that indicate the SERIRQ operating mode and bits that specify SERIRQ interrupt sources. • SIRQCR0 Bit 7 R/W Initial Bit Name Value Slave Host Q/C 0 R — Description Quiet/Continuous Mode Flag Indicates the mode specified by the host at the end of an SERIRQ transfer cycle (stop frame). 0: Continuous mode [Clearing conditions] • • LPC hardware reset, LPC software reset Specification by SERIRQ transfer cycle stop frame 1: Quiet mode [Setting condition] • 6 SELREQ 0 R/W — Specification by SERIRQ transfer cycle stop frame. Start Frame Initiation Request Select Selects whether start frame initiation is requested when one or more interrupt requests are cleared, or when all interrupt requests are cleared, in quiet mode. 0: Start frame initiation is requested when all interrupt requests are cleared in quiet mode. 1: Start frame initiation is requested when one or more interrupt requests are cleared in quiet mode. 5 IEDIR 0 R/W — Interrupt Enable Direct Mode Specifies whether LPC channel 2 and channel 3 SERIRQ interrupt source (SMI, IRQ6, IRQ9 to IRQ11) generation is conditional upon OBF, or is controlled only by the host interrupt enable bit. 0: Host interrupt is requested when host interrupt enable bit and corresponding OBF are both set to 1 1: Host interrupt is requested when host interrupt enable bit is set to 1 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 387 of 544 Bit 4 Bit Name SMIE3B R/W Initial Value Slave Host Description 0 R/W — Host SMI Interrupt Enable 3B Enables or disables a host SMI interrupt request when OBF3B is set by a TWR15 write. 0: Host SMI interrupt request by OBF3B and SMIE3B is disabled [Clearing conditions] • • • Writing 0 to SMIE3B LPC hardware reset, LPC software reset Clearing OBF3B to 0 (when IEDIR = 0) Host SMI interrupt request by setting OBF3B to 1 is enabled [When IEDIR = 1] Host SMI interrupt is requested [Setting condition] • Writing 1 after reading SMIE3B = 0 1: [When IEDIR = 0] 3 SMIE3A 0 R/W — Host SMI Interrupt Enable 3A Enables or disables a host SMI interrupt request when OBF3A is set by an ODR3 write. 0: Host SMI interrupt request by OBF3A and SMIE3A is disabled [Clearing conditions] • • • Writing 0 to SMIE3A LPC hardware reset, LPC software reset Clearing OBF3A to 0 (when IEDIR = 0) Host SMI interrupt request by setting OBF3A to 1 is enabled [When IEDIR = 1] Host SMI interrupt is requested [Setting condition] • Writing 1 after reading SMIE3A = 0 1: [When IEDIR = 0] Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 388 of 544 R/W Bit 2 Bit Name SMIE2 Initial Value Slave 0 R/W Hos t Description — Host SMI Interrupt Enable 2 Enables or disables a host SMI interrupt request when OBF2 is set by an ODR2 write. 0: Host SMI interrupt request by OBF2 and SMIE2 is disabled [Clearing conditions] • • • Writing 0 to SMIE2 LPC hardware reset, LPC software reset Clearing OBF2 to 0 (when IEDIR = 0) Host SMI interrupt request by setting OBF2 to 1 is enabled [When IEDIR = 1] Host SMI interrupt is requested [Setting condition] • 1 IRQ12E1 0 R/W — Writing 1 after reading SMIE2 = 0 Host IRQ12 Interrupt Enable 1 Enables or disables a host IRQ12 interrupt request when OBF1 is set by an ODR1 write. 0: Host IRQ12 interrupt request by OBF1 and IRQ12E1 is disabled [Clearing conditions] • • • Writing 0 to IRQ12E1 LPC hardware reset, LPC software reset Clearing OBF1 to 0 1: [When IEDIR = 0] 1: Host IRQ12 interrupt request by setting OBF1 to 1 is enabled [Setting condition] • Writing 1 after reading IRQ12E1 = 0 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 389 of 544 Bit 0 Bit Name IRQ1E1 R/W Initial Value Slave Host 0 R/W — Description Host IRQ1 Interrupt Enable 1 Enables or disables a host IRQ1 interrupt request when OBF1 is set by an ODR1 write. 0: Host IRQ1 interrupt request by OBF1 and IRQ1E1 is disabled [Clearing conditions] • • • Writing 0 to IRQ1E1 LPC hardware reset, LPC software reset Clearing OBF1 to 0 1: Host IRQ1 interrupt request by setting OBF1 to 1 is enabled [Setting condition] • Writing 1 after reading IRQ1E1 = 0 • SIRQCR1 Bit 7 Bit Name IRQ11E3 R/W Initial Value Slave Host 0 R/W — Description Host IRQ11 Interrupt Enable 3 Enables or disables a host IRQ11 interrupt request when OBF3A is set by an ODR3 write. 0: Host IRQ11 interrupt request by OBF3A and IRQ11E3 is disabled [Clearing conditions] • • • Writing 0 to IRQ11E3 LPC hardware reset, LPC software reset Clearing OBF3A to 0 (when IEDIR = 0) Host IRQ11 interrupt request by setting OBF3A to 1 is enabled [When IEDIR = 1] Host IRQ11 interrupt is requested. [Setting condition] • Writing 1 after reading IRQ11E3 = 0 1: [When IEDIR = 0] Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 390 of 544 Bit 6 R/W Initial Bit Name Value Slave Host IRQ10E3 0 R/W — Description Host IRQ10 Interrupt Enable 3 Enables or disables a host IRQ10 interrupt request when OBF3A is set by an ODR3 write. 0: Host IRQ10 interrupt request by OBF3A and IRQ10E3 is disabled [Clearing conditions] • • • Writing 0 to IRQ10E3 LPC hardware reset, LPC software reset Clearing OB3FA to 0 (when IEDIR = 0) Host IRQ10 interrupt request by setting OBF3A to 1 is enabled [When IEDIR = 1] Host IRQ10 interrupt is requested. [Setting condition] • Writing 1 after reading IRQ10E3 = 0 1: [When IEDIR = 0] 5 IRQ9E3 0 R/W — Host IRQ9 Interrupt Enable 3 Enables or disables a host IRQ9 interrupt request when OBF3A is set by an ODR3 write. 0: Host IRQ9 interrupt request by OBF3A and IRQ9E3 is disabled [Clearing conditions] • • • Writing 0 to IRQ9E3 LPC hardware reset, LPC software reset Clearing OBF3A to 0 (when IEDIR = 0) Host IRQ9 interrupt request by setting OBF3A to 1 is enabled [When IEDIR = 1] Host IRQ9 interrupt is requested. [Setting condition] • Writing 1 after reading IRQ9E3 = 0 1: [When IEDIR = 0] Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 391 of 544 Bit 4 Bit Name IRQ6E3 R/W Initial Value Slave Host 0 R/W — Description Host IRQ6 Interrupt Enable 3 Enables or disables a host IRQ6 interrupt request when OBF3A is set by an ODR3 write. 0: Host IRQ6 interrupt request by OBF3A and IRQ6E3 is disabled [Clearing conditions] • • • Writing 0 to IRQ6E3 LPC hardware reset, LPC software reset Clearing OBF3A to 0 (when IEDIR = 0) Host IRQ6 interrupt request by setting OBF3A to 1 is enabled [When IEDIR = 1] Host IRQ6 interrupt is requested. [Setting condition] • Writing 1 after reading IRQ6E3 = 0 1: [When IEDIR = 0] 3 IRQ11E2 0 R/W — Host IRQ11 Interrupt Enable 2 Enables or disables a host IRQ11 interrupt request when OBF2 is set by an ODR2 write. 0: Host IRQ11 interrupt request by OBF2 and IRQ11E2 is disabled [Clearing conditions] • • • Writing 0 to IRQ11E2 LPC hardware reset, LPC software reset Clearing OBF2 to 0 (when IEDIR = 0) Host IRQ11 interrupt request by setting OBF2 to 1 is enabled [When IEDIR = 1] Host IRQ11 interrupt is requested. [Setting condition] • Writing 1 after reading IRQ11E2 = 0 1: [When IEDIR = 0] Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 392 of 544 Bit 2 Bit Name IRQ10E2 R/W Initial Value Slave Host Description 0 R/W — Host IRQ10 Interrupt Enable 2 Enables or disables a host IRQ10 interrupt request when OBF2 is set by an ODR2 write. 0: Host IRQ10 interrupt request by OBF2 and IRQ10E2 is disabled [Clearing conditions] • • • Writing 0 to IRQ10E2 LPC hardware reset, LPC software reset Clearing OBF2 to 0 (when IEDIR = 0) Host IRQ10 interrupt request by setting OBF2 to 1 is enabled [When IEDIR = 1] Host IRQ10 interrupt is requested. [Setting condition] • Writing 1 after reading IRQ10E2 = 0 1: [When IEDIR = 0] 1 IRQ9E2 0 R/W — Host IRQ9 Interrupt Enable 2 Enables or disables a host IRQ9 interrupt request when OBF2 is set by an ODR2 write. 0: Host IRQ9 interrupt request by OBF2 and IRQ9E2 is disabled [Clearing conditions] • • • Writing 0 to IRQ9E2 LPC hardware reset, LPC software reset Clearing OBF2 to 0 (when IEDIR = 0) Host IRQ9 interrupt request by setting OBF2 to 1 is enabled [When IEDIR = 1] Host IRQ9 interrupt is requested. [Setting condition] • Writing 1 after reading IRQ9E2 = 0 1: [When IEDIR = 0] Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 393 of 544 Bit 0 Bit Name IRQ6E2 R/W Initial Value Slave Host Description 0 R/W — Host IRQ6 Interrupt Enable 2 Enables or disables a host IRQ6 interrupt request when OBF2 is set by an ODR2 write. 0: Host IRQ6 interrupt request by OBF2 and IRQ6E2 is disabled [Clearing conditions] • • • Writing 0 to IRQ6E2 LPC hardware reset, LPC software reset Clearing OBF2 to 0 (when IEDIR = 0) 1: [When IEDIR = 0] Host IRQ6 interrupt request by setting OBF2 to 1 is enabled [When IEDIR = 1] Host IRQ6 interrupt is requested. [Setting condition] • Writing 1 after reading IRQ6E2 = 0 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 394 of 544 15.3.9 Host Interface Select Register (HISEL) HISEL selects the function of bits 7 to 4 in STR3 and specifies the output of the host interrupt request signal of each frame. R/W Bit 7 Bit Name Initial Value Slave Host Description SELSTR3 0 W STR3 Register Function Select 3 Selects the function of bits 7 to 4 in STR3 in combination with the TWRE bit in LADR3L. See description on STR3 in section 15.3.7, Status Registers 1 to 3 (STR1 to STR3), for details. 0: Bits 7 to 4 in STR3 are status bits of the host interface. 1: [When TWRE = 1] Bits 7 to 4 in STR3 are status bits of the host interface. [When TWRE = 0] Bits 7 to 4 in STR3 are user bits. 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SELIRQ11 0 SELIRQ10 0 SELIRQ9 0 SELIRQ6 0 SELSMI 0 SELIRQ12 1 SELIRQ1 1 W W W W W W W — — — — — — — SERIRQ Output Select Selects the pin output status of host interrupt requests (HIRQ11, HIRQ10, HIRQ9, HIRQ6, SMI, HIRQ12, and HIRQ1) of the LPC. 0: [When host interrupt request is cleared] SERIRQ pin output is in the high-impedance state. [When host interrupt request is set] SERIRQ pin output is 0. 1: [When host interrupt request is cleared] SERIRQ pin output is 0. [When host interrupt request is set] SERIRQ pin output is in the high-impedance state. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 395 of 544 15.4 15.4.1 Operation Host Interface Activation The host interface is activated by setting one of bits LPC3E to LPC1E in HICR0 to 1 in singlechip mode. When the host interface is activated, the related I/O ports (ports 37 to 30, ports 83 and 82) function as dedicated host interface input/output pins. In addition, setting the FGA20E, PMEE, LSMIE, and LSCIE bits to 1 adds the related I/O ports (ports 81 and 80, ports B0 and B1) to the host interface's input/output pins. Use the following procedure to activate the host interface after a reset release. 1. Read the signal line status and confirm that the LPC module can be connected. Also check that the LPC module is initialized internally. 2. When using channel 3, set LADR3 to determine the channel 3 I/O address and whether bidirectional data registers are to be used. 3. Set the enable bit (LPC3E to LPC1E) for the channel to be used. 4. Set the enable bits (GA20E, PMEE, LSMIE, and LSCIE) for the additional functions to be used. 5. Set the selection bits for other functions (SDWNE, IEDIR). 6. As a precaution, clear the interrupt flags (LRST, SDWN, ABRT, OBF). Read IDR or TWR15 to clear IBF. 7. Set interrupt enable bits (IBFIE3 to IBFIE1, ERRIE) as necessary. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 396 of 544 15.4.2 LPC I/O Cycles There are ten kinds of LPC transfer cycle: memory read, memory write, I/O read, I/O write, DMA read, DMA write, bus master memory read, bus master memory write, bus master I/O read, and bus master I/O write. Of these, the chip's LPC supports only I/O read and I/O write cycles. An LPC transfer cycle is started when the LFRAME signal goes low in the bus idle state. If the LFRAME signal goes low when the bus is not idle, this means that a forced termination (abort) of the LPC transfer cycle has been requested. In an I/O read cycle or I/O write cycle, transfer is carried out using LAD3 to LAD0 in the following order, in synchronization with LCLK. The host can be made to wait by sending back a value other than B′0000 in the slave's synchronization return cycle, but with the chip's LPC a value of B′0000 is always returned. If the received address matches the host address in an LPC register (IDR, ODR, STR, TWR), the host interface enters the busy state; it returns to the idle state by output of a state count 12 turnaround. Register and flag changes are made at this timing, so in the event of a transfer cycle forced termination (abort) before state #12, registers and flags are not changed. I/O Read Cycle State Count 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Contents Start Drive Source Host Value (3 to 0) 0000 0000 Bits 15 to 12 Bits 11 to 8 Bits 7 to 4 Bits 3 to 0 1111 ZZZZ 0000 Bits 3 to 0 Bits 7 to 4 1111 ZZZZ Contents Start I/O Write Cycle Drive Source Host Value (3 to 0) 0000 0010 Bits 15 to 12 Bits 11 to 8 Bits 7 to 4 Bits 3 to 0 Bits 3 to 0 Bits 7 to 4 1111 ZZZZ 0000 1111 ZZZZ Cycle type/direction Host Address 1 Address 2 Address 3 Address 4 Turnaround (recovery) Turnaround Synchronization Data 1 Data 2 Turnaround (recovery) Turnaround Host Host Host Host Host None Slave Slave Slave Slave None Cycle type/direction Host Address 1 Address 2 Address 3 Address 4 Data 1 Data 2 Turnaround (recovery) Turnaround Synchronization Turnaround (recovery) Turnaround Host Host Host Host Host Host Host None Slave Slave None Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 397 of 544 The timing of the LFRAME, LCLK, and LAD signals is shown in figures 15.2 and 15.3. LCLK LFRAME LAD3–LAD0 Start Cycle type, direction, and size ADDR TAR Sync Data TAR Start Number of clocks 1 1 4 2 1 2 2 1 Figure 15.2 Typical LFRAME Timing LCLK LFRAME LAD3–LAD0 Start Cycle type, direction, and size ADDR TAR Sync Slave must stop driving Too many Syncs cause timeout Master will drive high Figure 15.3 Abort Mechanism 15.4.3 A20 Gate The A20 gate signal can mask address A20 to emulate an addressing mode used by personal computers with an 8086*-family CPU. A regular-speed A20 gate signal can be output under firmware control. The fast A20 gate function that is speeded up by hardware is enabled by setting the FGA20E bit to 1 in HICR0. Note: An Intel microprocessor Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 398 of 544 Regular A20 Gate Operation: Output of the A20 gate signal can be controlled by an H'D1 command followed by data. When the slave processor (this LSI) receives data, it normally uses an interrupt routine activated by the IBF1 interrupt to read IDR1. At this time, firmware copies bit 1 of data following an H'D1 command and outputs it at the gate A20 pin. Fast A20 Gate Operation: The internal state of GA20 output is initialized to 1 when FGA20E = 0. When the FGA20E bit is set to 1, P81/GA20 is used for output of a fast A20 gate signal. The state of the P81/GA20 pin can be monitored by reading the GA20 bit in HICR2. The initial output from this pin will be a logic 1, which is the initial value. Afterward, the host processor can manipulate the output from this pin by sending commands and data. This function is only available via the IDR1 register. The host interface decodes commands input from the host. When an H'D1 host command is detected, bit 1 of the data following the host command is output from the GA20 output pin. This operation does not depend on firmware or interrupts, and is faster than the regular processing using interrupts. Table 15.3 shows the conditions that set and clear GA20 (P81). Figure 15.4 shows the GA20 output in flowchart form. Table 15.4 indicates the GA20 output signal values. Table 15.3 GA20 (P81) Set/Clear Timing Pin Name GA20 (P81) Setting Condition When bit 1 of the data that follows an H'D1 host command is 1 Clearing Condition When bit 1 of the data that follows an H'D1 host command is 0 Start Host write No H'D1 command received? Yes Wait for next byte Host write No Data byte? Yes Write bit 1 of data byte to DR bit of P81/GA20 Figure 15.4 GA20 Output Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 399 of 544 Table 15.4 Fast A20 Gate Output Signals Internal CPU Interrupt Flag (IBF) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 GA20 (P81) Q 1 Q (1) Q 0 Q (0) Q 1 Q (1) Q 0 Q (0) Q Q Q Q Q 1/0 Q (1/0) Retriggered sequence Consecutively executed sequences Cancelled sequence Turn-off sequence (abbreviated form) Turn-on sequence (abbreviated form) Turn-off sequence HA0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1/0 1 0 1/0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 Data/Command H'D1 command 1 data*1 H'FF command H'D1 command 0 data* 2 Remarks Turn-on sequence H'FF command H'D1 command 1 data* 1 Command other than H'FF and H'D1 H'D1 command 0 data* 2 Command other than H'FF and H'D1 H'D1 command Command other than H'D1 H'D1 command H'D1 command H'D1 command Any data H'D1 command Notes: 1. Arbitrary data with bit 1 set to 1. 2. Arbitrary data with bit 1 cleared to 0. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 400 of 544 15.4.4 Host Interface Shutdown Function (LPCPD) The host interface can be placed in the shutdown state according to the state of the LPCPD pin. There are two kinds of host interface shutdown state: LPC hardware shutdown and LPC software shutdown. The LPC hardware shutdown state is controlled by the LPCPD pin, while the software shutdown state is controlled by the SDWNB bit. In both states, the host interface enters the reset state by itself, and is no longer affected by external signals other than the LRESET and LPCPD signals. Placing the slave processor in sleep mode or software standby mode is effective in reducing current dissipation in the shutdown state. If software standby mode is set, some means must be provided for exiting software standby mode before clearing the shutdown state with the LPCPD signal. If the SDWNE bit has been set to 1 beforehand, the LPC hardware shutdown state is entered at the same time as the LPCPD signal falls, and prior preparation is not possible. If the LPC software shutdown state is set by means of the SDWNB bit, on the other hand, the LPC software shutdown state cannot be cleared at the same time as the rise of the LPCPD signal. Taking these points into consideration, the following operating procedure uses a combination of LPC software shutdown and LPC hardware shutdown. 1. Clear the SDWNE bit to 0. 2. Set the ERRIE bit to 1 and wait for an interrupt by the SDWN flag. 3. When an ERRI interrupt is generated by the SDWN flag, check the host interface internal status flags and perform any necessary processing. 4. Set the SDWNB bit to 1 to set LPC software standby mode. 5. Set the SDWNE bit to 1 and make a transition to LPC hardware standby mode. The SDWNB bit is cleared automatically. 6. Check the state of the LPCPD signal to make sure that the LPCPD signal has not risen during steps 3 to 5. If the signal has risen, clear SDWNE to 0 to return to the state in step 1. 7. Place the slave processor in sleep mode or software standby mode as necessary. 8. If software standby mode has been set, exit software standby mode by some means independent of the LPC. 9. When a rising edge is detected in the LPCPD signal, the SDWNE bit is automatically cleared to 0. If the slave processor has been placed in sleep mode, the mode is exited by means of LRESET signal input, on completion of the LPC transfer cycle, or by some other means. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 401 of 544 Table 15.5 shows the scope of the host interface pin shutdown. Table 15.5 Scope of Host Interface Pin Shutdown Abbreviation LAD3 to LAD0 LFRAME LRESET LCLK SERIRQ LSCI LSMI PME GA20 CLKRUN LPCPD Port P33–P30 P34 P35 P36 P37 PB1 PB0 P80 P81 P82 P83 Scope of Shutdown O O × O O ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ O × I/O I/O Input Input Input I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O Input Notes Hi-Z Hi-Z LPC hardware reset function is active Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z, only when LSCIE = 1 Hi-Z, only when LSMIE = 1 Hi-Z, only when PMEE = 1 Hi-Z, only when FGA20E = 1 Hi-Z Needed to clear shutdown state [Legend] O: Pin that is shutdown by the shutdown function ∆: Pin that is shutdown only when the LPC function is selected by register setting ×: Pin that is not shutdown In the LPC shutdown state, the LPC's internal state and some register bits are initialized. The order of priority of LPC shutdown and reset states is as follows. 1. System reset (reset by STBY or RES pin input, or WDT0 overflow)  All register bits, including bits LPC3E to LPC1E, are initialized. 2. LPC hardware reset (reset by LRESET pin input)  LRSTB, SDWNE, and SDWNB bits are cleared to 0. 3. LPC software reset (reset by LRSTB)  SDWNE and SDWNB bits are cleared to 0. 4. LPC hardware shutdown  SDWNB bit is cleared to 0. 5. LPC software shutdown Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 402 of 544 The scope of the initialization in each mode is shown in table 15.6. Table 15.6 Scope of Initialization in Each Host Interface Mode Items Initialized LPC transfer cycle sequencer (internal state), LPCBSY and ABRT flags SERIRQ transfer cycle sequencer (internal state), CLKREQ and IRQBSY flags Host interface flags (IBF1, IBF2, IBF3A, IBF3B, MWMF, C/D1, C/D2, C/D3, OBF1, OBF2, OBF3A, OBF3B, SWMF, DBU), GA20 (internal state) Host interrupt enable bits (IRQ1E1, IRQ12E1, SMIE2, IRQ6E2, IRQ9E2 to IRQ11E2, SMIE3B, SMIE3A, IRQ6E3, IRQ9E3 to IRQ11E3), Q/C flag, SELREQ bit LRST flag SDWN flag LRSTB bit SDWNB bit SDWNE bit System Reset Initialized Initialized Initialized LPC Reset Initialized Initialized Initialized LPC Shutdown Initialized Initialized Retained Initialized Initialized Retained Initialized (0) Initialized (0) Initialized (0) Initialized (0) Initialized (0) Can be set/cleared Initialized (0) HR: 0 SR: 1 Initialized (0) Initialized (0) Retained Can be set/cleared Can be set/cleared 0 (can be set) HS: 0 SS: 1 HS: 1 SS: 0 or 1 Retained Initialized Host interface operation control bits (LPC3E to LPC1E, FGA20E, LADR3, IBFIE1 to IBFIE3, PMEE, PMEB, LSMIE, LSMIB, LSCIE, LSCIB, TWRE, SELSTR3, SELIRQ1, SELSMI, SELIRQ6, SELIRQ9, SELIRQ10, SELIRQ11, SELIRQ12) LRESET signal LPCPD signal LAD3 to LAD0, LFRAME, LCLK, SERIRQ, CLKRUN signals PME, LSMI, LSCI, GA20 signals (when function is selected) PME, LSMI, LSCI, GA20 signals (when function is not selected) Input (port function Input Input Input Output Port function Input Input Hi-Z Hi-Z Port function Note: System reset: Reset by STBY input, RES input, or WDT overflow LPC reset: Reset by LPC hardware reset (HR) or LPC software reset (SR) LPC shutdown: Reset by LPC hardware shutdown (HS) or LPC software shutdown (SS) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 403 of 544 Figure 15.5 shows the timing of the LPCPD and LRESET signals. LCLK LPCPD LAD3–LAD0 LFRAME At least 30 µs At least 100 µs At least 60 µs LRESET Figure 15.5 Power-Down State Termination Timing Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 404 of 544 15.4.5 Host Interface Serialized Interrupt Operation (SERIRQ) A host interrupt request can be issued from the host interface by means of the SERIRQ pin. In a host interrupt request via the SERIRQ pin, LCLK cycles are counted from the start frame of the serialized interrupt transfer cycle generated by the host or a peripheral function, and a request signal is generated by the frame corresponding to that interrupt. The timing is shown in figure 15.6. SL or H LCLK SERIRQ Drive source IRQ1 START Host controller None IRQ1 None Start frame H R T IRQ0 frame S R T IRQ1 frame S R T IRQ2 frame S R T [Legend] H = Host control, SL = Slave control, R = Recovery, T = Turnaround, S = Sample IRQ14 frame S LCLK SERIRQ Driver None R T IRQ15 frame S R T IOCHCK frame S R T I Stop frame H R T Next cycle STOP IRQ15 None Host controller START [Legend] H = Host control, R = Recovery, T = Turnaround, S = Sample, I = Idle Figure 15.6 SERIRQ Timing The serialized interrupt transfer cycle frame configuration is as follows. Two of the states comprising each frame are the recover state in which the SERIRQ signal is returned to the 1-level at the end of the frame, and the turnaround state in which the SERIRQ signal is not driven. The recover state must be driven by the host or slave processor that was driving the preceding state. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 405 of 544 Serial Interrupt Transfer Cycle Frame Count 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Contents Start IRQ0 IRQ1 SMI IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 IRQ6 IRQ7 IRQ8 IRQ9 IRQ10 IRQ11 IRQ12 IRQ13 IRQ14 IRQ15 IOCHCK Stop Drive Source Slave Host Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave Host Number of States 6 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Undefined First, 1 or more idle states, then 2 or 3 states 0-driven by host 2 states: Quiet mode next 3 states: Continuous mode next Drive possible in LPC channels 2 and 3 Drive possible in LPC channels 2 and 3 Drive possible in LPC channels 2 and 3 Drive possible in LPC channel 1 Drive possible in LPC channels 2 and 3 Drive possible in LPC channel 1 Drive possible in LPC channels 2 and 3 Notes In quiet mode only, slave drive possible in first state, then next 3 states 0-driven by host There are two modes—continuous mode and quiet mode—for serialized interrupts. The mode initiated in the next transfer cycle is selected by the stop frame of the serialized interrupt transfer cycle that ended before that cycle. In continuous mode, the host initiates host interrupt transfer cycles at regular intervals. In quiet mode, the slave processor with interrupt sources requiring a request can also initiate an interrupt transfer cycle, in addition to the host. In quiet mode, since the host does not necessarily initiate interrupt transfer cycles, it is possible to suspend the clock (LCLK) supply and enter the powerdown state. In order for a slave to transfer an interrupt request in this case, a request to restart the clock must first be issued to the host. For details see section 15.4.6, Host Interface Clock Start Request (CLKRUN). Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 406 of 544 15.4.6 Host Interface Clock Start Request (CLKRUN) A request to restart the clock (LCLK) can be sent to the host processor by means of the CLKRUN pin. With LPC data transfer and SERIRQ in continuous mode, a clock restart is never requested since the transfer cycles are initiated by the host. With SERIRQ in quiet mode, when a host interrupt request is generated the CLKRUN signal is driven and a clock (LCLK) restart request is sent to the host. The timing for this operation is shown in figure 15.7. CLK 1 2 3 4 5 6 CLKRUN Pull-up enable Drive by the slave processor Drive by the host processor Figure 15.7 Clock Start Request Timing Cases other than SERIRQ in quiet mode when clock restart is required must be handled with a different protocol, using the PME signal, etc. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 407 of 544 15.5 15.5.1 Interrupt Sources IBFI1, IBFI2, IBFI3, and ERRI The host interface has four interrupt requests for the slave processor (this LSI): IBF1, IBF2, IBF3, and ERRI. IBFI1, IBFI2, and IBFI3 are IDR receive complete interrupts for IDR1, IDR2, and IDR3 and TWR, respectively. The ERRI interrupt indicates the occurrence of a special state such as an LPC reset, LPC shutdown, or transfer cycle abort. An interrupt request is enabled by setting the corresponding enable bit. Table 15.7 Receive Complete Interrupts and Error Interrupt Interrupt IBFI1 IBFI2 IBFI3 ERRI Description When IBFIE1 is set to 1 and IDR1 reception is completed When IBFIE2 is set to 1 and IDR2 reception is completed When IBFIE3 is set to 1 and IDR3 reception is completed, or when TWRE and IBFIE3 are set to 1 and reception is completed up to TWR15 When ERRIE is set to 1 and one of LRST, SDWN and ABRT is set to 1 15.5.2 SMI, HIRQ1, HIRQ6, HIRQ9, HIRQ10, HIRQ11, and HIRQ12 The host interface can request seven kinds of host interrupt by means of SERIRQ. HIRQ1 and HIRQ12 are used on LPC channel 1 only, while SMI, HIRQ6, HIRQ9, HIRQ10, and HIRQ11 can be requested from LPC channel 2 or 3. There are two ways of clearing a host interrupt request. When the IEDIR bit is cleared to 0 in SIRQCR0, host interrupt sources and LPC channels are all linked to the host interrupt request enable bits. When the OBF flag is cleared to 0 by a read of ODR or TWR15 by the host in the corresponding LPC channel, the corresponding host interrupt enable bit is automatically cleared to 0, and the host interrupt request is cleared. When the IEDIR bit is set to 1 in SIRQCR0, LPC channel 2 and 3 interrupt requests are dependent only upon the host interrupt enable bits. The host interrupt enable bit is not cleared when OBF for channel 2 or 3 is cleared. Therefore, SMIE2, SMIE3A and SMIE3B, IRQ6E2 and IRQ6E3, IRQ9E2 and IRQ9E3, IRQ10E2 and IRQ10E3, and IRQ11E2 and IRQ11E3 lose their respective functional differences. In order to clear a host interrupt request, it is necessary to clear the host interrupt enable bit. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 408 of 544 Table 15.8 summarizes the methods of setting and clearing these bits, and figure 15.8 shows the processing flowchart. Table 15.8 HIRQ Setting and Clearing Conditions Host Interrupt HIRQ1 (independent from IEDIR) HIRQ12 (independent from IEDIR) SMI (IEDIR = 0) Setting Condition Clearing Condition Internal CPU writes to ODR1, then reads 0 Internal CPU writes 0 to bit from bit IRQ1E1 and writes 1 IRQ1E1, or host reads ODR1 Internal CPU writes to ODR1, then reads 0 Internal CPU writes 0 to bit from bit IRQ12E1 and writes 1 IRQ12E1, or host reads ODR1 Internal CPU • • • writes to ODR2, then reads 0 from bit SMIE2 and writes 1 writes to ODR3, then reads 0 from bit SMIE3A and writes 1 Internal CPU • • writes 0 to bit SMIE2, or host reads ODR2 writes 0 to bit SMIE3A, or host reads ODR3 writes 0 to bit SMIE3B, or host reads TWR15 writes 0 to bit SMIE2 writes 0 to bit SMIE3A writes 0 to bit SMIE3B writes 0 to bit IRQiE2, or host reads ODR2 CPU writes 0 to bit IRQiE3, or host reads ODR3 writes 0 to bit IRQiE2 writes 0 to bit IRQiE3 writes to TWR15, then reads 0 from bit • SMIE3B and writes 1 reads 0 from bit SMIE2, then writes 1 • SMI (IEDIR = 1) Internal CPU • • • Internal CPU reads 0 from bit SMIE3A, then writes 1 • reads 0 from bit SMIE3B, then writes 1 • writes to ODR2, then reads 0 from bit IRQiE2 and writes 1 writes to ODR3, then reads 0 from bit IRQiE3 and writes 1 reads 0 from bit IRQiE2, then writes 1 reads 0 from bit IRQiE3, then writes 1 • • HIRQi (i = 6, 9, 10, 11) (IEDIR = 0) Internal CPU • • Internal CPU HIRQi (i = 6, 9, 10, 11) (IEDIR = 1) Internal CPU • • Internal CPU • • Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 409 of 544 Slave CPU Master CPU ODR1 write Write 1 to IRQ1E1 SERIRQ IRQ1 output SERIRQ IRQ1 source clearance Interrupt initiation ODR1 read OBF1 = 0? No Yes All bytes transferred? Hardware operation Yes Software operation No Figure 15.8 HIRQ Flowchart (Example of Channel 1) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 410 of 544 15.6 15.6.1 Usage Notes Module Stop Mode Setting LPC operation can be enabled or disabled using the module stop control register. The initial setting is for LPC operation to be halted. Register access is enabled by canceling module stop mode. For details, refer to section 20, Power-Down Modes. 15.6.2 Notes on Using Host Interface The host interface provides buffering of asynchronous data from the host processor and slave processor (this LSI), but an interface protocol that uses the flags in STR must be followed to avoid data contention. For example, if the host and slave processor both try to access IDR or ODR at the same time, the data will be corrupted. To prevent simultaneous accesses, IBF and OBF must be used to allow access only to data for which writing has finished. Unlike the IDR and ODR registers, the transfer direction is not fixed for the bidirectional data registers (TWR). MWMF and SWMF are provided in STR to handle this situation. After writing to TWR0, MWMF and SWMF must be used to confirm that the write authority for TWR1 to TWR15 has been obtained. Table 15.9 shows host address examples for LADR3 and registers, IDR3, ODR3, STR3, TWR0MW, TWR0SW, and TWR1 to TWR15 when LADR3 = H'A24F and LADR3 = H'3FD0. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 411 of 544 Table 15.9 Host Address Example Register IDR3 ODR3 STR3 TWR0MW TWR0SW TWR1 TWR2 TWR3 TWR4 TWR5 TWR6 TWR7 TWR8 TWR9 TWR10 TWR11 TWR12 TWR13 TWR14 TWR15 Host Address when LADR3 = H'A24F H'A24A and H'A24E H'A24A H'A24E H'A250 H'A250 H'A251 H'A252 H'A253 H'A254 H'A255 H'A256 H'A257 H'A258 H'A259 H'A25A H'A25B H'A25C H'A25D H'A25E H'A25F Host Address when LADR3 = H'3FD0 H'3FD0 and H'3FD4 H'3FD0 H'3FD4 H'3FC0 H'3FC0 H'3FC1 H'3FC2 H'3FC3 H'3FC4 H'3FC5 H'3FC6 H'3FC7 H'3FC8 H'3FC9 H'3FCA H'3FCB H'3FCC H'3FCD H'3FCE H'3FCF Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 412 of 544 Section 16 A/D Converter This LSI includes a successive-approximation-type 10-bit A/D converter that allows up to six analog input channels to be selected. A/D conversion for digital input is effective as a comparator in multiple input testing. 16.1 Features • 10-bit resolution • Ιnput channels: six analog input channels • Analog conversion voltage range can be specified using the reference power supply voltage pin (AVref) as an analog reference voltage. • Conversion time: 13.4 µs per channel (at 10 MHz operation) • Two kinds of operating modes  Single mode: Single-channel A/D conversion  Scan mode: Continuous A/D conversion on 1 to 4 channels • Four data registers  Conversion results are held in a 16-bit data register for each channel • Sample and hold function • Three kinds of conversion start  Software, 8-bit timer (TMR) conversion start trigger, or external trigger signal. • Interrupt request  A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) request can be generated ADCMS33B_010020040200 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 413 of 544 A block diagram of the A/D converter is shown in figure 16.1. Module data bus Bus interface Internal data bus Successive approximations register AVCC AVref AVSS 10-bit D/A A D D R A A D D R B A D D R C A D D R D A D C S R A D C R + AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 AN4 AN5 Multiplexer φ/8 Control circuit φ/16 Comparator Sample-and-hold circuit ADI interrupt signal Conversion start trigger from 8-bit timer ADTRG [Legend] ADCR: ADCSR: ADDRA: ADDRB: ADDRC: ADDRD: A/D control register A/D control/status register A/D data register A A/D data register B A/D data register C A/D data register D Figure 16.1 Block Diagram of A/D Converter Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 414 of 544 16.2 Input/Output Pins Table 16.1 summarizes the pins used by the A/D converter. The 6 analog input pins are divided into two groups consisting of four channels and two channels. Analog input pins 0 to 3 (AN0 to AN3) comprising group 0 and analog input pins 4 and 5 (AN4 and AN5) comprising group 1. The AVcc and AVss pins are the power supply pins for the analog block in the A/D converter. Table 16.1 Pin Configuration Pin Name Analog power supply pin Analog ground pin Symbol AVCC AVSS I/O Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input External trigger input pin for starting A/D conversion Group 1 analog input pins Function Analog block power supply and reference voltage Analog block ground and reference voltage Reference voltage for A/D conversion Group 0 analog input pins Reference power supply pin AVref Analog input pin 0 Analog input pin 1 Analog input pin 2 Analog input pin 3 Analog input pin 4 Analog input pin 5 AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 AN4 AN5 A/D external trigger input pin ADTRG Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 415 of 544 16.3 Register Descriptions The A/D converter has the following registers. • • • • • • A/D data register A (ADDRA) A/D data register B (ADDRB) A/D data register C (ADDRC) A/D data register D (ADDRD) A/D control/status register (ADCSR) A/D control register (ADCR) A/D Data Registers A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD) 16.3.1 There are four 16-bit read-only ADDR registers, ADDRA to ADDRD, used to store the results of A/D conversion. The ADDR registers, which store a conversion result for each channel, are shown in table 16.2. The converted 10-bit data is stored to bits 15 to 6. The lower 6-bit data is always read as 0. The data bus between the CPU and the A/D converter is 8-bit width. The upper byte can be read directly from the CPU, but the lower byte should be read via a temporary register. The temporary register contents are transferred from the ADDR when the upper byte data is read. When reading the ADDR, read the upper byte before lower byte or in word units. Table 16.2 Analog Input Channels and Corresponding ADDR Registers Analog Input Channel Group 0 AN0 An1 AN2 AN3 Group 1 AN4 AN5   A/D Data Register to Store A/D Conversion Results ADDRA ADDRB ADDRC ADDRD Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 416 of 544 16.3.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR) ADCSR controls A/D conversion operations. Bit 7 Bit Name ADF Initial Value 0 R/W R/(W)* Description A/D End Flag A status flag that indicates the end of A/D conversion. [Setting conditions] • • When A/D conversion ends in single mode When A/D conversion ends on all channels specified in scan mode When 0 is written after reading ADF = 1 [Clearing conditions] • 6 5 ADIE ADST 0 0 R/W R/W A/D Interrupt Enable Enables ADI interrupt by ADF when this bit is set to 1 A/D Start Setting this bit to 1 starts A/D conversion. Clearing this bit to 0 stops A/D conversion. In single mode, this bit is cleared to 0 automatically when conversion on the specified channel ends. In scan mode, conversion continues sequentially on the specified channels until this bit is cleared to 0 by software, a reset, or a transition to standby mode or module stop mode. 4 SCAN 0 R/W Scan Mode Selects the A/D conversion operating mode. The setting of this bit must be made when conversion is halted (ADST = 0). 0: Single mode 1: Scan mode 3 CKS 0 R/W Clock Select Sets A/D conversion time. The input channel setting must be made when conversion is halted (ADST = 0). 0: Conversion time is 266 states (max) 1: Conversion time is 134 states (max) Switch conversion time while ADST is 0. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 417 of 544 Bit 2 1 0 Initial Bit Name Value CH2 CH1 CH0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Description Channel Select 2 to 0 Select analog input channels. The input channel setting must be made when conversion is halted (ADST = 0). When SCAN = 0: 000: AN0 001: AN1 010: AN2 011: AN3 100: AN4 101: AN5 110: Setting prohibited 111: Setting prohibited When SCAN = 1: 000: AN0 001: AN0 and AN1 010: AN0 to AN2 011: AN0 to AN3 100: AN4 101: AN4 and AN5 110: Setting prohibited 111: Setting prohibited Note: * Only 0 can be written for clearing the flag. 16.3.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR) ADCR enables A/D conversion started by an external trigger signal. Bit 7 6 Initial Bit Name Value TRGS1 TRGS0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W Description Timer Trigger Select 1 and 0 Enable the start of A/D conversion by a trigger signal. Only set bits TRGS1 and TRGS0 when conversion is halted (ADST = 0). 00: A/D conversion start by external trigger is disabled 01: A/D conversion start by external trigger is disabled 10: A/D conversion start by conversion trigger from TMR is enabled 11: A/D conversion start by ADTRG pin is enabled 5 to 0 — All 1 R Reserved These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 418 of 544 16.4 Operation The A/D converter operates by successive approximation with 10-bit resolution. It has two operating modes: single mode and scan mode. When changing the operating mode or analog input channel, to prevent incorrect operation, first clear the ADST bit to 0 in ADCSR to halt A/D conversion. The ADST bit can be set at the same time as the operating mode or analog input channel is changed. 16.4.1 Single Mode In single mode, A/D conversion is to be performed only once on the specified single channel. Operations are as follows. 1. A/D conversion on the specified channel is started when the ADST bit in ADCSR is set to 1, by software or an external trigger input. 2. When A/D conversion is completed, the result is transferred to the A/D data register corresponding to the channel. 3. On completion of A/D conversion, the ADF bit in ADCSR is set to 1. If the ADIE bit is set to 1 at this time, an ADI interrupt request is generated. 4. The ADST bit remains set to 1 during A/D conversion. When conversion ends, the ADST bit is automatically cleared to 0, and the A/D converter enters wait state. 16.4.2 Scan Mode Scan mode is useful for monitoring analog inputs in a group of one or more channels. When the ADST bit is set to 1 by software, or by timer or external trigger input, A/D conversion starts on the first channel in the group (AN0 when CH2 = 0; AN4 when CH2 = 1). When two or more channels are selected, after conversion of the first channel ends, conversion of the second channel (AN1 or AN5) starts immediately. A/D conversion continues cyclically on the selected channels until the ADST bit is cleared to 0. The conversion results are transferred for storage into the ADDR registers corresponding to the channels. Typical operations when three channels (AN0 to AN2) are selected in scan mode are described below. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 419 of 544 Figure 16.2 shows the operation timing. 1. Scan mode is selected (SCAN = 1), scan group 0 is selected (CH2 = 0), analog input channels AN0 to AN2 are selected (CH1 = 1, CH0 = 0), and A/D conversion is started (ADST = 1). 2. When A/D conversion of the first channel (AN0) is completed, the result is transferred to ADDRA. Next, conversion of the second channel (AN1) starts automatically. 3. Conversion proceeds in the same way through the third channel (AN2). 4. When conversion of all the selected channels (AN0 to AN2) is completed, the ADF flag is set to 1 and conversion of the first channel (AN0) starts again. If the ADIE bit is set to 1 at this time, an ADI interrupt is requested after A/D conversion ends. 5. Steps 2 to 4 are repeated as long as the ADST bit remains set to 1. When the ADST bit is cleared to 0, A/D conversion stops. After that, if the ADST bit is set to 1, A/D conversion starts again from the first channel (AN0). Continuous A/D conversion execution Set*1 Clear*1 Clear*1 A/D conversion time ADST ADF State of channel 0 (AN0) State of channel 1 (AN1) State of channel 2 (AN2) Idle Idle Idle A/D conversion 1 Idle A/D conversion 2 A/D conversion 4 Idle A/D conversion 5 *2 Idle A/D conversion 3 Idle Idle State of channel 3 (AN3) Transfer Idle A/D conversion result 1 A/D conversion result 4 A/D conversion result 2 A/D conversion result 3 ADDRA ADDRB ADDRC ADDRD Notes: 1. Vertical arrows ( ) indicate instructions executed by software. 2. Data currently being converted is ignored. Figure 16.2 Example of A/D Converter Operation (Scan Mode, Channels AN0 to AN2 Selected) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 420 of 544 16.4.3 Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time The A/D converter has a built-in sample-and-hold circuit. The A/D converter samples the analog input when the A/D conversion start delay time (tD) passes after the ADST bit in ADCSR is set to 1, then starts A/D conversion. Figure 16.3 shows the A/D conversion timing. Table 16.3 indicates the A/D conversion time. As indicated in figure 16.3, the A/D conversion time (tCONV) includes tD and the input sampling time (tSPL). The length of tD varies depending on the timing of the write access to ADCSR. The total conversion time therefore varies within the ranges indicated in table 16.3. In scan mode, the values given in table 16.3 apply to the first conversion time. In the second and subsequent conversions, the conversion time is 256 state (fixed) when CKS = 0 and 128 states (fixed) when CKS = 1. (1) φ (2) Address Write signal Input sampling timing ADF tD tSPL tCONV [Legend] (1): ADCSR write cycle (2): ADCSR address A/D conversion start delay tD: tSPL: Input sampling time tCONV: A/D conversion time Figure 16.3 A/D Conversion Timing Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 421 of 544 Table 16.3 A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode) CKS = 0 Item A/D conversion start delay time Input sampling time A/D conversion time Note: * Symbol tD tSPL tCONV Min. 10 — 259 Typ. — 63 — Max. 17 — 266 Min. 6 — 131 CKS = 1 Typ. — 31 — Max. 9 — 134 Values in the table indicate the number of states. 16.4.4 External Trigger Input Timing A/D conversion can be externally triggered. When the TRGS1 and TRGS0 bits are set to B'11 in ADCR, external trigger input is enabled at the ADTRG pin. A falling edge at the ADTRG pin sets the ADST bit to 1 in ADCSR, starting A/D conversion. Other operations, in both single and scan modes, are the same as when the ADST bit has been set to 1 by software. Figure 16.4 shows the timing. φ ADTRG Internal trigger signal ADST A/D conversion Figure 16.4 External Trigger Input Timing Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 422 of 544 16.5 Interrupt Sources The A/D converter generates an A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) at the end of A/D conversion. Setting the ADIE bit to 1 enables ADI interrupt requests while the ADF bit in ADCSR is set to 1 after A/D conversion is completed. 16.6 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions This LSI's A/D conversion accuracy definitions are given below. • Resolution The number of A/D converter digital output codes • Quantization error The deviation inherent in the A/D converter, given by 1/2 LSB (see figure 16.5). • Offset error The deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal A/D conversion characteristic when the digital output changes from the minimum voltage value B'0000000000 (H'000) to B'0000000001 (H'001) (see figure 16.6). • Full-scale error The deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal A/D conversion characteristic when the digital output changes from B'1111111110 (H'3FE) to B'1111111111 (H'3FF) (see figure 16.6). • Nonlinearity error The error with respect to the ideal A/D conversion characteristics between the zero voltage and the full-scale voltage. Does not include the offset error, full-scale error, or quantization error (see figure 16.6). • Absolute accuracy The deviation between the digital value and the analog input value. Includes the offset error, full-scale error, quantization error, and nonlinearity error. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 423 of 544 Digital output H'3FF H'3FE H'3FD H'004 H'003 H'002 Ideal A/D conversion characteristic Quantization error H'001 H'000 1 2 1024 1024 1022 1023 FS 1024 1024 Analog input voltage Figure 16.5 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions Full-scale error Digital output Ideal A/D conversion characteristic Nonlinearity error Actual A/D conversion characteristic FS Offset error Analog input voltage Figure 16.6 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 424 of 544 16.7 16.7.1 Usage Notes Permissible Signal Source Impedance This LSI's analog input (3-V version) is designed so that the conversion accuracy is guaranteed for an input signal for which the signal source impedance is 5 kΩ or less. This specification is provided to enable the A/D converter's sample-and-hold circuit input capacitance to be charged within the sampling time; if the sensor output impedance exceeds 5 kΩ, charging may be insufficient and it may not be possible to guarantee the A/D conversion accuracy. However, if a large capacitance is provided externally in single mode, the input load will essentially comprise only the internal input resistance of 10 kΩ, and the signal source impedance is ignored. However, since a low-pass filter effect is obtained in this case, it may not be possible to follow an analog signal with a large differential coefficient (e.g., voltage fluctuation ratio of 5 mV/µs or greater) (see figure 16.7). When converting a high-speed analog signal or converting in scan mode, a lowimpedance buffer should be inserted. 16.7.2 Influences on Absolute Accuracy Adding capacitance results in coupling with ground, and therefore noise in ground may adversely affect the absolute accuracy. Be sure to make the connection to an electrically stable ground such as AVss. Care is also required to insure that filter circuits do not communicate with digital signals on the mounting board, so acting as antennas. This LSI Sensor output impedance to 5 kΩ Sensor input A/D converter equivalent circuit 10 kΩ Low-pass filter C to 0.1 µF Cin = 15 pF 20 pF Figure 16.7 Example of Analog Input Circuit Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 425 of 544 16.7.3 Setting Range of Analog Power Supply and Other Pins If conditions shown below are not met, the reliability of this LSI may be adversely affected. • Analog input voltage range The voltage applied to analog input pin ANn during A/D conversion should be in the range AVss ≤ ANn ≤ AVref (n = 0 to 5). • Relation between AVcc, AVss and Vcc, Vss For the relationship between AVcc, AVss and Vcc, Vss, set AVss = Vss. If the A/D converter is not used, the AVcc and AVss pins must on no account be left open. • AVref pin reference voltage specification range The reference voltage of the AVref pin should be in the range AVref ≤ AVcc. 16.7.4 Notes on Board Design In board design, digital circuitry and analog circuitry should be as mutually isolated as possible, and layout in which digital circuit signal lines and analog circuit signal lines cross or are in close proximity should be avoided as far as possible. Failure to do so may result in incorrect operation of the analog circuitry due to inductance, adversely affecting A/D conversion values. Also, digital circuitry must be isolated from the analog input signals (AN0 to AN5), analog reference voltage (AVref), and analog power supply (AVCC) by the analog ground (AVSS). Also, the analog ground (AVSS) should be connected at one point to a stable digital ground (VSS) on the board. 16.7.5 Notes on Noise Countermeasures A protection circuit connected to prevent damage due to an abnormal voltage such as an excessive surge at the analog input pins (AN0 to AN5) and analog reference voltage (AVref) should be connected between AVcc and AVss as shown in figure 16.8. Also, the bypass capacitors connected to AVcc and AVref , and the filter capacitor connected to AN0 to AN5, must be connected to AVSS. If a filter capacitor is connected, the input currents at the analog input pins (AN0 to AN5) are averaged, and so an error may arise. Also, when A/D conversion is performed frequently, as in scan mode, if the current charged and discharged by the capacitance of the sample-and-hold circuit in the A/D converter exceeds the current input via the input impedance (Rin), an error will arise in the analog input pin voltage. Careful consideration is therefore required when deciding the circuit constants. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 426 of 544 AVCC AVref *1 *1 2 Rin* 100 Ω AN0 to AN5 0.1 µF AVSS Notes: Values are reference values. 1. 10 µF 0.01 µF 2. Rin: Input impedance Figure 16.8 Example of Analog Input Protection Circuit 10 kΩ AN0 to AN5 20 pF To A/D converter Note: * Values are reference values. Figure 16.9 Equivalent Circuit of Analog Input Pin 16.7.6 Module Stop Mode Setting A/D converter operation can be enabled or disabled using the module stop control register. The initial setting is for A/D converter operation to be halted. Register access is enabled by canceling module stop mode. For details, refer to section 20, Power-Down Modes. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 427 of 544 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 428 of 544 Section 17 RAM This LSI has an on-chip high-speed static RAM. The RAM is connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus, enabling one-state access by the CPU to both byte data and word data. The on-chip RAM can be enabled or disabled by means of the RAME bit in the system control register (SYSCR). For details on SYSCR, refer to section 3.2.2, System Control Register (SYSCR). Product Classification Flash memory version RAM Capacitance RAM Address H'E880 to H'EFFF, H'FF00 to H'FF7F H'E480 to H'EFFF, H'FF00 to H'FF7F H8S/2111B-B 2 Kbytes H8S/2111B-C 3 Kbytes Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 429 of 544 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 430 of 544 Section 18 ROM This LSI has an on-chip ROM (flash memory). The features of the flash memory are summarized below. A block diagram of the flash memory is shown in figure 18.1. 18.1 • Size Features Product Classification H8S/2111B ROM Capacitance 64 Kbytes ROM Address H'000000 to H'00FFFF (mode 2) H'0000 to H'DFFF (mode 3) • Programming/erase methods The flash memory is programmed 128 bytes at a time. Erase is performed in single-block units. The flash memory is configured as follows:  8 Kbytes × 2 blocks, 16 Kbytes × 1 block, 28 Kbytes × 1 block, and 1 Kbyte × 4 blocks To erase the entire flash memory, each block must be erased in turn. • Programming/erase time It takes 10 ms (typ.) to program the flash memory 128 bytes at a time; 80 µs (typ.) per 1 byte. Erasing one block takes 100 ms (typ.). • Reprogramming capability The flash memory can be reprogrammed up to 100 times. • Two flash memory on-board programming modes  Boot mode  User program mode On-board programming/erasing can be done in boot mode in which the boot program built into the chip is started for erase or programming of the entire flash memory. In user program mode, individual blocks can be erased or programmed. • Automatic bit rate adjustment With data transfer in boot mode, this LSI's bit rate can be automatically adjusted to match the transfer bit rate of the host. • Programming/erasing protection Sets protection against flash memory programming/erasing via hardware, software, or error protection. ROMF360A_010020040200 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 431 of 544 • Programmer mode In addition to on-board programming mode, programmer mode is supported to program or erase the flash memory using a PROM programmer. Internal address bus Internal data bus (16 bits) FLMCR1 FLMCR2 Module bus EBR1 EBR2 Bus interface/controller Operating mode Mode pin Flash memory (64 Kbytes) [Legend] FLMCR1: FLMCR2: EBR1: EBR2: Flash memory control register 1 Flash memory control register 2 Erase block register 1 Erase block register 2 Figure 18.1 Block Diagram of Flash Memory Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 432 of 544 18.2 Mode Transitions When the mode pins are set in the reset state and a reset-start is executed, this LSI enters an operating mode as shown in figure 18.2. In user mode, flash memory can be read but not programmed or erased. The boot, user program, and programmer modes are provided as modes to write and erase the flash memory. The differences between boot mode and user program mode are shown in table 18.1. Figure 18.3 shows the boot mode and figure 18.4 shows the user program mode. 1= MD User mode (on-chip ROM enabled) FLSHE = 1 SWE = 1 FLSHE = 0 SWE = 0 1 =0 Reset state RES RES = 0 *2 = 0 RE *1 RES = 0 S Programmer mode User program mode Boot mode On-board programming mode Notes: Only make a transition between user mode and user program mode when the CPU is not accessing the flash memory. 1. MD1 = MD0 = 0, P92 = P91 = P90 = 1 2. MD1 = MD0 = 0, P92 = 0, P91 = P90 = 1 Figure 18.2 Flash Memory State Transitions Table 18.1 Differences between Boot Mode and User Program Mode Boot Mode Total erase Block erase Programming control program* Note: * Yes No Program/program-verify User Program Mode Yes Yes Program/program-verify Erase/erase-verify Should be provided by the user, in accordance with the recommended algorithm. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 433 of 544 1. Initial state The flash memory is erased at shipment. The following describes how to write over an old-version application program or data in the flash memory. The user should prepare the programming control program and new application program beforehand in the host. Programming control program New application program Boot program SCI 2. SCI communication check When boot mode is entered, the boot program in this LSI (originally incorporated in the chip) is started and SCI communication is checked. Then the boot program required for flash memory erasing is automatically transferred to the RAM boot program area. New application program Boot program SCI Boot program area Application program (old version) Application program (old version) Programming control program 3. Flash memory initialization The erase program in the boot program area (in RAM) is executed, and the flash memory is initialized (to H'FF). In boot mode, total flash memory erasure is performed, without regard to blocks. 4. Writing new application program The programming control program transferred from the host to RAM via SCI communication is executed, and the new application program in the host is written into the flash memory. New application program Boot program SCI Boot program New application program SCI Boot program area Flash memory erase Programming control program Boot program area Programming control program Program execution state Figure 18.3 Boot Mode Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 434 of 544 1. Initial state (1) The program that will transfer the programming/erase control program from flash memory to on-chip RAM should be written into the flash memory by the user beforehand. (2) The programming/erase control program should be prepared in the host or in the flash memory. 2. Programming/erase control program transfer The transfer program in the flash memory is executed and the programming/erase control program is transferred to RAM. Programming/ erase control program New application program New application program Boot program SCI Boot program SCI Transfer program Transfer program Programming/ erase control program Application program (old version) Application program (old version) 3. Flash memory initialization The programming/erase program in RAM is executed, and the flash memory is initialized (to H'FF). Erasing can be performed in block units, but not in byte units. 4. Writing new application program Next, the new application program in the host is written into the erased flash memory blocks. Do not write to unerased blocks. New application program Boot program SCI Boot program SCI Transfer program Transfer program Programming/ erase control program Programming/ erase control program New application program Flash memory erase Program execution state Figure 18.4 User Program Mode (Example) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 435 of 544 18.3 Block Configuration Figure 18.5 shows the block configuration of flash memory. The thick lines indicate erasing units, the narrow lines indicate programming units, and the values are addresses. The flash memory is divided into 8 Kbytes (2 blocks), 16 Kbytes (1 block), 28 Kbytes (1 block), and 1 Kbyte (4 blocks). Erasing is performed in these divided units. Programming is performed in 128-byte units starting from an address whose lower bits are H'00 or H'80. EB0 Erase unit: 1 Kbyte H'000000 H'000380 H'000001 H'000381 H'000401 H'000002 H'000382 H'000402 Programming unit: 128 bytes –––––––––––––– H'00007F H'0003FF H'00047F H'0007FF H'00087F EB1 Erase unit: 1 Kbyte H'000400 Programming unit: 128 bytes –––––––––––––– H'000780 EB2 Erase unit: 1 Kbyte H'000800 H'000781 H'000801 H'000782 H'000802 Programming unit: 128 bytes –––––––––––––– H'000B80 EB3 Erase unit: 1 Kbyte H'000F80 EB4 Erase unit: 28 Kbytes H'007F80 EB5 Erase unit: 16 Kbytes H'008000 H'001000 H'000B81 H'000B82 H'000C02 H'000BFF H'000C7F H'000FFF H'00107F H'007FFF H'00807F H'00BFFF H'00C07F H'00DFFF H'00E07F H'000C00 H'000C01 Programming unit: 128 bytes –––––––––––––– H'000F81 H'001001 H'007F81 H'008001 H'000F82 H'001002 H'007F82 H'008002 H'00BF82 H'00C002 H'00DF82 H'00E002 H'00FF82 Programming unit: 128 bytes –––––––––––––– Programming unit: 128 bytes –––––––––––––– H'00BF80 H'00BF81 EB6 Erase unit: 8 Kbytes H'00DF80 H'00DF81 EB7 Erase unit: 8 Kbytes H'00FF80 H'00FF81 H'00E000 H'00E001 H'00C000 H'00C001 Programming unit: 128 bytes –––––––––––––– Programming unit: 128 bytes –––––––––––––– H'00FFFF Figure 18.5 Flash Memory Block Configuration Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 436 of 544 18.4 Input/Output Pins The flash memory is controlled by means of the pins shown in table 18.2. Table 18.2 Pin Configuration Pin Name RES MD1 MD0 P92 P91 P90 TxD1 RxD1 I/O Input Input Input Input Input Input Output Input Function Reset Sets this LSI's operating mode Sets this LSI's operating mode Sets this LSI's operating mode Sets this LSI's operating mode Sets this LSI's operating mode Serial transmit data output Serial receive data input 18.5 Register Descriptions The flash memory has the following registers. To access FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, or EBR2, the FLSHE bit in the serial/timer control register (STCR) should be set to 1. For details on the serial/timer control register, refer to section 3.2.3, Serial Timer Control Register (STCR). • • • • Flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1) Flash memory control register 2 (FLMCR2) Erase block register 1 (EBR1) Erase block register 2 (EBR2) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 437 of 544 18.5.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1) FLMCR1, used together with FLMCR2, makes the flash memory transit to program mode, program-verify mode, erase mode, or erase-verify mode. For details on register setting, refer to section 18.8, Flash Memory Programming/Erasing.FLMCR1 is initialized to H'80 by a reset, or in hardware standby mode, software standby mode, sub-active mode, sub-sleep mode, or watch mode. Bit 7 Bit Name FWE Initial Value 1 R/W R Description Flash Write Enable Controls programming/erasing of on-chip flash memory. This bit is always read as 0, and cannot be modified. 6 SWE 0 R/W Software Write Enable When this bit is set to 1, flash memory programming/erasing is enabled. When this bit is cleared to 0, the EV, PV, E, and P bits in this register, the ESU and PSU bits in FLMCR2, and all EBR1 and EBR2 bits cannot be set to 1. Do not clear these bits and SWE to 0 simultaneously. 5 4 3 — — EV 0 0 0 R R R/W Reserved These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Erase-Verify When this bit is set to 1 while SWE = 1, the flash memory transits to erase-verify mode. When it is cleared to 0, erase-verify mode is cancelled. 2 PV 0 R/W Program-Verify When this bit is set to 1 while SWE = 1, the flash memory transits to program-verify mode. When it is cleared to 0, program-verify mode is cancelled. 1 E 0 R/W Erase When this bit is set to 1 while SWE = 1 and ESU = 1, the flash memory transits to erase mode. When it is cleared to 0, erase mode is cancelled. 0 P 0 R/W Program When this bit is set to 1 while SWE = 1 and PSU = 1, the flash memory transits to program mode. When it is cleared to 0, program mode is cancelled. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 438 of 544 18.5.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2) FLMCR2 monitors the state of flash memory programming/erasing protection (error protection) and sets up the flash memory to transit to programming/erasing mode. FLMCR2 is initialized to H'00 by a reset or in hardware standby mode. The ESU and PSU bits are cleared to 0 in software standby mode, sub-active mode, sub-sleep mode, or watch mode, or when the SWE bit in FLMCR1 is cleared to 0. Bit 7 Initial Bit Name Value FLER 0 R/W R Description Flash memory error Indicates that an error has occurred during flash memory programming/erasing. When this bit is set to 1, flash memory goes to the error-protection state. For details, see section 18.9.3, Error Protection. 6 to 2 1 — ESU All 0 0 R/(W) R/W Reserved The initial values should not be modified. Erase Setup When this bit is set to 1 while SWE = 1, the flash memory transits to the erase setup state. When it is cleared to 0, the erase setup state is cancelled. Set this bit to 1 before setting the E bit in FLMCR1 to 1. 0 PSU 0 R/W Program Setup When this bit is set to 1 while SWE = 1, the flash memory transits to the program setup state. When it is cleared to 0, the program setup state is cancelled. Set this bit to 1 before setting the P bit in FLMCR1 to 1. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 439 of 544 18.5.3 Erase Block Registers 1 and 2 (EBR1, EBR2) EBR1 and EBR2 are used to specify the flash memory erase block. EBR1 and EBR2 are initialized to H'00 by a reset, or in hardware standby mode, software standby mode, sub-active mode, sub-sleep mode, or watch mode, or when the SWE bit in FLMCR1 is cleared to 0. Set only one bit to 1 at a time, otherwise all bits in EBR1 and EBR2 are automatically cleared to 0. • EBR1 Bit 7 to 0 Initial Bit Name Value — All 0 R/W R/(W) Description Reserved The initial values should not be modified. • EBR2 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note: * Initial Bit Name Value EB7 EB6 EB5 EB4 EB3 EB2 EB1 EB0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W* R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Description When this bit is set to 1, 8 Kbytes of EB7 (H'00E000 to H'00FFFF) are to be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 8 Kbytes of EB6 (H'00C000 to H'00DFFF) are to be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 16 Kbytes of EB5 (H'008000 to H'00BFFF) are to be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 28 Kbytes of EB4 (H'001000 to H'007FFF) are to be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 1 Kbyte of EB3 (H'000C00 to H'000FFF) is to be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 1 Kbyte of EB2 (H'000800 to H'000BFF) is to be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 1 Kbyte of EB1 (H'000400 to H'0007FF) is to be erased. When this bit is set to 1, 1 Kbyte of EB0 (H'000000 to H'0003FF) is to be erased. In normal mode, this bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 440 of 544 18.6 Operating Modes The flash memory is connected to the CPU via a 16-bit data bus, enabling byte data and word data to be accessed in a single state. Even addresses are connected to the upper 8 bits and odd addresses are connected to the lower 8 bits. Note that word data must start from an even address. In normal mode (mode 3), up to 56 Kbytes of ROM can be used. Table 18.3 Operating Modes and ROM Operating Modes MCU CPU Operating Mode Operating Mode Mode Mode 2 Mode 3 Advanced Normal Mode Pins MD1 MD0 On-Chip ROM 0 1 Enabled (64 Kbytes) Enabled (56 Kbytes) Single-chip mode 1 Single-chip mode 1 18.7 On-Board Programming Modes An on-board programming mode is used to perform on-chip flash memory programming, erasing, and verification. This LSI has two on-board programming modes: boot mode and user program mode. Table 18.4 shows pin settings for boot mode. In user program mode, operation by software is enabled by setting control bits. For details on flash memory mode transitions, see figure 18.2. Table 18.4 On-Board Programming Mode Settings Mode Setting Boot mode User program mode Note: * MD1 0 Mode 2 (advanced mode) 1 Mode 3 (normal mode) 1 MD0 0 0 1 P92 1*   P91 1*   P90 1*   Can be used as an I/O port after the boot mode activation. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 441 of 544 18.7.1 Boot Mode Table 18.5 shows the boot mode operations between reset end and branching to the programming control program. 1. When boot mode is used, the flash memory programming control program must be prepared in the host beforehand. Prepare a programming control program in accordance with the description in section 18.8, Flash Memory Programming/Erasing. In boot mode, if any data exists in the flash memory (except in the case that all data are 1), all blocks in the flash memory are erased. Use boot mode at initial writing in the on-board state, or forced recovery when user program mode cannot be executed because the program to be initiated in user program mode was mistakenly erased. 2. The SCI_1 should be set to asynchronous mode, and the transfer format as follows: 8-bit data, 1 stop bit, and no parity. 3. When the boot program is initiated, this LSI measures the low-level period of asynchronous SCI communication data (H'00) transmitted continuously from the host. This LSI then calculates the bit rate of transmission from the host, and adjusts the SCI_1 bit rate to match that of the host. The reset should end with the RxD1 pin high. The RxD1 and TxD1 pins should be pulled up on the board if necessary. After the reset ends, it takes approximately 100 states before this LSI is ready to measure the low-level period. 4. After matching the bit rates, this LSI transmits one H'00 byte to the host to indicate the end of bit rate adjustment. The host should confirm that this adjustment end indication (H'00) has been received normally, and transmit one H'55 byte to this LSI. If reception could not be performed normally, initiate boot mode again by a reset. Depending on the host's transfer bit rate and system clock frequency of this LSI, there will be a discrepancy between the bit rates of the host and this LSI. To operate the SCI properly, set the host's transfer bit rate and system clock frequency of this LSI within the ranges listed in table 18.6. 5. In boot mode, a part of the on-chip RAM area is used by the boot program. Addresses H'FFE080 to H'FFE87F*1 is the area to which the programming control program is transferred from the host. Note, however, that ID codes are assigned to addresses H'FFE080 to H'FFE087. The boot program area cannot be used until the execution state in boot mode switches to the programming control program. Figure 18.6 shows the on-chip RAM area in boot mode. 6. Before branching to the programming control program (H'FFE088 in the RAM area), this LSI terminates transfer operations by the SCI_1 (by clearing the RE and TE bits in SCR to 0), but the adjusted bit rate value remains set in BRR. Therefore, the programming control program can still use it for transfer of write data or verify data with the host. The TxD1 pin is in highlevel output state. The contents of the CPU general registers are undefined immediately after branching to the programming control program. These registers must be initialized at the beginning of the programming control program, since the stack pointer (SP), in particular, is used implicitly in subroutine calls, etc. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 442 of 544 7. Boot mode can be cleared by a reset. Cancel the reset*2 after driving the reset pin low, waiting at least 20 states, and then setting the mode pins. Boot mode is also cleared when a WDT overflow occurs. 8. Do not change the mode pin input levels in boot mode. 9. All interrupts are disabled during programming or erasing of the flash memory. Notes: 1. Some parts of this area are reserved only for boot mode and therefore should not be used for any other purpose. 2. After reset is cancelled, mode pin input settings must satisfy the mode programming setup time (tMDS = 4 states). Table 18.5 Boot Mode Operation Boot mode start Item Host Operation Processing Contents Communications Contents LSI Operation Processing Contents Branches to boot program at reset-start. Boot program start Bit rate adjustment Continuously transmits data H'00 at specified bit rate. H'00, H'00 . . . H'00 Transmits data H'55 when data H'00 is received error-free. H'00 H'55 H'AA • Measures low-level period of receive data H'00. • Calculates bit rate and sets it in BRR of SCI_1. • Transmits data H'00 to host as adjustment end indication. Receives data H'AA. Transmits number of bytes (N) of programming control program to be transferred as 2-byte data (low-order byte following high-order byte). After receiving data H'55, transmits data H'AA to host. Transfer of programming control program High-order byte and low-order byte Echoback H'XX Echobacks the 2-byte data received to host. Transmits 1-byte of programming control program (repeated for N times). Echoback Echobacks received data to host and also transfers it to RAM (repeated for N times). Flash memory erase Boot program erase error H'FF Receives data H'AA. H'AA Checks flash memory data, erases all flash memory blocks in case of written data existing, and transmits data H'AA to host. (If erase could not be done, transmits data H'FF to host and aborts operation.) Branches to programming control program transferred to on-chip RAM and starts execution. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 443 of 544 Table 18.6 System Clock Frequencies for which Automatic Adjustment of LSI Bit Rate is Possible Host Bit Rate 19200 bps 9600 bps 4800 bps System Clock Frequency Range of LSI 8 to 10 MHz 4 to 10 MHz 4 to 10 MHz H'FFE080 H'FFE088 ID code area*1 Programming control program area*1 (2040 bytes) H'FFE880 Boot program area*2 (1920 bytes) H'FFEFFF H'FFFF00 Boot program area*2 (128 bytes) H'FFFF7F Notes: 1. Some parts of this area are reserved only for boot mode and therefore should not be used for any other purpose. 2. The boot program area and area which is not used cannot be used until a transition is made to the execution state for the programming control program transferred to RAM. Note that the contents of the boot program area in RAM are remained after a branch is made to the programming control program. Figure 18.6 On-Chip RAM Area in Boot Mode In boot mode, this LSI checks the contents of the 8-byte ID code area as shown below to confirm that the programming control program corresponds with this LSI. To originally write a programming control program to be used in boot mode, the above 8-byte ID code must be added at the beginning of the program. H'FFE080 40 FE 64 66 32 31 31 30 (Product ID) H'FFE088 Instruction codes of the programming control program Figure 18.7 ID Code Area Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 444 of 544 18.7.2 User Program Mode On-board programming/erasing of an individual flash memory block can also be performed in user program mode by branching to a user program/erase control program. The user must set branching conditions and provide on-board means of supplying programming data. The flash memory must contain the user program/erase control program or a program which provides the user program/erase control program from external memory. Because the flash memory itself cannot be read during programming/erasing, transfer the user program/erase control program to on-chip RAM, as like in boot mode. Figure 18.8 shows a sample procedure for programming/erasing in user program mode. Prepare a user program/erase control program in accordance with the description in section 18.8, Flash Memory Programming/Erasing. Reset-start No Program/erase? Yes Transfer user program/ erase control program to RAM Branch to flash memory application program Branch to user program/ erase control program in RAM Execute user program/erase control program (flash memory rewrite) Branch to flash memory application program Figure 18.8 Programming/Erasing Flowchart Example in User Program Mode Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 445 of 544 18.8 Flash Memory Programming/Erasing A software method, using the CPU, is employed to program and erase flash memory in the onboard programming modes. Depending on the FLMCR1 and FLMCR2 settings, the flash memory operates in one of the following four modes: program mode, program-verify mode, erase mode, and erase-verify mode. The programming control program in boot mode and the user program/erase control program in user program mode use these operating modes in combination to perform programming/erasing. Flash memory programming and erasing should be performed in accordance with the descriptions in section 18.8.1, Program/Program-Verify and section 18.8.2, Erase/Erase-Verify, respectively. 18.8.1 Program/Program-Verify When writing data or programs to the flash memory, the program/program-verify flowchart shown in figure 18.9 should be followed. Performing programming operations according to this flowchart will enable data or programs to be written to the flash memory without subjecting this LSI to voltage stress or sacrificing program data reliability. 1. Programming must be done to an empty address. Do not reprogram an address to which programming has already been performed. 2. Programming should be carried out 128 bytes at a time. A 128-byte data transfer must be performed even if writing fewer than 128 bytes. In this case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses. 3. Prepare the following data storage areas in RAM: a 128-byte programming data area, a 128byte reprogramming data area, and a 128-byte additional-programming data area. Perform reprogramming data computation and additional programming data computation according to figure 18.9. 4. Consecutively transfer 128 bytes of data in byte units from the reprogramming data area or additional-programming data area to the flash memory. The program address and 128-byte data are latched in the flash memory. The lower 8 bits of the start address in the flash memory destination area must be H'00 or H'80. 5. The time during which the P bit is set to 1 is the programming time. Figure 18.9 shows the allowable programming times. 6. The watchdog timer (WDT) is set to prevent overprogramming due to program runaway, etc. The overflow cycle should be longer than (y + z2 + α + β) µs. 7. For a dummy write to a verify address, write 1-byte data H'FF to an address whose lower 2 bits are B'00. Verify data can be read in words from the address to which a dummy write was performed. 8. The maximum number of repetitions of the program/program-verify sequence to the same bit is (N). Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 446 of 544 Write pulse application subroutine Sub-Routine Write Pulse WDT enable Set PSU bit in FLMCR2 Wait (γ) µs Set P bit in FLMCR1 Wait (z1) µs, (z2) µs or (z3) µs Clear P bit in FLMCR1 Wait (α) µs Clear PSU bit in FLMCR2 Wait (β) µs Disable WDT End Sub Increment address Start of programming START Set SWE bit in FLMCR1 Wait (x) µs Store 128-byte program data in program data area and reprogram data area Perform programming in the erased state. Do not perform additional programming on previously programmed addresses. *4 n=1 *5 m=0 Write 128-byte data in RAM reprogram data area consecutively to flash memory *1 See Note 7 for pulse width Sub-Routine-Call Apply write pulse z1 µs or z2 µs Set PV bit in FLMCR1 Wait (γ) µs H'FF dummy write to verify address Wait (ε) µs Read verify data Write data = verify data? n←n+1 *2 Note 7: Write Pulse Width Number of Writes n Write Time (z) µs 1 z1 2 z1 3 z1 4 z1 5 z1 6 z1 7 z2 8 z2 9 z2 10 z2 11 z2 12 z2 13 z2 NG NG m=1 NG OK 6≥n? OK Additional-programming data computation Transfer additional-programming data to additional-programming data area *4 Reprogram data computation *3 *4 Transfer reprogram data to reprogram data area 128-byte data verification completed? 998 999 1000 z2 z2 z2 OK Clear PV bit in FLMCR1 Wait (η) µs 6 ≥ n? Note: Use a z3 µs write pulse for additional programming. NG RAM Program data storage area (128 bytes) Reprogram data storage area (128 bytes) Additional-programming data storage area (128 bytes) OK Successively write 128-byte data from additionalprogramming data area in RAM to flash memory Apply write pulse (Additional programming) *1 *3 µs n ≥ (N)? m=0? NG NG OK Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1 Wait (θ) µs OK Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1 Wait (θ) µs End of programming Programming failure Notes: 1. Data transfer is performed by byte transfer. The lower 8 bits of the first address written to must be H'00 or H'80. A 128-byte data transfer must be performed even if writing fewer than 128 bytes; in this case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses. 2. Verify data is read in 16-bit (word) units. 3. Even bits for which programming has been completed will be subjected to programming once again if the result of the subsequent verify operation is NG. 4. A 128-byte area for storing program data, a 128-byte area for storing reprogram data, and a 128-byte area for storing additional data must be provided in RAM. The contents of the reprogram data area and additional data area are modified as programming proceeds. 5. A write pulse of z1 µs or z2 µs is applied according to the progress of the programming operation. See Note7 for details of the pulse widths. When writing of additional-programming data is executed, a z3 µs write pulse should be applied. Reprogram data X' means reprogram data when the write pulse is applied. 6. The values of x, y, z1, z2, z3, α, β, γ, ε, η, θ, and N are shown in section 22.5, Flash Memory Characteristics. Reprogram Data Computation Table Original Data Verify Data Reprogram Data (D) (V) (X) 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 Additional-Programming Data Computation Table Reprogram Data Verify Data Additional(X') (V) Programming Data (Y) 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 Additional programming not to be executed Comments Programming completed Programming incomplete; reprogram Comments Additional programming to be executed Additional programming not to be executed Still in erased state; no action 1 Figure 18.9 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 447 of 544 18.8.2 Erase/Erase-Verify When erasing flash memory, the erase/erase-verify flowchart shown in figure 18.10 should be followed. 1. Prewriting (setting erase block data to all 0) is not necessary. 2. Erasing is performed in block units. Make only a single-block specification in erase block registers 1 and 2 (EBR1 and EBR2). To erase multiple blocks, each block must be erased in turn. 3. The time during which the E bit is set to 1 is the flash memory erase time. 4. The watchdog timer (WDT) is set to prevent overprogramming due to program runaway, etc. An overflow cycle of approximately (y + z + α + β) ms is allowed. 5. For a dummy write to a verify address, write 1-byte data H'FF to an address whose lower two bits are B'00. Verify data can be read in longwords from the address to which a dummy write was performed. 6. If the read data is unerased, set erase mode again, and repeat the erase/erase-verify sequence as before. The maximum number of repetitions of the erase/erase-verify sequence is N. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 448 of 544 START *1 Set SWE bit in FLMCR1 Wait (x) µs n=1 Set EBR1 and EBR2 Enable WDT *4 *2 Set ESU bit in FLMCR2 Wait (y) µs *2 Start of erasing Set E bit in FLMCR1 Wait (z) ms Clear E bit in FLMCR1 *2 End of erasing Wait (α) µs Clear ESU bit in FLMCR2 *2 Wait (β) µs Disable WDT *2 Set EV bit in FLMCR1 Wait (γ) µs Set block start address as verify address H'FF dummy write to verify address *2 n←n+1 Wait (ε) µs Read verify data Increment address *2 *3 NG Verify data = all "1"? OK NG Last address of block? OK Clear EV bit in FLMCR1 Clear EV bit in FLMCR1 Wait (η) µs Wait (η) µs *2 NG *2 n≥ (N) ? OK *5 All erase blocks erased? OK *2 NG Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1 Wait (θ) µs Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1 Wait (θ) µs End of erasing Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Erase failure Prewriting (writing 0 to all data in erased block) is not necessary. The values of x, y, z, α, β, γ, ε, η, θ, and N are shown in section 22.5, Flash Memory Characteristics. Verify data is read in 16-bit (word) units. Set only a single bit in EBR1 and EBR2. Do not set more than one bit. Erasing is performed in block units. To erase multiple blocks, each block must be erased in turn. Figure 18.10 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 449 of 544 18.9 Program/Erase Protection There are three kinds of flash memory program/erase protection: hardware protection, software protection, and error protection. 18.9.1 Hardware Protection Hardware protection is a state in which programming/erasing of flash memory is forcibly disabled or aborted by a reset (including WDT overflow reset), or a transition to hardware standby mode, software standby mode, sub-active mode, sub-sleep mode or watch mode. Flash memory control registers 1 and 2 (FLMCR1 and FLMCR2) and erase block registers 1 and 2 (EBR1 and EBR2) are initialized. In a reset via the RES pin, the reset state is not entered unless the RES pin is held low until oscillation stabilizes after powering on. In the case of a reset during operation, hold the RES pin low for the RES pulse width specified in the AC Characteristics section. 18.9.2 Software Protection Software protection can be implemented against programming/erasing of all flash memory blocks by clearing the SWE bit in FLMCR1 to 0. When software protection is in effect, setting the P or E bit in FLMCR1 does not cause a transition to program mode or erase mode. By setting the erase block registers 1 and 2 (EBR1 and EBR2), erase protection can be set for individual blocks. When EBR1 and EBR2 are set to H'00, erase protection is set for all blocks. 18.9.3 Error Protection In error protection, an error is detected when the CPU's runaway occurs during flash memory programming/erasing, or operation is not performed in accordance with the program/erase algorithm, and the program/erase operation is aborted. Aborting the program/erase operation prevents damage to the flash memory due to overprogramming or overerasing. When the following errors are detected during programming/erasing of flash memory, the FLER bit in FLMCR2 is set to 1, and the error protection state is entered. • When the flash memory of is read during programming/erasing (including vector read and instruction fetch) • Immediately after exception handling (excluding a reset) during programming/erasing • When a SLEEP instruction is executed (transits to software standby mode, sleep mode, subactive mode, sub-sleep mode, or watch mode) during programming/erasing Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 450 of 544 The FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2 settings are retained, but program mode or erase mode is aborted at the point at which the error occurred. Program mode or erase mode cannot be entered by setting the P or E bit to 1. However, because the PV and EV bit settings are retained, a transition to verify mode can be made. The error protection state can be cancelled by a reset or in hardware standby mode. 18.10 Interrupts during Flash Memory Programming/Erasing In order to give the highest priority to programming/erasing operations, disable all interrupts including NMI input during flash memory programming/erasing (the P or E bit in FlMCR1 is set to 1) or boot program execution*1. 1. If an interrupt is generated during programming/erasing, operation in accordance with the program/erase algorithm is not guaranteed. 2. CPU runaway may occur because normal vector reading cannot be performed in interrupt exception handling during programming/erasing*2. 3. If an interrupt occurs during boot program execution, the normal boot mode sequence cannot be executed. Notes: 1. Interrupt requests must be disabled inside and outside the CPU until the programming control program has completed programming. 2. The vector may not be read correctly for the following two reasons: If flash memory is read while being programmed or erased (while the P or E bit in FLMCR1 is set to 1), correct read data will not be obtained (undefined values will be returned). If the interrupt entry in the vector table has not been programmed yet, interrupt exception handling will not be executed correctly. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 451 of 544 18.11 Programmer Mode In programmer mode, the on-chip flash memory can be programmed/erased by a PROM programmer via a socket adapter, just like for a discrete flash memory. Use a PROM programmer that supports the Renesas 64-Kbyte flash memory on-chip MCU device*. Figure 18.11 shows a memory map in programmer mode. Note: Set the programming voltage of the PROM programmer to 3.3V. MCU mode H'000000 Programmer mode H'00000 On-chip ROM area H'00FFFF H'0FFFF Undefined value output H'1FFFF Figure 18.11 Memory Map in Programmer Mode Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 452 of 544 18.12 Usage Notes The following lists notes on the use of on-board programming modes and programmer mode. 1. Perform programming/erasing with the specified voltage and timing. If a voltage higher than the rated voltage is applied, the product may be fatally damaged. Use a PROM programmer that supports the Renesas 64-Kbyte flash memory on-chip MCU device at 3.3 V. Do not set the programmer to HN28F101 or the programming voltage to 5.0 V. 2. Notes on power on/off At powering on or off the Vcc power supply, fix the RES pin to low and set the flash memory to hardware protection state. This power on/off timing must also be satisfied at a power-off and power-on caused by a power failure and other factors. 3. Perform flash memory programming/erasing in accordance with the recommended algorithm In the recommended algorithm, flash memory programming/erasing can be performed without subjecting this LSI to voltage stress or sacrificing program data reliability. When setting the P or E bit in FLMCR1 to 1, set the watchdog timer against program runaway. 4. Do not set/clear the SWE bit during program execution in the flash memory. Do not set/clear the SWE bit during program execution in the flash memory. An interval of at least 100 µs is necessary between program execution or data reading in flash memory and SWE bit clearing. When the SWE bit is set to 1, flash memory data can be modified, however, flash memory data can be read only in program-verify or erase-verify mode. Do not access the flash memory for a purpose other than verification during programming/erasing. Do not clear the SWE bit during programming, erasing, or verifying. 5. Do not use interrupts during flash memory programming/erasing In order to give the highest priority to programming/erasing operation, disable all interrupts including NMI input when the flash memory is programmed or erased. 6. Do not perform additional programming. Programming must be performed in the erased state. Program the area with 128-byte programming-unit blocks in on-board programming or programmer mode only once. Perform programming in the state where the programming-unit block is fully erased. 7. Ensure that the PROM programmer is correctly attached before programming. If the socket, socket adapter, or product index does not match the specifications, too much current flows and the product may be damaged. 8. Do not touch the socket adapter or LSI while programming. Touching either of these can cause contact faults and write errors. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 453 of 544 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 454 of 544 Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator This LSI incorporates a clock pulse generator, which generates the system clock (φ), bus master clock, and internal clock. The clock pulse generator consists of an oscillator, duty correction circuit, clock select circuit, medium-speed clock divider, bus master clock select circuit, subclock input circuit, and waveform forming circuit. Figure 19.1 shows a block diagram of the clock pulse generator. EXTAL Oscillator XTAL Duty correction circuit Clock select circuit φSUB Mediumspeed clock divider φ/2 to φ/32 φ Bus master clock select circuit EXCL Subclock input circuit Waveform forming circuit WDT_1 count clock System clock to φ pin Internal clock to peripheral modules Bus master clock to CPU Figure 19.1 Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator The bus master clock is selected as either high-speed mode or medium-speed mode by software according to the settings of the SCK2 to SCK0 bits in the standby control register. For details on the standby control register, refer to section 20.1.1, Standby Control Register (SBYCR). The subclock input is controlled by software according to the EXCLE bit setting in the low power control register. For details on the low power control register, refer to section 20.1.2, Low Power Control Register (LPWRCR). Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 455 of 544 19.1 Oscillator Clock pulses can be supplied either by connecting a crystal resonator, or by providing external clock input. 19.1.1 Connecting Crystal Resonator Figure 19.2 shows a typical method of connecting a crystal resonator. An appropriate damping resistance Rd, given in table 19.1, should be used. An AT-cut parallel-resonance crystal resonator should be used. Figure 19.3 shows the equivalent circuit of a crystal resonator. A resonator having the characteristics given in table 19.2 should be used. A crystal resonator with frequency identical to that of the system clock (φ) should be used. CL1 EXTAL XTAL Rd CL2 CL1 = CL2 = 10 to 22 pF Figure 19.2 Typical Connection to Crystal Resonator Table 19.1 Damping Resistance Values Frequency (MHz) Rd (Ω) 4 500 8 200 10 0 CL L Rs XTAL EXTAL C0 AT-cut parallel-resonance crystal resonator Figure 19.3 Equivalent Circuit of Crystal Resonator Table 19.2 Crystal Resonator Parameters Frequency (MHz) RS (max) (Ω) C0 (max) (pF) 4 120 7 8 80 7 10 70 7 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 456 of 544 19.1.2 External Clock Input Method Figure 19.4 shows a typical method of connecting an external clock signal. To leave the XTAL pin open, incidental capacitance should be 10 pF or less. To input an inverted clock to the XTAL pin, the external clock should be set to high in standby mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode. External clock input conditions are shown in table 19.3. The frequency of the external clock should be the same as that of the system clock (φ). EXTAL XTAL Open External clock input (a) Example of external clock input when XTAL pin left open EXTAL XTAL External clock input (b) Example of external clock input when an inverted clock is input to XTAL pin Figure 19.4 Example of External Clock Input Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 457 of 544 Table 19.3 External Clock Input Conditions VCC =3.0 to 3.6 V Item External clock input pulse width low level External clock input pulse width high level External clock rising time External clock falling time Symbol tEXL tEXH tEXr tEXf Min 40 40 — — 0.4 80 Clock pulse width high level tCH 0.4 80 Max — — 10 10 0.6 — 0.6 — Unit ns ns ns ns tcyc ns tcyc ns φ ≥ 5 MHz φ < 5 MHz φ ≥ 5 MHz φ < 5 MHz Figure 22.5 Test Conditions Figure 19.5 Clock pulse width low level tCL tEXH tEXL EXTAL VCC × 0.5 tEXr tEXf Figure 19.5 External Clock Input Timing The oscillator and duty correction circuit have a function to adjust the waveform of the external clock input that is input to the EXTAL pin. When a specified clock signal is input to the EXTAL pin, internal clock signal output is determined after the external clock output stabilization delay time (tDEXT) has passed. As the clock signal output is not determined during the tDEXT cycle, a reset signal should be set to low to hold it in reset state. Table 19.4 shows the external clock output stabilization delay time. Figure 19.6 shows the timing of the external clock output stabilization delay time. Table 19.4 External Clock Output Stabilization Delay Time Condition: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, VSS = 0 V Item External clock output stabilization delay time Note: * Symbol tDEXT* Min. 500 Max. — Unit µs Remarks Figure 19.6 tDEXT includes a RES pulse width (tRESW). Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 458 of 544 VCC 3.0 V STBY VIH EXTAL φ (Internal and external) RES tDEXT* Note: * The external clock output stabilization delay time (tDEXT) includes a RES pulse width (tRESW). Figure 19.6 Timing of External Clock Output Stabilization Delay Time 19.2 Duty Correction Circuit The duty correction circuit is valid when the oscillating frequency is 5 MHz or more. It corrects the duty of a clock that is output from the oscillator, and generates the system clock (φ). 19.3 Medium-Speed Clock Divider The medium-speed clock divider divides the system clock (φ), and generates φ/2, φ/4, φ/8, φ/16, and φ/32 clocks. 19.4 Bus Master Clock Select Circuit The bus master clock select circuit selects a clock to supply the bus master with either the system clock (φ) or medium-speed clock (φ/2, φ/4, φ/8, φ/16, or φ/32) by the SCK2 to SCK0 bits in SBYCR. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 459 of 544 19.5 Subclock Input Circuit The subclock input circuit controls subclock input from the EXCL pin. To use the subclock, a 32.768-kHz external clock should be input from the EXCL pin. At this time, the P96DDR bit in P9DDR should be cleared to 0, and the EXCLE bit in LPWRCR should be set to 1. Subclock input conditions are shown in table 19.5. When the subclock is not used, subclock input should not be enabled. Table 19.5 Subclock Input Conditions Vcc = 3.0 to 3.6 V Item Subclock input pulse width low level Subclock input pulse width high level Subclock input rising time Subclock input falling time Symbol tEXCLL tEXCLH tEXCLr tEXCLf Min — — — — Typ 15.26 15.26 — — Max — — 10 10 Unit µs µs ns ns Measurement Condition Figure 19.7 tEXCLH tEXCLL EXCL VCC × 0.5 tEXCLr tEXCLf Figure 19.7 Subclock Input Timing 19.6 Waveform Forming Circuit To remove noise from the subclock input at the EXCL pin, the subclock is sampled by a divided φ clock. The sampling frequency is set by the NESEL bit in LPWRCR. The subclock is not sampled in subactive mode, subsleep mode, or watch mode. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 460 of 544 19.7 Clock Select Circuit The clock select circuit selects the system clock that is used in this LSI. A clock generated by an oscillator to which the EXTAL and XTAL pins are input is selected as a system clock when returning from high-speed mode, medium-speed mode, sleep mode, reset state, or standby mode. A subclock input from the EXCL pin is selected as a system clock in subactive mode, subsleep mode, or watch mode. At this time, modules such as the CPU, TMR_0, TMR_1, WDT_0, WDT_1, ports, and interrupt controller and their functions operate depending on the φSUB. The count clock and sampling clock for each timer are divided φSUB clocks. 19.8 19.8.1 Usage Notes Note on Resonator Since all kinds of characteristics of the resonator are closely related to the board design by the user, use the example of resonator connection in this document for only reference; be sure to use an resonator that has been sufficiently evaluated by the user. Consult with the resonator manufacturer about the resonator circuit ratings which vary depending on the stray capacitances of the resonator and installation circuit. Make sure the voltage applied to the oscillator pins does not exceed the maximum rating. 19.8.2 Notes on Board Design When using a crystal resonator, the crystal resonator and its load capacitors should be placed as close as possible to the XTAL and EXTAL pins. Other signal lines should be routed away from the oscillator circuit to prevent inductive interference with the correct oscillation as shown in figure 19.8. Avoid Signal A Signal B CL2 This LSI XTAL EXTAL CL1 Figure 19.8 Note on Board Design of Oscillator Circuit Section Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 461 of 544 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 462 of 544 Section 20 Power-Down Modes For operating modes after the reset state is cancelled, this LSI has not only the normal program execution state but also seven power-down modes in which power consumption is significantly reduced. In addition, there is also module stop mode in which reduced power consumption can be achieved by individually stopping on-chip peripheral modules. • Medium-speed mode System clock frequency for the CPU operation can be selected as φ/2, φ/4, φ/8, φ/16, or φ/32. • Subactive mode The CPU operates based on the subclock and on-chip peripheral modules other than TMR_0, TMR_1, WDT_0, and WDT_1 stop operating. • Sleep mode The CPU stops but on-chip peripheral modules continue operating. • Subsleep mode The CPU and on-chip peripheral modules other than TMR_0, TMR_1, WDT_0, and WDT_1 stop operating. • Watch mode The CPU and on-chip peripheral modules other than WDT_1 stop operating. • Software standby mode Clock oscillation stops, and the CPU and on-chip peripheral modules stop operating. • Hardware standby mode Clock oscillation stops, and the CPU and on-chip peripheral modules enter reset state. • Module stop mode Independently of above operating modes, on-chip peripheral modules that are not used can be stopped individually. 20.1 Register Descriptions Power-down modes are controlled by the following registers. To access SBYCR, LPWRCR, MSTPCRH, and MSTPCRL, the FLSHE bit in the serial timer control register (STCR) must be cleared to 0. For details on STCR, see section 3.2.3, Serial Timer Control Register (STCR). • • • • Standby control register (SBYCR) Low power control register (LPWRCR) Module stop control register H (MSTPCRH) Module stop control register L (MSTPCRL) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 463 of 544 20.1.1 Standby Control Register (SBYCR) SBYCR controls power-down modes. Bit 7 Bit Name SSBY Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Software Standby Specifies the operating mode to be entered after executing the SLEEP instruction. When the SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode: 0: Shifts to sleep mode 1: Shifts to software standby mode, subactive mode, or watch mode When the SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode: 0: Shifts to subsleep mode 1: Shifts to watch mode or high-speed mode Note that the SSBY bit is not changed even if a mode transition occurs by an interrupt. Standby Timer Select 2 to 0 Selects the wait time for clock stabilization from clock oscillation start when canceling software standby mode, watch mode, or subactive mode. Select a wait time of 8 ms (oscillation stabilization time) or more, depending on the operating frequency. Table 20.1 shows the relationship between the STS2 to STS0 values and wait time. With an external clock, there are no specific wait requirements. Normally the minimum value is recommended. Reserved This bit is always read as 0, and cannot be modified. System Clock Select 2 to 0 Selects a clock for the bus master in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode. When making a transition to subactive mode or watch mode, SCK2 to SCK0 must be cleared to 0. 000: High-speed mode 001: Medium-speed clock: φ/2 010: Medium-speed clock: φ/4 011: Medium-speed clock: φ/8 100: Medium-speed clock: φ/16 101: Medium-speed clock: φ/32 11X: — 6 5 4 STS2 STS1 STS0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W 3 2 1 0  SCK2 SCK1 SCK0 0 0 0 0 R R/W R/W R/W [Legend] X: Don't care Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 464 of 544 Table 20.1 Operating Frequency and Wait Time STS2 STS1 STS0 Wait Time 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 8192 states 16384 states 32768 states 65536 states 131072 states 262144 states Reserved Reserved 10 MHz 0.8 1.6 3.3 6.6 13.1 26.2   8 MHz 1.0 2.0 4.1 8.2 16.4 32.8   6 MHz 1.3 2.7 5.5 10.9 21.8 43.6   4 MHz 20. 4.1 8.2 16.4 32.8 65.6   Unit ms Shaded cells indicate the recommended specification. 20.1.2 Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR) LPWRCR controls power-down modes. Bit 7 Bit Name DTON Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Direct Transfer On Flag Specifies the operating mode to be entered after executing the SLEEP instruction. When the SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode: 0: Shifts to sleep mode, software standby mode, or watch mode 1: Shifts directly to subactive mode, or shifts to sleep mode or software standby mode When the SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode: 0: Shifts to subsleep mode or watch mode 1: Shifts directly to high-speed mode, or shifts to subsleep mode Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 465 of 544 Bit 6 Bit Name LSON Initial Value 0 R/W R/W Description Low-Speed On Flag Specifies the operating mode to be entered after executing the SLEEP instruction. This bit also controls whether to shift to high-speed mode or subactive mode when watch mode is cancelled. When the SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode: 0: Shifts to sleep mode, software standby mode, or watch mode 1: Shifts to watch mode or subactive mode When the SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode: 0: Shifts directly to watch mode or high-speed mode 1: Shifts to subsleep mode or watch mode When watch mode is cancelled: 0: Shifts to high-speed mode 1: Shifts to subactive mode 5 NESEL 0 R/W Noise Elimination Sampling Frequency Select Selects the frequency by which the subclock (φSUB) input from the EXCL pin is sampled using the clock (φ) generated by the system clock pulse generator. Clear this bit to 0 when φ is 5 MHz or more. 0: Sampling using φ/32 clock 1: Sampling using φ/4 clock 4 EXCLE 0 R/W Subclock Input Enable Enables/disables subclock input from the EXCL pin. 0: Disables subclock input from the EXCL pin 1: Enables subclock input from the EXCL pin 3  0 R/W Reserved An undefined value is read from this bit. This bit should not be set to 1. 2 to 0  All 0 R Reserved These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 466 of 544 20.1.3 Module Stop Control Registers H and L (MSTPCRH, MSTPCRL) MSTPCRH and MSTPCRL specify on-chip peripheral modules to shift to module stop mode in module units. Each module can enter module stop mode by setting the corresponding bit to 1. • MSTPCRH Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Name MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 Initial Value 0* 0* 1 1 1 1* 1 1 2 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Corresponding Module   16-bit free-running timer (FRT) 8-bit timers (TMR_0, TMR_1) 8-bit PWM timer (PWM)  A/D converter 8-bit timers (TMR_X, TMR_Y) Notes: 1. Do not set this bit to 1. 2. Do not clear this bit to 0. • MSTPCRL Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 Initial Bit Name Value MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 1* 1 1* 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Corresponding Module  Serial communication interface_1 (SCI_1)  I2C bus interface_0 (IIC_0) I2C bus interface_1 (IIC_1) Keyboard buffer controller, keyboard matrix interrupt mask register (KMIMR), keyboard matrix interrupt mask register A (KMIMRA), port 6 pull-up MOS control register (KMPCR) 8-bit timers (TMR_A, TMR_B) Host interface (LPC), wake-up event interrupt mask register B (WUEMRB) 1 0 Note: * MSTP1 MSTP0 1 1 R/W R/W Do not clear this bit to 0. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 467 of 544 20.2 Mode Transitions and LSI States Figure 20.1 shows the enabled mode transition diagram. The mode transition from program execution state to program halt state is performed by the SLEEP instruction. The mode transition from program halt state to program execution state is performed by an interrupt. The STBY input causes a mode transition from any state to hardware standby mode. The RES input causes a mode transition from a state other than hardware standby mode to the reset state. Table 20.2 shows the LSI internal states in each operating mode. Program halt state STBY pin = Low Reset state STBY pin = High RES pin = Low Program execution state RES pin = High SLEEP instruction High-speed mode (main clock) Any interrupt SCK2 to SCK0 are 0 SCK2 to SCK0 are not 0 SLEEP instruction External interrupt *3 SLEEP instruction Interrupt *1 LSON bit = 0 SLEEP instruction Interrupt *1 LSON bit = 1 SLEEP instruction Interrupt *2 SSBY = 1, PSS = 0, LSON = 0 Software standby mode Hardware standby mode SSBY = 0, LSON = 0 Sleep mode (main clock) Medium-speed mode (main clock) SLEEP instruction SSBY = 1, PSS = 1, DTON = 1, LSON = 0 After the oscillation stabilization time (STS2 to STS0), clock switching exception handling SLEEP instruction SSBY = 1, PSS = 1, DTON = 1, LSON = 1 Clock switching exception handling SSBY = 1, PSS = 1, DTON = 0 Watch mode (subclock) SSBY = 0, PSS = 1, LSON = 1 Subsleep mode (subclock) Subactive mode (subclock) : Transition after exception processing Notes: 1. NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ2, IRQ6, IRQ7, and WDT1 interrupts 2. NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ7, WDT0, WDT1, TMR0, and TMR1 interrupts 3. NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ2, IRQ6, and IRQ7 interrupts : Power-down mode • When a transition is made between modes by means of an interrupt, the transition cannot be made on interrupt source generation alone. Ensure that interrupt handling is performed after accepting the interrupt request. • Always select high-speed mode before making a transition to watch mode or sub-active mode. Figure 20.1 Mode Transition Diagram Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 468 of 544 Table 20.2 LSI Internal States in Each Operating Mode HighFunction System clock pulse generator Subclock pulse generator CPU Instruction execution Registers External interrupts NMI IRQ0 to IRQ7 KIN0 to KIN15 WUE0 to WUE7 Peripheral modules WDT_0 TMR_0, TMR_1 FRT TMR_X, TMR_Y TMR_A, TMR_B IIC_0 IIC_1 LPC SCI_1 PWM Keyboard buffer controller A/D RAM I/O Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Retained Retained Functioning Functioning Retained Functioning Retained Retained Retained High impedance Functioning/H Halted (reset) alted (reset) Halted (reset) Halted (reset) Halted (reset) Functioning/H alted (retained) WDT_1 Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Subclock operation Halted (retained) Subclock operation Subclock operation Halted (retained) Halted (reset) Functioning Functioning Speed Functioning Functioning Functioning MediumSpeed Functioning Functioning Medium-speed operation Retained Functioning Functioning Retained Functioning Functioning Sleep Functioning Functioning Halted Module Stop Functioning Functioning Functioning Watch Halted Functioning Halted SubActive Halted Functioning Subclock operation Retained Functioning Retained Functioning Undefined Halted SubSleep Halted Functioning Halted Software Standby Halted Halted Halted Hardware Standby Halted Halted Halted Halted (retained) Halted (retained) Note: * "Halted (retained)" means that internal register values are retained. The internal state is "operation suspended." "Halted (reset)" means that internal register values and internal states are initialized. In module stop mode, only modules for which a stop setting has been made are halted (reset or retained). Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 469 of 544 20.3 Medium-Speed Mode The CPU makes a transition to medium-speed mode as soon as the current bus cycle ends according to the setting of the SCK2 to SCK0 bits in SBYCR. In medium-speed mode, the CPU operates on the operating clock (φ/2, φ/4, φ/8, φ/16, or φ/32). On-chip peripheral modules other than the bus masters always operate on the system clock (φ). In medium-speed mode, a bus access is executed in the specified number of states with respect to the bus master operating clock. For example, if φ/4 is selected as the operating clock, on-chip memory is accessed in 4 states, and internal I/O registers in 8 states. By clearing all of bits SCK2 to SCK0 to 0, a transition is made to high-speed mode at the end of the current bus cycle. If a SLEEP instruction is executed when the SSBY bit in SBYCR is cleared to 0, and the LSON bit in LPWRCR is cleared to 0, a transition is made to sleep mode. When sleep mode is cleared by an interrupt, medium-speed mode is restored. When the SLEEP instruction is executed with the SSBY bit set to 1, the LSON bit cleared to 0, and the PSS bit in TCSR (WDT_1) cleared to 0, operation shifts to software standby mode. When software standby mode is cleared by an external interrupt, medium-speed mode is restored. When the RES pin is set low and medium-speed mode is cancelled, operation shifts to the reset state. The same applies in the case of a reset caused by overflow of the watchdog timer. When the STBY pin is driven low, medium-speed mode is cancelled and a transition is made to hardware standby mode. Figure 20.2 shows an example of medium-speed mode timing. Medium-speed mode φ, peripheral module clock Bus master clock Internal address bus SBYCR SBYCR Internal write signal Figure 20.2 Medium-Speed Mode Timing Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 470 of 544 20.4 Sleep Mode The CPU makes a transition to sleep mode if the SLEEP instruction is executed when the SSBY bit in SBYCR is cleared to 0 and the LSON bit in LPWRCR is cleared to 0. In sleep mode, CPU operation stops but the peripheral modules do not stop. The contents of the CPU's internal registers are retained. Sleep mode is exited by any interrupt, the RES pin, or the STBY pin. When an interrupt occurs, sleep mode is exited and interrupt exception handling starts. Sleep mode is not exited if the interrupt is disabled, or interrupts other than NMI are masked by the CPU. Setting the RES pin level low cancels sleep mode and selects the reset state. After the oscillation stabilization time has passed, driving the RES pin high causes the CPU to start reset exception handling. When the STBY pin level is driven low, sleep mode is cancelled and a transition is made to hardware standby mode. 20.5 Software Standby Mode The CPU makes a transition to software standby mode when the SLEEP instruction is executed while the SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to 1, the LSON bit in LPWRCR is cleared to 0, and the PSS bit in TCSR (WDT_1) is cleared to 0. In software standby mode, the CPU, on-chip peripheral modules, and clock pulse generator all stop. However, the contents of the CPU's internal registers, on-chip RAM data, I/O ports, and the states of on-chip peripheral modules other than the SCI and PWM, are retained as long as the prescribed voltage is supplied. Software standby mode is cleared by an external interrupt (NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ2, IRQ6, or IRQ7), the RES pin input, or STBY pin input. When an external interrupt request signal is input, system clock oscillation starts, and after the elapse of the time set in bits STS2 to STS0 in SBYCR, software standby mode is cleared, and interrupt exception handling is started. When clearing software standby mode with an IRQ0 to IRQ2, IRQ6, or IRQ7 interrupt, set the corresponding enable bit to 1 and ensure that no interrupt with a higher priority than interrupts IRQ0 to IRQ2, IRQ6, and IRQ7 is generated. Software standby mode cannot be cleared if an interrupt enable bit corresponding to an IRQ0 to IRQ2, IRQ6, or IRQ7 interrupt is cleared to 0 or if the interrupt has been masked on the CPU side. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 471 of 544 When the RES pin is driven low, system clock oscillation is started. At the same time as system clock oscillation starts, the system clock is supplied to the entire LSI. Note that the RES pin must be held low until clock oscillation stabilizes. When the RES pin goes high after clock oscillation stabilizes, the CPU begins reset exception handling. When the STBY pin is driven low, software standby mode is cancelled and a transition is made to hardware standby mode. Figure 20.3 shows an example in which a transition is made to software standby mode at the falling edge of the NMI pin, and software standby mode is cleared at the rising edge of the NMI pin. In this example, an NMI interrupt is accepted with the NMIEG bit in SYSCR cleared to 0 (falling edge specification), then the NMIEG bit is set to 1 (rising edge specification), the SSBY bit is set to 1, and a SLEEP instruction is executed, causing a transition to software standby mode. Software standby mode is then cleared at the rising edge of the NMI pin. Oscillator φ NMI NMIEG SSBY NMI exception Software standby mode handling (power-down mode) NMIEG = 1 SSBY = 1 SLEEP instruction Oscillation stabilization time tOSC2 NMI exception handling Figure 20.3 Application Example in Software Standby Mode Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 472 of 544 20.6 Hardware Standby Mode The CPU makes a transition to hardware standby mode from any mode when the STBY pin is driven low. In hardware standby mode, all functions enter the reset state. As long as the prescribed voltage is supplied, on-chip RAM data is retained. The I/O ports are set to the high-impedance state. In order to retain on-chip RAM data, the RAME bit in SYSCR should be cleared to 0 before driving the STBY pin low. Do not change the state of the mode pins (MD1 and MD0) while this LSI is in hardware standby mode. Hardware standby mode is cleared by the STBY pin input or the RES pin input. When the STBY pin is driven high while the RES pin is low, clock oscillation is started. Ensure that the RES pin is held low until system clock oscillation stabilizes. When the RES pin is subsequently driven high after the clock oscillation stabilization time has passed, reset exception handling starts. Figure 20.4 shows an example of hardware standby mode timing. Oscillator RES STBY Oscillation stabilization time Reset exception handling Figure 20.4 Hardware Standby Mode Timing Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 473 of 544 20.7 Watch Mode The CPU makes a transition to watch mode when the SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or subactive mode with the SSBY bit in SBYCR set to 1, the DTON bit in LPWRCR cleared to 0, and the PSS bit in TCSR (WDT_1) set to 1. In watch mode, the CPU is stopped and peripheral modules other than WDT_1 are also stopped. The contents of the CPU's internal registers, several on-chip peripheral module registers, and onchip RAM data are retained and the I/O ports retain their values before transition as long as the prescribed voltage is supplied. Watch mode is exited by an interrupt (WOVI1, NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ2, IRQ6, or IRQ7), RES pin input, or STBY pin input. When an interrupt occurs, watch mode is exited and a transition is made to high-speed mode or medium-speed mode when the LSON bit in LPWRCR cleared to 0 or to subactive mode when the LSON bit is set to 1. When a transition is made to high-speed mode, a stable clock is supplied to the entire LSI and interrupt exception handling starts after the time set in the STS2 to STS0 bits in SBYCR has elapsed. In the case of an IRQ0 to IRQ2, IRQ6, or IRQ7 interrupt, watch mode is not exited if the corresponding enable bit has been cleared to 0. In the case of interrupts from the onchip peripheral modules, watch mode is not exited if the interrupt enable register has been set to disable the reception of that interrupt, or the interrupt is masked by the CPU. When the RES pin is driven low, system clock oscillation starts. Simultaneously with the start of system clock oscillation, the system clock is supplied to the entire LSI. Note that the RES pin must be held low until clock oscillation is stabilized. If the RES pin is driven high after the clock oscillation stabilization time has passed, the CPU begins reset exception handling. If the STBY pin is driven low, the LSI enters hardware standby mode. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 474 of 544 20.8 Subsleep Mode The CPU makes a transition to subsleep mode when the SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode with the SSBY bit in SBYCR cleared to 0, the LSON bit in LPWRCR set to 1, and the PSS bit in TCSR (WDT_1) set to 1. In subsleep mode, the CPU is stopped. Peripheral modules other than TMR_0, TMR_1, WDT_0, and WDT_1 are also stopped. The contents of the CPU's internal registers, several on-chip peripheral module registers, and on-chip RAM data are retained and the I/O ports retain their values before transition as long as the prescribed voltage is supplied. Subsleep mode is exited by an interrupt (interrupts by on-chip peripheral modules, NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ7), the RES pin input, or the STBY pin input. When an interrupt occurs, subsleep mode is exited and interrupt exception handling starts. In the case of an IRQ0 to IRQ7 interrupt, subsleep mode is not exited if the corresponding enable bit has been cleared to 0. In the case of interrupts from the on-chip peripheral modules, subsleep mode is not exited if the interrupt enable register has been set to disable the reception of that interrupt, or the interrupt is masked by the CPU. When the RES pin is driven low, system clock oscillation starts. Simultaneously with the start of system clock oscillation, the system clock is supplied to the entire LSI. Note that the RES pin must be held low until clock oscillation is stabilized. If the RES pin is driven high after the clock oscillation stabilization time has passed, the CPU begins reset exception handling. If the STBY pin is driven low, the LSI enters hardware standby mode. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 475 of 544 20.9 Subactive Mode The CPU makes a transition to subactive mode when the SLEEP instruction is executed in highspeed mode with the SSBY bit in SBYCR set to 1, the DTON bit and LSON bit in LPWRCR set to 1, and the PSS bit in TCSR (WDT_1) set to 1. When an interrupt occurs in watch mode, and if the LSON bit in LPWRCR is 1, a direct transition is made to subactive mode. Similarly, if an interrupt occurs in subsleep mode, a transition is made to subactive mode. In subactive mode, the CPU operates at a low speed based on the subclock and sequentially executes programs. Peripheral modules other than TMR_0, TMR_1, WDT_0, and WDT_1 are also stopped. When operating the CPU in subactive mode, the SCK2 to SCK0 bits in SBYCR must be cleared to 0. Subactive mode is exited by the SLEEP instruction, RES pin input, or STBY pin input. When the SLEEP instruction is executed with the SSBY bit in SBYCR set to 1, the DTON bit in LPWRCR cleared to 0, and the PSS bit in TCSR (WDT_1) set to 1, the CPU exits subactive mode and a transition is made to watch mode. When the SLEEP instruction is executed with the SSBY bit in SBYCR cleared to 0, the LSON bit in LPWRCR set to 1, and the PSS bit in TCSR (WDT_1) set to 1, a transition is made to subsleep mode. When the SLEEP instruction is executed with the SSBY bit in SBYCR set to 1, the DTON bit and LSON bit in LPWRCR set to 10, and the PSS bit in TCSR (WDT_1) set to 1, a direct transition is made to high-speed mode. For details of direct transitions, see section 20.11, Direct Transitions. When the RES pin is driven low, system clock oscillation starts. Simultaneously with the start of system clock oscillation, the system clock is supplied to the entire LSI. Note that the RES pin must be held low until the clock oscillation is stabilized. If the RES pin is driven high after the clock oscillation stabilization time has passed, the CPU begins reset exception handling. If the STBY pin is driven low, the LSI enters hardware standby mode. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 476 of 544 20.10 Module Stop Mode Module stop mode can be individually set for each on-chip peripheral module. When the corresponding MSTP bit in MSTPCR is set to 1, module operation stops at the end of the bus cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. In turn, when the corresponding MSTP bit is cleared to 0, module stop mode is cancelled and the module operation resumes at the end of the bus cycle. In module stop mode, the internal states of modules other than the SCI and PWM are retained. After the reset state is cancelled, all modules are in module stop mode. While an on-chip peripheral module is in module stop mode, read/write access to its registers is disabled. 20.11 Direct Transitions The CPU executes programs in three modes: high-speed, medium-speed, and subactive. When a direct transition is made from high-speed mode to subactive mode, there is no interruption of program execution. A direct transition is enabled by setting the DTON bit in LPWRCR to 1 and then executing the SLEEP instruction. After a transition, direct transition exception handling starts. The CPU makes a transition to subactive mode when the SLEEP instruction is executed in highspeed mode with the SSBY bit in SBYCR set to 1, the LSON bit and DTON bit in LPWRCR set to 11, and the PSS bit in TSCR (WDT_1) set to 1. To make a direct transition to high-speed mode after the time set in the STS2 to STS0 bits in SBYCR has elapsed, execute the SLEEP instruction in subactive mode with the SSBY bit in SBYCR set to 1, the LSON bit and DTON bit in LPWRCR set to 01, and the PSS bit in TSCR (WDT_1) set to 1. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 477 of 544 20.12 Usage Notes 20.12.1 I/O Port Status The status of the I/O ports is retained in software standby mode. Therefore, when a high level is output, the current consumption is not reduced by the amount of current to support the high level output. 20.12.2 Current Consumption when Waiting for Oscillation Stabilization The current consumption increases during oscillation stabilization. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 478 of 544 Section 21 List of Registers The register list gives information on the on-chip I/O register addresses, how the register bits are configured, and the register states in each operating mode. The information is given as shown below. 1. • • • • 2. • • • • 3. • • 4. • • Register Addresses (address order) Registers are listed from the lower allocation addresses. The MSB-side address is indicated for 16-bit addresses. Registers are classified by functional modules. The access size is indicated. Register Bits Bit configurations of the registers are described in the same order as the Register Addresses (address order) above. Reserved bits are indicated by  in the bit name column. The bit number in the bit-name column indicates that the whole register is allocated as a counter or for holding data. 16-bit registers are indicated from the bit on the MSB side. Register States in Each Operating Mode Register states are described in the same order as the Register Addresses (address order) above. The register states described here are for the basic operating modes. If there is a specific reset for an on-chip peripheral module, see the section on that on-chip peripheral module. Register Select Conditions Register states are described in the same order as the Register Addresses (address order) above. For details on the register select conditions, see section 3.2.2, System Control Register (SYSCR), 3.2.3, Serial Timer Control Register (STCR), 20.1.3, Module Stop Control Registers H, L (MSTPCRH, MSTPCRL), and the register descriptions for each module. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 479 of 544 21.1 Register Addresses (Address Order) The data bus width indicates the numbers of bits by which the register is accessed. The number of access states indicates the number of states based on the specified reference clock. Data Bus Width 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Number of Access States 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Register Name Timer control register_B Timer control register_A Timer control/status register_B Timer control/status register_A Time constant register A_B Time constant register A_A Time constant register B_B Time constant register B_A Timer counter_B Timer counter_A Timer input select register_B Input capture register R_A Input capture register F_A Timer AB control register Timer XY control register* Serial pin select register* Port G control register* Port G open drain control register Port E open drain control register Port F open drain control register Port C open drain control register Port D open drain control register Bidirectional data register 0MW Bidirectional data register 0SW Abbreviation TCR_B TCR_A TCSR_B TCSR_A TCORA_B TCORA_A TCORB_B TCORB_A TCNT_B TCNT_A TISR_B TICRR_A TICRF_A TCRAB TCRXY SPSR PGCTL PGNOCR PENOCR PFNOCR PCNOCR PDNOCR TWR0MW TWR0SW Number of Bits 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Address H'FE00 H'FE01 H'FE02 H'FE03 H'FE04 H'FE05 H'FE06 H'FE07 H'FE08 H'FE09 H'FE0A H'FE0C H'FE0D H'FE0E H'FE10 H'FE12 H'FE14 H'FE16 H'FE18 H'FE19 H'FE1C H'FE1D H'FE20 H'FE20 Module TMR_B TMR_A TMR_B TMR_A TMR_B TMR_A TMR_B TMR_A TMR_B TMR_A TMR_B TMR_A TMR_A TMR_A, TMR_B TMR_X, TMR_Y SCI_1 IIC common 8 PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT LPC LPC 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 480 of 544 Register Name Bidirectional data register 1 Bidirectional data register 2 Bidirectional data register 3 Bidirectional data register 4 Bidirectional data register 5 Bidirectional data register 6 Bidirectional data register 7 Bidirectional data register 8 Bidirectional data register 9 Bidirectional data register 10 Bidirectional data register 11 Bidirectional data register 12 Bidirectional data register 13 Bidirectional data register 14 Bidirectional data register 15 Input data register 3 Output data register 3 Status register 3 LPC channel address register H LPC channel address register L SERIRQ control register 0 SERIRQ control register 1 Input data register 1 Output data register 1 Status register 1 Input data register 2 Output data register 2 Status register 2 Host interface select register Host interface control register 0 Host interface control register 1 Host interface control register 2 Host interface control register 3 Abbreviation TWR1 TWR2 TWR3 TWR4 TWR5 TWR6 TWR7 TWR8 TWR9 TWR10 TWR11 TWR12 TWR13 TWR14 TWR15 IDR3 ODR3 STR3 LADR3H LADR3L SIRQCR0 SIRQCR1 IDR1 ODR1 STR1 IDR2 ODR2 STR2 HISEL HICR0 HICR1 HICR2 HICR3 Number of Bits 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Address H'FE21 H'FE22 H'FE23 H'FE24 H'FE25 H'FE26 H'FE27 H'FE28 H'FE29 H'FE2A H'FE2B H'FE2C H'FE2D H'FE2E H'FE2F H'FE30 H'FE31 H'FE32 H'FE34 H'FE35 H'FE36 H'FE37 H'FE38 H'FE39 H'FE3A H'FE3C H'FE3D H'FE3E H'FE3F H'FE40 H'FE41 H'FE42 H'FE43 Module LPC LPC LPC LPC LPC LPC LPC LPC LPC LPC LPC LPC LPC LPC LPC LPC LPC LPC LPC LPC LPC LPC LPC LPC LPC LPC LPC LPC LPC LPC LPC LPC LPC Data Bus Width 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Number of Access States 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 481 of 544 Register Name Abbreviation Number of Bits 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Address H'FE44 H'FE46 H'FE47 (read) H'FE47 (write) H'FE48 H'FE49 H'FE4A (read) H'FE4A (write) H'FE4B (read) H'FE4B (write) H'FE4C H'FE4D H'FE4E (read) H'FE4E (write) H'FE4F (read) H'FE4F (write) H'FED4 H'FED5 H'FED8 Module INT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT IIC_0 IIC_1 Data Bus Width 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Number of Access States 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 Wakeup event interrupt mask register WUEMRB B Port G output data register Port G input data register Port G data direction register Port E output data register Port F output data register Port E input data register Port E data direction register Port F input data register Port F data direction register Port C output data register Port D output data register Port C input data register Port C data direction register Port D input data register Port D data direction register I C bus extended control register_0 I C bus extended control register_1 Keyboard control register H_0 2 2 PGODR PGPIN PGDDR PEODR PFODR PEPIN PEDDR PFPIN PFDDR PCODR PDODR PCPIN PCDDR PDPIN PDDDR ICXR_0 ICXR_1 KBCRH_0 8 Keyboard buffer controller_0 8 Keyboard buffer controller_0 8 Keyboard buffer controller_0 Keyboard control register L_0 KBCRL_0 8 H'FED9 2 Keyboard data buffer register_0 KBBR_0 8 H'FEDA 2 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 482 of 544 Register Name Keyboard control register H_1 Abbreviation KBCRH_1 Number of Bits 8 Address H'FEDC Module Data Bus Width Number of Access States 2 8 Keyboard buffer controller_1 8 Keyboard buffer controller_1 8 Keyboard buffer controller_1 8 Keyboard buffer controller_2 8 Keyboard buffer controller_2 8 Keyboard buffer controller_2 IIC common 8 INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT FLASH FLASH PWM FLASH SYSTEM FLASH SYSTEM 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Keyboard control register L_1 KBCRL_1 8 H'FEDD 2 Keyboard data buffer register_1 KBBR_1 8 H'FEDE 2 Keyboard control register H_2 KBCRH_2 8 H'FEE0 2 Keyboard control register L_2 KBCRL_2 8 H'FEE1 2 Keyboard data buffer register_2 KBBR_2 8 H'FEE2 2 DDC switch register Interrupt control register A Interrupt control register B Interrupt control register C IRQ status register IRQ sense control register H IRQ sense control register L Address break control register Break address register A Break address register B Break address register C Flash memory control register 1 Flash memory control register 2 Peripheral clock select register Erase block register 1 System control register 2 Erase block register 2 Standby control register DDCSWR ICRA ICRB ICRC ISR ISCRH ISCRL ABRKCR BARA BARB BARC FLMCR1 FLMCR2 PCSR EBR1 SYSCR2 EBR2 SBYCR 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 H'FEE6 H'FEE8 H'FEE9 H'FEEA H'FEEB H'FEEC H'FEED H'FEF4 H'FEF5 H'FEF6 H'FEF7 H'FF80 H'FF81 H'FF82 H'FF82 H'FF83 H'FF83 H'FF84 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 483 of 544 Register Name Low power control register Module stop control register H Module stop control register L Serial mode register_1 I C bus control register_1 Bit rate register_1 I C bus status register_1 Serial control register_1 Transmit data register_1 Serial status register_1 Receive data register_1 Smart card mode register_1 I C bus data register_1 Second slave address register_1 I C bus mode register_1 Slave address register_1 Timer interrupt enable register Timer control/status register Free running counter H Free running counter L Output control register AH Output control register BH Output control register AL Output control register BL Timer control register 2 2 2 2 Abbreviation LPWRCR MSTPCRH MSTPCRL SMR_1 ICCR_1 BRR_1 ICSR_1 SCR_1 TDR_1 SSR_1 RDR_1 SCMR_1 ICDR_1 SARX_1 ICMR_1 SAR_1 TIER TCSR FRCH FRCL OCRAH OCRBH OCRAL OCRBL TCR Number of Bits 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Address H'FF85 H'FF86 H'FF87 H'FF88 H'FF88 H'FF89 H'FF89 H'FF8A H'FF8B H'FF8C H'FF8D H'FF8E H'FF8E H'FF8E H'FF8F H'FF8F H'FF90 H'FF91 H'FF92 H'FF93 H'FF94 H'FF94 H'FF95 H'FF95 H'FF96 H'FF97 H'FF98 H'FF98 H'FF99 H'FF99 H'FF9A H'FF9A H'FF9B Module SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SCI_1 IIC_1 SCI_1 IIC_1 SCI_1 SCI_1 SCI_1 SCI_1 SCI_1 IIC_1 IIC_1 IIC_1 IIC_1 FRT FRT FRT FRT FRT FRT FRT FRT FRT FRT FRT FRT FRT FRT FRT FRT FRT Data Bus Width 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Number of Access States 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Timer output compare control register TOCR Input capture register AH Output control register ARH Input capture register AL Output control register ARL Input capture register BH Output control register AFH Input capture register BL ICRAH OCRARH ICRAL OCRARL ICRBH OCRAFH ICRBL Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 484 of 544 Register Name Output control register AFL Input capture register CH Output compare register DMH Input capture register CL Output compare register DML Input capture register DH Input capture register DL Timer control/status register_0 Timer counter_0 Timer counter_0 Port A output data register Port A input data register Port A data direction register Port 1 pull-up MOS control register Port 2 pull-up MOS control register Port 3 pull-up MOS control register Port 1 data direction register Port 2 data direction register Port 1 data register Port 2 data register Port 3 data direction register Port 4 data direction register Port 3 data register Port 4 data register Port 5 data direction register Port 6 data direction register Port 5 data register Port 6 data register Port B output data register Port B input data register Abbreviation OCRAFL ICRCH OCRDMH ICRCL OCRDML ICRDH ICRDL TCSR_0 TCNT_0 TCNT_0 PAODR PAPIN PADDR P1PCR P2PCR P3PCR P1DDR P2DDR P1DR P2DR P3DDR P4DDR P3DR P4DR P5DDR P6DDR P5DR P6DR PBODR PBPIN Number of Bits 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Address H'FF9B H'FF9C H'FF9C H'FF9D H'FF9D H'FF9E H'FF9F H'FFA8 H'FFA8 (write) H'FFA9 (read) H'FFAA H'FFAB H'FFAB H'FFAC H'FFAD H'FFAE H'FFB0 H'FFB1 H'FFB2 H'FFB3 H'FFB4 H'FFB5 H'FFB6 H'FFB7 H'FFB8 H'FFB9 H'FFBA H'FFBB H'FFBC H'FFBD (read) Module FRT FRT FRT FRT FRT FRT FRT WDT_0 WDT_0 WDT_0 PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT Data Bus Width 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Number of Access States 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 485 of 544 Register Name Port 8 data direction register Port 7 input data register Port B data direction register Port 8 data register Port 9 data direction register Port 9 data register Interrupt enable register Serial timer control register System control register Mode control register Bus control register Wait state control register Timer control register_0 Timer control register_1 Timer control/status register_0 Timer control/status register_1 Time constant register A_0 Time constant register A_1 Time constant register B_0 Time constant register B_1 Timer counter_0 Timer counter_1 PWM output enable register A PWM data polarity register A PWM register select PWM data registers 0 to 7 I C bus control register_0 I C bus status register_0 I C bus data register_0 Second slave address register_0 2 2 2 Abbreviation P8DDR P7PIN PBDDR P8DR P9DDR P9DR IER STCR SYSCR MDCR BCR WSCR TCR_0 TCR_1 TCSR_0 TCSR_1 TCORA_0 TCORA_1 TCORB_0 TCORB_1 TCNT_0 TCNT_1 PWOERA PWDPRA PWSL PWDR0 to PWDR7 ICCR_0 ICSR_0 ICDR_0 SARX_0 Number of Bits 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Address H'FFBD (write) H'FFBE (read) H'FFBE (write) H'FFBF H'FFC0 H'FFC1 H'FFC2 H'FFC3 H'FFC4 H'FFC5 H'FFC6 H'FFC7 H'FFC8 H'FFC9 H'FFCA H'FFCB H'FFCC H'FFCD H'FFCE H'FFCF H'FFD0 H'FFD1 H'FFD3 H'FFD5 H'FFD6 H'FFD7 H'FFD8 H'FFD9 H'FFDE H'FFDE Module PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT PORT INT SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM BSC BSC TMR_0 TMR_1 TMR_0 TMR_1 TMR_0 TMR_1 TMR_0 TMR_1 TMR_0 TMR_1 PWM PWM PWM PWM IIC_0 IIC_0 IIC_0 IIC_0 Data Bus Width 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Number of Access States 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 486 of 544 Register Name I C bus mode register_0 Slave address register_0 A/D data register AH A/D data register AL A/D data register BH A/D data register BL A/D data register CH A/D data register CL A/D data register DH A/D data register DL A/D control/status register A/D control register Timer control/status register_1 Timer counter_1 Timer counter_1 Timer control register_X Timer control register_Y Keyboard matrix interrupt register 6 Timer control/status register_X Timer control/status register_Y Pull-up MOS control register Input capture register R Time constant register A_Y Keyboard matrix interrupt register A 2 Abbreviation ICMR_0 SAR_0 ADDRAH ADDRAL ADDRBH ADDRBL ADDRCH ADDRCL ADDRDH ADDRDL ADCSR ADCR TCSR_1 TCNT_1 TCNT_1 TCR_X TCR_Y KMIMR TCSR_X TCSR_Y KMPCR TICRR TCORA_Y KMIMRA Number of Bits 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Address H'FFDF H'FFDF H'FFE0 H'FFE1 H'FFE2 H'FFE3 H'FFE4 H'FFE5 H'FFE6 H'FFE7 H'FFE8 H'FFE9 H'FFEA H'FFEA (write) H'FFEB (read) H'FFF0 H'FFF0 H'FFF1 H'FFF1 H'FFF1 H'FFF2 H'FFF2 H'FFF2 H'FFF3 Module IIC_0 IIC_0 A/D converter A/D converter A/D converter A/D converter A/D converter A/D converter A/D converter A/D converter A/D converter A/D converter WDT_1 WDT_1 WDT_1 TMR_X TMR_Y INT TMR_X TMR_Y PORT TMR_X TMR_Y INT Data Bus Width 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 16 16 8 16 16 8 16 16 8 Number of Access States 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 487 of 544 Register Name Input capture register F Time constant register B_Y Timer counter_X Timer counter_Y Timer constant register C Timer input select register Timer constant register A_X Timer constant register B_X Timer connection register I Timer connection register S Abbreviation TICRF TCORB_Y TCNT_X TCNT_Y TCORC TISR TCORA_X TCORB_X TCONRI TCONRS Number of Bits 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Address H'FFF3 H'FFF3 H'FFF4 H'FFF4 H'FFF5 H'FFF5 H'FFF6 H'FFF7 H'FFFC H'FFFE Module TMR_X TMR_Y TMR_X TMR_Y TMR_X TMR_Y TMR_X TMR_X TMR_X TMR_Y Data Bus Width 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 8 8 Number of Access States 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Note: * The program development tool (emulator) does not support these registers. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 488 of 544 21.2 Register Bits Register addresses and bit names of the on-chip peripheral modules are described below. Each line covers 8 bits, and 16-bit registers are shown as 2 lines. Register Abbreviation TCR_B TCR_A TCSR_B TCSR_A TCORA_B TCORA_A TCORB_B TCORB_A TCNT_B TCNT_A TISR_B TICRR_A TICRF_A TCRAB TCRXY*1 SPSR*1 PGCTL* 1 Bit 7 CMIEB CMIEB CMFB CMFB Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 6 CMIEA CMIEA CMFA CMFA Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 5 OVIE OVIE OVF OVF Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 4 CCLR1 CCLR1 ICIE ICF Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 3 CCLR0 CCLR0 OS3 OS3 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 2 CKS2 CKS2 OS2 OS2 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 1 CKS1 CKS1 OS1 OS1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 0 CKS0 CKS0 OS0 OS0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 IS Bit 0 Bit 0 Module TMR_A TMR_B  Bit 7 Bit 7  Bit 6 Bit 6  Bit 5 Bit 5 CKSA CKSX  Bit 4 Bit 4 CKSB CKSY  Bit 3 Bit 3 ICST  Bit 2 Bit 2  Bit 1 Bit 1  IOSX  IOSY    IIC0AS         TMR_X TMR_Y SCI_1 IIC common PORT   IC0BS SPS1 IIC1BS  IIC1AS     PGNOCR PENOCR PFNOCR PCNOCR PDNOCR TWR0MW TWR0SW PG7NOCR PE7NOCR PF7NOCR PC7NOCR PD7NOCR PG6NOCR PE6NOCR PF6NOCR PC6NOCR PD6NOCR PG5NOCR PE5NOCR PF5NOCR PC5NOCR PD5NOCR PG4NOCR PE4NOCR PF4NOCR PC4NOCR PD4NOCR PG3NOCR PE3NOCR PF3NOCR PC3NOCR PD3NOCR PG2NOCR PE2NOCR PF2NOCR PC2NOCR PD2NOCR PG1NOCR PE1NOCR PF1NOCR PC1NOCR PD1NOCR PG0NOCR PE0NOCR PF0NOCR PC0NOCR PD0NOCR Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 0 LPC Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 489 of 544 Register Abbreviation TWR1 TWR2 TWR3 TWR4 TWR5 TWR6 TWR7 TWR8 TWR9 TWR10 TWR11 TWR12 TWR13 TWR14 TWR15 IDR3 ODR3 STR3* 2 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 IBF3B DBU37 Bit 15 Q/C IRQ11E3 Bit 7 Bit 7 DBU17 Bit 7 Bit 7 DBU27 SELSTR3 LPC3E LPCBSY GA20 LFRAME Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 6 OBF3B DBU36 Bit 14 SELREQ IRQ10E3 Bit 6 Bit 6 DBU16 Bit 6 Bit 6 DBU26 SELIRQ11 Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 5 MWMF DBU35 Bit 13 IEDIR IRQ9E3 Bit 5 Bit 5 DBU15 Bit 5 Bit 5 DBU25 SELIRQ10 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 SWMF DBU34 Bit 12 SMIE3B IRQ6E3 Bit 4 Bit 4 DBU14 Bit 4 Bit 4 DBU24 SELIRQ9 FGA20E LRSTB ABRT LRESET Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 C/D3 C/D3 Bit 11 SMIE3A IRQ11E2 Bit 3 Bit 3 C/D1 Bit 3 Bit 3 C/D2 SELIRQ6 SDWNE SDWNB BFIE3 LPCPD Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 2 DBU32 DBU32 Bit 10 SMIE2 IRQ10E2 Bit 2 Bit 2 DBU12 Bit 2 Bit 2 DBU22 SELSMI PMEE PMEB IBFIE2 PME Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 IBF3A IBF3A Bit 9 IRQ12E1 IRQ9E2 Bit 1 Bit 1 IBF1 Bit 1 Bit 1 IBF2 SELIRQ12 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 OBF3A OBF3A Bit 8 IRQ1E1 IRQ6E2 Bit 0 Bit 0 OBF1 Bit 0 Bit 0 OBF2 SELIRQ1 LSCIE LSCIB ERRIE LSCI Module LPC STR3*3 LADR3H SIRQCR0 SIRQCR1 IDR1 ODR1 STR1 IDR2 ODR2 STR2 HISEL HICR0 HICR1 HICR2 HICR3 LPC2E CLKREQ LRST CLKRUN LPC1E IRQBSY SDWN SERIRQ LSMIE LSMIB IBFIE1 LSMI Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 490 of 544 Register Abbreviation WUEMRB PGODR PGPIN PGDDR PEODR PFODR PEPIN PEDDR PFPIN PFDDR PCODR PDODR PCPIN PCDDR PDPIN PDDDR ICXR_0 ICXR_1 KBCRH_0 KBCRL_0 KBBR_0 KBCRH_1 KBCRL_1 KBBR_1 KBCRH_2 KBCRL_2 KBBR_2 DDCSWR Bit 7 WUEMR7 PG7ODR PG7PIN PG7DDR PE7ODR PF7ODR PE7PIN PE7DDR PF7PIN PF7DDR PC7ODR PD7ODR PC7PIN PC7DDR PD7PIN PD7DDR STOPIM STOPIM KBIOE KBE KB7 KBIOE KBE KB7 KBIOE KBE KB7 — Bit 6 WUEMR6 PG6ODR PG6PIN PG6DDR PE6ODR PF6ODR PE6PIN PE6DDR PF6PIN PF6DDR PC6ODR PD6ODR PC6PIN PC6DDR PD6PIN PD6DDR HNDS HNDS KCLKI KCLKO KB6 KCLKI KCLKO KB6 KCLKI KCLKO KB6 — Bit 5 WUEMR5 PG5ODR PG5PIN PG5DDR PE5ODR PF5ODR PE5PIN PE5DDR PF5PIN PF5DDR PC5ODR PD5ODR PC5PIN PC5DDR PD5PIN PD5DDR ICDRF ICDRF KDI KDO KB5 KDI KDO KB5 KDI KDO KB5 — Bit 4 WUEMR4 PG4ODR PG4PIN PG4DDR PE4ODR PF4ODR PE4PIN PE4DDR PF4PIN PF4DDR PC4ODR PD4ODR PC4PIN PC4DDR PD4PIN PD4DDR ICDRE ICDRE KBFSEL — KB4 KBFSEL — KB4 KBFSEL — KB4 — Bit 3 WUEMR3 PG3ODR PG3PIN PG3DDR PE3ODR PF3ODR PE3PIN PE3DDR PF3PIN PF3DDR PC3ODR PD3ODR PC3PIN PC3DDR PD3PIN PD3DDR ALIE ALIE KBIE RXCR3 KB3 KBIE RXCR3 KB3 KBIE RXCR3 KB3 CLR3 Bit 2 WUEMR2 PG2ODR PG2PIN PG2DDR PE2ODR PF2ODR PE2PIN PE2DDR PF2PIN PF2DDR PC2ODR PD2ODR PC2PIN PC2DDR PD2PIN PD2DDR ALSL ALSL KBF RXCR2 KB2 KBF RXCR2 KB2 KBF RXCR2 KB2 CLR2 Bit 1 WUEMR1 PG1ODR PG1PIN PG1DDR PE1ODR PF1ODR PE1PIN PE1DDR PF1PIN PF1DDR PC1ODR PD1ODR PC1PIN PC1DDR PD1PIN PD1DDR FNC1 FNC1 PER RXCR1 KB1 PER RXCR1 KB1 PER RXCR1 KB1 CLR1 Bit 0 WUEMR0 PG0ODR PG0PIN PG0DDR PE0ODR PF0ODR PE0PIN PE0DDR PF0PIN PF0DDR PC0ODR PD0ODR PC0PIN PC0DDR PD0PIN PD0DDR FNC0 FNC0 KBS RXCR0 KB0 KBS RXCR0 KB0 KBS RXCR0 KB0 CLR0 Module INT PORT IIC_0 IIC_1 Keyboard buffer controller _0 Keyboard buffer controller _1 Keyboard buffer controller _2 IIC common Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 491 of 544 Register Abbreviation ICRA ICRB ICRC ISR ISCRH ISCRL ABRKCR BARA BARB BARC FLMCR1 FLMCR2 PCSR EBR1 SYSCR2 EBR2 SBYCR LPWRCR MSTPCRH MSTPCRL SMR_1 ICCR_1 BRR_1 ICSR_1 SCR_1 TDR_1 SSR_1 RDR_1 SCMR_1 ICDR_1 SARX_1 ICMR_1 SAR_1 Bit 7 ICRA7 ICRB7 ICRC7 IRQ7F IRQ7SCB IRQ3SCB CMF A23 A15 A7 FWE FLER — — — EB7 SSBY DTON MSTP15 MSTP7 C/A ICE Bit 7 ESTP TIE Bit 7 TDRE Bit 7 — ICDR7 SVAX6 MLS SVA6 Bit 6 ICRA6 ICRB6 ICRC6 IRQ6F IRQ7SCA IRQ3SCA — A22 A14 A6 SWE — — — — EB6 STS2 LSON MSTP14 MSTP6 CHR IEIC Bit 6 STOP RIE Bit 6 RDRF Bit 6 — ICDR6 SVAX5 WAIT SVA5 Bit 5 ICRA5 ICRB5 ICRC5 IRQ5F IRQ6SCB IRQ2SCB — A21 A13 A5 — — — — — EB5 STS1 NESEL MSTP13 MSTP5 PE MST Bit 5 IRTR TE Bit 5 ORER Bit 5 — ICDR5 SVAX4 CKS2 SVA4 Bit 4 ICRA4 ICRB4 ICRC4 IRQ4F IRQ6SCA IRQ2SCA — A20 A12 A4 — — — — — EB4 STS0 EXCLE MSTP12 MSTP4 O/E TRS Bit 4 AASX RE Bit 4 FER Bit 4 — ICDR4 SVAX3 CKS1 SVA3 Bit 3 ICRA3 ICRB3 ICRC3 IRQ3F IRQ5SCB IRQ1SCB — A19 A11 A3 EV — PWCKC — — EB3 — — MSTP11 MSTP3 STOP ACKE Bit 3 AL MPIE Bit 3 PER Bit 3 SDIR ICDR3 SVAX2 CKS0 SVA2 Bit 2 ICRA2 ICRB2 ICRC2 IRQ2F IRQ5SCA IRQ1SCA — A18 A10 A2 PV — PWCKB — — EB2 SCK2 — MSTP10 MSTP2 MP BBSY Bit 2 AAS TEIE Bit 2 TEND Bit 2 SINV ICDR2 SVAX1 BC2 SVA1 Bit 1 ICRA1 ICRB1 ICRC1 IRQ1F IRQ4SCB IRQ0SCB — A17 A9 A1 E ESU PWCKA — — EB1 SCK1 — MSTP9 MSTP1 CKS1 IRIC Bit 1 ADZ CKE1 Bit 1 MPB Bit 1 — ICDR1 SVAX0 BC1 SVA0 Bit 0 ICRA0 ICRB0 ICRC0 IRQ0F IRQ4SCA IRQ0SCA BIE A16 A8 — P PSU — — — EB0 SCK0 — MSTP8 MSTP0 CKS0 SCP Bit 0 ACKB CKE0 Bit 0 MPBT Bit 0 SMIF ICDR0 FSX BC0 FS Module INT FLASH PWM FLASH SYSTEM FLASH SYSTEM SCI_1 IIC_1 SCI_1 IIC_1 SCI_1 IIC_1 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 492 of 544 Register Abbreviation TIER TCSR FRCH FRCL OCRAH OCRBH OCRAL OCRBL TCR TOCR ICRAH OCRARH ICRAL OCRARL ICRBH OCRAFH ICRBL OCRAFL ICRCH OCRDMH ICRCL OCRDML ICRDH ICRDL TCSR_0 TCNT_0 Bit 7 ICIAE ICFA Bit 15 Bit 7 Bit 15 Bit 15 Bit 7 Bit 7 IEDGA ICRDMS Bit 15 Bit 15 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 15 Bit 15 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 15 Bit 15 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 15 Bit 7 OVF Bit 7 Bit 6 ICIBE ICFB Bit 14 Bit 6 Bit 14 Bit 14 Bit 6 Bit 6 IEDGB OCRAMS Bit 14 Bit 14 Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 14 Bit 14 Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 14 Bit 14 Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 14 Bit 6 WT/IT Bit 6 Bit 5 ICICE ICFC Bit 13 Bit 5 Bit 13 Bit 13 Bit 5 Bit 5 IEDGC ICRS Bit 13 Bit 13 Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 13 Bit 13 Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 13 Bit 13 Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 13 Bit 5 TME Bit 5 Bit 4 ICIDE ICFD Bit 12 Bit 4 Bit 12 Bit 12 Bit 4 Bit 4 IEDGD OCRS Bit 12 Bit 12 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 12 Bit 12 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 12 Bit 12 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 12 Bit 4 — Bit 4 Bit 3 OCIAE OCFA Bit 11 Bit 3 Bit 11 Bit 11 Bit 3 Bit 3 BUFEA OEA Bit 11 Bit 11 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 11 Bit 11 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 11 Bit 11 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 11 Bit 3 RST/NMI Bit 3 Bit 2 OCIBE OCFB Bit 10 Bit 2 Bit 10 Bit 10 Bit 2 Bit 2 BUFEB OEB Bit 10 Bit 10 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 10 Bit 10 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 10 Bit 10 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 10 Bit 2 CKS2 Bit 2 Bit 1 OVIE OVF Bit 9 Bit 1 Bit 9 Bit 9 Bit 1 Bit 1 CKS1 OLVLA Bit 9 Bit 9 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 9 Bit 9 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 9 Bit 9 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 9 Bit 1 CKS1 Bit 1 Bit 0 — CCLRA Bit 8 Bit 0 Bit 8 Bit 8 Bit 0 Bit 0 CKS0 OLVLB Bit 8 Bit 8 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 8 Bit 8 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 8 Bit 8 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 8 Bit 0 CKS0 Bit 0 Module FRT WDT_0 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 493 of 544 Register Abbreviation PAODR PAPIN PADDR P1PCR P2PCR P3PCR P1DDR P2DDR P1DR P2DR P3DDR P4DDR P3DR P4DR P5DDR P6DDR P5DR P6DR PBODR PBPIN P8DDR P7PIN PBDDR P8DR P9DDR P9DR IER STCR SYSCR MDCR BCR WSCR Bit 7 PA7ODR PA7PIN PA7DDR P17PCR P27PCR P37PCR P17DDR P27DDR P17DR P27DR P37DDR P47DDR P37DR P47DR — P67DDR — P67DR PB7ODR PB7PIN — P77PIN PB7DDR — P97DDR P97DR IRQ7E IICS — EXPE — — Bit 6 PA6ODR PA6PIN PA6DDR P16PCR P26PCR P36PCR P16DDR P26DDR P16DR P26DR P36DDR P46DDR P36DR P46DR — P66DDR — P66DR PB6ODR PB6PIN P86DDR P76PIN PB6DDR P86DR P96DDR P96DR IRQ6E IICX1 — — ICIS0 — Bit 5 PA5ODR PA5PIN PA5DDR P15PCR P25PCR P35PCR P15DDR P25DDR P15DR P25DR P35DDR P45DDR P35DR P45DR — P65DDR — P65DR PB5ODR PB5PIN P85DDR P75PIN PB5DDR P85DR P95DDR P95DR IRQ5E IICX0 INTM1 — BRSTRM ABW Bit 4 PA4ODR PA4PIN PA4DDR P14PCR P24PCR P34PCR P14DDR P24DDR P14DR P24DR P34DDR P44DDR P34DR P44DR — P64DDR — P64DR PB4ODR PB4PIN P84DDR P74PIN PB4DDR P84DR P94DDR P94DR IRQ4E IICE INTM0 — BRSTS1 AST Bit 3 PA3ODR PA3PIN PA3DDR P13PCR P23PCR P33PCR P13DDR P23DDR P13DR P23DR P33DDR P43DDR P33DR P43DR — P63DDR — P63DR PB3ODR PB3PIN P83DDR P73PIN PB3DDR P83DR P93DDR P93DR IRQ3E FLSHE XRST — BRSTS0 WMS1 Bit 2 PA2ODR PA2PIN PA2DDR P12PCR P22PCR P32PCR P12DDR P22DDR P12DR P22DR P32DDR P42DDR P32DR P42DR P52DDR P62DDR P52DR P62DR PB2ODR PB2PIN P82DDR P72PIN PB2DDR P82DR P92DDR P92DR IRQ2E — NMIEG — — WMS0 Bit 1 PA1ODR PA1PIN PA1DDR P11PCR P21PCR P31PCR P11DDR P21DDR P11DR P21DR P31DDR P41DDR P31DR P41DR P51DDR P61DDR P51DR P61DR PB1ODR PB1PIN P81DDR P71PIN PB1DDR P81DR P91DDR P91DR IRQ1E ICKS1 HIE MDS1 IOS1 WC1 Bit 0 PA0ODR PA0PIN PA0DDR P10PCR P20PCR P30PCR P10DDR P20DDR P10DR P20DR P30DDR P40DDR P30DR P40DR P50DDR P60DDR P50DR P60DR PB0ODR PB0PIN P80DDR P70PIN PB0DDR P80DR P90DDR P90DR IRQ0E ICKS0 RAME MDS0 IOS0 WC0 Module PORT INT SYSTEM BSC Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 494 of 544 Register Abbreviation TCR_0 TCR_1 TCSR_0 TCSR_1 TCORA_0 TCORA_1 TCORB_0 TCORB_1 TCNT_0 TCNT_1 PWOERA PWDPRA PWSL PWDR0 to PWDR7 ICCR_0 ICSR_0 ICDR_0 SARX_0 ICMR_0 SAR_0 ADDRAH ADDRAL ADDRBH ADDRBL ADDRCH ADDRCL ADDRDH ADDRDL ADCSR ADCR TCSR_1 TCNT_1 Bit 7 CMIEB CMIEB CMFB CMFB Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 OE7 OS7 PWCKE Bit 7 Bit 6 CMIEA CMIEA CMFA CMFA Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 6 OE6 OS6 PWCKS Bit 6 Bit 5 OVIE OVIE OVF OVF Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 5 OE5 OS5 — Bit 5 Bit 4 CCLR1 CCLR1 ADTE — Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 OE4 OS4 — Bit 4 Bit 3 CCLR0 CCLR0 OS3 OS3 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 OE3 OS3 RS3 Bit 3 Bit 2 CKS2 CKS2 OS2 OS2 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 2 OE2 OS2 RS2 Bit 2 Bit 1 CKS1 CKS1 OS1 OS1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 OE1 OS1 RS1 Bit 1 Bit 0 CKS0 CKS0 OS0 OS0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 OE0 OS0 RS0 Bit 0 Module TMR_0, TMR_1 PWM ICE ESTP ICDR7 SVAX6 MLS SVA6 AD9 AD1 AD9 AD1 AD9 AD1 AD9 AD1 ADF TRGS1 OVF Bit 7 IEIC STOP ICDR6 SVAX5 WAIT SVA5 AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 AD8 AD0 ADIE TRGS0 WT/IT Bit 6 MST IRTR ICDR5 SVAX4 CKS2 SVA4 AD7 — AD7 — AD7 — AD7 — ADST — TME Bit 5 TRS AASX ICDR4 SVAX3 CKS1 SVA3 AD6 — AD6 — AD6 — AD6 — SCAN — PSS Bit 4 ACKE AL ICDR3 SVAX2 CKS0 SVA2 AD5 — AD5 — AD5 — AD5 — CKS — RST/NMI Bit 3 BBSY AAS ICDR2 SVAX1 BC2 SVA1 AD4 — AD4 — AD4 — AD4 — CH2 — CKS2 Bit 2 IRIC ADZ ICDR1 SVAX0 BC1 SVA0 AD3 — AD3 — AD3 — AD3 — CH1 — CKS1 Bit 1 SCP ACKB ICDR0 FSX BC0 FS AD2 — AD2 — AD2 — AD2 — CH0 — CKS0 Bit 0 IIC_0 A/D converter WDT_1 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 495 of 544 Register Abbreviation TCR_X TCR_Y KMIMR TCSR_X TCSR_Y KMPCR TICRR TCORA_Y KMIMRA TICRF TCORB_Y TCNT_X TCNT_Y TCORC TISR TCORA_X TCORB_X TCONRI TCONRS Bit 7 CMIEB CMIEB KMIMR7 CMFB CMFB KM7PCR Bit 7 Bit 7 KMIMR15 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 Bit 7 — Bit 7 Bit 7 — TMRX/Y Bit 6 CMIEA CMIEA KMIMR6 CMFA CMFA KM6PCR Bit 6 Bit 6 KMIMR14 Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 6 Bit 6 — Bit 6 Bit 6 — — Bit 5 OVIE OVIE KMIMR5 OVF OVF KM5PCR Bit 5 Bit 5 KMIMR13 Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 5 Bit 5 — Bit 5 Bit 5 — — Bit 4 CCLR1 CCLR1 KMIMR4 ICF ICIE KM4PCR Bit 4 Bit 4 KMIMR12 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 Bit 4 — Bit 4 Bit 4 ICST — Bit 3 CCLR0 CCLR0 KMIMR3 OS3 OS3 KM3PCR Bit 3 Bit 3 KMIMR11 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 Bit 3 — Bit 3 Bit 3 — — Bit 2 CKS2 CKS2 KMIMR2 OS2 OS2 KM2PCR Bit 2 Bit 2 KMIMR10 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 2 Bit 2 — Bit 2 Bit 2 — — Bit 1 CKS1 CKS1 KMIMR1 OS1 OS1 KM1PCR Bit 1 Bit 1 KMIMR9 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 — Bit 1 Bit 1 — — Bit 0 CKS0 CKS0 KMIMR0 OS0 OS0 KM0PCR Bit 0 Bit 0 KMIMR8 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 IS Bit 0 Bit 0 — — Module TMR_X TMR_Y INT TMR_X TMR_Y PORT TMR_X TMR_Y INT TMR_X TMR_Y TMR_X TMR_Y TMR_X TMR_Y TMR_X TMR_Y Notes: 1. The program development tool (emulator) does not support these registers. 2. When TWRE = 1 or SELSTR3 = 0 in LADR3L 3. When TWRE = 0 and SELSTR3 = 1 in LADR3L Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 496 of 544 21.3 Register Abbreviation TCR_B TCR_A TCSR_B TCSR_A TCORA_B TCORA_A TCORB_B TCORB_A TCNT_B TCNT_A TISR_B TICRR_A TICRF_A TCRAB TCRXY* Register States in Each Operating Mode High-Speed/ MediumReset Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Speed                Watch                Sleep                SubActive                Module Sub-Sleep Stop                               Software Standby                Hardware Standby Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized TMR_X, TMR_Y Module TMR_A TMR_B SPSR* PGCTL* PGNOCR PENOCR PFNOCR PCNOCR PDNOCR TWR0MW TWR0SW TWR1 TWR2 TWR3 TWR4 TWR5 Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized — — — — — — —   — — — — — — — — — — — —   — — — — — — — — — — — —   — — — — — — — — — — — —   — — — — — — — — — — — —   — — — — — — — — — — — —   — — — — — — — — — — — —   — — — — — — — — — — — — Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized — — — — — — — SCI_1 IIC common PORT LPC Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 497 of 544 Register Abbreviation TWR6 TWR7 TWR8 TWR9 TWR10 TWR11 TWR12 TWR13 TWR14 TWR15 IDR3 ODR3 STR3 LADR3H LADR3L SIRQCR0 SIRQCR1 IDR1 ODR1 STR1 IDR2 ODR2 STR2 HISEL HICR0 HICR1 HICR2 HICR3 High-Speed/ MediumReset — — — — — — — — — — — — Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized — — Initialized — — Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized — Speed — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Watch — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Sleep — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — SubActive — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Module Sub-Sleep Stop — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Software Standby — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Hardware Standby — — — — — — — — — — — — Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized — — Initialized — — Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized — Module LPC Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 498 of 544 Register Abbreviation WUEMRB PGODR PGPIN PGDDR PEODR PFODR PEPIN PEDDR PFPIN PFDDR PCODR PDODR PCPIN PCDDR PDPIN PDDDR ICXR_0 ICXR_1 KBCRH_0 KBCRL_0 KBBR_0 KBCRH_1 KBCRL_1 KBBR_1 KBCRH_2 KBCRL_2 KBBR_2 DDCSWR High-Speed/ MediumReset Initialized Initialized — Initialized Initialized Initialized — Initialized — Initialized Initialized Initialized — Initialized — Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Speed — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Watch — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized — Sleep — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — SubActive — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized — Module Sub-Sleep Stop — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized — Software Standby — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized — Hardware Standby Initialized Initialized — Initialized Initialized Initialized — Initialized — Initialized Initialized Initialized — Initialized — Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized IIC common Keyboard buffer controller_2 Keyboard buffer controller_1 IIC_0 IIC_1 Keyboard buffer controller_0 Module INT PORT Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 499 of 544 Register Abbreviation ICRA ICRB ICRC ISR ISCRH ISCRL ABRKCR BARA BARB BARC FLMCR1 FLMCR2 PCSR EBR1 SYSCR2 EBR2 SBYCR LPWRCR MSTPCRH MSTPCRL SMR_1 ICCR_1 BRR_1 ICSR_1 SCR_1 TDR_1 SSR_1 RDR_1 SCMR_1 ICDR_1 SARX_1 ICMR_1 SAR_1 High-Speed/ MediumReset Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized — Initialized Initialized Initialized Speed — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Watch — — — — — — — — — — Initialized Initialized — Initialized — Initialized — — — — Initialized — Initialized — Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized — — — — Sleep — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — SubActive — — — — — — — — — — Initialized Initialized — Initialized — Initialized — — — — Initialized — Initialized — Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized — — — — Module Sub-Sleep Stop — — — — — — — — — — Initialized Initialized — Initialized — Initialized — — — — Initialized — Initialized — Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Initialized — Initialized — Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized — — — — Software Standby — — — — — — — — — — Initialized Initialized — Initialized — Initialized — — — — Initialized — Initialized — Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized — — — — Hardware Standby Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized — Initialized Initialized Initialized IIC_1 SCI_1 IIC_1 SCI_1 IIC_1 SCI_1 PWM FLASH SYSTEM FLASH SYSTEM FLASH Module INT Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 500 of 544 Register Abbreviation TIER TCSR FRCH FRCL OCRAH OCRBH OCRAL OCRBL TCR TOCR ICRAH OCRARH ICRAL OCRARL ICRBH OCRAFH ICRBL OCRAFL ICRCH OCRDMH ICRCL OCRDML ICRDH ICRDL TCSR_0 TCNT_0 High-Speed/ MediumReset Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Speed — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Watch — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Sleep — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — SubActive — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Module Sub-Sleep Stop — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Software Standby — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Hardware Standby Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized WDT_0 Module FRT Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 501 of 544 Register Abbreviation PAODR PAPIN PADDR P1PCR P2PCR P3PCR P1DDR P2DDR P1DR P2DR P3DDR P4DDR P3DR P4DR P5DDR P6DDR P5DR P6DR PBODR PBPIN P8DDR P7PIN PBDDR P8DR P9DDR P9DR IER STCR SYSCR MDCR BCR WSCR High-Speed/ MediumReset Initialized — Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized — Initialized — Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Speed — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Watch — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Sleep — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — SubActive — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Module Sub-Sleep Stop — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Software Standby — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Hardware Standby Initialized — Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized — Initialized — Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized BSC INT SYSTEM Module PORT Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 502 of 544 Register Abbreviation TCR_0 TCR_1 TCSR_0 TCSR_1 TCORA_0 TCORA_1 TCORB_0 TCORB_1 TCNT_0 TCNT_1 PWOERA PWDPRA PWSL PWDR0 to PWDR7 ICCR_0 ICSR_0 ICDR_0 SARX_0 ICMR_0 SAR_0 ADDRAH ADDRAL ADDRBH ADDRBL ADDRCH ADDRCL ADDRDH ADDRDL ADCSR ADCR TCSR_1 TCNT_1 High-Speed/ MediumReset Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Speed — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Watch — — — — — — — — — — — — Initialized Initialized Sleep — — — — — — — — — — — — — — SubActive — — — — — — — — — — — — Initialized Initialized Module Sub-Sleep Stop — — — — — — — — — — — — Initialized Initialized — — — — — — — — — — — — Initialized Initialized Software Standby — — — — — — — — — — — — Initialized Initialized Hardware Standby Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized PWM Module TMR_0, TMR_1 Initialized Initialized — Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized — — — — — — — — Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized — — — — — — — — Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized — — — — — — — — Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized — — Initialized Initialized — Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized IIC_0 A/D converter WDT_1 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 503 of 544 Register Abbreviation TCR_X TCR_Y KMIMR TCSR_X TCSR_Y KMPCR TICRR TCORA_Y KMIMRA TICRF TCORB_Y TCNT_X TCNT_Y TCORC TISR TCORA_X TCORB_X TCONRI TCONRS High-Speed/ MediumReset Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Speed — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Watch — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Sleep — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — SubActive — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Module Sub-Sleep Stop — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Software Standby — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Hardware Standby Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized Initialized TMR_X TMR_Y Module TMR_X TMR_Y INT TMR_X TMR_Y PORT TMR_X TMR_Y INT TMR_X TMR_Y TMR_X TMR_Y TMR_X TMR_Y TMR_X Note: * The program development tool (emulator) does not support these registers. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 504 of 544 21.4 H'FE00 H'FE01 H'FE02 H'FE03 H'FE04 H'FE05 H'FE06 H'FE07 H'FE08 H'FE09 H'FE0A H'FE0C H'FE0D H'FE0E H'FE10 H'FE12 H'FE14 H'FE16 H'FE18 H'FE19 H'FE1C H'FE1D Register Select Conditions Register Name TCR_B TCR_A TCSR_B TCSR_A TCORA_B TCORA_A TCORB_B TCORB_A TCNT_B TCNT_A TISR_B TICRR_A TICRF_A TCRAB TCRXY* SPSR* PGCTL* PGNOCR PENOCR PFNOCR PCNOCR PDNOCR No condition No condition No condition No condition TMR_X, TMR_Y SCL_1 IIC common PORT Register Select Condition MSTP1 = 0 Module Name TMR_A, TMR_B Lower Address Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 505 of 544 Lower Address H'FE20 H'FE21 H'FE22 H'FE23 H'FE24 H'FE25 H'FE26 H'FE27 H'FE28 H'FE29 H'FE2A H'FE2B H'FE2C H'FE2D H'FE2E H'FE2F H'FE30 H'FE31 H'FE32 H'FE34 H'FE35 H'FE36 H'FE37 H'FE38 H'FE39 H'FE3A H'FE3C H'FE3D H'FE3E H'FE3F H'FE40 H'FE41 H'FE42 H'FE43 Register Name TWR0MW TWR0SW TWR1 TWR2 TWR3 TWR4 TWR5 TWR6 TWR7 TWR8 TWR9 TWR10 TWR11 TWR12 TWR13 TWR14 TWR15 IDR3 ODR3 STR3 LADR3H LADR3L SIRQCR0 SIRQCR1 IDR1 ODR1 STR1 IDR2 ODR2 STR2 HISEL HICR0 HICR1 HICR2 HICR3 Register Select Condition MSTP0 = 0 Module Name LPC Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 506 of 544 Lower Address H'FE44 H'FE46 H'FE47 H'FE48 H'FE49 H'FE4A H'FE4B H'FE4C H'FE4D H'FE4E H'FE4F H'FED4 H'FED5 H'FED8 H'FED9 H'FEDA H'FEDC H'FEDD H'FEDE H'FEE0 H'FEE1 H'FEE2 H'FEE6 Register Name WUEMRB PGODR PGPIN (read) PGDDR (write) PEODR PFODR PEPIN (read) PEDDR (write) PFPIN (read) PFDDR (write) PCODR PDODR PCPIN (read) PCDDR (write) PDPIN (read) PDDDR (write) ICXR_0 ICXR_1 KBCRH_0 KBCRL_0 KBBR_0 KBCRH_1 KBCRL_1 KBBR_1 KBCRH_2 KBCRL_2 KBBR_2 DDCSWR Register Select Condition No condition No condition Module Name INT PORT No condition MSTP2 = 0 IIC_0 IIC_1 Keyboard buffer controller MSTP4 = 0 IIC common Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 507 of 544 Lower Address H'FEE8 H'FEE9 H'FEEA H'FEEB H'FEEC H'FEED H'FEF4 H'FEF5 H'FEF6 H'FEF7 H'FF80 H'FF81 H'FF82 H'FF83 H'FF84 H'FF85 H'FF86 H'FF87 H'FF88 H'FF89 H'FF8E H'FF8F H'FF90 H'FF91 H'FF92 H'FF93 Register Name ICRA ICRB ICRC ISR ISCRH ISCRL ABRKCR BARA BARB BARC FLMCR1 FLMCR2 PCSR EBR1 SYSCR2 EBR2 SBYCR LPWRCR MSTPCRH MSTPCRL ICCR_1 ICSR_1 ICDR_1 SARX_1 ICMR_1 SAR_1 TIER TCSR FRCH FRCL Register Select Condition No condition Module Name INT FLSHE = 1 in STCR FLSHE = 0 in STCR FLSHE = 1 in STCR FLSHE = 0 in STCR FLSHE = 1 in STCR FLSHE = 0 in STCR FLASH PWM FLASH SYSTEM FLASH SYSTEM MSTP3 = 0, IICE = 1 in STCR MSTP3 = 0, IICE = 1 in STCR MSTP3 = 0, IICE = 1 in STCR ICE = 1 in ICCR1 ICE = 0 in ICCR1 ICE = 1 in ICCR1 ICE = 0 in ICCR1 MSTP13 = 0 IIC_1 FRT Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 508 of 544 Lower Address H'FF94 H'FF95 H'FF96 H'FF97 H'FF98 H'FF99 H'FF9A H'FF9B H'FF9C H'FF9D H'FF9E H'FF9F H'FFA8 H'FFA9 Register Name OCRAH OCRBH OCRAL OCRBL TCR TOCR ICRAH OCRARH ICRAL OCRARL ICRBH OCRAFH ICRBL OCRAFL ICRCH OCRDMH ICRCL OCRDML ICRDH ICRDL TCSR_0 TCNT_0 (write) TCNT_0 (read) Register Select Condition MSTP13 = 0 OCRS = 0 in TOCR OCRS = 1 in TOCR OCRS = 0 in TOCR OCRS = 1 in TOCR Module Name FRT ICRS = 0 in TOCR ICRS = 1 in TOCR ICRS = 0 in TOCR ICRS = 1 in TOCR ICRS = 0 in TOCR ICRS = 1 in TOCR ICRS = 0 in TOCR ICRS = 1 in TOCR ICRS = 0 in TOCR ICRS = 1 in TOCR ICRS = 0 in TOCR ICRS = 1 in TOCR No condition WDT_0 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 509 of 544 Lower Address H'FFAA H'FFAB H'FFAC H'FFAD H'FFAE H'FFB0 H'FFB1 H'FFB2 H'FFB3 H'FFB4 H'FFB5 H'FFB6 H'FFB7 H'FFB8 H'FFB9 H'FFBA H'FFBB H'FFBC H'FFBD H'FFBE H'FFBF H'FFC0 H'FFC1 H'FFC2 H'FFC3 H'FFC4 H'FFC5 H'FFC6 H'FFC7 Register Name PAODR PAPIN (read) PADDR (write) P1PCR P2PCR P3PCR P1DDR P2DDR P1DR P2DR P3DDR P4DDR P3DR P4DR P5DDR P6DDR P5DR P6DR PBODR P8DDR (write) PBPIN (read) P7PIN (read) PBDDR (write) P8DR P9DDR P9DR IER STCR SYSCR MDCR BCR WSCR Register Select Condition No condition Module Name PORT No condition No condition INT SYSTEM No condition BSC Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 510 of 544 Lower Address H'FFC8 H'FFC9 H'FFCA H'FFCB H'FFCC H'FFCD H'FFCE H'FFCF H'FFD0 H'FFD1 H'FFD3 H'FFD5 H'FFD6 H'FFD7 H'FFD8 H'FFD9 H'FFDE Register Name TCR_0 TCR_1 TCSR_0 TCSR_1 TCORA_0 TCORA_1 TCORB_0 TCORB_1 TCNT_0 TCNT_1 PWOERA PWDPRA PWSL PWDR0 to PWDR7 ICCR_0 ICSR_0 ICDR_0 SARX_0 Register Select Condition MSTP12 = 0 Module Name TMR_0, TMR_1 No condition MSTP11 = 0 PWM MSTP4 = 0, IICE = 1 in STCR MSTP4 = 0, IICE = 1 in STCR MSTP4 = 0, IICE = 1 in STCR MSTP9 = 0 ICE = 1 in ICCR0 ICE = 0 in ICCR0 ICE = 1 in ICCR0 ICE = 0 in ICCR0 IIC_0 H'FFDF ICMR_0 SAR_0 H'FFE0 H'FFE1 H'FFE2 H'FFE3 H'FFE4 H'FFE5 H'FFE6 H'FFE7 H'FFE8 H'FFE9 ADDRAH ADDRAL ADDRBH ADDRBL ADDRCH ADDRCL ADDRDH ADDRDL ADCSR ADCR A/D Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 511 of 544 Lower Address H'FFEA H’FFEB H'FFF0 Register Name TCSR_1 TCNT_1 (write) TCNT_1 (read) TCR_X TCR_Y Register Select Condition No condition Module Name WDT_1 MSTP8 = 0, HIE = 0 in SYSCR TMRX/Y = 0 in TCONRS TMRX/Y = 1 in TCONRS TMRX/Y = 0 in TCONRS TMRX/Y = 1 in TCONRS TMRX/Y = 0 in TCONRS TMRX/Y = 1 in TCONRS TMRX/Y = 0 in TCONRS TMRX/Y = 1 in TCONRS TMRX/Y = 0 in TCONRS TMRX/Y = 1 in TCONRS TMRX/Y = 0 in TCONRS TMRX/Y = 1 in TCONRS TMRX/Y = 0 in TCONRS TMR_X TMR_Y INT TMR_X TMR_Y PORT TMR_X TMR_Y INT TMR_X TMR_Y TMR_X TMR_Y TMR_X TMR_Y TMR_X H'FFF1 KMIMR TCSR_X TCSR_Y MSTP2 = 0, HIE = 0 in SYSCR MSTP8 = 0, HIE = 0 in SYSCR H'FFF2 KMPCR TICRR TCORA_Y MSTP2 = 0, HIE = 1 in SYSCR MSTP8 = 0, HIE = 0 in SYSCR H'FFF3 KMIMRA TICRF TCORB_Y MSTP2 = 0, HIE = 1 in SYSCR MSTP8 = 0, HIE = 0 in SYSCR MSTP8 = 0, HIE = 0 in SYSCR MSTP8 = 0, HIE = 0 in SYSCR MSTP8 = 0, HIE = 0 in SYSCR H'FFF4 TCNT_X TCNT_Y H'FFF5 TCORC TISR H'FFF6 H'FFF7 H'FFFC H'FFFE Note: * TCORA_X TCORB_X TCONRI TCONRS MSTP8 = 0, HIE = 0 in SYSCR MSTP8 = 0, HIE = 0 in SYSCR TMR_Y The program development tool (emulator) does not support these registers. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 512 of 544 Section 22 Electrical Characteristics 22.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings Table 22.1 lists the absolute maximum ratings. Table 22.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings Item Power supply voltage I/O buffer power supply voltage Input voltage (except ports 7, A, P97, P86, P52, P42, and port G) Input Voltage (port A) Input voltage (P97, P86, P52, P42 and port G) Input voltage (port 7) Reference supply voltage Analog power supply voltage Analog input voltage Operating temperature Operating temperature (flash memory programming/erasing) Storage temperature Symbol VCC, VCL VCCB Vin Vin Vin Vin AVref AVCC VAN Topr Topr Tstg Value –0.3 to +4.3 –0.3 to +7.0 –0.3 to VCC +0.3 –0.3 to VCCB +0.3 –0.3 to +7.0 –0.3 to AVCC + 0.3 –0.3 to AVCC + 0.3 –0.3 to +4.3 –0.3 to AVCC +0.3 –20 to +75 –20 to +75 –55 to +125 Unit V V V V V V V V V °C °C °C Caution: Permanent damage to the chip may result if absolute maximum ratings are exceeded. Ensure so that the impressed voltage does not exceed 4.3 V for pins for which the maximum rating is determined by the voltage on the VCC, AVCC, and VCL pins, or 7.0 V for pins for which the maximum rating is determined by VCCB. The VCC and VCL pins must be connected to the Vcc power supply. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 513 of 544 22.2 DC Characteristics Table 22.2 lists the DC characteristics. Permitted output current values and bus drive characteristics are shown in tables 22.3 and 22.4, respectively. Table 22.2 DC Characteristics (1) Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V*7, VCCB = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC*1 = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVref*1 = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS*1 = 0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C Item Schmitt trigger input voltage P67 to 2 P60* , KIN15 to KIN8, 3 IRQ2 to IRQ0* , IRQ5 to IRQ3 RES, STBY, NMI, MD1, MD0 EXTAL PA7 to PA0* Port 7 P97, P86, P52, P42, and Port G Input pins except (1) and (2) above Input low voltage RES, STBY, MD1, MD0 PA7 to PA0 (3) VIL 7 Symbol (1)* 8 Min. VCC × 0.2 VCCB × 0.2 — Typ. — — Max. — VCC × 0.7 VCCB × 0.7 — VCC +0.3 VCC +0.3 VCCB + 0.3 AVCC + 0.3 5.5 VCC + 0.3 VCC × 0.1 VCCB × 0.2 Unit V Test Conditions VT VT – + VT – VT (2) VIH + – VCC × 0.05 — VCCB × 0.05 VCC × 0.9 VCC × 0.7 VCCB × 0.7 — — — — — — — — Input high voltage V (2) VIH VCC × 0.7 VCC × 0.7 VCC × 0.7 –0.3 –0.3 V VCCB = 3.0 V to 4.0 V VCCB = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V V V IOH = –200 µA IOH = –1 mA, (VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, VCCB = 3.0 V to 4.5 V) IOH = –200 µA 0.8 NMI, EXTAL, input pins except (1) and (3) above Output high voltage All output pins (except P97, P86, P52, P42, 4 5 6 and Port G) * , * , * VOH –0.3 — VCC × 0.2 VCC – 0.5 VCCB – 0.5 VCC – 1.0 VCCB – 1.0 — — — — P97, P86, P52, P42, 4 and Port G* 0.5 — — V Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 514 of 544 Item Output low voltage All output pins 5 (except RESO)* Ports 1 to 3 RESO Symbol VOL Min. — — — Typ. — — — Max. 0.4 1.0 0.4 Unit V V V Test Conditions IOL = 1.6 mA IOL = 5 mA IOL = 1.6 mA Notes: 1. Do not leave the AVcc, AVref, and AVss pins open even if the A/D converter is not used. Even if the A/D converter is not used, apply a value in the range 2.0 V to 3.6 V to AVCC and AVref pins by connection to the power supply (VCC), or some other method. Ensure that AVref ≤ AVCC. 2. P67 to P60 include peripheral module inputs multiplexed on those pins. 3. IRQ2 includes the ADTRG signal multiplexed on that pin. 4. P52/ExSCK1/SCL0, P97/SDA0, P86/SCK1/SCL1, P42/SDA1, and port G are NMOS push-pull outputs. When the SCL0, SDA0, SCL1, SDA1 (ICE = 1), ExSDAA, ExSCLA, ExSDAB, or ExSCLB pin is used as an output, it is NMOS open-drain output. Therefore, an external pull-up resistor must be connected in order to output high level. P52/ExSCK1, P97, P86/SCK1, P42 (ICE = 0), and port G high levels are driven by NMOS. An external pull-up resistor is necessary to provide high-level output from ExSCK1 and SCK1. 5. When IICS = 0, ICE = 0, and KBIOE = 0. Low-level output when the bus drive function is selected is determined separately. 6. The port A characteristics depend on VCCB, and the other pins characteristics depend on VCC. 7. For flash memory programming/erasure, the applicable range is VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 515 of 544 Table 22.2 DC Characteristics (2) Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V*5, VCCB = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC*1 = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVref*1 = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS*1 = 0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C Item Input leakage current RES STBY, NMI, MD1, MD0 Port 7 Three-state leakage current (off state) Ports 1 to 6, 8, 9, 4 A* , and B to G ITSI Symbol Min. Iin — — — — Typ. — — — — Max. 10.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 µA Test Unit Conditions µA Vin = 0.5 to VCC – 0.5 V Vin = 0.5 to AVCC – 0.5 V Vin = 0.5 to VCC – 0.5 V, Vin = 0.5 to VCCB – 0.5 V Vin = 0 V, VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V VCCB = 3.0 V to 5.5 V Vin = 0 V, f = 1 MHz, Ta = 25°C Input pull-up Ports 1 to 3 MOS current Ports 6 and B to F Ports A* Input capacitance RES NMI Input pins except (4) above Current dissipation*2 Normal operation Sleep mode Standby mode* 3 4 –IP 5 30 30 — — — — — — 30 20 1 — 1.2 0.01 0.5 150 300 600 80 50 10 40 32 5.0 20.0 2.0 5.0 1.0 µA (4) Cin — — — pF pF pF mA mA µA ICC — — — — f = 10 MHz f = 10 MHz Ta ≤ 50°C 50°C < Ta Analog power During A/D supply conversion current Idle Reference During A/D power supply conversion current Idle AlCC — — mA µA mA AVCC = 2.0 V to 3.6 V Alref — — 0.01 5.0 µA AVref = 2.0 V to AVCC Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 516 of 544 Item Analog power supply voltage*1 Symbol Min. AVCC 3.0 2.0 Typ. — — — Max. 3.6 3.6 — Test Unit Conditions V Operating Idle/not used V RAM standby voltage VRAM 2.0 Notes: 1. Do not leave the AVCC, AVref, and AVSS pins open even if the A/D converter is not used. Even if the A/D converter is not used, apply a value in the range 2.0 V to 3.6 V to AVCC and AVref pins by connection to the power supply (VCC), or some other method. Ensure that AVref ≤ AVCC. 2. Current dissipation values are for VIH min = VCC – 0.2 V, VCCB – 0.2 V, and VIL max = 0.2 V with all output pins unloaded and the on-chip pull-up MOSs in the off state. 3. The values are for VRAM ≤ VCC < 3.0 V, VIH min = VCC– 0.2 V, VCCB – 0.2 V, and VIL max = 0.2 V. 4. The port A characteristics depend on VCCB, and the other pins characteristics depend on VCC. 5. For flash memory programming/erasure, the applicable range is VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V. Table 22.2 DC Characteristics (3) When LPC Function is Used Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, VCCB = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC* = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVref* = 3.0 V to AVCC, VSS = AVSS*1 = 0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C Item Input high voltage Input low voltage Output high voltage Output low voltage Note: * P37 to P30, P83 to P80, PB1, PB0 P37 to P30, P83 to P80, PB1, PB0 P37, P33 to P30, P82 to P80, PB1, PB0 P37, P33 to P30, P82 to P80, PB1, PB0 Symbol VIH Min. VCC × 0.5 Max. — Test Unit Conditions V VIL — VCC × 0.3 V VOH VCC × 0.9 — V IOH = –0.5 mA IOL = 1.5 mA VOL — VCC × 0.1 V Do not leave the AVCC, AVref, and AVSS pins open even if the A/D converter is not used. Even if the A/D converter is not used, apply a value in the range 2.0 V to 3.6 V to AVCC and AVref pins by connection to the power supply (VCC), or some other method. Ensure that AVref ≤ AVCC. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 517 of 544 Table 22.3 Permissible Output Currents Conditions: Item Permissible output low current (per pin) VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, VCCB = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C Symbol SCL1, SCL0, IOL SDA1, SDA0, PS2AC to PS2CC, PS2AD to PS2CD, PA7 to PA4, ExSDAA, ExSCLA, ExSDAB, ExSCLB (bus drive function selected) Ports 1, 2, 3 RESO Other output pins ∑ IOL Min. — Typ. — Max. 10 Unit mA — — — — — — — — — — 2 1 1 40 60 mA Permissible output low current (total) Total of ports 1, 2, and 3 Total of all output pins, including the above All output pins Permissible output high current (per pin) Permissible output high current (total) –IOH — — 2 mA Total of all output pins ∑ –IOH — — 30 mA Notes: 1. To protect chip reliability, do not exceed the output current values in table 22.3. 2. When driving a Darlington pair or LED, always insert a current-limiting resistor in the output line, as show in figures 22.1 and 22.2. This LSI 2 kΩ Port Darlington pair Figure 22.1 Darlington Pair Drive Circuit (Example) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 518 of 544 This LSI 600 Ω Ports 1 to 3 LED Figure 22.2 LED Drive Circuit (Example) Table 22.4 Bus Drive Characteristics Conditions: Applicable Pins: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C SCL1, SCL0, SDA1, SDA0 ExSDAA, ExSCLA, ExSDAB, ExSCLB (bus drive function selected) Symbol VT – Item Schmitt trigger input voltage Min. VCC × 0.3 — VCC × 0.05 VCC × 0.7 –0.5 — — Typ. — — — — — — — — Max. — VCC × 0.7 — 5.5 VCC × 0.3 0.5 0.4 10 Test Unit Conditions V VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V V VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V V IOL = 8 mA IOL = 3 mA pF Vin = 0 V, f = 1 MHz, Ta = 25°C Vin = 0.5 to VCC – 0.5 V VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V VT+ VT+ – VT– Input high voltage Input low voltage Output low voltage VIH VIL VOL Cin Input capacitance — Three-state leakage current (off state) SCL, SDA output fall time | ITSI | tOf — — 1.0 250 µA ns 20 + 0.1Cb — Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 519 of 544 Conditions: Applicable Pins: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, VCCB = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C PS2AC, PS2AD, PS2BC, PS2BD, PS2CC, PS2CD, PA7 to PA4 (bus drive function selected) Symbol VOL Min. — Typ. — Max. 0.8 Unit Test Conditions V IOL = 16 mA, VCCB = 4.5 V to 5.5 V IOL = 8 mA IOL = 3 mA Item Output low voltage — — — — 0.5 0.4 22.3 AC Characteristics Figure 22.3 shows the test conditions for the AC characteristics. VCC RL Chip output pin C = 30 pF: All output ports RL = 2.4 kΩ RH = 12 kΩ I/O timing test levels C RH • Low level: 0.8 V • High level: 2.0 V Figure 22.3 Output Load Circuit Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 520 of 544 22.3.1 Clock Timing Table 22.5 shows the clock timing. The clock timing specified here covers clock (φ) output and clock pulse generator (crystal) and external clock input (EXTAL pin) oscillation settling times. For details on external clock input (EXTAL pin and EXCL pin) timing, see section19, Clock Pulse Generator. Table 22.5 Clock Timing Condition: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, VCCB = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, φ = 4 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = –20 to +75°C Condition 10 MHz Item Clock cycle time Clock high pulse width Clock low pulse width Clock rise time Clock fall time Oscillation settling time at reset (crystal) Oscillation settling time in software standby (crystal) External clock output stabilization delay time Symbol tcyc tCH tCL tCr tCf tOSC1 tOSC2 tDEXT Min. 100 30 30 — — 20 8 500 Max. 250 — — 20 20 — — — Unit ns ns ns ns ns ms ms µs Figure 22.6 Figure 22.7 Reference Figure 22.5 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 521 of 544 22.3.2 Control Signal Timing Table 22.6 shows the control signal timing. The only external interrupts that can operate on the subclock (φ = 32.768 kHz) are NMI and IRQ0, 1, 2, 6, and 7. Table 22.6 Control Signal Timing Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, VCCB = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, φ = 32.768 kHz, 4 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = –20 to +75°C Condition 10 MHz Item RES setup time RES pulse width NMI setup time (NMI) NMI hold time (NMI) NMI pulse width (exiting software standby mode) IRQ setup time (IRQ7 to IRQ0) IRQ hold time(IRQ7 to IRQ0) IRQ pulse width (IRQ7, IRQ6, IRQ2 to IRQ0) (exiting software standby mode) Symbol tRESS tRESW tNMIS tNMIH tNMIW tIRQS tIRQH tIRQW Min. 300 20 250 10 200 250 10 200 Max. — — — — — — — — Unit ns tcyc ns ns ns ns ns ns Figure 22.9 Test Conditions Figure 22.8 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 522 of 544 22.3.3 Timing of On-Chip Peripheral Modules Tables 22.7 to 22.10 show the on-chip peripheral module timing. The only on-chip peripheral modules that can operate in subclock operation (φ = 32.768 kHz) are the I/O ports, external interrupts (NMI and IRQ0, 1, 2, 6, and 7), the watchdog timer, and the 8-bit timer (channels 0 and 1). Table 22.7 Timing of On-Chip Peripheral Modules (1) Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, VCCB = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, φ = 32.768 kHz*, 4 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = –20 to +75°C Condition 10 MHz Item I/O ports Output data delay time Input data setup time Input data hold time Symbol tPWD tPRS tPRH tFTOD tFTIS tFTCWH tFTCWL tTMOD Min. — 50 50 — 50 50 1.5 2.5 — 50 50 1.5 2.5 — 4 6 Max. 100 — — 100 — — — — 100 — — — — 100 — — 0.6 1.5 1.5 Test Unit Conditions ns Figure 22.10 FRT Timer output delay time Timer input setup time ns Figure 22.11 Figure 22.12 Timer clock input setup time tFTCS Timer clock pulse width Single edge Both edges tcyc ns Figure 22.13 Figure 22.15 Figure 22.14 tcyc ns tcyc tScyc tcyc Figure 22.16 Figure 22.17 TMR Timer output delay time Timer reset input setup time tTMRS Timer clock input setup time tTMCS Timer clock pulse width Single edge Both edges tTMCWH tTMCWL tPWOD PWM SCI Pulse output delay time Input clock cycle Asynchronous tScyc Synchronous Input clock pulse width Input clock rise time Input clock fall time tSCKW tSCKr tSCKf 0.4 — — Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 523 of 544 Condition 10 MHz Item SCI Transmit data delay time (synchronous) Symbol Min. tTXD — 100 100 50 — 132 Max. 100 — — — 200 — Test Unit Conditions ns ns ns ns ns tcyc Figure 22.19 Figure 22.20 Figure 22.18 Receive data setup time tRXS (synchronous) Receive data hold time (synchronous) tRXH A/D Trigger input setup time tTRGS converter WDT RESO output delay time tRESD RESO output pulse width Note: * tRESOW Only peripheral modules that can be used in subclock operation Table 22.8 Keyboard Buffer Controller Timing Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, VCCB = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, φ = 4 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = –20 to +75°C Ratings Item KCLK, KD output fall time KCLK, KD input data hold time KCLK, KD input data setup time KCLK, KD output delay time KCLK, KD capacitive load Symbol Min. tKBF tKBIH tKBIS tKBOD Cb Test Typ. Max. Unit Conditions Notes 250 — — 450 400 ns ns ns ns pF Figure 22.21 20 + — 0.1Cb 150 150 — — — — — — Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 524 of 544 Table 22.9 I2C Bus Timing Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, VSS = 0 V, φ = 5 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = –20 to +75°C Ratings Item SCL input cycle time SCL input high pulse width SCL input low pulse width SCL, SDA input rise time SCL, SDA input fall time SCL, SDA input spike pulse elimination time SDA input bus free time Start condition input hold time Retransmission start condition input setup time Stop condition input setup time Data input setup time Data input hold time SCL, SDA capacitive load Note: * Symbol Min. tSCL tSCLH tSCLL tSr tSf tSP tBUF tSTAH tSTAS tSTOS tSDAS tSDAH Cb 12 3 5 — — — 5 3 3 3 0.5 0 — Typ. — — — — — — — — — — — — — Max. — — — 7.5* 300 1 — — — — — — 400 Unit tcyc tcyc tcyc tcyc ns tcyc tcyc tcyc tcyc tcyc tcyc ns pF Test Conditions Notes Figure 22.22 17.5 tcyc can be set according to the clock selected for use by the I2C module. For details, see section 13.6, Usage Notes. Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 525 of 544 Table 22.10 LPC Module Timing Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, VSS = 0 V, φ = 4 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = –20 to +75°C Item LPC Input clock cycle Symbol tLcyc tLCKL tOFF tRXS tRXH Min. 30 11 11 2 — 7 0 Typ. — — — — — — — Max. — — — 11 28 — — Test Unit Conditions ns Figure 22.23 Input clock pulse width (H) tLCKH Input clock pulse width (L) Transmit signal delay time tTXD Transmit signal floating delay time Receive signal setup time Receive signal hold time 22.4 A/D Conversion Characteristics Tables 22.11 list the A/D conversion characteristics. Table 22.11 A/D Conversion Characteristics (AN5 to AN0 Input: 134/266-State Conversion) Conditions: VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVref = 3.0 V to AVCC, VCCB = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0 V, φ = 4 MHz to maximum operating frequency, Ta = –20 to +75°C Condition 10 MHz Item Resolution Conversion time Analog input capacitance Permissible signal-source impedance Nonlinearity error Offset error Full-scale error Quantization error Absolute accuracy Min. 10 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 13.4 20 5 ±7.0 ±7.5 ±7.5 ±0.5 ±8.0 Typ. Max. Unit bits µs pF kΩ LSB LSB LSB LSB LSB Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 526 of 544 22.5 Flash Memory Characteristics Table 22.12 shows the flash memory characteristics. Table 22.12 Flash Memory Characteristics Conditions: Item Programming time* , * ,* 1 2 4 VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C Symbol tP Min. — Typ. 10 Max. 200 Unit ms/ 128 bytes ms/ block times µs µs µs µs µs µs µs µs µs µs µs times 1≤n≤6 7 ≤ n ≤ 1000 Additional write Test Condition Erase time*1, *3,*6 Reprogramming count Programming Wait time after SWE-bit setting*1 Wait time after 1 PSU-bit setting* Wait time after P-bit setting*1, *4 tE NWEC x y z1 z2 z3 — — 1 50 28 198 8 5 5 4 2 2 100 — 100 — — — 30 200 10 — — — — — — — 1200 100 — — 32 202 12 — — — — — — 1000 Wait time after P-bit clear*1 Wait time after PSU-bit clear*1 Wait time after PV-bit setting*1 Wait time after dummy write*1 Wait time after PV-bit clear*1 Wait time after SWE-bit clear*1 Maximum programming 1 4 5 count* , * ,* α β γ ε η θ N Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 527 of 544 Item Erase Wait time after SWE-bit setting*1 Wait time after ESU-bit setting*1 Wait time after E-bit setting*1, *6 Wait time after 1 E-bit clear* Wait time after ESU-bit clear*1 Wait time after EV-bit setting*1 Wait time after 1 dummy write* Wait time after EV-bit clear*1 Wait time after SWE-bit clear*1 Maximum erase count*1, *6, *7 Symbol x y z α β γ ε η θ N Min. 1 100 10 10 10 20 2 4 100 — Typ. — — — — — — — — — — Max. — — 100 — — — — — — 120 Unit µs µs ms µs µs µs µs µs µs times Test Conditions Notes: 1. Set the times according to the program/erase algorithms. 2. Programming time per 128 bytes (Shows the total period for which the P-bit in FLMCR1 is set. It does not include the programming verification time.) 3. Block erase time (Shows the total period for which the E-bit in FLMCR1 is set. It does not include the erase verification time.) 4. Maximum programming time (tP (max)) tP (max) = (wait time after P-bit setting (z1) + (z3)) × 6 + wait time after P-bit setting (z2) × ((N) – 6) 5. The maximum number of writes (N) should be set according to the actual set value of z1, z2 and z3 to allow programming within the maximum programming time (tP (max)). The wait time after P-bit setting (z1, z2, and z3) should be alternated according to the number of writes (n) as follows: 1≤n≤6 z1 = 30µs, z3 = 10µs 7 ≤ n ≤ 1000 z2 = 200µs 6. Maximum erase time (tE (max)) tE (max) = Wait time after E-bit setting (z) × maximum erase count (N) 7. The maximum number of erases (N) should be set according to the actual set value of z to allow erasing within the maximum erase time (tE (max)). Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 528 of 544 22.6 Usage Note The method of connecting an external capacitor is shown in figure 22.4. Connect the system power supply to the VCL pin together with the VCC pins. Vcc power supply Bypass capacitor VCL 10 µF 0.01 µF VSS < Vcc = 3.0 V to 3.6 V > Connect the Vcc power supply to the chip's VCL pin in the same way as the VCC pins. It is recommended that a bypass capacitor be connected to the power supply pins. (Values are reference values.) Figure 22.4 Connection of VCL Capacitor 22.7 22.7.1 Timing Chart Clock Timing The clock timings are shown below. tcyc tCH φ tCf tCL tCr Figure 22.5 System Clock Timing Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 529 of 544 EXTAL tDEXT tDEXT VCC STBY tOSC1 RES tOSC1 φ Figure 22.6 Oscillation Settling Timing φ NMI IRQi (i = 0, 1, 2, 6, 7) tOSC2 Figure 22.7 Oscillation Setting Timing (Exiting Software Standby Mode) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 530 of 544 22.7.2 Control Signal Timing The control signal timings are shown below. φ tRESS RES tRESS tRESW Figure 22.8 Reset Input Timing φ tNMIS NMI tNMIW tNMIH IRQi (i = 7 to 0) tIRQS tIRQW tIRQH IRQi Edge input (i = 7 to 0) tIRQS IRQi Level input (i = 7 to 0) Figure 22.9 Interrupt Input Timing Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 531 of 544 22.7.3 On-Chip Peripheral Module Timing The on-chip peripheral module timings are shown below. T1 T2 φ Ports 1 to 9, and A to G (read) tPRS tPRH tPWD Ports 1 to 6, 8, 9, and A to G (write) Figure 22.10 I/O Port Input/Output Timing φ tFTOD FTOA, FTOB tFTIS FTIA, FTIB, FTIC, FTID Figure 22.11 FRT Input/Output Timing φ tFTCS FTCI tFTCWL tFTCWH Figure 22.12 FRT Clock Input Timing Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 532 of 544 φ tTMOD TMO0, TMO1 TMOX, ExTMOX, TMOY, TMOA, TMOB Figure 22.13 8-Bit Timer Output Timing φ tTMCS tTMCS TMCI0, TMCI1 TMIX, TMIY, ExTMIX, ExTMIY, TMIA, TMIB tTMCWL tTMCWH Figure 22.14 8-Bit Timer Clock Input Timing φ tTMRS TMRI0, TMRI1 TMIX, TMIY, ExTMIX, ExTMIY, TMIA, TMIB Figure 22.15 8-Bit Timer Reset Input Timing φ tPWOD PW7 to PW0 Figure 22.16 PWM, PWMX Output Timing Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 533 of 544 tSCKW tSCKr tSCKf SCK1, ExSCK1 tScyc Figure 22.17 SCK Clock Input Timing SCK1, ExSCK1 tTXD TxD1, ExTxD1 (transmit data) tRXS tRXH RxD1, ExRxD1 (receive data) Figure 22.18 SCI Input/Output Timing (Synchronous Mode) φ tTRGS ADTRG Figure 22.19 A/D Converter External Trigger Input Timing φ tRESD RESO tRESOW tRESD Figure 22.20 WDT Output Timing (RESO) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 534 of 544 1. Reception φ tKBIS tKBIH KCLK/KD* 2. Transmission (a) T1 T2 φ tKBOD KCLK/KD* Transmission (b) KCLK/KD* tKBF Note: φ shown here is the clock scaled by 1/N when the operating mode is active medium-speed mode. * KCLK: PS2AC to PS2CC KD: PS2AD to PS2CD Figure 22.21 Keyboard Buffer Controller Timing SDA0, SDA1, ExSDAA, ExSDAB VIH VIL tBUF tSTAH tSCLH tSTAS tSP tSTOS SCL0, SCL1, ExSCLA, ExSCLB P* S* tSf tSCLL tSCL tSr tSDAH Sr* tSDAS P* Note:* S, P, and Sr indicate the following conditions. S: Start condition P: Stop condition Sr: Retransmission start condition Figure 22.22 I2C Bus Interface Input/Output Timing Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 535 of 544 tLCKH LCLK tLcyc tLCKL LCLK tTXD LAD3 to LAD0, SERIRQ, CLKRUN (Transmit signal) tRXS tRXH LAD3 to LAD0, SERIRQ, CLKRUN LFRAME (Receive signal) tOFF LAD3 to LAD0, SERIRQ, CLKRUN (Transmit signal) Figure 22.23 Host Interface (LPC) Timing Testing voltage: 0.4Vcc 50pF Figure 22.24 Tester Measurement Condition Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 536 of 544 Appendix A. I/O Port States in Each Processing State I/O Port States in Each Processing State Hardware Standby Mode T T T T T T T T T T Table A.1 Port Name Pin Name Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Port 5 Port 6 Port 7 Port 8 Port 97 Port 96 φ EXCL Ports 95 to 90 Port A Port B Ports C to G Reset T T T T T T T T T T Software Standby Mode kept kept kept kept kept kept T kept kept [DDR = 1] H [DDR = 0] T Watch Mode kept kept kept kept kept kept T kept kept EXCL input Sleep Mode kept kept kept kept kept kept T kept kept [DDR = 1] clock output [DDR = 0] T SubSubactive sleep Mode Mode kept kept kept kept kept kept T kept kept EXCL input Program Execution State I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port Input port I/O port I/O port Clock output/ EXCL input/ input port I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port Input port I/O port I/O port EXCL input T T T T T T T T kept kept kept kept kept kept kept kept kept kept kept kept kept kept kept kept I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port I/O port [Legend] H: High L: Low T: High-impedance state kept: Input ports are in the high-impedance state (when DDR = 0 and PCR = 1, input pull-up MOSs remain on). Output ports maintain their previous state. Depending on the pins, the on-chip peripheral modules may be initialized and the I/O port function determined by DDR and DR used. DDR: Data direction register Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 537 of 544 B. Product Codes Product Code Flash memory version HD64F2111BVB (3 V version) HD64F2111BVC Mark Code F2111BVTE10B F2111BVTE10C Package (Package Code) 144-pin TQFP (TFP-144) Product Type H8S/2111B-B H8S/2111B-C Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 538 of 544 C. Package Dimensions For package dimensions, dimensions described in Renesas Semiconductor Packages Data Book have priority. Unit: mm 73 72 18.0 ± 0.2 16 108 109 18.0 ± 0.2 144 37 *0.17 ± 0.05 1.00 1.20 Max 0.07 M 1.0 0.15 ± 0.04 1 *0.18 ± 0.05 0.16 ± 0.04 36 0.4 1.0 0.10 ± 0.05 0˚ – 8˚ 0.5 ± 0.1 Package Code JEDEC EIAJ Weight (reference value) TFP-144 — Conforms 0.6 g 0.08 *Dimension including the plating thickness Base material dimension Figure C.1 Package Dimensions (TFP-144) Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 539 of 544 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 540 of 544 Index 16-bit count mode................................... 210 16-bit free-running timer (FRT) ............. 157 8-bit PWM timer (PWM)........................ 147 8-bit timer (TMR) ................................... 183 A/D converter ......................................... 413 A20 gate.................................................. 398 Absolute address....................................... 41 Additional pulse...................................... 154 Address map ............................................. 57 Address space ........................................... 20 Addressing modes..................................... 40 ADI ......................................................... 423 Analog input channel.............................. 416 Arithmetic operations instructions............ 32 Asynchronous mode ............................... 249 Basic pulse.............................................. 153 Bcc............................................................ 37 Bit manipulation instructions.................... 35 Bit rate .................................................... 244 Block data transfer instructions ................ 38 Boot mode .............................................. 442 Branch instructions ................................... 37 Break....................................................... 272 Buffered input capture input ................... 173 Bus controller (BSC) ................................ 93 .................................................................. 93 Carrier frequency.................................... 149 Cascaded connection .............................. 210 Clear timing ............................................ 171 Clock pulse generator ............................. 455 Clocked synchronous mode .................... 264 CMI......................................................... 215 CMIA...................................................... 215 CMIAAB ................................................ 215 CMIAY................................................... 215 CMIB...................................................... 215 CMIBAB................................................. 215 CMIBY ................................................... 215 Compare-match count mode ................... 210 Condition field .......................................... 39 Condition-code register............................. 24 Conversion time ...................................... 421 Crystal resonator ..................................... 456 Data transfer instructions .......................... 31 Direct transitions..................................... 477 EEPMOV instruction ................................ 49 Effective address................................. 40, 44 Effective address extension....................... 39 Electrical characteristics ......................... 513 Erase/erase-verify ................................... 448 Erasing units ........................................... 436 ERRI ....................................................... 408 Error protection....................................... 450 Exception handling ................................... 59 Exception handling vector table................ 60 Exception vector table............................... 60 Extended control register .......................... 23 External trigger ....................................... 422 Flash memory ......................................... 431 FOV ........................................................ 177 Framing error .......................................... 256 General registers ....................................... 22 Hardware protection................................ 450 Hardware standby mode.......................... 473 Host interface (LPC) ............................... 367 I/O ports .................................................... 95 I2C bus data format ................................. 307 I2C bus interface (IIC)............................. 277 ICI ........................................................... 177 ICIA ........................................................ 215 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 541 of 544 ICIX........................................................ 215 IICI ......................................................... 337 Immediate ................................................. 42 Increment timing .................................... 170 Input capture input.................................. 172 Input capture operation........................... 212 Instruction set ........................................... 29 Interrupt control modes ............................ 80 Interrupt controller.................................... 67 Interrupt exception handling..................... 63 Interrupt Exception handling vector table 78 Interrupt mask bit ..................................... 24 Interval timer mode ................................ 229 Keyboard buffer controller ..................... 349 Logic operations instructions.................... 34 Mark state ............................................... 272 MCU operating mode selection ................ 51 MCU operating modes.............................. 51 Medium-speed mode .............................. 470 Memory indirect ....................................... 43 Mode 2...................................................... 56 Mode 3...................................................... 56 Mode pins ................................................. 51 Module stop mode .................................. 477 Multiprocessor communication function................................................... 259 NMI interrupt.................................... 76, 230 Noise canceler ........................................ 335 Note on bit manipulation instructions....... 48 OCI ......................................................... 177 On-board programming modes............... 441 Operation field.......................................... 39 Output compare output ........................... 171 Overrun error .......................................... 256 OVI......................................................... 215 OVIAB ................................................... 215 OVIY ...................................................... 215 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 542 of 544 Parity error .............................................. 256 Power-down modes................................. 463 Program counter........................................ 23 Program/erase protection ........................ 450 Program/program-verify ......................... 446 Program-counter relative .......................... 42 Programmer mode................................... 452 Pulse output ............................................ 169 PWM conversion period ......................... 149 RAM ....................................................... 429 Register direct ........................................... 40 Register field............................................. 39 Register indirect........................................ 40 Register indirect with displacement.......... 41 Register indirect with post-increment ....... 41 Register indirect with pre-decrement........ 41 Registers ABRKCR.............. 70, 483, 492, 500, 508 ADCR ................. 418, 487, 495, 503, 511 ADCSR ............... 417, 487, 495, 503, 511 ADDR ................. 416, 487, 495, 503, 511 BAR ...................... 71, 483, 492, 500, 508 BCR ...................... 93, 486, 494, 502, 510 BRR .................................................... 244 DDCSWR ........... 301, 483, 491, 499, 507 EBR1................... 440, 483, 492, 500, 508 EBR2................... 440, 483, 492, 500, 508 FLMCR1............. 438, 483, 492, 500, 508 FLMCR2............. 439, 483, 492, 500, 508 FRC..................... 160, 484, 493, 501, 508 HICR0................. 371, 481, 490, 498, 506 HICR1................. 371, 481, 490, 498, 506 HICR2................. 377, 481, 490, 498, 506 HICR3................. 377, 481, 490, 498, 506 HISEL ................. 395, 481, 490, 498, 506 ICCR ................... 289, 486, 495, 503, 511 ICDR................... 282, 486, 495, 503, 511 ICMR .................. 286, 487, 495, 503, 511 ICR....................... 69, 160, 483, 484, 492, ............................ 493, 500, 501, 508, 509 ICSR ................... 297, 486, 495, 503, 511 ICXR....................302, 482, 491, 499, 507 IDR ......................380, 481, 490, 498, 506 IER.........................73, 486, 494, 502, 510 ISCR ......................72, 483, 492, 500, 508 ISR.........................73, 483, 492, 500, 508 KBBR ..................354, 482, 491, 499, 507 KBCR ..................351, 482, 491, 499, 507 KMIMR .................73, 487, 496, 504, 512 KMIMRA ..............73, 487, 496, 504, 512 KMPCR ...............113, 487, 496, 504, 512 LADR3 ................379, 481, 490, 498, 506 LPWRCR.............465, 484, 492, 500, 508 MDCR ...................52, 486, 494, 502, 510 MSTPCR .............467, 484, 492, 500, 508 OCR.....................160, 484, 493, 501, 509 OCRDM ............................................. 161 ODR.....................381, 481, 490, 498, 506 P1DDR ................100, 485, 494, 502, 510 P1DR ...................100, 485, 494, 502, 510 P1PCR .................101, 485, 494, 502, 510 P2DDR ................102, 485, 494, 502, 510 P2DR ...................103, 485, 494, 502, 510 P2PCR .................103, 485, 494, 502, 510 P3DDR ................104, 485, 494, 502, 510 P3DR ...................105, 485, 494, 502, 510 P3PCR .................105, 485, 494, 502, 510 P4DDR ................107, 485, 494, 502, 510 P4DR ...................107, 485, 494, 502, 510 P5DDR ................110, 485, 494, 502, 510 P5DR ...................110, 485, 494, 502, 510 P6DDR ................112, 485, 494, 502, 510 P6DR ...................113, 485, 494, 502, 510 P7PIN ..................117, 486, 494, 502, 510 P8DDR ................118, 486, 494, 502, 510 P8DR ...................118, 486, 494, 502, 510 P9DDR ................122, 486, 494, 502, 510 P9DR ...................122, 486, 494, 502, 510 PADDR................125, 485, 494, 502, 510 PAODR................125, 485, 494, 502, 510 PAPIN..................126, 485, 494, 502, 510 PBDDR................129, 486, 494, 502, 510 PBODR................129, 485, 494, 502, 510 PBPIN..................130, 485, 494, 502, 510 PCDDR ............... 132, 482, 491, 499, 507 PCNOCR ............ 134, 480, 489, 497, 505 PCODR ............... 133, 482, 491, 499, 507 PCPIN ................. 133, 482, 491, 499, 507 PCSR................... 152, 483, 492, 500, 508 PDDDR............... 132, 482, 491, 499, 507 PDNOCR ............ 134, 480, 489, 497, 505 PDODR............... 133, 482, 491, 499, 507 PDPIN................. 133, 482, 491, 499, 507 PEDDR ............... 136, 482, 491, 499, 507 PENOCR............. 140, 480, 489, 497, 505 PEODR ............... 137, 482, 491, 499, 507 PEPIN ................. 138, 482, 491, 499, 507 PFDDR................ 136, 482, 491, 499, 507 PFNOCR............. 140, 480, 489, 497, 505 PFODR................ 137, 482, 491, 499, 507 PFPIN.................. 138, 482, 491, 499, 507 PGCTL................ 306, 480, 489, 497, 505 PGDDR............... 142, 482, 491, 499, 507 PGNOCR ............ 145, 480, 489, 497, 505 PGODR............... 143, 482, 491, 499, 507 PGPIN................. 143, 482, 491, 499, 507 PWDPR............................................... 151 PWDR................. 151, 486, 495, 503, 511 PWOER .............................................. 152 PWSL.................. 149, 486, 495, 503, 511 RDR .................................................... 237 RSR..................................................... 237 SAR..................... 283, 487, 495, 503, 511 SARX.................. 284, 486, 495, 503, 511 SBYCR ............... 464, 483, 492, 500, 508 SCMR ................................................. 243 SCR..................................................... 239 SIRQCR .............. 387, 481, 490, 498, 506 SMR .................................................... 238 SPSR ................................................... 249 SSR ..................................................... 241 STCR .................... 55, 486, 494, 502, 510 STR ..................... 381, 481, 490, 498, 506 SYSCR.................. 53, 486, 494, 502, 510 SYSCR2.............. 114, 483, 492, 500, 508 TCNT ................. 191, 233, 485, 486, 493, ............................. 495,501, 503, 509, 511 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 543 of 544 TCONRI ..............203, 488, 496, 504, 512 TCONRS .............203, 488, 496, 504, 512 TCOR ..................191, 486, 495, 503, 511 TCORC................202, 488, 496, 504, 512 TCR ....................166, 192, 484, 486, 493, .............................495, 501, 503, 509, 511 TCRAB............................................... 205 TCRXY .............................................. 204 TCSR ..................163, 196, 224, 484, 485, ............................486, 493, 495, 501, 503, ............................................ 508, 509, 511 TDR .................................................... 237 TICRF..................202, 488, 496, 504, 512 TICRR .................202, 487, 496, 504, 512 TIER ....................162, 484, 493, 501, 508 TISR ....................202, 488, 496, 504, 512 TOCR ..................167, 484, 493, 501, 509 TSR..................................................... 238 TWR ....................381, 481, 490, 497, 506 WSCR....................94, 486, 494, 502, 510 WUEMRB .............73, 482, 491, 499, 507 Reset ......................................................... 61 Reset exception handling.......................... 61 Resolution............................................... 149 ROM ....................................................... 431 Serial communication interface (SCI)..... 235 Serial formats.......................................... 307 Shift instructions ....................................... 34 Single mode ............................................ 419 Sleep mode.............................................. 471 SMI ......................................................... 409 Software protection................................. 450 Software standby mode........................... 471 Stack pointer ............................................. 22 Stack status ............................................... 64 Subactive mode....................................... 476 Subsleep mode ........................................ 475 System control instructions....................... 38 Trap instruction exception handling ......... 63 User program mode ................................ 445 Watch mode ............................................ 474 Watchdog timer (WDT).......................... 221 Watchdog timer mode............................. 227 WOVI ..................................................... 230 Rev. 1.00, 05/04, page 544 of 544 Renesas 16-Bit Single-Chip Microcomputer Hardware Manual H8S/2111B Publication Date: Rev.1.00, May 14, 2004 Published by: Sales Strategic Planning Div. Renesas Technology Corp. Edited by: Technical Documentation & Information Department Renesas Kodaira Semiconductor Co., Ltd..  2004. Renesas Technology Corp., All rights reserved. Printed in Japan. Sales Strategic Planning Div. Nippon Bldg., 2-6-2, Ohte-machi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 100-0004, Japan RENESAS SALES OFFICES Renesas Technology America, Inc. 450 Holger Way, San Jose, CA 95134-1368, U.S.A Tel: (408) 382-7500 Fax: (408) 382-7501 Renesas Technology Europe Limited. Dukes Meadow, Millboard Road, Bourne End, Buckinghamshire, SL8 5FH, United Kingdom Tel: (1628) 585 100, Fax: (1628) 585 900 Renesas Technology Europe GmbH Dornacher Str. 3, D-85622 Feldkirchen, Germany Tel: (89) 380 70 0, Fax: (89) 929 30 11 Renesas Technology Hong Kong Ltd. 7/F., North Tower, World Finance Centre, Harbour City, Canton Road, Hong Kong Tel: 2265-6688, Fax: 2375-6836 Renesas Technology Taiwan Co., Ltd. FL 10, #99, Fu-Hsing N. Rd., Taipei, Taiwan Tel: (2) 2715-2888, Fax: (2) 2713-2999 Renesas Technology (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. 26/F., Ruijin Building, No.205 Maoming Road (S), Shanghai 200020, China Tel: (21) 6472-1001, Fax: (21) 6415-2952 Renesas Technology Singapore Pte. Ltd. 1, Harbour Front Avenue, #06-10, Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632 Tel: 6213-0200, Fax: 6278-8001 http://www.renesas.com Colophon 1.0 H8S/2111B Hardware Manual